Revit Architecture 2008

Metric Tutorials

April 2007

Copyright© 2007 Autodesk, Inc.
All Rights Reserved This publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. AUTODESK, INC., MAKES NO WARRANTY, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS, AND MAKES SUCH MATERIALS AVAILABLE SOLELY ON AN "AS-IS" BASIS. IN NO EVENT SHALL AUTODESK, INC., BE LIABLE TO ANYONE FOR SPECIAL, COLLATERAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH OR ARISING OUT OF ACQUISITION OR USE OF THESE MATERIALS. THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE LIABILITY TO AUTODESK, INC., REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF ACTION, SHALL NOT EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE, IF ANY, OF THE MATERIALS DESCRIBED HEREIN. Autodesk, Inc., reserves the right to revise and improve its products as it sees fit. This publication describes the state of the product at the time of publication, and may not reflect the product at all times in the future.

Autodesk Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ActiveShapes, Actrix, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Your World, Design Your World (design/logo), DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, EditDV, Education by Design, Extending the Design Team, FBX, Filmbox, FMDesktop, GDX Driver, Gmax, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HOOPS, HumanIK, i-drop, iMOUT, Incinerator, IntroDV, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), LocationLogic, Lustre, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, MotionBuilder, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Render Queue, Revit, Showcase, SketchBook, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, Visual, Visual Bridge, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Syllabus, Visual Toolbox, Visual Tugboat, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, and Wiretap. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner, Discreet, Fire, Flame, Flint, Frost, Inferno, Multi-Master Editing, River, Smoke, Sparks, Stone, Wire.

Third Party Trademarks
All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders.

Third Party Software Program Credits
ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Copyright© 1997 Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE® and other Pantone, Inc. trademarks are the property of Pantone, Inc.© Pantone, Inc., 2002 Pantone, Inc. is the copyright owner of color data and/or software which are licensed to Autodesk, Inc., to distribute for use only in combination with certain Autodesk software products. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. AutoCAD 2008 is produced under a license of data derived from DIC Color Guide® from Dainippon Ink and Chemicals, Inc. Copyright © Dainippon Ink and Chemicals, Inc. All rights reserved. DIC Color Guide computer color simulations used in this product may not exactly match DIC Color Guide, DIC color Guide Part 2 identified solid color standards. Use current DIC Color Guide Manuals for exact color reference. DIC and DIC Color Guide are registered trademarks of Dainippon Ink and Chemicals, Inc. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002).

Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved.

GOVERNMENT USE
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Contents

Part 1

Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . Navigating the User Interface . . . . . . . . Performing Common Tasks as You Work in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Revit Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Chapter 1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Part 2

Developing Your Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Creating the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Adding Project Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Creating a Column Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Adding Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Adding Braces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Creating a Foundation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Changing Structural Member Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Adding Floors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Adding a Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Adding a Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Creating a Drop Ceiling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Creating Multi-Level Stairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Adding Entourage and Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Linking a Service Core to the Building Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Part 3

Documenting Your Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Creating Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation and Section Views . . . . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying View Tag Appearance . . . . . . . Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views . Creating a View Template . . . . . . . . . . View Range and Plan Regions . . . . . . . . Using Filters to Control Visibility . . . . . . Masking Portions of a View . . . . . . . . . Working with Visual Overrides . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Views to Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 . 112 . 115 . 121 . 126 . 130 . 130 . 133 . 136 . 137 . 140 . 146 . 146 . 149 . 153

Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Contents | v

Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Tagging Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Doors and Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Other Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Rooms from a Program List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Color Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Material Takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Shared Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shared Parameter File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shared Parameters to a Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing, Tagging, and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions . . . . . . . Exporting Project Information with ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 . 160 . 165 . 169 . 172 . 172 . 177 . 179 . 181 . 183 . 189 . 192 . 195 . 195 . 196 . 199 . 204 . 204 . 206 . 206 . 210 . 211 . 215 . 215 . 221 . 223 . 227 . 230 . 231 . 238 . 238 . 244 . 248 . 250 . 252 . 254 . 258 . 259 . 260 . 260 . 262 . 278 . 278 . 283 . 283 . 284 . 284 . 287 . 292 . 292 . 294 . 296

Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Changing the Base Elevation of a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Witness Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions . Creating Text Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail from a Building Model . . . . Detailing the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Detail Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Detail Components . . . . . . . . Adding Keynotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Line-based Detail Components . Modifying a Keynote Database . . . . . . . Creating a Drafted Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a Detail into a Drafting View . . Creating a Reference Callout . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail in a Drafting View . . . . Using Note Blocks . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Note Block . . . . . Using Drawing Lists . . . . . . . . . Creating a Drawing List . . . . Using Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Symbol Legend . . . Creating a Component Legend Using Revision Tracking . . . . . . . Setting Up a Revision Table . . Sketching Revision Clouds . . . Tagging Revision Clouds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 6 Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

vi | Contents

Working with Revisions . . . . Importing from Other Applications . Importing Image Files . . . . . Importing Text Documents . . Importing Spreadsheets . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. 297 . 299 . 299 . 300 . 301

Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Using Dependent Views in Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

Part 4

Viewing and Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Viewing a Building Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exploring the Building Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Perspective View with a Camera . . . . . . . . . Creating a Section View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Fill Pattern Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling the Fill Pattern Color of a Material . . . . . . . Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type . Creating a View Plan Region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Exterior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model . Adding Trees to the Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding RPC People . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Interior Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a New Render Scene . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Daylights and Rendering the View . . . . . . . Creating and Recording Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position . . Recording the Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Views for Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study - Courtyard View . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View . . . . . . Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations . . Creating Solar Studies - Summer and Winter Solstice . Previewing Solar Study Animation . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting the Study as AVI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting a Study as PNG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Orienting to True North for Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . Orienting to True North . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering Interior Shadow Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 . 324 . 327 . 333 . 335 . 337 . 337 . 339 . 340 . 341 . 346 . 346 . 350 . 352 . 355 . 358 . 358 . 360 . 364 . 365 . 367 . 367 . 370 . 372 . 376 . 376 . 377 . 379 . 382 . 382 . 383 . 384 . 384 . 387 . 388 . 388 . 390 . 391 . 394 . 394

Chapter 9 Viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

Chapter 12 Presentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399

Contents | vii

Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Advanced Model Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Elevation Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet . Adding Section Views to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Section View for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . Working with a Presentation View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . Working in a Callout Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Isometric Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Perspective Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annotating the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 399 . 401 . 403 . 406 . 406 . 408 . 411 . 411 . 415 . 417 . 420 . 422 . 429 . 429 . 436 . 440

Part 5

Importing and Exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Render a Revit Architecture Building Model in 3ds Max . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446 Rendering Cutaway Views in 3ds Max . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453 Creating a Daylight Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457

Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445

Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461 Creating a Building from Mass Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462

Part 6

Creating

Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473

Chapter 15 About Families and the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Using Families and the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476 Introduction to Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476 Introduction to the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477

Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Creating 3D Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Process Overview: Creating a Family . . . . . . . . . . Defining the Origin of a Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Reference Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Priorities for Reference Planes . . . . . . . . . Dimensioning Reference Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Managing Family Parameters and Family Types . . . . Lock geometry to reference planes . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Work Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Solid Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating 2D Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading a Family into a Project . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Door Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing the Door Plan View Components . . . . Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry . . . . . . Assigning Materials to the Door Components . . . Defining New Door Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Window Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the New Window Parameters . . . . . Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry . . . Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry . . . . Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry . . . Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry . . Assigning Materials to the Window Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480 . 480 . 481 . 481 . 483 . 484 . 490 . 491 . 491 . 491 . 491 . 495 . 496 . 497 . 498 . 503 . 506 . 508 . 511 . 512 . 513 . 519 . 521 . 526 . 538

viii | Contents

Defining New Window Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Complex Model Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting a Family Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Skeleton for a Complex Wall Opening . Modelling a Complex Wall Opening . . . . . . . . . Creating Window Frame Geometry . . . . . . . . . . Defining the Window Sash Parameters . . . . . . . . Defining Visibility Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Reference Planes for the Glass Geometry . . Creating the Glass Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Formulas to Define Width . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning Default Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Material Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Nested Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Sill Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading Sill Families into the Window Family . . . . Creating a Length Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing the Sill Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shared Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing Nested Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing the Family in a Project Environment . . . . . Creating a Furniture Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters . . . . . Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry . . . . Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . Defining New Furniture Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Baluster Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Baluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning the New Baluster to a Stair Run . . . . . . . Creating Profile Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Sweep Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Rail Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Stair Nosing Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Reveal Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Host Sweep Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying a Sweep Profile to a 2D Path . . . . . . . . . Applying a Host Sweep Profile to Walls . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Room Tag Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Annotation Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Custom North Arrow Annotation Symbol . Adding the New North Arrow to a Project . . . . . . . Creating a Titleblock Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet . . . . . . . Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock . . . . . . . Adding the Titleblock to a New Project . . . . . . . . Creating In-Place Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family . . . . . . . Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family . . . . . . Appendix A - Exploring Family Templates . . . . . . . . . Model Family Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annotation Family Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . Titleblock Family Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 540 . 545 . 547 . 548 . 551 . 554 . 561 . 565 . 566 . 567 . 570 . 573 . 574 . 574 . 575 . 575 . 577 . 578 . 579 . 580 . 581 . 582 . 583 . 584 . 591 . 594 . 603 . 609 . 612 . 614 . 614 . 616 . 618 . 618 . 618 . 619 . 620 . 621 . 622 . 624 . 626 . 626 . 628 . 628 . 630 . 631 . 631 . 634 . 642 . 644 . 644 . 650 . 653 . 654 . 668 . 669

Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671
Planning a Parametric Component Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672

Contents | ix

Determining Component Needs . . . . . . . . Selecting the Family Template . . . . . . . . . Creating the Component Skeleton . . . . . . . . . Adding Reference Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Dimensions and Constraints . . . . . Creating New Length Parameters . . . . . . . Flexing the Component Model . . . . . . . . Adding Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Solid Extrusions . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry . . Creating Additional Solid Geometry . . . . . . Testing the Family in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . Loading a Family into a Project . . . . . . . . Testing a Family Instance in a Project . . . . . Working with Nested Subcomponents . . . . . . . Adding a Nested Component . . . . . . . . . Creating Formula-controlled Parameters . . . Arraying Nested Subcomponents . . . . . . . Reloading a Family into a Project . . . . . . . Applying Subcategories, Materials, and Parameters . Creating and Applying Subcategories . . . . . Creating Material Parameters . . . . . . . . . Controlling Component Visibility . . . . . . . . . Assigning Detail Level and View Controls . . . Creating Component Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Multiple Component Types . . . . . Creating Conditional Formulas . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 672 . 673 . 676 . 676 . 682 . 686 . 690 . 693 . 693 . 695 . 698 . 707 . 707 . 708 . 712 . 712 . 716 . 721 . 726 . 728 . 728 . 733 . 735 . 735 . 738 . 738 . 739

Part 7

Using Advanced Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 741
Flat Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Mullions to the Curtain System . . . Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . Adding a Custom Curtain Panel . . . . . . . . Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel Additional Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sloped Glazings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storefront System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Curtain System by Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 744 . 744 . 753 . 755 . 755 . 758 . 760 . 764 . 764 . 765 . 768 . 774 . 774 . 778 . 780 . 782 . 785 . 787 . 788 . 789 . 791 . 792 . 793 . 794

Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 743

Chapter 19 Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 773
Creating Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Extruded Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint . Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aligning Roof Eaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mansard Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Fascia, Gutters, and Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roof Fascia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Gutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 20 Area Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 797
Using Area Analysis Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 798 Creating Area Schemes and Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 798

x | Contents

Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 804

Chapter 21 Massing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 807
Using Massing Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model . . . . . . . . . . Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model . Using Mass Family Files in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating New Mass Family Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Placing New Mass Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Joining Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Mass Elements with Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mass Elements in Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Building Components from Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . Creating Walls by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Floors by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roofs by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Elements Created from Massings . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating, Modifying, and Nesting Groups . Creating and Placing a Group . . . . . Modifying a Group . . . . . . . . . . . Nesting Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Detail Groups . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail Group . . . . . . . . Using Attached Detail Groups . . . . . Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808 . 808 . 813 . 815 . 815 . 816 . 819 . 822 . 822 . 825 . 825 . 828 . 832 . 834 . 837 . 842 . 846 . 846 . 853 . 857 . 859 . 860 . 863 . 866 . 866 . 870 . 870 . 876 . 880 . 882 . 889 . 893 . 895 . 899 . 900 . 904 . 904 . 905 . 913 . 916 . 917 . 921 . 932 . 938 . 939 . 940 . 942 . 942 . 943

Chapter 22 Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 845

Chapter 23 Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 869
Using Site Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Property Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings . Creating Topographic Subregions . . . . . . . . Grading the Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Building Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Site and Parking Components . . . . . Creating Parking Space Schedules . . . . . . . . Adding Structural Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a DWG for Use as an Underlay . Sketching Structural Walls . . . . . . . . . Dimensioning and Modifying Walls . . . . Adding Structural Columns and Beams . . . . . Adding Structural Columns . . . . . . . . Adding Structural Beams and Girders . . . Adding Joists and Purlins . . . . . . . . . Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels . . . Defining New Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating the Existing Design . . . . . . Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation . . . . . Creating a Framing Elevation . . . . . . . Adding Structural Braces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 24 Structural . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 903

Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 949
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 950

Contents | xi

Using Worksharing in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals . . . . . . . Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets . . . . Working Individually with Worksets . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksets with Multiple Users . . . . . . . . . . . Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users . Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project . Creating the Structural Design Options . . Creating the Roof System Design Options . Managing Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. 950 . 950 . 953 . 957 . 961 . 965 . 970 . 970 . 980 . 987

Chapter 26 Creating Multiple Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 969

Chapter 27 Project Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 991
Using Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 992 Phasing Your Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 992 Using Phase-Specific Room Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 998

Chapter 28 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1001
Linking Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linking Building Models from Different Project Files . Repositioning Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . . Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility . . . . . Managing Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models . . . . . . . Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates . . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates . . . . . Working with a Linked Building Model . . . . . . . . Managing Shared Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Components of Linked Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1003 . 1003 . 1011 . 1014 . 1017 . 1019 . 1020 . 1021 . 1024 . 1026 . 1027

Part 8

Customizing Project Settings and Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1031
Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Fill Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Object Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Line Patterns and Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Units of Measurement, Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options . Modifying Project Browser Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choosing the Base Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Modifying Families and Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Views and View Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Render Scene Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Import/Export Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up Shared and Project Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Named Print Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1034 . 1034 . 1036 . 1038 . 1039 . 1041 . 1041 . 1045 . 1047 . 1048 . 1053 . 1055 . 1056 . 1059 . 1059 . 1060 . 1064 . 1067 . 1069 . 1071 . 1072 . 1074

Chapter 29 Modifying Project and System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1033

xii | Contents

Getting Started

1

1

2 | Chapter 1 Getting Started

Introduction

1

This introduction helps you get started with the Revit Architecture 2008 tutorials and presents the fundamental concepts of the product, including:
■ ■ ■ ■

how Revit Architecture works. the terms used when working with the product. how to navigate the user interface. how to perform some common tasks in the product.

3

Using the Tutorials
In this lesson, you learn how to get started with the Revit Architecture tutorials, including where to locate the training files specified in the tutorials and how to create a new Revit Architecture project from a template file. The Contents tab of the Revit Architecture Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Expand a title to display the titles of the lessons in the tutorial, and expand a lesson title to display a list of exercises in the lesson. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit Architecture. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit Architecture.

Accessing Training Files
Training files are Revit Architecture projects, templates, and families that were created specifically for the tutorials. The training files, like the tutorials, are bundled with the product. Training files are provided to help you work through the tutorials. In this exercise, you learn where the training files are located, as well as how to open and save them.

Where are the training files located?
Training files, by default, are located in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training. Training files are grouped into three folders within the training folder:

Common: generic files often used to teach a concept. These files are not dependent on imperial or metric units. Common file names have a c_ prefix. Imperial: files specifically for users working with imperial units. Imperial file names have an i_ prefix. Metric: files specifically for users working with metric units. Metric file names have an m_ prefix.

■ ■

NOTE Depending on your installation, your training folder may be in a different location. Contact your CAD manager for more information.

IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials, such as templates and families, is located and accessed in the training files location. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system, all content used in the tutorials is included in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files.

What is a dataset?
A dataset is a Revit Architecture project that defines a building information model and views of the model that is used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Many tutorials include a Dataset section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. In other tutorials, you create a project from a template, rather than opening an existing dataset.

Open a dataset
1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon. 3 In the right pane, double-click Common, Imperial, or Metric, depending on the type of dataset.

4 | Chapter 1 Introduction

4 Click the dataset name, and click Open.

Save a dataset
5 To save a dataset with a new name, click File menu ➤ Save As. In many cases, the work you do in a project during a tutorial exercise becomes the starting point for the next exercise. In many tutorials, you create a project or modify an existing project, save the changes, and use the saved version of the file to begin the next exercise or lesson. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog:

For Save in, select the folder in which to save the new file. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. Note where you save the file so you can open it for additional exercises as required.

For File name, enter the new file name. A good practice is to save the dataset with a unique name after you have made changes. For example, if you open c_settings.rvt and make changes, you should save this file with a new name such as c_settings_modified.rvt.

For Save as type, verify that Project Files is selected, and then click Save.

Create a project from a template
7 To create a project from a template, rather than using an existing dataset, click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.

8 In the New Project dialog, under Create new, select Project. 9 Under Template file, verify the second option is selected, and click Browse. In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Templates. 10 In the Choose Template dialog, review the Revit Architecture templates.

Accessing Training Files | 5

Templates are available for specific building types: commercial, construction, and residential. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. For most tutorial projects, you will use the default template, and customize the project as necessary. 11 Select DefaultMetric.rte, and click Open. 12 Click OK.

Understanding the Basics
In this lesson, you learn what Revit Architecture is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. You begin with the fundamental concepts that Revit Architecture is built upon. You learn the terminology, the hierarchy of elements, how to navigate the user interface, and how to perform some common tasks in the product.

What is Revit Architecture 2008?
The Revit Architecture platform for building information modeling is a design and documentation system that supports the design, drawings, and schedules required for a building project. Building information modeling (BIM) delivers information about project design, scope, quantities, and phases when you need it. In the Revit Architecture model, every drawing sheet, 2D and 3D view, and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. As you work in drawing and schedule views, Revit Architecture collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. The Revit Architecture parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views, drawing sheets, schedules, sections, and plans.

What is meant by parametric?
The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination and change management that Revit Architecture provides. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. In mathematics and mechanical CAD, the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters; hence, the operation of the software is parametric. This concept is important because it is this capability that delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit Architecture: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project, and Revit Architecture coordinates that change through the entire project. The following are examples of these element relationships:

The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. If you move the partition, the door retains this relationship to the partition. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. If the length of the elevation is changed, the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. In this case, the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved, the floor or roof remains connected. In this case, the parameter is one of association or connection.

How does Revit Architecture 2008 keep things updated?
A fundamental characteristic of a building information modeling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. When you change something, Revit Architecture immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. Revit Architecture uses two key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do, without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design.

Element behavior in a parametric modeler
Revit Architecture uses five software element classes: host, component, annotation, view, and datum.

Hosts include walls, floors, roofs, and ceilings.

6 | Chapter 1 Introduction

■ ■ ■ ■

Components include windows, doors, and furniture. Annotations are 2D, view-specific elements that help you produce documentation. Views are dynamic representations of the model and are always up-to-date. Datums are reference elements that help you put your building together.

This implementation provides flexibility for designers. Revit Architecture elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly; programming is not required. If you can draw, you can define new parametric elements in Revit Architecture. In Revit Architecture, the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the building. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. Often, you do nothing to establish these relationships; they are implied by what you do and how you draw. In other cases, you can explicitly control them, by locking a dimension or aligning two walls, for example.

Understanding Revit Architecture 2008 terms
Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit Architecture are common, industry-standard terms familiar to most architects. However, there are some terms that are unique to Revit Architecture, and understanding them is crucial to understanding the software. This section defines the basic terms used in Revit Architecture. Project: In Revit Architecture, the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. The project file contains all the information for your building design, from geometry to construction data. This information includes components used to design the model, views of the project, and drawings of the design. By using a single project file, Revit Architecture makes it easy for you to alter your design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views, elevation views, section views, schedules, and so forth). Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements, such as roofs, floors, and ceilings. Most often, you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a building. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building; for example, first floor, top of wall, or bottom of foundation. To place levels, you must be in a section or elevation view.
Level 2 work plane cutting through the 3D view with the corresponding floor plan tiled next to it.

Element: When creating your project, you add Revit Architecture parametric building elements to the design. All elements are considered categories. Revit Architecture classifies elements by model component elements and annotation elements.
■ ■

A model component element, such as a door, desk, or roof, represents the actual 3D geometry of the building. An annotation building element, such as a door tag, elevation symbol, or room tag, helps document the model.

Understanding the Basics | 7

Family: Families are classes of elements in a category that group elements with a common set of parameters (properties), identical use, and similar graphical representation. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties, but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. For example, six-panel colonial doors could be considered one family, although the doors that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. Families are either component families or system families:

Component family files can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. System families include walls, dimensions, ceilings, roofs, floors, and levels, and are not available for loading or creating as separate files.
■ ■

Revit Architecture predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. For example, the behavior of a wall is predefined in the system; however, you can create different types of walls with different compositions. System families can be transferred between projects.

Type: Each family can have different types. A type can be a specific size of a family, such as a A0 title block or a 910 x 2110 door. A type can also be a style, such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. A family can have several types. For example, a table could come in several different sizes. Each different size would be a new type within the same family. Instance: Instances are the actual items that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the building (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances).

Revit Architecture 2008 terms

Navigating the User Interface
One of the advantages of Revit Architecture is its ease of use, specifically its clear user interface. The Revit Architecture window is arranged to make navigation easy. Even the toolbar buttons are labeled, making it easy to understand what each button represents. Revit Architecture uses standard Microsoft® Windows® conventions. If you have used any other product that follows these conventions, learning Revit Architecture is much easier.

8 | Chapter 1 Introduction

In the following illustration, the user interface is labeled. In the steps that follow, you navigate and become familiar with the user interface.

Start a new project
1 On the Standard toolbar, click .

This creates a new project based on the default template.

The Title Bar
2 Place the cursor at the top of the user interface and notice the Title Bar contains the name of the project and the view that is currently open.

By default, new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name. In addition, the Level 1 floor plan view is the default open view. TIP The view opened and the view names are dependent on the template on which the project is based.

The Menu Bar
3 Click View menu ➤ Zoom.

Navigating the User Interface | 9

You can control the visibility of the six toolbars and turn the toolbar text labels on or off within the Window ➤ Toolbar menu. TIP For example. Then. The Toolbar 4 On the Window menu.The Menu Bar across the top of the window includes standard menu names such as File. On the left side of the Options Bar. The Options Bar 5 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. To choose commands. notice a door type is specified. Another timesaving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and right-click. and click. The buttons on the toolbar represent some of the more common commands. Notice the bar beneath the toolbars contains wall design options. These shortcut keys are listed next to the command on the menu. The Options Bar is context-sensitive and varies depending on the tool or selected component. the shortcut key for Zoom in Region is ZR. 6 Click Modelling menu ➤ Door. The context menu changes depending on the function you are performing and what is currently selected. A context menu appears with a list of all available commands. While working in the drawing area. click the command name to start the command. click Toolbar. and View. Notice the design options available on the Options Bar are now applicable to doors. There are six toolbars across the top of the window just beneath the Menu Bar. you simply type the required keystrokes to run the command. Many of the commands also have shortcut keys to speed up the design process. Edit. 10 | Chapter 1 Introduction . place the cursor over the menu name. You can use the toolbar grips to resize and move each toolbar.

The list of components in the Type Selector is identical to the components listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the respective category. For example. if you intend to add a door. 9 In the Type Selector. the door type active in the Type Selector is the door type that is added when you insert it into the building model. The Design Bar 10 Click Window menu ➤ Design Bars. Within the drawing area. Navigating the User Interface | 11 . notice the list of walls that are available. 8 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. You can also use the Type Selector to change a component type after it has been added to the building model. First. The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list. the Type Selector displays a list of doors available within the project. you can select any component and then change the type from the Type Selector. you can select a component type before you add it to the building model.The Type Selector 7 The drop-down list on the left side of the Options Bar is called the Type Selector. If you select the Door tool. Select the drop-down list to view the list of doors. You use the Type Selector in two ways.

There are 10 tabs in the Design Bar. The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface. immediately below the Type Selector. You can control which tabs display by selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog. Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the menu. ■ ■ ■ ■ Basics tab: includes commands for creating most basic building model components View tab: commands for creating different views in the project Modelling tab: all the commands to create model elements Drafting tab: commands for both adding annotation symbols and creating the sheet details for the project construction documents Rendering tab: commands for creating rendered 3D images ■ 12 | Chapter 1 Introduction . containing buttons grouped by function.The Show Design Bars dialog is displayed. 11 Click OK.

The browser is conveniently organized by view type (floor plans. families. walls. delete. schedules. Navigating the User Interface | 13 . click the tab. sheets. The Project Browser 12 To the right of the Design Bar is the Project Browser. windows). and groups of your current project: ■ ■ Right-click in the browser to add. and group name. 3D). In the Project Browser. TIP You can turn the visibility of each tab on and off by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the tab from the context menu.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Site tab: commands for adding site components and producing site plans Massing tab: commands for executing conceptual massing commands Room and Area tab: commands for making room and area schemes and plans Structural tab: commands for adding structural components to your project Construction tab: includes commands for creating construction industry information To access the commands within a tab. select Views (all). You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views. families. and rename views. reports. and the respective commands are displayed on the Design Bar. elevations. family category (doors. and groups. Expand or compress the browser list by clicking the + or sign next to the name.

The Status Bar 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. scroll through the sorting options available for the Project Browser. 14 | Chapter 1 Introduction . You can also drag and drop from the browser into the drawing area. Do not click.■ ■ To open a view. You can create and modify Project Browser organization schemes for both views and sheets. ■ 13 In the Type Selector. The cursor is displayed as a pencil. After you create a browser organization scheme. 15 In the Browser Organization dialog. The browser is dockable. 17 Place the cursor near the center of the drawing area. you can instantly change the sorting within the Project Browser by selecting the scheme in the Type Selector. click Cancel. click Wall. 14 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. making it easy to add a family or group to the project or add a view to a sheet. so you can position it wherever you want by dragging the Project Browser title bar to a new location. double-click the name.

19 Place the cursor over the elevation symbol arrow on the left side of the drawing area. notice that the name of the preselected component is Views: Elevation: West. Revit Architecture 2008 Help 21 Click Help menu ➤ Revit Architecture 2008 Help. it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point. The Status Bar also provides information. When attempting to select a specific component in a complex or crowded view. In the Status Bar. You can turn the Status Bar visibility on or off from the Window menu. 18 On the Design Bar. In this case. Make sure you place the cursor over the arrow portion of the symbol. 20 Press TAB. the main symbol and the elevation directional arrows. When you place the cursor over a component. use the Tab key to alternate between nearby components. it highlights and the status bar displays the component name." TIP The tooltip that displays is identical to the note in the status bar. Elevations: Elevation: Elevation 5. notice the Status Bar provides information regarding what you should do next. click Modify. Navigating the User Interface | 15 . regarding selected components within a view. It highlights when the cursor is over it. The elevation symbol consists of two parts. in conjunction with Tooltips. you can use the Status Bar and the Tab key to toggle between components and select the desired component. TIP When attempting to select a specific component in a crowded or detailed view.In the bottom left corner of the window. and notice that the preselected component switches to the main elevation symbol.

Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the building model in the window. find a keyword on the Index tab. Click the Help button. click . you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. you open a dataset and practice adjusting the view with the zoom commands. If there is no Help button displayed. Tool Tips: To see Tool Tips. search for all instances of a word or phrase on the Search tab. rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the Tool Tip displays. Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit Architecture In this exercise. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. and then click on a specific menu command or command button for Help. 2 Click File menu ➤ Open. press F1 to get help on that dialog box. 16 | Chapter 1 Introduction . Use zoom commands to adjust the view 1 In the tutorials. or save commonly used pages on the Favorites tab. HTML help window to search for information and quickly display it to read or print. it will be easier to work in Revit Architecture and focus on the unique tasks for each tutorial. You can use this tri-pane. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire building or floor plan in the view. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. After you are familiar with how to complete these tasks. You can also press SHIFT+F1. There are several ways to access zoom options: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ View menu commands Zoom command on the View toolbar Shortcut keys Wheel mouse Dynamic View dialog In the following steps. and the topic specific to the dialog box opens.Help is available online at all times during a Revit Architecture session. There are several tools that help you find information. You can access Help in the following ways: ■ Dialog Boxes: Dialog boxes include Help buttons. Be sure to have the Standard toolbar displayed. Context-sensitive help is also available to provide instant help on any menu command. click Training Files. you learn to perform some of the common Revit Architecture tasks that are included in the tutorials. For example. You can select a topic on the Contents tab.rvt. ■ ■ ■ 22 Close the Revit Architecture Help window. press F1 to get the topic associated with the window. TIP You can control the level of Tool Tip assistance from the Settings ➤ Options menu. Toolbar: From the Toolbar. Windows: From any window.

and the view of the buiding model is sized to fit the available window. this is referred to as a crossing selection. 7 Click Zoom To Fit. The zoom menu lists the zoom options and the shortcut keys for each option. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass.The 3D isometric view displays: 4 Click View menu ➤ Zoom to display the zoom options menu. 6 On the View toolbar. 8 Click in the drawing area. NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself automatically activates the Zoom In Region command. 9 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region you wish to zoom. Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit Architecture | 17 . and enter the shortcut keys ZR to zoom in on a region. 5 Click Zoom Out (2x). click the drop-down menu next to the Zoom command to display the zoom options.

If you do not have a wheel mouse. 12 Use one of the following methods to zoom: ■ ■ In the Dynamic View dialog. as shown: Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the wall. click Zoom. Small blue dots. Cnst. expand Floor Plans. use a zoom menu command or the Toolbar option to zoom out within the view. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. Without clicking in the dialog. and double-click 2nd Flr. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. bottoms. and tops of selected walls in elevation and 3D views. display along the ends. and select the wall. These are the drag controls. Similar controls. roll the wheel to zoom the view. The Dynamic View dialog displays in the lower-left corner of the screen. On a wheel mouse. ■ Resize elements using drag controls 13 In the Project Browser. called drag controls. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire building again. click . 18 | Chapter 1 Introduction .10 If you use a mouse where the middle button is a wheel. expand Views (all). zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. 11 Zoom is also available in Dynamic View mode. 14 Enter ZR. To modify or add snap increments. hold the middle mouse button (or left mouse button on a wheel mouse). Revit Architecture uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. and drag the cursor in the drawing area. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view dynamically. press and hold CTRL. referred to as shape handles. on the View toolbar. display at the ends of selected lines and walls in a plan view. NOTE As you zoom in and out within a view. To display the Dynamic View dialog in a 2D or 3D view. and drag the cursor. When drawing or modifying a building model.

and click again to specify the ending position. Move an element 17 Scroll the view down so you can see the couch and table in the floor plan. to lengthen the wall. click (Move). Some commands. In this case.15 Click and drag the left control. After selecting the element to be moved. click to specify the starting position. moving the cursor to the left horizontally. Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit Architecture | 19 . you want to move the table closer to the wall. 16 Click in the drawing area to deselect the wall. and on the Edit toolbar. 19 Click the lower-left endpoint of the table. require two clicks to complete the command. for example. such as Move and Copy. 18 Select the Craftsman02 table.

All changes you make to a project are tracked. click the drop-down menu next to . Selecting the second action in the list will undo the last two actions. Move. Select the plant.20 Click next to the lower wall. The table and plant are returned to their original locations. The Undo command allows you to undo several commands by clicking the drop-down menu next to the Undo command on the Toolbar. Undo commands 22 On the Standard toolbar. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. select the second item in the list. you decide that you like the table better where it was placed originally. The table moves down and the lower-left corner is placed at the move endpoint. 20 | Chapter 1 Introduction . as shown. 23 On the Undo menu. In this example. and drag it on top of the table. 21 Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location.

Some commands. 26 To end the command. click Modify. use one of the following methods: ■ ■ ■ Choose another command. click Lines. or press and hold CTRL and enter Z. click the Undo command. on the Standard toolbar. Notice that the Lines command is still active and you could continue to place lines. End a command 24 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit Architecture | 21 . such as the Lines command. 25 Click in the drawing area to start the line and click again to end it.NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. Press ESC twice. On the Design Bar. 27 Close the file without saving your changes. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command.

22 | Chapter 1 Introduction .

Developing Your Designs 2 23 .

24 | Chapter 2 Developing Your Designs .

You create a retail building that contains 5 floors. As you develop the building design. For example. you learn how to constrain elements and how to test the parametric relationships between them. the wall or column will move with it. a central service core. Dimensions and other positional constraints define relationships between elements in the model. you learn how to use parametric design techniques. When you constrain Revit Architecture elements to each other. a curtain wall. or “flex the model” by changing parameters. 25 . it is good practice to test the constraints. Parametric design allows you to incorporate design intent into your model. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit® Architecture 2008.Creating a Building Information Model 2 In this tutorial. a wall or a column can be constrained to grid. and a sloped roof over one corner of the building. If the grid moves. As you complete the exercises in this tutorial.

After the beginning exercises. you create a Revit Architecture project from a template provided with the software. you load any required family type that is not in your project.Using this Tutorial In the first 6 exercises of this tutorial. The project datasets have pre-loaded family types and represent the correct state for beginning the exercise. such as a door or window. 26 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . from the product library. In practice. so there is no dependency on previously completed exercises. You set up the project and create the structural frame and foundation of the building. subsequent exercises instruct you to open a project dataset.

For this project. and customize the project as necessary. The Project Browser contains a hierarchical tree structure that you use to navigate the views. locate the Project Browser. only a single floor plan view and a single ceiling plan view are created. views. expand Views (all). In views that display elevation markers. with an RVT extension. notice four elevation markers. To create the project file. Explore the project with the Project Browser 6 On the left side of the drawing screen. Each marker corresponds to an elevation view in the project: North. verify the second option is selected. and Elevations (Building Elevation). East. you create the project that will store the retail building design and different views of the building. and click Browse. NOTE If you create a project without a template. The project is stored as a single file. In the drawing space in the right pane. or by opening the view in the Project Browser. The views that display under each of these branches of the tree are the default floor plan views. Creating the Project | 27 . West. Ceiling Plans. Create the project from the default template 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. and residential. and settings. duplicate them.rte. under Create new. expand Floor Plans. 4 In the left pane of the dialog. change their properties. construction. Revit Architecture templates are available for specific building types: commercial. These views are customizable: you can rename them. schedules. you use a template that is provided with the software. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. The new project opens. 5 Click OK.Creating the Project In this exercise. You can also add views to your project as you develop and document the building information model. 7 If necessary. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. sheets. and elevation views created in the project by the template. you design inside the elevation markers. levels. and delete them. The template file has an RTE extension and provides default project units. reflected ceiling plan views. South. you will use the default template. 3 Under Template file. but contains no geometry. and families in your project. You can access these views by double-clicking the elevation marker arrow. click Training Files. select Project. 2 In the New Project dialog.

as well as the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views to create foundation and entry levels for the building. view the Save Reminder interval. Save the project 11 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and duplicate levels. you modify the 2 default project levels and add 5 levels to the project to define the 7 vertical levels of the building model.Floor Plan: Level 1 to indicate the Level 1 Floor plan view is current. content and building model reports. and click Training Files. Families. You can add. 16 Click Save. enter Revit Retail Building. Sheets (all). As you design and document your building model. 9 Under Elevations (Building Elevation).rvt) is selected. The bold type indicates that the Level 1 Floor Plan view is the current view. Level lines are finite horizontal planes that you use to define the levels (stories) of your building information model. As you complete the exercises in this tutorial. double-click South. heights. 15 For Save as type. double-click Metric. Groups. Adding Project Levels In this exercise. Schedules/Quantities. You use levels to position Revit Architecture elements in your building model. and Revit Links branches that display at the same level as Views (all). notice the Legends. verify Project Files (*. such as schedules and legends. you add the remaining 5 levels using different techniques. verify that Level 1 displays as bold. created by the template. 10 In the Project Browser. will be accessible from the Project Browser. display in the south elevation. Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 12 In the left pane of the Save As dialog. and on the General tab. Notice that in the top left corner of your screen. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. as well as change their names. the view you see in the drawing area. 13 In the file window. You can control how often the software will prompt you to save your work. the software title bar contains the name of the software and Project 1. 28 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . delete. Two level lines. “Adding Project Levels” on page 28. After you modify the two default levels. click to scroll down to the bottom of the list. you will want to save your work frequently. You change the names of the 2 default levels. and other properties. This folder contains the Revit Architecture files that you need to complete all of the Revit Architecture tutorials. 14 For File name. You also change the elevation of the two levels lines to the appropriate heights for the first two stories of the building.8 Under Floor Plans.

and press ENTER. 9 Click the 01 Entry Level elevation height. Adding Project Levels | 29 . doors. 3 Double-click the Level 1 text. so that when one level moves. enter 0 mm. notice the Level 1 floor and ceiling plan views are now named 00 Foundation. 2 Zoom to the level names at the right end of each level line. and double-click South. 4 Click Yes to rename the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views. Modify the two default project levels 1 In the Project Browser. or constrained. 7 Double-click the Level 2 text. it is good practice to precede the level names with level numbers so the corresponding views will list sequentially in the Project Browser. and press ENTER. enter -1800 mm. 5 In the Project Browser. enter 00 Foundation. When you begin designing. under Floor Plans and Ceiling Plans. and windows within the building model. enter 01 Entry Level. the other levels move and change with it. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). and press ENTER. to each other. you will use the levels to position building elements such as walls. TIP Because views list alphabetically or sequentially in the Project Browser. and press ENTER. 6 Click the 00 Foundation elevation height. 8 Click Yes to rename the corresponding views.You learn how the levels are locked. expand Views (all).

and move it slightly upward. Next. This is the Options Bar. enter 3750 mm. click to specify the endpoint of the level line. Notice that the name of the level line changes to 02 Level in the current view. and enter 02 Level. Notice that the bar above the drawing area changes to display new tools and settings. 3750 mm above the 02 Level line. 3750 mm above 01 Entry Level. 14 Click Plan View Types. you add a level by drawing it above the 01 Entry Level. click Level. 20 Click Yes to rename the corresponding level and view. 13 On the Options Bar. By default. right-click. and click OK. you add another level. As you move the cursor. right-click Level 3. 15 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the 01 Entry Level line. not all the tabs are visible. 11 On the left side of the Project Browser. 30 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . and click Basics. view the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 16 Enter 3750 mm. verify Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected. and for Offset. click . click Level. A dashed green line indicates where the new level will be drawn. using a different option. When you add the new level. 19 Click OK. 24 Place the cursor on the 02 Level line. a corresponding ceiling plan and floor plan view will be created. and then move it up. verify and Make Plan View are selected. and press ENTER to specify the start point of the new level line. click Rename. verify that you have created an 02 Level ceiling plan view as well. and press ESC.Next. 12 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. If it does not. 17 Move the cursor horizontally until a dashed green line displays alignment with the two existing levels. The command that you use to add levels is on the Basics tab. The Options Bar displays appropriate options and settings for every command that you select on the Design Bar. place the cursor anywhere on the Design Bar. Use the Draw option to add a level 10 Zoom out so you can see both levels in the view. Use the Pick option to add a level 22 On Design Bar. 21 In the Project Browser. which should display by default. 23 On the Options Bar. a temporary dimension displays the height between 01 Entry Level and the cursor position. 18 In the Project Browser. The Design Bar provides tabs that provide quick access to many commands.

Name the levels: ■ ■ ■ 04 Level 05 Roof Garden 06 Roof NOTE Do not use the Copy command to create the levels. 31 Clear the box to redisplay the level symbol on the right side only. Add the remaining 3 levels 28 Using either the Draw or Pick option. 30 Select the empty blue box on the left to display a level symbol at the left endpoint of the line. and zoom to the left endpoint of the line.25 Click to place the level line. If you create a level by copying it. Display a symbol at the left endpoint of the 06 level line 29 Click the 06 Roof Level line. 27 Press ESC. as shown. Copy levels only when you want to use them for reference. click Modify to end the command. and rename the corresponding views. Adding Project Levels | 31 . or on the Design Bar. add 3 levels 3750 mm apart above 03 Level. the associated floor and ceiling plan views are not created. 26 Rename the level 03 Level.

Notice that the status bar prompts you to specify a start point for the grid line. you change the columns to round hollow steel columns. On the Design Bar. If you select a level and click its lock. Creating a Column Grid In this exercise. Notice that by moving the top level. under Floor Plans. 3 On the Options Bar. you place the building columns at the grid line intersections. double-click 00 Foundation. In the following exercise. you ensure a level of accuracy early in your design. click Modify. the column height changes as well. specify a start point for the grid line. 32 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . and specify the grid line endpoint. all the levels move. click Grid. you constrain the column heights to the roof level. Move the cursor up. the levels are no longer constrained. Verify that the levels are vertically constrained with locks before you continue on to the next exercise. until it is positioned under the top elevation marker. In a later exercise. The lock icon that displays indicates that the levels are vertically constrained. 4 Draw the first vertical grid line: ■ ■ In the lower left corner of the drawing area. and you can move them independently. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. Create vertical column grid lines 1 On the Project Browser.Test the level constraints 32 Select and drag the blue circle to the right or left to shorten or lengthen the level lines. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. When the grid is complete. so that if the roof elevation changes. select . By using the grid to control placement of columns. “Creating a Column Grid” on page 32. you create a structural grid in the 00 Foundation floor plan view of the building model. ■ The number 1 displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line.

and for Offset. and click to place the line. for Offset. ■ The first vertical grid bay is created. and click to place the line. click . Enter A. and click to place the line. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line B. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line D. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line C. 7 Add 3 vertical grid lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. and then place the cursor on the grid line to display the location of the second grid line. 6 Offset a second vertical grid line from the first grid line: ■ On the Design Bar. On the Options Bar. Creating a Column Grid | 33 .5 Change the grid bubble number to a letter: ■ ■ Double-click 1 inside the grid bubble. for Offset. ■ ■ Move the cursor to the right side of the grid line. You can change what displays in grid bubbles at any point in your project. enter 7500 mm. Click to place the grid line. click Grid. enter 7500 mm. enter 4500 mm. On the Options Bar. use the Pick option to create another vertical grid line by offsetting it a specific distance from the existing line. Next. and press ENTER.

and specify the grid line endpoint. Dimension the grid and lock the grid bay spacing 13 On the Design Bar. add horizontal grid lines to complete the grid. as shown. ■ ■ ■ On the upper left side of the grid. click Grid. Create horizontal grid lines 9 Draw the first horizontal grid line: ■ On the Design Bar. 12 Using the Pick option and offsets of 7500 mm and 4500 mm. specify a start point for the grid line just below grid line A. click Grid. 34 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . click Dimension.8 Press ESC. Move the cursor horizontally past the vertical grid line E. The letter F displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line. 11 On the Design Bar. 10 Change the grid bubble letter to 1. click and specify an Offset of 0 mm. On the Options Bar.

At the bottom endpoint of the grid line. The pins are hidden. 17 Click all 4 lock icons on the dimension string to lock the grid bay spacing. Two pins display on the grid lines. 23 Click Edit menu ➤ Pin Position. click and drag the blue circular grip to the right. 25 Adjust the grid: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. until it is closer to grid line A. By pinning these central grid lines. 15 Starting with grid line A. select each vertical grid line just under its grid bubble. click Modify. select grid lines C and 3. 19 Dimension the horizontal grid lines as shown. At the left endpoint of the grid line. click Dimension. and select grid line A. 16 When you select the last vertical grid line. and press ESC. 20 Click the 4 lock icons to lock the horizontal grid dimensions. click and drag the blue circular grip up. Creating a Column Grid | 35 . click the drawing area to the right of the line to place the dimension. 21 Press ESC. The locks ensure that the grid spacing cannot be accidentally changed. until it is closer to grid line 5. 22 While pressing CTRL. You must select the grid lines to redisplay the pins.14 On the Options Bar. 24 Press ESC. 18 On the Design Bar. click . and press ESC. ■ ■ Select grid line 1. you ensure that the grid remains centered and the building will ''grow'' out from the center if its grid dimensions are changed.

27 In the Type Selector. click Finish. and press ENTER. Create a 3D perspective view of the building 38 In the Project Browser. The columns move to the new location at the intersection of the grid lines. select grid line A. ■ 29 While pressing CTRL. 32 Select the dimension string between grid line A and B. 39 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 36 On the Standard toolbar. 37 Select the dimension string and verify that it is locked. 30 Verify that all the grid lines are selected (red). under Floor Plans. lock it. You want to view the columns as if you were walking toward them. If it is unlocked. select all of the column grid lines. 36 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . create a 3D perspective view with a camera in which to better view the columns. click Structural Column. 40 On the Options Bar. Add columns to the grid 26 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. Next. For Place By. 35 Enter 9000 mm. 28 On the Options Bar: ■ Select Height and 05 Roof Garden. for From. 41 Place the camera and select its target point: ■ Zoom to the lower right corner of the column grid.■ If necessary. and specify a point beyond the last horizontal grid line to place the camera. 31 Press ESC. select UC-Universal Column: 305x305x97UC. 34 On the Options Bar. double-click 01 Entry Level. click Activate Dimensions. click Camera. adjust the position of the dimension strings by selecting and dragging them. and unlock it. Columns that span from the 00 Foundation level to the 05 Roof Garden level are added at the grid line intersections of the column grid. select 01 Entry Level. 33 While pressing CTRL. click (Grid Intersection). and on the Options Bar. and then select the dimension value between grid lines A and B. click twice to restore the original locked grid dimension.

Creating a Column Grid | 37 . The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display. The 3D perspective view created by the camera displays.■ Move the cursor next to grid bubble A. and click to place the target point of the camera.

38 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . and then copy them to the subsequent levels. 44 Save the drawing. In the Rename View dialog. ■ ■ Right-click 3D View 1. under Views (all). enter To Building. Adding Beams In this exercise. “Adding Beams” on page 38. and click OK. and click Rename. expand 3D Views. displays in bold under 3D Views. 43 Name the view: ■ In the Project Browser. The current view. you add beams to build the structure of the building model. You begin by adding beams to the 01 Entry Level floor plan. 45 Proceed to the next exercise.42 Resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can view all of the columns. named 3D View 1 by default.

9 On the Options Bar. The View Control Bar offers graphical shortcuts to view settings and commands. select each grid line. The view is currently set to Coarse. which displays the structural elements in your view as single lines. view the icons on the View Control Bar. Add beams to the first level of the building 1 In the Project Browser. click Beam. the icon on the right side of the scale. 2 At the bottom left corner of the drawing area. 4 Click Medium. The selected grid lines display as red. click Finish. 5 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. you change the height of the columns so they extend to the 06 Roof level. 8 While pressing CTRL. verify UB-Universal Beam: 305x165x40UB is selected. double-click 01 Entry Level. under 3D Views. A flyout menu displays the level of detail in which you can display the elements in the current view. 3 Click the Detail Level icon . 6 In the Type Selector. 7 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. double-click To Building to view all of the beams. click Grid. Adding Beams | 39 .When you finish adding beams. 10 In the Project Browser.

and click OK. right-click. and click Select All Instances. 16 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 14 Select one of the beams. All of the beams attached to the columns display as red. 12 On the View toolbar. press and hold SHIFT. Notice that top level beams are not connected to the columns. When you created the columns. 13 On the Design Bar. click Modify. under Floor Plans. double-click 01 Entry Level. The default 3D view is a southeast isometric view with hidden lines. click to view the default 3D view of the structure. select 02 Level. which only extend to the 5th level. NOTE The default 3D view is not available in a perspective or camera view. 15 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard.Copy beams from 01 Entry Level to levels 02 through 06 11 In the Project Browser. 40 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 17 In the Select Levels dialog. select 06 Roof. The beams that you copied from the 01 Entry Level are pasted onto each subsequent level of the building. you specified their height to reach only the 05 Roof Garden level.

21 With the column selected. view the Top Level Constraint parameter. 20 Click Cancel. double-click To Building. select 06 Roof. under 3D Views. click . 25 In the Project Browser. under Constraints. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. resize the view to see the entire structure. right-click.Change the height of the columns 18 Select one of the columns. 06 Roof. for Top Level. and click OK. and click Element Properties. 24 Press ESC. under Instance Parameters. You could change this parameter to 06 Roof in this dialog to change the height of the column. Adding Beams | 41 . but it would only change the height of the single selected column. 22 On the Options Bar. and click Select All Instances. and if necessary. The parameter is set to 05 Roof Garden. All of the columns display as red. The columns now extend to the top level of the building.

28 Save the drawing. “Adding Braces” on page 43. on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style.View the south elevation of the structure 26 In the Project Browser. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. Click Detail Level. area. 27 At the lower left corner of the drawing. The structural elements (columns and beams) display only as lines. as lines only. under Elevations. 42 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . and click Coarse. double-click South. and click Hidden line. but want to display them in less detail. You can view the columns and beams in the elevation.

Each elevation marker aligns perpendicularly to the grid. Add braces in a framing elevation view 5 On the bottom left side of the grid. under Floor Plans. 3 On the Options Bar. and press ESC to end the command.Adding Braces In this exercise. Adding Braces | 43 . Create framing elevation views 1 In the Project Browser. verify Attach to Grid is selected. you create 8 framing elevation views. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. click Framing Elevation. 4 Select the outer grid lines to place 8 elevation markers around the outside of the grid as shown. double-click the elevation marker arrow. To better add the braces to the structure. double-click 00 Foundation. you add braces to the four corners of the building structure.

After you add the final brace. but when placed the braces are placed. 8 In the Type Selector. You must place them one by one to establish the proper connections between elements. and click to specify the endpoint of the brace. 7 On the Design Bar. click Brace. press ESC. and when the endpoint snap displays. NOTE Do not copy or array braces. The endpoints will display when you move the cursor over them. NOTE Make sure you snap to the endpoints of the beams when adding braces to ensure proper connectivity in the building model. 44 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 10 Move the cursor diagonally to the right endpoint of the beam on 02 Level.The associated framing elevation view displays. click to specify the start point of the brace. visible offsets between the beam and the brace connection points displays. 6 Use the grips that display on the crop region to adjust both sides of the view. so that you can see vertical columns located on grid lines A and B. 9 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the beam on 01 Entry Level. verify UB-Universal Beam: 305x165x40UB is selected. 11 Using the same technique. add 4 braces on the subsequent levels of the building as shown.

Make sure that you use the endpoint snap to connect the brace to the beams. enter 18000 mm.Lower the height of the roof (06 Roof) and the 04 Level to test the connectivity 12 Double-click the 06 Roof level height. IMPORTANT If the brace does not move with the level. The height of the roof lowers. Adding Braces | 45 . delete it and redraw it. and press ENTER.

enter 10000 mm. and press ENTER. Add braces in another framing elevation view 15 In the Project Browser. and on the Options Bar. double-click 00 Foundation. enter 12000 mm. click Activate Dimensions. and press ENTER. and click the lock that displays to unlock it. 46 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . Add brace in the remaining views and test the connectivity of the building model structure 18 Add braces to the structure in the remaining framing elevation views. under Floor Plans. 17 Add diagonal braces to the structure. but this time add them from right to left. under Floor Plans. 21 Select grid line A. 22 Click the dimension value of the first vertical grid bay (the one that you unlocked). as shown in the 3D view below.13 Double-click the 04 Level height. double-click the framing elevation marker arrow. 14 On the Standard toolbar. double-click 00 Foundation. 20 Select the dimension string between grid lines A and B. click twice to restore the original level heights. 16 On the bottom right side of the grid. 19 In the Project Browser.

and drag it away from the structure. open the 3D view and notice the change in the size. lock it. beams. 30 Select the dimension string of the first vertical grid bay.23 In the Project Browser. under Elevations. Creating a Foundation | 47 . under 3D Views. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. 31 Save the drawing. under Floor Plans. you place isolated pile caps under the building columns to create a foundation system that distributes the building load to the ground. 24 In the Project Browser. and braces 27 Select one of the columns in the structure. The connected beams and braces resize as the columns move. and if necessary. 25 Change the height of the 06 Roof level to 24000 mm. click 3 times to restore the locked dimension. Creating a Foundation In this exercise. double-click South. 26 In the Project Browser. double-click 00 Foundation. Test connectivity of the columns. and roof height. double-click 3D. “Creating a Foundation” on page 47. 29 In the Project Browser. grid size. 28 On the Standard toolbar.

3 In the Revit dialog that displays. You learn how to access the families that are stored in libraries included with software. expand Families. click Edit. 9 Close the warning dialog. select Unlimited. double-click 00 Foundation. The foundation pile cap now displays. you add the pile caps in the 00 Foundation floor plan view. and press ESC. Click OK twice. click Yes to load a new structural foundation family. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. In the Element Properties dialog. click Foundation ➤ Isolated. where you must adjust the view range before you can view them. 7 Select 2000 x 2000 x 900 mm. and click View Properties. In the View Range dialog.rfa. Load a pile cap family 1 In the Project Browser. but the current depth of the view does not allow you to view it. Add the first pile cap 8 At the top left of the grid. and expand Structural Foundation. click the intersection of grid line A and grid line 1. and how to load specific families into a project. under Extents. you must load the appropriate pile cap family into the project. under View Depth. for Level. and drag it to the drawing area. Verify the pile cap family is loaded in the project 5 In the Project Browser. After you load the pile cap family. 4 In the left pane of the dialog. The M_Pile Cap-Rectangular family displays in the tree. and open Metric\Families\Structural\Foundations\M_Pile Cap-Rectangular. click Training Files. 10 Edit the 00 Foundation view range: ■ ■ ■ ■ Right-click in the view. under Floor Plans. 48 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model .Before you can add the pile caps. for View Range. The pile cap has been added in the view. A warning displays. 6 Expand M_Pile Cap-Rectangular to display the available pile cap types (sizes).

12 Select each grid intersection to add pile caps that form the foundation. and click Create Similar. press ESC. 13 In the Project Browser. When the final pile cap is placed.Add pile caps to complete the foundation 11 Right-click the pile cap. Creating a Foundation | 49 . under 3D Views. double-click {3D} to view the complete foundation.

beams. and braces that you used to create the building structure. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. It is not available in a perspective or camera view. 50 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . View the round hollow columns in the building model.rvt. and learn how to select and change multiple structural element types to refine the building structure. and open Metric\m_RRB_update_structure. NOTE The default 3D view is the only 3D view in which the Select All Instances command is available. click Modify. You load new column. double-click 3D. 3 In the Type Selector. 4 On the Design Bar.5CHS. 2 Select one of the columns. under 3D Views. All of the columns in the building model display as red. you change the types of the columns. and brace families into the project. select CHS-Circular Hollow Section-Column: 508x12. right-click. “Changing Structural Member Types” on page 50. 15 Proceed to the next exercise.14 Click File menu ➤ Save. Change the column type 1 In the Project Browser. beam. Changing Structural Member Types In this exercise. and click Select All Instances.

9. and click OK twice. select M_HSS-Hollow Structural Section: HSS203. under Dimensions. 10 On the Options Bar. although the framing elevation displays the braces as lines only. 20 Open the other building elevations and change the braces to M_Round Bar: 75 mm. click Duplicate. click Brace. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. and click Select All Instances. 15 In the Project Browser. Changing Structural Member Types | 51 . You need to create a new bar type by duplicating the 25mm bar type. Change the brace type 8 On the Design Bar. you change the brace type. but it is the only size of its type currently available. double-click Elevation 1-a.2x101.Change the beam type 5 Select one of the beams. select M_Round Bar: 25mm. click Edit/New. 18 In the Type Selector. This not the size that you want to use. In the following steps. 9 In the Type Selector. The brace type changes. select the braces in the elevation one by one. right-click. for Type. the braces as well as the beams change. for d. Because the braces that you added were actually a beam type. enter 75 mm. View the building model with the new structural element types 21 On the View toolbar. 16 On the Design Bar. and changing its size parameter. click Modify. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. enter 75 mm. select M_Round Bar: 75 mm. and click OK. 19 On the Design Bar. 11 In the Element Properties dialog.6x15. click . click Modify. click . 7 On the Design Bar. under Elevations (Interior Elevation). click Modify to view the new beam type in the building model. 17 While pressing CTRL. 6 In the Type Selector. 13 In the Name dialog.

“Adding Floors” on page 52. under Floor Plans. 22 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. 52 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . you learn some different techniques that you can use when sketching objects. and elements in the current view display as gray. and railings are also created from sketches. you add floors to the 01 Entry Level through the 05 Roof Garden level of the building. click Floor. Some other Revit Architecture elements. Adding Floors In this exercise.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. Notice the Design Bar now displays the Sketch tab. click Lines. In the left pane of the Open dialog. double-click 01 Entry Level. such as roofs. ■ On the Sketch tab. you must sketch them first in a sketch editor. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You are now in the sketch editor. stairs. To create floors. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_floors. In this exercise. 2 Sketch the floor: ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Training Files. Add the 01 Entry Level Floor 1 In the Project Browser.

the 01 Entry Level floor will resize with it. At the top left corner of the grid. Do not lock the dimension. and click above the 1st horizontal grid line to place the dimension. Do not lock the dimensions. The exact dimensions of the sketched floor are not important. past the first vertical grid line. Move the cursor to the left. click Dimension. click . Adding Floors | 53 . If the grid changes size. sketch a rectangular floor inside the extents of the grid. Using a crossing window. 3 Place a dimension between the first horizontal grid line and the left floor edge: ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. 5 Dimension the bottom right corner of the grid. as you resize it in the next steps. Leave this dimension unlocked. select the top floor line. and then the 1st horizontal grid line. 4 Dimension the space between the left floor edge and the first vertical grid line.■ ■ On the Options Bar.

Select the left floor edge and change the top dimension value to 300 mm. and change their values to 300 mm. on the Design Bar. Enter 300 mm. Next. The floor sketch and dimensions redisplay. You use the Pick option to create a floor from the 01 Entry Level floor geometry. click Modify. They display on the floor sketch. 9 Because you do not need to modify the floor. click Finish Sketch to create the floor. and then press ESC.6 Resize the floor sketch by changing its dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. Move the cursor to dimensions at the bottom of the grid. 7 On the Design Bar. this is how you would do it. select the top floor line. If you needed to modify the floor after you created it. Move the cursor to the right dimension. click Quit Sketch. Select and lock the dimensions. The dimensions are not visible on the finished floor. press ENTER. 8 Select the floor. using a different sketching technique. click . you will add a floor to the 02 Level of the building model. 54 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . At the top left corner of the grid. and on the Options Bar. and click the temporary dimension value.

and for Offset. under Floor Plans. IMPORTANT Make sure you select the 01 Entry Level floor lines and not the grid lines. and lock the dimensions. dimension the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid. and press ESC. 14 On the Design Bar. The 02 Level floor sketch displays. ■ ■ Select the right vertical 01 Entry Level floor line.Add the 02 Level floor 10 In the Project Browser. On the Options Bar. click Floor. dimension the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid as shown. enter 1500mm. ■ 12 At the top left corner of the grid. double-click 02 Level. 13 At the bottom right corner of the grid. click Lines. click . click Finish Sketch. Select the three remaining floor lines. The 02 Level floor displays. 11 Sketch the floor: ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. On the Sketch tab. Adding Floors | 55 . and move the cursor until the dashed green line displays in the inside of the 01 Entry Level floor.

18 On the Options Bar. 16 On the Design Bar. 23 Continue to align the remaining 3 floor sketch lines with the 02 Level floor. 56 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . click Lines. The cursor changes to 2 arrows to indicate the Align command is active. double-click 03 Level. 21 Select the top 02 Level floor line.Add the 03 Level floor 15 In the Project Browser. The 02 Level floor is visible in the view. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and a lock icon displays. click Floor. Click the locks to constrain the floors. 20 On the Tools toolbar. under Floor Plans. 22 Click the lock to constrain the 03 Level floor line to the 02 Level floor. click Align . The sketched floor line is aligned with the top 03 Level floor line. click . and then select the top line of the 03 Level floor sketch. 19 Sketch a floor inside the 02 Level floor.

39 Select the dimension string between grid line A and B. 41 Click the dimension value of the first vertical grid bay. 27 Select the 01 Entry Level Floor. 40 Select grid line A. 38 In the Project Browser. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard.24 On the Design Bar. 34 At the bottom right corner of the grid. double-click {3D}. and click OK. you could place the rectangular sketch on the 04 Level. click Edit. dimension the space between 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid. 31 In the Project Browser. and click Activate Dimensions. View the floors in the 3D building model and test connectivity 36 In the Project Browser. double-click 01 Entry Level. Copy and paste the 01 Entry Level floor to the 05 Roof Garden level 26 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 32 Select the floor. Click the lock icons that display next to the dimensions to constrain the 05 Roof Garden level floor to the grid. Adding Floors | 57 . 29 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. Alternatively. under Floor Plans. 33 At the top left corner of the grid. and on the Options Bar. and enter 4500 mm. 25 Repeat the previous procedure to create a floor on the 04 Level. 37 On the View Control Bar. click Finish Sketch. 30 In the Select Levels dialog. select 05 Roof Garden. under Floor Plans. and lock the edges. 35 On the Design Bar. click Model Graphics Style. dimension the space between the 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid. double-click 05 Roof Garden. click Finish Sketch. under Views ➤ 3D Views. double-click 00 Foundation. and click Shading with Edges. and unlock it. The 01 Entry Level floor is copied at the same location onto the 05 Roof Garden level. and constrain the 04 Level floor to the 03 Level floor. Lock the dimensions to constrain the floors.

45 Proceed to the next exercise. under Floor Plans. 58 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . click to restore the grid bay size to 7500 mm. under 3D Views. and lock the dimension that you unlocked in a previous step. double-click {3D} to view the grid. you add a sloped roof over the corner of the building. double-click 00 Foundation. Adding a Roof In this exercise. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. “Adding a Roof ” on page 58. 43 On the Standard toolbar.42 In the Project Browser. 44 In the Project Browser.

Adding a Roof | 59 . You sketch the footprint. click Training Files.rvt. and press ENTER. 4 On the Options Bar: ■ Select Defines Slope. enter 1800 mm. The roof sketch line displays with a slope marker. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_roof.To create the roof. double-click 06 Roof. and specify which roof edges will define the roof slope. under Floor Plans. click Lines. click to place the roof line. ■ ■ For Offset. of the roof in a plan view. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and then move the cursor slightly to the right of the grid line. 5 Move the cursor over grid line E. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. When a green dashed line displays. you use the Roof by Footprint option in Revit Architecture. or the perimeter. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. Add the roof 1 In the Project Browser. Click . 3 On the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

and when the green dashed line displays. Select the lower portion of the roof line that you created from grid line E (the part you want to keep). 8 Select grid line C to place another roof line. For Offset. 11 Trim the rooflines: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. enter 0 mm. click (Trim/Extend). ■ 60 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . The roof sketch line displays with a slope marker. 10 Press ESC. Continue to trim the lines until you complete the roof as shown. and then select the right portion of the roof line that you created from grid line 5. 7 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Defines Slope. move the cursor slightly below the grid line. and lock it.6 Select grid line 5. and lock it. 9 Select grid line 3 to place the final roof line. click to place the roof line.

under Dimensions. Adding a Roof | 61 . click . double-click 06 Roof.00. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. 17 Select the roof. enter 4. Change the roof slope 16 In the Project Browser. and on the Options Bar. click . click Finish Roof.12 Optionally. under Floor Plans. 13 On the Design Bar. for Slope Angle. and click OK. 15 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southeast. place a dimension between the roof slope edges and the grid to constrain them. click . View the roof 14 On the View toolbar. View the roof 19 On the View toolbar.

When you duplicate a type. for Spacing. the curtain wall resizes with it. click Training Files. click Duplicate. “Adding a Curtain Wall” on page 62. you add a curtain wall. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. Add curtain wall segments 1 In the Project Browser. click 01 Entry Level. for Type. 3 In the Type Selector. select Curtain Wall: Storefront. In the left pane of the Open dialog.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. enter 1050 mm. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Horizontal Grid Continuous. 6 In the Name dialog. you copy an existing family type and change its name and parameters to create a new unique type. Adding a Curtain Wall In this exercise. 7 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ . for Spacing. so if you resize the grid. click Wall. enter 2100 mm. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_curtainwall. and click OK. for Join Condition. You constrain the curtain wall to the grid. Click OK twice. and click 4 In the Element Properties dialog. Under Horizontal Grid Pattern. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ Click . The type is saved in the project. Under Vertical Grid Pattern. under Floor Plans. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. 62 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . click Edit/New. Under Construction. enter Retail Storefront.rvt.

click Dimension. dimension both corners of the curtain wall to the grid. Adding a Curtain Wall | 63 . If the grid moves. These dimensions are not in a sketch. but opt to keep the constraint when prompted. 11 Select the 3 remaining outermost grid lines to create 3 more curtain wall segments that are offset 600 mm from the grid lines toward the building interior. the locks ensure that the curtain wall will move with it. enter 600 mm. 13 On the Design Bar. and lock the dimensions.■ ■ ■ For Level. If you want to hide them. For Offset. For Height. and trim each curtain wall segment. and move it slightly toward the building interior. click to place the 1st curtain wall segment. 9 Move the cursor over the grid line 1 near its endpoint. select 05 Roof Garden. so they remain in the view. you can delete the dimension. 10 When a green dashed line displays. click (Trim/Extend). Trim the curtain wall segments 12 On the Tools toolbar. select 01 Entry Level.

View the curtain wall 14 In the Project Browser. 64 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . under 3D Views. “Creating an Entrance” on page 65. and click Shading with Edges. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. and click Hidden Line. Click Model Graphics Style. 15 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style. double-click To Building.

and double-click South. select Curtain Panels and Structural Columns. In the left pane of the Open dialog. To better work with the curtain wall panels. under the element list. Modify the South elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. you want to change the view so only curtain wall panels and columns display. 4 On the Model Categories tab. 5 Under Visibility. All the elements in the list are selected. Creating an Entrance | 65 . you replace 4 curtain wall panels with doors in the front of the building to create the main building entrance. 2 On the View Control Bar. under Views (all).Creating an Entrance In this exercise.rvt. and open Metric\m_RRB_modify_curtainwall. 6 Under Visibility. and click None. and click Medium. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. clear one element to clear all the elements. 3 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click Detail Level. click Training Files. click All. You also modify the panels around the doors so they are solid rather than glass.

click the pin to remove it from each of the panels. 10 Select 1 panel. as these usually represent internal pilasters. 66 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . in the Type Selector. press and hold CTRL. 7 Click OK. select System Panel: Solid. 12 With the panels selected.Do not select Columns. 15 Zoom to the drawing extents. 14 In the Select View Template dialog. 11 When all 9 panels are selected. and click OK. 13 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. 8 Zoom in to the entrance area. click Modify. and select the other panels around the entrance as shown. in the center of the 01 Entry Level. 9 On the Design Bar. select Architectural Elevation.

double-click {3D}. If you select View ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 19 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. Creating an Entrance | 67 . under 3D Views. The view template applies a collection of visibility graphics appropriate to the view it is named for. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. click Detail Level ➤ Medium.16 On the View Control Bar. you see that the visibility of many of the Model element categories that you cleared in a previous step are selected. 17 In the Project Browser. double-click To Building. 18 On the View Control Bar. in this case an architectural elevation.

23 Press TAB until you are notified that you have selected a grid line. 24 On the Options Bar. 25 Select the mullion that you selected previously. select another mullion to the right. click Curtain Grid. 26 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Add or Remove Segments. 68 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model .20 In the Project Browser. under Elevations (Building Elevation). double-click South. 21 Zoom to the front of the building. and click to select it. 22 Move the cursor over the curtain wall mullion as shown. and press ESC to remove the grid lines as shown.

Creating an Entrance | 69 . 30 On the Design Bar.27 On the Options Bar. and view the new entrance. 31 Select the newly created curtain wall panel (press TAB to cycle through selections). 29 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion to the right. 34 On the View toolbar. 33 Repeat for the next 3 panels. and unpin it. click Modify. 28 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion. click . select One Segment. select M_Curtain Wall Sgl Glass. 35 Zoom in to the front of the building. 32 In the Type Selector.

and unpin it. 70 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 38 Press DELETE. 37 Move the cursor over the bottom mullion. 39 Using the same process. remove the mullions from the 2nd. select it. and 4th panels. 3rd. press TAB until it is selected.36 Zoom in to the first panel.

41 Proceed to the next exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 3 Right-click in the view. 2 Zoom in to the lower right corner of the building. you create a drop ceiling on the 01 Entry Level of the building.rvt. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 71 . click Training Files. “Creating a Drop Ceiling” on page 71. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating a Drop Ceiling In this exercise. and click View Properties. Use the same steps that you used to create the south entrance. and add an entrance to the north side of the building. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_drop_ceiling. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. under Graphics. double-click 01 Entry Level. select 02 Level. 5 Click OK.40 Optionally. for Underlay. open the North elevation. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

which indicates you must draw the callout. 8 Select the callout. The cursor changes to a pencil. 7 Place the callout: ■ Specify a point above the top left column.6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. ■ Move the cursor horizontally below the bottom right column. select the grip closest to the callout head. and drag the grip down to position the callout head below the grid as shown. and specify a point to complete the callout. click Callout. 72 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model .

right-click. 15 Double-click the section marker to view the section. 14 Press ESC. right-click Callout of 01 Entry Level. 10 In the Rename View dialog. enter Display Area. Move the cursor horizontally to the left. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. and click OK.9 In the Project Browser. 12 Draw a section line. and click Rename. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 73 . and click Flip Section. and drag the top grip down to display only 01 Entry Level and 02 Level. 13 Select the section line. ■ ■ Specify the section start point just below the right framing elevation marker. 16 Select the section box. click Section. and specify a point past grid line D.

under Ceiling Plans. enter Section Display Area. click Ceiling. and then specify a point near the intersection of grid lines D and 4 to draw a 5000 x 5000 mm rectangular wall inside the grid lines. 19 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. 26 On the Design Bar. and lock the dimension. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click . click Wall. 24 On the Tools toolbar. 74 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . double-click 01 Entry Level. For Loc Line. double-click 01 Entry Level. 28 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the left vertical wall and the grid. 32 In the Type Selector. 18 In the Rename View dialog. select Compound Ceiling : 600 x 600 mm Grid. 25 Press ESC. click (Align). 30 In the Project Browser. Lock both alignments. 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. ■ 23 Select the bottom corner of the overhead floor. 33 On the Options Bar: ■ Click Sketch. and click OK. 27 On the Options Bar. 29 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the top horizontal wall and the grid. select Wall faces. under Floor Plans. 31 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. expand Sections (Building Section). and lock the dimension. for Prefer. Click . select Basic Wall: Interior-135mm Partition (2 hr). click Dimension. select Finish Face: Exterior. and align the exterior faces of the right vertical wall and the bottom horizontal wall with the 02 Level underlay. right-click Section 1.17 In the Project Browser. 21 In the Type Selector.

click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. ■ 34 Sketch the ceiling within the walls. 38 In the Project Browser under Sections (Building Section). click Finish Sketch. 35 Align and lock each ceiling line to the interior wall faces.■ Click Click . and click to select the walls. double-click Section Display Area. 39 On the View Control Bar. 41 On the Options Bar. press TAB until the chain of walls is selected. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 75 . 37 On the Design Bar. . 36 Press ESC. 40 Move the cursor over one of the walls. click . The ceiling grid displays inside of the walls.

47 In the Project Browser. click Move. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. ■ 76 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 44 Select the ceiling. for Base Offset. To position the grid.42 In the Element Properties dialog. and drag it to the interior face of the horizontal or vertical wall. Select the 02 Level Floor. enter 2700 mm. under Constraints. under Constraints. for Top/Base. on the Tools toolbar. double-click 01 Entry Level. click Modify. 48 Modify the ceiling grid: ■ To start the tiles on a wall edge. for Height Offset From Level. On the Options Bar. select any horizontal or vertical ceiling grid line. 46 Attach the walls to the 02 Level floor: ■ Select one of the vertical walls above the ceiling. and click . and specify a distance. under Ceiling Plans. press TAB until you select the wall chain. 43 On the Design Bar. and click OK. and click OK. enter 2700 mm. click Attach. select a grid line. ■ ■ The walls attach to the 02 Level floor. and click to select the walls.

under Construction. 51 In the Type Properties dialog. 52 In the Edit Assembly dialog. 58 Move the cursor toward the top left corner of the grid.View the ceiling structure 49 Select the ceiling. click Edit/New. 55 In the Element Properties dialog. 53 Click OK. 54 In the Type Properties dialog. for Type. 57 On the Options Bar. 50 In the Element Properties dialog. Rotate the ceiling grid 56 Select the center ceiling grid line. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 77 . for Structure. view the ceiling structure. click Cancel. and click . click (Rotate). click Edit. click Cancel.

and press ENTER. 61 Select and drag the diagonal center grid line until it spans the corners of the ceiling grid. enter 45. 60 Press ESC. 78 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model .59 Click.

Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 79 . copy the drop ceiling to the other building levels. click Shadows Off. After the stairs and stairwell have been copied to levels 01-05. you must cut an opening through the floors on each level. and then copying it to the 05 Level. You begin by creating a flight of stairs and stairwell on the 01 Entry Level of the building. you create multi-level stairs and a stairwell that span the levels of the building. 65 Optionally. Creating Multi-Level Stairs In this exercise. 63 On the View Control Bar. “Creating Multi-Level Stairs” on page 79. 64 On the View Control Bar. under 3D Views. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it.View the building in 3D with shadows 62 In the Project Browser. click Shadows On. 66 Proceed to the next exercise. double-click To Building.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Zoom in to the area defined by grid lines B. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click to specify the start point of the reference plane. ■ 80 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . Move the cursor vertically. click Detail Level ➤ Coarse. You will create the stair in the area between these columns. 5 Draw 2 reference planes that you will use to locate the flight of stairs: ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor over the intersection of grid lines C and 3. 3 On the View Control Bar. C. click Training Files.Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_stair_. Move the cursor to the left along grid line 3. and 3. and specify the reference plane endpoint on grid line B. under Floor Plans. When the temporary dimensions indicate the cursor is 1500 mm from the grid line intersection. Create the stair 1 In the Project Browser. 2. click Ref Plane. double-click 01 Entry Level.

6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Move the cursor vertically along the reference plane until the text below the stair flight displays an equal number of risers created and risers remaining. and specify a point to create first stair flight. 7 Sketch the stair: ■ ■ Select the bottom endpoint of the right reference plane. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 81 . click Stairs.■ Draw another reference plane 1500 mm from grid line 2.

select Finish Face: Interior. The complete stair displays. 13 On the Tools toolbar. 10 In the Type Selector. press TAB until the stair edge is selected. click Finish Sketch to create the complete stair. 11 On the Options Bar: ■ For Loc Line. Move the cursor down. click Align. and select the 2nd reference plane. beyond the end of the stair. including its handrails. 15 Select the interior face of the top horizontal wall. and click to select it. click Wall. 14 Move the cursor over the top horizontal outside edge of the stair. align the 2 vertical side edges of the stair with the 2 vertical walls and lock the alignments. select Basic Wall: Generic .■ ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the left. ■ 12 Draw walls around the stair. Make sure you select the stair and not the railing. with a message that 20 risers have been created and that 0 remain. 16 Using the same technique. Click . 82 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 8 On the Options Bar. and lock the alignment.225mm Masonry. and specify a point. 9 On the Design Bar.

17 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select both reference planes. and drag it to the left to test the stair and wall constraints. Because the dimension is constrained. 23 While pressing CTRL. Select the interior face of the wall. click Dimension. and press DELETE. Select the wall. a warning displays. select Wall faces. 22 On the Standard toolbar. Click Modify. 19 Select the dimension. 20 Click OK to delete the dimension. 18 Dimension the distance from the bottom of the stair to the interior face of the bottom horizontal wall: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. 21 Select the stair. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 83 . click . and press ENTER. Select the bottom of the stair. Lock the dimension. and specify a point away from the wall. for Prefer. select the dimension value. enter 1200 mm. and press DELETE. but leave the stair and wall constrained to each other. The stair and walls move to the left.

Add a door to the stairwell 24 On the Design Bar. for Base Constraint. 26 On the Options Bar. 29 While pressing CTRL. and move the cursor to spin the building model. Under Constraints. 25 In the Type Selector. 31 Select the stair. 32 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Constraints. 35 Press SHIFT. 27 Select the right side of the lower horizontal wall to place the door. click . select 05 Roof Garden. 33 On the View toolbar. You can see that the walls and stairs span the vertical height of the building. and click . click Modify. You must cut an opening through the building to accommodate the multi-level stairs. verify Up to level: 06 Roof is selected. 84 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . Click OK. 28 On the Design Bar. select 00 Foundation. but if you view the top level of the building. select M_Single-Flush: 0915 x 2134mm. click 34 On the View toolbar. select all 4 walls. clear Tag on Placement. for Multistory Top Level. and click 30 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . . The Dynamic View dialog displays in the left corner of your screen. you can see that the stair railings penetrate the floors. Click OK. For Top Constraint. press the SPACEBAR before you place the door. TIP To flip the door swing. press and hold the left mouse button. click Door.

Create a shaft opening 36 In the Project Browser. 44 Align the bottom horizontal shaft sketch line with the bottom tread of the stair. 45 Click Finish Sketch to complete the shaft. under Floor Plans. 48 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 42 Align the top horizontal shaft sketch line with the top horizontal interior wall face and lock the alignment. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 85 . click Align. 39 On the Options Bar: ■ Click Click . double-click 01 Entry Level. 38 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 37 Zoom in to the stairs. click Opening ➤ Shaft Opening. and lock the alignment. and lock the alignments. ■ 40 Draw a rectangular shaft opening around the stairs. . 41 On the Tools toolbar. Copy the door to multiple levels 46 Select the door. 43 Align the 2 vertical shaft sketch lines with the interior face of the 2 vertical walls. 47 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard.

53 Select the shaft. 86 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . By offsetting the base. click . click 51 On the View toolbar. . select Up to Level: 06 Roof. you prevent it from cutting through the 01 Entry Level floor. and click OK.49 In the Select Levels dialog. and click 54 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ . ■ For Top Constraint. 52 In the Project Browser. and click OK. Under Constraints. double-click 01 Entry Level. and spin the building so you can see the roof. 55 On the View toolbar. The shaft opening will cut through any level it touches. for Base Offset. click 56 On the View toolbar. Look at the top of building and notice that the shaft is not cutting an opening. View the shaft and stair 50 On the View toolbar. select 02 Level through 05 Roof Garden. 57 Spin the building so that you can see the shaft opening. click . under Floor Plans. enter 300 mm. .

Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height In this exercise. “Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height” on page 87.58 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest. 59 Proceed to the next exercise. You learn how to access and modify the profile and height of the wall to create a decorative wall that extends past the height of the 06 Roof Level. you create a wall on the 05 Roof Garden level.rvt. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Metric\m_RRB_wall_profile. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 87 .

click Wall. for Loc Line. for Underlay. select Basic Wall: Generic . select 06 Roof. under Floor Plans.225mm Masonry. and click View Properties. 10 Change the dimension value: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. Enter 1050 mm. Select the dimension value. 6 On the Options Bar. under Graphics. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 5 In the Type Selector. 2 Right-click in the view. double-click 05 Roof Garden. 7 Move the cursor near the column at the intersection of grid lines C and 3. and draw a 10650 mm wall along grid line 3. 88 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model .Add a basic wall to the 05 Roof Garden level 1 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 9 Dimension the space between grid line C and the left face of the wall on grid line 3. and press ENTER. click Modify. You must draw the wall from left to right to position it on the correct side of grid line 3. click Dimension. and click OK. Select the wall. select Core Face: Interior. 3 In the Element Properties dialog.

19 Press ESC. 13 Click the lock that displays to constrain the 2 elements. double-click Elevation: South. 22 Move the cursor horizontally 1520 mm to the left. 18 Select the top endpoint of the left vertical profile line. click Modify. The South elevation displays. The profile of the wall that you just modified displays as a purple sketch. and click to place a line. click Edit Profile. and then select the right face of the wall. click Lines. 20 On the Design Bar. 12 Select the floor on the right side of the wall. and on the Options Bar. move the cursor up 4500 mm. Modify the profile of the wall 14 On the Design Bar. click Lines. 21 Select the top endpoint of the right vertical profile line. and click to place a line.11 On the Tools toolbar. 16 In the Go To View dialog. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 89 . click (Align). move the cursor up 6000 mm. 23 Press ESC. 17 On the Design Bar. and click to place a line. 15 Select the wall.

31 Move the cursor to the left. and click to place it. Select the top right portion of the circle. and select the endpoint of the left vertical profile line. 90 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . click Lines. click (Trim/Extend). 30 Using the Quadrant snap. 32 Click Modify. Select the top horizontal profile line. move the cursor out until a circle with a radius of 1520 mm displays. 27 Press ESC. 33 Trim the profile lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. click . Press ESC. click the drop-down arrow that displays next to the sketching tools. and select it. snap to the top of the circle. 25 On the Options Bar. Select the short right profile line.24 On the Design Bar. click Lines. and click (Circle). 26 Snap to the endpoint of the line that you just drew. 28 On the Design Bar. 29 On the Options Bar. Select the top right portion of the circle.

click the Close button. 48 Change the 06 Roof level height to 19000 mm. move the cursor out until a circle with a radius of 1000 mm displays. you maintained the relationship to the roof level. 42 On the Design Bar. 35 On the Options Bar. click . and press DELETE. click Modify. 47 Click Cancel. 45 On the Options Bar. Up to level: 06 Roof is selected. under Constraints. click Finish Sketch. By adding extra height to the wall. 44 On the Design Bar. note that for Top Constraint. and press DELETE. 40 On the Design Bar. 46 In the Element Properties dialog. click Continue. click Modify. click Finish Sketch. select the short horizontal line on the right. and select the wall. 43 In the Warning dialog. click Lines. 36 Snap to the endpoint of the short horizontal line. unlock it. instead of lengthening the existing edge. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 91 . 39 In the Error dialog. click . 38 On the Design Bar. You need a closed sketch to complete the profile. 41 Select the horizontal line across the middle of the profile sketch.34 On the Design Bar. click Modify. and click to place it. 37 On the Design Bar.

49 On the Standard toolbar. You learn how to load these components into the project. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. under 3D Views. create a sidewalk on 2 sides of the building. and place people and a car on and next to the sidewalk. 51 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northwest. 52 Proceed to the next exercise. click to restore the original height of the roof. “Adding Entourage and Site Components” on page 92. Adding Entourage and Site Components In this exercise. and how to place and adjust them in project views. you place planters on the 05 Roof level to create a roof garden. View the wall 50 In the Project Browser. 92 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . double-click 3D.

click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. TIP After you place the 1st planter. between grid lines C and D. move the cursor over the planter and move it to the right to display a dashed green line that helps you to place the next planter.rvt. select M_Planter : 1200 x 1200mm. and open Metric\m_RRB_host. 3 In the Type Selector. click Component. under Floor Plans. 4 Add 3 planters on the inside of the floor and grid line 5. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 93 . double-click 05 Roof Garden. as shown. Create the roof garden 1 On the Project Browser.Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

under Floor Plans. double-click 05 Roof Garden. 19 In the Project Browser. 17 Click Apply.5 Meters. 12 Select 1 of the trees. 11 In the Project Browser. and press ESC. double-click {3D}. 6 In the Type Selector. The height of the trees no longer extends past the roof. 94 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . Create a sidewalk outside of the building 20 In the Project Browser. click Edit/New. click Component. under Floor Plans. 14 In the Type Properties dialog.5. 8 On the View toolbar. select M_Tree . and then click OK twice. and click OK. enter 1500 mm. double-click 01 Entry Level. and notice that the trees that you placed in the planters protrude through the roof. enter Cornus Florida 1. under Other. click Duplicate. 18 While pressing CTRL. 13 In the Element Properties dialog.5 Meters. under 3D Views. 15 In the Name dialog.Deciduous: Cornus Florida 1.5 On the Basics tab. select Tree .Deciduous: Cornus Florida 4. for Plant Height. and in the Type Selector. and on the Options Bar. select the 2 remaining trees. click . 7 Click to place a tree in the center of each planter. click . for Type. 16 In the Type Properties dialog. 9 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest. 10 View the roof.

and click to sketch a line. for Offset. sketch a line between grid lines 4 and 5. 23 On the Options Bar: Click . 27 On the Options Bar. 22 On the Design Bar. ■ ■ For Offset. and click to place the line. 26 Using the same method. 28 Select the bottom horizontal floor line. 25 Press TAB until a line that is offset 2400 mm below grid line 5 displays between grid lines A and B. 29 Select the right vertical floor line. 24 Move the cursor over grid line 5 between grid lines A and B. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 95 . and click to sketch a line.21 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Lines. enter 0 mm. enter 2400 mm. click Floor.

move the cursor to the right approximately 1200 mm. The completed sidewalk displays. and then select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5. click (Trim/Extend). 96 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 35 Select the line that you just drew. 36 Select the line between grid lines A and B. 33 Select the left endpoint of the line between grid lines A and B. 38 On the Design Bar. clear Chain. and then select the horizontal line near grid line 1. move the cursor up 900 mm. click . 34 On the Tools toolbar. 32 Select the top endpoint of the right vertical line. and then select the line that you sketched along the bottom horizontal line of the floor. and click to finish the line.30 On the Options Bar. 37 Select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5. click Finish Sketch. and click to finish the line. 31 On the Options Bar.

click Duplicate. and click to place her on the sidewalk. 42 In the Name dialog. for Type. 49 On the Options Bar. 45 Click OK. 53 In the Type Selector. and second line inside the circle indicates the person’s line of sight. create a new type for the sidewalk element. enter -250 mm. select M_RPC Female: Cathy. RPC people are represented by a circle. click Edit/New.Next. 40 In the Element Properties dialog. 39 Select the sidewalk. Place 2 people on the sidewalk 46 Zoom to the lower right corner of the sidewalk. 51 Move the cursor so the rotation line displays along Alex’s line of sight and specify a point. 47 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and specify a point to rotate him so he is facing the column. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. select Rotate after placement. 43 Click OK twice. as it is currently a floor element. 41 In the Type Properties dialog. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 97 . 52 Move the cursor toward the column. click Component. and on the Options Bar. In plan view. for Height Offset from Level. select M_RPC Male: Alex. 48 In the Type Selector. The circle is divided in half by a line. under Constraints. click . near Column E5. 50 Click to place Alex on the sidewalk. enter Sidewalk.

and place it along the sidewalk behind him. When you select a host for a component. 58 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select M_RPC Beetle.54 Rotate Cathy so she is facing Alex. enter -300 mm. 56 Press the spacebar to rotate it until it is facing away from Alex. 57 Press ESC. click Pick Host. under Elevations. double-click West. 64 Select Cathy. Next. and on the Options Bar. click Camera. you ensure that the components remain on the same plane as the host. 61 In the Project Browser. 59 In the camera view (3D View 1). 60 In the Element Properties dialog. 62 Zoom in to the area where Alex and Cathy are standing. for Offset. you select the sidewalk as a host for both the Alex and Cathy RPC components. click the car. and place it in the corner of the scene as shown. 63 Select and drag both Cathy and Alex above the sidewalk. and click . and click OK. 98 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 55 In the Type Selector. under Constraints.

NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. View the front of the building 70 In the Project Browser.65 Click the sidewalk. and replace them with a service core. “Linking a Service Core to the Building Project” on page 99. double-click To Building. 69 Using the same method. 67 Click the sidewalk. pick the sidewalk as the host for the car. under 3D Views. Linking a Service Core to the Building Project In this exercise. and on the Options Bar. Linking a Service Core to the Building Project | 99 . you remove the multi-level stairs and stairwell that you created in a previous exercise from the building. both Cathy and Alex will move with it. If the sidewalk changes height. 68 Select and move both Cathy and Alex until they are standing on the sidewalk. 71 Proceed to the next exercise. 66 Select Alex. click Pick Host.

you must cut another shaft opening around it. 100 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . including the stairs. and shaft opening. under Floor Plans. 4 On the View toolbar. click Training Files. walls. After the service core is linked to your project. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_host_style_railings.rvt. 2 Zoom in to the stairwell. By deleting the stairwell from the 06 Roof. and spin the building. so it will cut through the floors of the building. click . you delete the entire stairwell. . 3 Select the entire stairwell. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Notice that there is no longer a stairwell in the building.The service core is contained in an external file that you link to your current project. and press DELETE. double-click 06 Roof. Remove the stairwell from the building model 1 On the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. press SHIFT. click 5 On the View toolbar.

Linking a Service Core to the Building Project | 101 . 12 Specify a point to place it between grid lines B-D. select m_RRB_link. under Positioning: ■ ■ Select Manually place.rvt. 9 In the Metric folder.Link a new service core into the building model 6 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. The building service core displays in your drawing. 13 On the Tools toolbar. 7 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Revit. 8 In the left pane of the Add Link dialog. You cannot constrain elements in the current project to elements in linked models. 11 Click Open. under Floor Plans. Select Cursor at center. double-click 01 Entry Level. 14 Select the top horizontal floor line. and then select the top horizontal core wall. click (Align). Do not click the lock to constrain the core and floor. 10 At the bottom of the dialog.

16 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. For Top Constraint. select Up to level: 06 Roof. 21 Select the shaft opening and click 22 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . 102 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . click . Click OK.Create a shaft opening for the service core 15 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. for Base Offset. click Lines. View the service core in the building model 23 On the View toolbar. enter 300 mm. 18 On the Options Bar. select Chain. click . 17 On the Options Bar. Under Constraints. 19 Trace the outer edges of the core elements to sketch the service core as shown: 20 On the Design Bar. click 24 On the View toolbar. click Opening ➤ Shaft Opening.

After you modify it. Open a different project and view a rendering of the building lounge 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. in the Project Browser. and open Metric\m_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings_. click Training Files. 2 In the left pane of the dialog. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 103 . Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings In this exercise. 25 Proceed to the final exercise. 3 In the new project. where it is hosted within a railing family.. Notice the glass railing in the foreground. and spin the building to get a better view of the core. This is the railing that you want to add to your model. you add glass railings around the floor edges. click Training Files. You can see that the service core cuts through the floors of the building. The rendering displays. press SHIFT.rvt. and double-click Lounge Perspective. and open Metric\m_Conference. “Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings” on page 103. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. you cut away a portion of the floor on the 02 Level of the building. You copy the railing type into your project from another project. expand Renderings.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

click (Split). and drag to the left until it intersects with grid line B. Handrail only. click Modify. and on the Options Bar. press and hold CTRL. under Floor Plans. Modify the 02 Level floor 11 In the Project Browser. 12 Select the floor. click OK. 14 Select the bottom horizontal floor 700 mm to the left of grid line C. and expand Railings. and select Glass. 9 In the Duplicate Types dialog.rvt or m_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings. expand Families. 13 On the Options Bar. 17 Select the right endpoint of the floor where you split it. and click to split the floor. and Parapet. The floor sketch displays. double-click 02 Level. and drag it to the right until it intersects with grid line D. 7 Click Window menu ➤ Revit Retail Building. 10 Close the warning dialog that displays. 8 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. 15 On the Design Bar. 104 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 6 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. click Edit. 16 Select the left endpoint of the floor where you split it.Copy the railing types into the retail building project 4 In the Project Browser.rvt. 5 Expand Railing.

move the cursor vertically until the line is 1500 mm long. move the cursor vertically 1500 mm. 24 On the Tools toolbar. click Lines. 21 Sketch the same lines in the opposite direction on the right side of the floor sketch. 27 On the Tools toolbar. and lock the alignment. 22 Select the endpoint of the right horizontal line that you just sketched.18 On the Design Bar. and click to place it. 20 Move the cursor horizontally to the right 1500 mm and click to draw another line. 19 Select the left endpoint of the floor. and click the lock to lock the alignment. 25 Select grid line B. 28 Align the horizontal sketch lines with each other as shown. and click to draw another line. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 105 . click (Align). select the left vertical sketch line along grid line B. 26 Select grid line D. 23 Complete the sketch as shown. and click the lock to lock the alignment. select the right vertical sketch line along grid line D. click .

click Finish Sketch. 30 On the Design Bar. Add railings around the floor 32 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 37 On the Design Bar. and click OK. enter 100 mm. 33 On the Design Bar. 36 Select the floor lines to sketch the railing around the inside of the floor line as shown. For Offset.29 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. click Railing Properties.rvt project. click Yes to attach the top of the walls on 01 Entry Level to the bottom of the 02 Level floor. click Railing. and dimension the floor sketch lines as shown. click Dimension. for Type. 31 In the Revit dialog. 35 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click . select Glass. Lock the dimensions. 38 Dimension the railing sketch to the edge of the floor and lock the dimension. 106 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . This is the railing type that you copied from the Conference. 34 In the Element Properties dialog.

Click Model Graphics ➤ Shading with Edges. 41 Place the camera and camera target as shown. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 107 . A new 3D view of the interior of the 02 Level displays. You can view the railing that you just added. click Camera. View the floor and railings 40 On the View tab of the Design Bar.39 Click Finish Sketch. 42 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics ➤ Hidden Line.

■ Click Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region to hide the frame around the view. 108 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 43 Close all project drawings.

BNIM Architects was selected to convert the existing building into a 22-unit condominium featuring concrete floors. exterior fire stairs. and a roof garden. lofty ceilings. As the building is slated to receive historic tax credits. We wish to thank BNIM Architects.Documenting Your Projects 3 In this section of the tutorials. The additional 4th floor and non-historic north facade will be modernized to include a 4th floor penthouse. and north facing balconies for the 2nd and 3rd floor units. 109 . the existing building shell will be maintained and restored. balconies. you learn to create construction documentation in Revit Architecture 2008. a Kansas City-based architectural firm for providing their Freighthouse Flats renovation project to use for the tutorial datasets in this section. Located in Kansas City’s popular Crossroads Arts District. the Freighthouse Flats project is an exciting renovation of an historic three-story warehouse into new urban luxury loft living spaces.

110 | Chapter 3 Documenting Your Projects .NOTE For training purposes. slight modifications to the building design have been made.

You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Create new project views.Adding Views and Sheets to a Project 3 In this tutorial. section. you begin the construction documentation for the Freighthouse Flats project. elevation. including plan. and detail views Modify the appearance of tags and other annotation on plans Set visibility and graphic controls in views to produce different presentation effects Create projects sheets that contain project views ■ 111 .

Creating Views In this lesson. 112 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . You learn how to create new views from existing views. how to create section and elevation views. You duplicate the Level 1 and Level 2 floor plans to create Level 1 and Level 2 furniture plans. Level 1 Furniture Plan created from the Level 1 floor plan Vicinity Plan created from the Site plan Dataset ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you learn how to create views from a building model. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. you create new plan views of the building model by copying existing views and then modifying the copied views. and how to create views from callouts that you place in other views. You also duplicate the project site plan to create a vicinity plan.

right-click Copy of Level 1 ➤ Rename. 9 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Project Browser. 7 In the Project Browser. and right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 3 In the Rename View dialog. enter Level 2 Furniture Plan. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 furniture plan 1 In the Project Browser. Duplicating Plan Views | 113 . right-click Copy of Level 2 ➤ Rename. and click OK. click Training Files. and click OK. under Floor Plans. Use an alternate method of view duplication to create a Level 2 furniture plan 5 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. expand Floor Plans.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Floor Plans. 8 In the Rename View dialog. 2 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 2 Furniture Plan. 6 Click View menu ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views.rvt. select Level 2. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan.

Duplicate a view and change the scale as required 10 In the Project Browser. 11 Under Floor Plans. right-click Site ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 14 On the View Control Bar. 13 In the Project Browser. and click 1: 1000. double-click Vicinity Plan. 12 In the Rename View dialog. Next. hide the display of the elevation markers in the view. 15 Select the body of the south elevation marker. and click OK. 114 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click the current scale. under Floor Plans. right-click Copy of Site ➤ Rename. enter Vicinity Plan.

All of the elevation markers on the plan are hidden. 18 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and click Hide in view ➤ Category.rvt. Creating Elevation and Section Views In this exercise. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 115 . you create an additional section and elevation view of the building model.16 Right-click.

NOTE Elevation markers are context sensitive and will automatically try to align parallel to model geometry. 116 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Elevation.South East elevation view Section view Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select1:100. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. Add an elevation marker to the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Type Selector. for Scale.rvt. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 1. 4 On the Options Bar. 5 Specify a point in the drawing in front of the angular wall to place an elevation marker. select Elevation: Building Elevation.

under Elevations (Building Elevation).Modify the elevation extents 6 On the Design Bar. Rename and view the new elevation 9 In the Project Browser. 8 On the Design Bar. and click OK. double-click South East. 10 In the Rename View dialog. 7 Select and move the upper horizontal line of the elevation until it extends past the upper-left corner of the building. under Elevations. right-click Elevation 1-a ➤ Rename. enter South East. and select the head of the elevation marker that you just placed. 11 In the Project Browser. click Modify. click Modify. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 117 .

under Views (all).Draw a section line on the Level 1 floor plan 12 In the Project Browser. ■ Move the cursor down. select 1:100. and double-click Level 1. 118 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 14 In the Type Selector. and specify the section line endpoint between the endpoints of grid lines 2 and 3. expand Floor Plans. 15 On the Options Bar. select Section: Building Section. 16 Draw a section line through the building: ■ Specify a point above the top wall of the building between grid lines 2 and 3. Modify the section line 17 Click the blue arrows below the section line head to reverse the direction in which the section is cut through the building. for Scale. click Section. 13 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

20 Add a jog to the section line: ■ ■ On the Options Bar. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 119 .18 Select the blue triangular grips on the left side of the section extents. drag it to the right until it cuts through the stair. and move them to just outside of the left side of the building. click Split Segment. Click the midpoint of the section line. and click to place it. 19 Click the blue arrows below the section tail twice to cycle through the section tail options and add a section head to the section line endpoint.

21 On the Design Bar. and drag the top segment of gridline F to the right. 24 Select gridline F. select the blue break mark that displays under the grid bubble. expand Sections (Building Section). and double-click Section 1. 23 On the View Control Bar. View the new section 22 In the Project Browser. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. 120 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Modify.

you create new views: an enlarged stair plan view and a detail view. To create each view. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress.25 On the Design Bar.rvt.Enlarged Stair Plan Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. Stair callout on the Level 1 floor plan Resulting callout view . Creating Callout Views | 121 . Creating Callout Views In this exercise. you draw a callout around the geometry in another view to specify the contents of the each new callout view. click Modify.

■ Move the cursor to the lower-left of the stair. 3 In the Type Selector. double-click Level 1. 4 On the Options Bar. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 5 Draw the callout around the large stair in the center of the plan: ■ Specify a point to the upper-right of the stair. 122 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . under Floor Plans. for Scale.Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. Select the grip on the leader line that is closest to the callout head. 6 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. click Callout. select Floor Plan. select 1:50. and move it to the left side of the callout boundary. and select the callout boundary. and specify a point to complete the callout. click Modify.

Creating Callout Views | 123 . right-click Callout of Level 1 ➤ Rename. 8 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. Open the callout view 10 Double-click the callout head. 7 On the Design Bar. The Enlarged Stair Plan view displays. click Modify. 9 In the Rename View dialog.■ Select the middle grip. and drag it down slightly to create a jog in the leader line. and click OK. enter Enlarged Stair Plan.

and specify a point above and to the right of the roof overhang. and specify a point to the left and below the roof overhang. for Scale. 12 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select 1:50. click Callout.Create a detail view callout 11 In the Project Browser. under Sections (Building Sections). 15 Create the callout: ■ Zoom in to the upper-left corner of the building. select Detail View: Detail. ■ Move the cursor diagonally down. 124 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 14 On the Options Bar. 13 In the Type Selector. double-click Section 1.

and right-click Detail 0 ➤ Rename. under Detail Views (Details). 18 In the Rename View dialog. enter Roof Overhang Detail. expand Detail Views (Details). and click OK. Open the detail callout view 19 In the Project Browser.16 Modify the callout leader as shown. double-click Roof Overhang Detail. Creating Callout Views | 125 . 17 In the Project Browser.

Modifying View Tag Appearance In this exercise. you modify the appearance of tags in a view so that they conform to office CAD standards. Existing stair callout head and boundary 126 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . the elevation markers. and the callout head and boundary that you placed in previous exercises.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. You change the appearance of the section mark head.

10 On the floor plan. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. 12 For Section Tag.rvt. . The new section mark head that you want to apply to either endpoint of the section line displays. select Custom-Section Head. select Custom-Section Head: Section Head – Open. Section Tail – Filled. click Edit/New. enter Section Head – Custom. under Floor Plans. 8 In the Name dialog. and can be applied to the section line. Modify the line weight of the section line and mark 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. select Section Head . 2 Click File menu ➤ Open. select the current project. and click OK. 4 On the Design Bar. for Section Head. and click Open. Modifying View Tag Appearance | 127 . 15 Under Category. double-click Level 1. The Custom-Section Head family is now loaded in the project.Modified stair callout head and boundary Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson.Filled. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. click Load into Project. click Duplicate. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Section Tags.rfa. Modify the section mark head 1 In the Project Browser. click the Annotation Objects tab. 5 In the Load into Projects dialog. open Metric\Families\Annotations.Custom. click Training Files. Section Tail . and click OK twice. and click OK. and click OK. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. and click 11 In the Element Properties dialog. scroll to Section Line. select the section line. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. clear any others.

scroll to Section Marks. click Edit/New. clear all others.16 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. select 12.5 mm. notice the square elevation markers that display. enter 12. For Line Weight. 19 Click OK. select Square. For Dimensions ➤ Width. 27 Click OK twice. and click OK. 30 On the Design Bar. for Elevation Tag. enter 12.5mm Square. click Load into Project. On the floor plan. select 3. 18 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. The new callout head that you want to apply to the callout displays. 128 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . select the current project. notice the updated section marks that display at each endpoint of the section line. and select 2. under Graphics: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Shape. and click OK. click 25 In the Element Properties dialog. open Metric\Families\Annotations. 31 In the Load into Projects dialog. 24 Select an elevation marker in the drawing. On the floor plan. and click Open. Click OK. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. . 32 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Callout Tags.rfa. click Duplicate. 17 Under Category. and select 3. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. Modify the callout head 28 Click File menu ➤ Open. Modify the shape and weight of the elevation markers 20 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Elevation Tags.5mm Square. and on the Options Bar. click Training Files. select Custom-Callout Head. 23 In the Type Properties dialog. 22 In the Name dialog.

Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radiusand click OK. select Custom – Callout Head: Callout Head. Modifying View Tag Appearance | 129 . 45 For Line Pattern. and select 4. 39 Click OK twice. select the callout. Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radius. click Edit/New. For Corner Radius. 35 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Callout Head. click the Annotation Objects tab. and select 7. 48 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. 46 Under Category. scroll down to Callout Boundary. enter 6 mm. . for Callout Tag. select . 36 In the drawing. enter . 43 Under Category. The new callout boundary displays on the floor plan. 44 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. 38 In the Type Properties dialog. The custom callout head displays on the floor plan. 47 Select Callout Leader Line. click 37 In the Element Properties dialog.33 In the Type Properties dialog. 42 In the Objects Styles dialog. 49 Click OK. 34 In the Name dialog. select Dash. expand Callout Boundary. click Duplicate. and on the Options Bar. Click OK. Modify the callout boundary 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 40 Press ESC.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. you create presentation views that feature elevations of the building. you create a view template containing specific presentation quality visibility settings. and visual overrides. you learn how to control the visibility and graphic characteristics of elements in views. Set a crop region for the view 1 In the Project Browser. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views In this lesson. under Elevations. click Training Files.rvt. To accomplish this. and features blue triangular grips and break marks.50 Click File menu ➤ Save. and double-click East. The crop region displays as red. 130 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . masking regions. 2 Select the outer crop region that displays around the view. You learn to create view templates. Presentation view Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. filters. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG. Creating a View Template In this exercise. and apply it to multiple elevation views. view regions. View templates provide and easy way to transfer visibility settings to multiple drawings.

10 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Create and apply a view template to an elevation drawing 9 On the View Control bar. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium.3 Select and move the blue triangular grips to resize the crop region as shown. 13 Under Visibility. and click Properties. 6 On the Project Browser. 11 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. clear Entourage. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. 12 Click the Annotation Categories tab. clear: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Callouts Elevations Grids Levels Sections Creating a View Template | 131 . click Modify to hide the crop region grips and display it as black. under Extents. click Zoom to Fit. 5 On the View Toolbar. under Visibility. right-click East. under Elevations. 4 On the Design Bar. 8 Click OK. clear Crop Region Visible.

under Elevations. 132 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click OK.14 Click OK. right-click East. and click Create View Template From View. double-click North. Callouts. click Apply. 16 In the Project Browser. 20 In the Project Browser. levels. 21 In the Select View Template dialog. under Elevations. enter Black and White Presentation Elevation. 17 In the New View Template dialog. and click Apply View Template. grids. click Shadows Off ➤ Shadows On. elevation markers. and click OK. 15 On the View Control bar. 19 In the Project Browser. right-click North. click OK. select Black and White Presentation Elevation. The settings in the view template create a presentation-quality elevation view. 18 In the View Templates dialog. and section lines are now hidden in the view.

click Edit. NOTE The Penthouse plan now shows the level below to provide additional context to the view. You want to display the exterior roof terraces from Level 4 on the penthouse and roof plan. 2 In the Project Browser. 23 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. under Floor Plans.rvt. as this structure has not yet been documented in any of the views. select Level Below (Level 4). and the exterior area on the south side of the building. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click Penthouse. for Bottom. select Level Below (Level 4). under Extents. for Level.22 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Under View Depth. right-click. Click OK twice. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. select Penthouse. View Range and Plan Regions | 133 .rvt. Adjust the view range of the Penthouse plan 1 In the Project Browser. View Range and Plan Regions In this exercise. and click Properties. you modify the view range and create view plan regions to adjust the display of elements in the building Penthouse and Roof Plan. for View Range. 4 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range.

under Extents. under Floor Plans. for Bottom. 8 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. 6 In the Project Browser. double-click Roof Plan. Click OK twice. for Level.Adjust the view range of the Roof plan 5 In the Project Browser. for View Range. click Edit. right-click. select Roof Plan. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. Under View Depth. select Level 4. select Level 4. and click Properties. 134 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

click Finish Sketch. 16 On the Design Bar. click Lines. 11 On the Options Bar. View Range and Plan Regions | 135 . click Plan Region. click 12 Sketch a plan region: ■ ■ (Rectangle). Move you cursor diagonally. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. In the left corner of the building. 10 On the Design Bar.Create a plan region to show exterior space on the south side of the building 9 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Unlimited. select the left endpoint of the outer wall. and select the endpoint the gridline shown below. click Region Property. for Bottom. under Extents. for View Range. 13 On the Design Bar. click Edit. 17 On the Design Bar. 15 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. NOTE A Plan Region allows you to modify the view range of a specified area defined by the extents of the Plan Region. Click OK twice. select Unlimited. Under View Depth. click Modify. for Level.

select Fire Rating. enter Rated Walls.18 Click File menu ➤ Save. and double-click Level 1. 136 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . under Filters. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. 7 In the Filters dialog. Using Filters to Control Visibility In this exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. select Walls.rvt. 6 In the Filter Name dialog. under Views (all). click Edit/New. 5 In the Filters dialog. click (New). After you apply the filter. 8 Under Filter Rules: ■ For Filter by. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. You use a filter to quickly apply visual changes to the walls based on defined parameters. 4 At the bottom of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. the fire-rated walls on the floor plan display with a solid red fill. you visually audit the drawing to make sure the fire-rated walls are placed correctly. in this case. the fire rating of the walls. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. click the Filters tab. expand Floor Plans. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. under Categories.

Masking Portions of a View In this exercise. 18 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. you obscure or ''wipe out'' geometry in portions of a view. click Override under Patterns. Enter Hr. 9 Click OK. for Rated Walls. click Remove. 15 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. under Basic colors. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click OK. for Color.■ ■ Select contains. 14 In the Color dialog. for Pattern. but the overrides associated with the filter must be reapplied as well. click No Override. To accomplish this. and click OK. 13 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. click Add. 10 On the Filter tab. select Solid Fill. you use masking regions that you sketch over the areas that you want to hide. 19 Remove the filter: ■ ■ Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. apply the red solid fill override to Cut Patterns as well. Masking Portions of a View | 137 . and click OK. click OK. 17 Using the same method. 11 Select Rated Walls. select the red color. The Rated Walls filter can be reapplied to the drawing at any time. 16 Click OK. The fire-rated walls now display without the solid red fill. 12 On the Filter tab. On the Filters tab of the Visibility Graphics dialog. under Projection/Surface.

rvt. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. 4 On the View Control Bar. right-click.Masking regions sketched over the upper corners of a view Unit plan view with upper corners masked Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. 1 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. as shown. 6 Modify the crop region to get close to the desired view at the bottom left. 138 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Show Crop Region. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 5 On the View menu. under Floor Plans. 2 Select Copy of Level 1. right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. enter Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. and click OK.

8 Select the crop region. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. 13 Sketch 2 masking regions as shown. Use a masking region to hide additional model geometry that does not need to be shown 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 12 On the Options Bar. 11 In the Type Selector.7 On the View menu. NOTE This specifies the line type for the border of the masking region. and adjust the view again until it displays as shown. select Invisible lines. click (Rectangle). click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. 9 On the View Control Bar. click Masking Region. Masking Portions of a View | 139 .

click Finish Sketch. under Floor Plans.14 On the Design Bar. Working with Visual Overrides In this exercise.Level 1. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. 1 In the Project Browser. 15 View the effects of the masking regions on the floor plan. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. you create a presentation plan of one of the residential units on the Level 1 floor plan. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. You create poche for the walls and you hide and modify the display of certain elements on the presentation plan. and apply different visual overrides to create presentation effects. right-click Unit 18 Plan . Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson.rvt. 140 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

under Visibility. click in the Patterns field. Working with Visual Overrides | 141 . and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. Create poche for walls 5 Select the diagonal bottom wall. select Solid fill. 11 Click OK twice. 9 On the left side of the Color dialog. enter Presentation Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. for Color. and click 1: 50. 6 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 2 Select the Copy of Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. click No Override. and click OK. and click OK. for Pattern. right-click. 3 In the Rename View dialog. and click Rename. click black. 10 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. right-click.NOTE Duplicate with Detailing is selected so that the masking regions are retained in the new view. and click Override. 8 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 4 On the View Control Bar. click the current scale. 7 Under Cut. select Walls. under Pattern Overrides.

click Modify. Hide elements in the view by category 17 Select the lamp on the table on the floor plan as shown. 12 On the Design Bar. clear Grids. 142 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .Set the visibility and graphics of other categories in the view. under Visibility. clear Floors. 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. 16 Under Visibility. 15 Click the Annotation Categories tab. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog.

Working with Visual Overrides | 143 . and click Hide in View ➤ Category. 19 Select 1 of the chairs around the long table on the floor plan as shown.18 Right-click.

25 Click OK twice. 21 Under Projection/Surface. 22 In the Line Graphics dialog. right-click. select Dash. select a bright green color. 23 In the Color dialog. 27 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog. under Lines. By using the previous method to make the selection. click a purple color. for Color.20 Right-click. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. 29 In the Color dialog. click By Category Override. Modify visibility and graphics by element 26 On the floor plan. click Projection Lines. 28 For Color. select the sofa. the Visibility/Graphics dialog opens to the category of the object (Furniture) selected by default. and click OK. click No Override. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. for Pattern. and click OK twice. 144 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Override.

click . Working with Visual Overrides | 145 . 33 On the View Control Bar. and click Unhide in view ➤ Category. click . 32 Select one of the lamps. right-click. The lighting fixtures and grid lines that you hid previously display in a dark red color. click Modify. The hidden crop region is also revealed.30 On the Design Bar. Reveal hidden elements in a view 31 On the View Control Bar.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. you learn how to create sheets within a Revit Architecture project. select A0 metric. 146 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats. click Training Files.rvt. you create project drawing sheets that report the project information in the sheet titleblocks. and click OK. and click View. Creating Drawing Sheets In this exercise. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and how to make changes to the building model from a view on a sheet. Create a project sheet 1 On View tab of the Design Bar. click Sheet.34 Click File menu ➤ Save. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. how to add views to the sheets. right-click. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project In this lesson.Creating Sheets.

Unnamed. expand Sheets (all). enter A101. 3 In the Project Browser. 5 When the title block highlights. under Identity Data: ■ ■ (Properties). click Modify. enter Site Plan. and select the title block. For Sheet Number. NOTE The vertical time and date stamp in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates every time the project file is saved. The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project. on the Options Bar. Creating Drawing Sheets | 147 . The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser with the name A102 . Change the sheet name and number 4 On the Design Bar. For Sheet Name. click 6 In the Element Properties dialog.A title block and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet. The text fields in the titleblock family (shown below) contain labels that associate the project information parameters with the appropriate text fields.

enter For Approval. under Other. for Project Address. enter 15 May. The Sheet Number has been updated to display A101. 7 On the Design Bar. enter Freighthouse Flats. For Client Name. 8 Zoom in to the lower-right corner of the title block. The new project information displays in the titleblock. 148 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 2007. click Modify. Smith. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. enter J. MA 12345 12 Click OK. 11 In the Edit Text dialog. For Project Number. continue to add project information: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. For Project Status. For Project Name. enter the following address: ■ ■ 123 Main Street Anytown. click Edit. 14 Click OK. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. Site Plan displays in the title block as the sheet name and is appended to the sheet name in the Project Browser. Display additional project information in the sheet title block 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information.■ Click OK. enter 2007-1.

Elevations A105 . The border of the view displays as red to indicate that you can reposition it on the sheet.Floor Plan. and click to place the view. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. and click OK. 16 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. you add views to these sheets. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. 4 On the Design Bar. 21 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save As.Elevations A106 . Drag the Level 1 floor plan onto a sheet to create a floor plan 1 In the Project Browser.Create a floor plan sheet 15 In the Project Browser. 3 Move the cursor to position the lower-right corner of the view in the lower-right corner of the sheet. enter Floor Plan. you add views to the sheets that you created in the previous exercise. Adding Views to Sheets In this exercise. create the following new project sheets: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A103 .Elevations A107 . Create additional sheets 19 Using the same method as you did in the previous steps.Sections A108 . and click Save. select the new sheet name. and click Rename. click Modify. right-click. select Level 1.rvt. under Floor Plans. select A0 metric. 18 In the Sheet Title dialog. under Sheets (all). double-click A102 . Adding Views to Sheets | 149 .Layout Plan A104 . Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. and drag it to the sheet. for Name.rvt. 17 In the Project Browser. 2 In the Project Browser. and click OK.Stairs In the following exercise.

click Modify. Add elevation views to the A104-Elevation sheet 5 In the Project Browser. and click to place it. drag East to the upper-right corner of the sheet. under Sheets (all). 6 In the Project Browser. 8 On the Design Bar. align it with the East elevation.The red border around the view no longer displays. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 7 Drag the North elevation to the lower-right corner of the sheet. double-click A104 .Elevations. and click to place it. 150 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

for View Scale. 12 On the Design Bar. click 14 In the Element Properties dialog. 15 Drag the view to reposition it next to the Building Section view. 16 Select title bar. Notice the title bar also needs to be resized.Add the Building Section view to the A107-Sections sheet 9 In the Project Browser. and on the Options Bar.Sections. click Modify. . select 1:5. and click to place it. Change the scale of the detail view 13 Select the Roof Overhang Detail on the sheet. under Sheets (all). drag Building Section to the upper-right corner of the sheet. and click to place it. double-click A107 . drag Roof Overhang Detail to the left of the Building Section view on the sheet. and use the blue endpoint grips to resize it so that it spans the length of the view. 11 Under Detail Views (Detail). 10 Under Sections (Building Sections). and click OK. Adding Views to Sheets | 151 .

click Modify. 152 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . drag Enlarged Stair Plan to the upper-right corner of the sheet. zoom in to the grip. Notice that the callout tag has been automatically updated to reference the correct sheet. double-click Level 1. double-click A108 . and press TAB until it highlights. Create a sheet with stair and stair detail views 17 In the Project Browser. move the cursor over it.Stairs.NOTE If you find it difficult to select the left grip on the title bar. 19 On the Design Bar. 21 Zoom to the stair callout. View updated annotation on referenced views 20 In the Project Browser. 18 Under Floor Plans. and click to place it. under Sheets (all). under Floor Plans.

Sections. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save.rvt. you must first activate the view on the sheet. and then make changes and deactivate the view. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View In this exercise. Change the roof elevation 1 In the Project Browser. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. under Sheets (all). Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View | 153 . and notice they also reference the correct sheet numbers. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. double-click A107 . In order to do this.22 Zoom in to the section line heads and the east and north elevation markers. you learn how to modify a building model directly from the drawing sheets that you created from its views.

3 At the right end of the Roof level line. zoom in to the name and elevation of the level. 7 In the Project Browser. and press ENTER. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 5 On the Design Bar. 4 Double-click the Roof elevation height. double-click North. enter 16700 mm. 6 Right-click. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save. right-click. and click Activate View. click Modify. and click Deactivate View. 154 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Notice that the Roof Plan elevation has been updated.2 Select the building section view.

select the new sheet name. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 155 . For Sheet Name. select A0 metric. and click OK. as it is not necessary to display it on the title sheet. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 7 Place the camera as shown. Create a new sheet 1 In the Project Browser. enter T. you create a perspective view of the building and place it on the sheet. right-click. and click Properties. you create a title sheet for your drawing set.Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet In this exercise. double-click Level 1. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Sheet Number. enter Title Sheet. The camera view displays. under Floor Plans. You modify the view to hide the view title. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. After you create the sheet. Create a view of the building to place on the title sheet 5 In the Project Browser. Click OK. 3 In the Project Browser.rvt. click Camera.

11 On the View Control Bar. click Shadows off ➤ Shadows on. Under Extents. Under Camera. For Far Clip Offset. 156 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . drag 3D View 1 onto the sheet. select Far Clip Active. enter 18000 mm. double-click T . 10 Select the crop region and adjust the view to fit the building. 13 In the Project Browser. For Target Elevation. enter 1500 mm. click 9 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ .Title Sheet. for Eye Elevation.8 On the Options Bar. under Sheets (all). 14 Under 3D Views. and click to place it in the center of the sheet. enter100000 mm. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. Click OK. 12 On the View Control Bar.

select Scale (locked proportions). click Modify.15 With the view selected. on the Options Bar. 17 Reposition the view on the title sheet. click 20 In the Element Properties dialog. The title bar no longer displays on the sheet. Under Model Crop Size. Remove the title bar on the view 18 On the Design Bar. 24 Click OK twice. 19 Select the view on the sheet. click Duplicate. enter 635 mm. click Size. and on the Options Bar. select No. Click Apply. 22 In the Name dialog. and click OK. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. and then click OK. enter Viewport/no title mark. click Modify. for Show title. click Edit/New. under Graphics. 25 On the Design Bar. 23 In the Type Properties dialog. . for Height. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 157 . 16 In the Crop Region dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change.

and close the exercise file. 158 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .26 Click File menu ➤ Save.

159 . You also learn to create different types of schedules. such as room and window schedules.Tagging and Scheduling 4 In this tutorial. in your Revit Architecture 2008 projects. such as doors and windows. you learn how to tag rooms and other components of floor plans.

3 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. you learn how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit Architecture. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The Room command with the Tag on placement option selected allows you to place and tag rooms with one command. click Training Files. you need to create room separation lines to define the rooms to be tagged.rvt. and click Room and Area. 2 Zoom in to the upper area of the floor plan. 160 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . right-click in the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You learn how to ■ ■ ■ ■ Sequentially tag rooms on a floor plan Tag doors and windows Modify tag placement and mark text Tag other objects. NOTE If the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar is not active.Level 1. Adding room separation lines breaks up an open space to make it easier to add rooms. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . such as furniture Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms In this exercise. expand Floor Plans.Tagging Objects In this lesson. click Room Separation. Because of the open style floor plan. Add room separations 1 In the Project Browser. you sequentially place and tag the rooms on the floor plan. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects.

as shown: 6 Use the same method to create a horizontal separation above the stair to divide the dining area from the living area. move the cursor to the right. and click the opposite wall to create a horizontal room separation dividing the kitchen from the dining area (top area of the drawing). Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 161 . as shown: 5 Use the same method to create a vertical separation to divide the kitchen from the entry area on the right.4 Click the endpoint of the short horizontal wall on the left.

click Modify. verify that Tag on placement is selected. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Room Tag. 15 On the Design Bar. and click to place the room and tag. indicating that it can be edited. 14 Move the cursor to the room at the upper right of the plan view. click OK. 13 On the Options Bar.rfa. click Training Files. and the rectangle contains the room tag.7 On the Design Bar. Tag rooms sequentially 12 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 11 In the Tags dialog. click Load. 9 In the Tags dialog. The room tag number displays in blue. 10 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 162 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . click Room. click Modify. Load room tag annotation family 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. and select the room tag. The crosshair graphic represents the room area being tagged.

and press ENTER. click it. Align the tags by moving the cursor until a dashed green line displays between the placed tag and the one that displays at the tip of the cursor. 17 Click the room text label. 18 On the Design Bar. click Modify.16 Zoom in on the tag number. and press ENTER. click Room. enter Entry. enter U18-1. ■ Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 163 . 19 Place another room and tag: ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. Click to place the new room and tag. Move the cursor into the room to the left of the one previously tagged.

enter Kitchen. and edit the tags as shown (Toilet. Sequential letters are also supported. click Modify. 22 Use the same method to place rooms and tags. 164 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling .NOTE The second tag that you place displays the sequential number U18-2. and Living): Hide the room separations 23 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 20 On the Design Bar. 21 Click the room text label. and press ENTER. Dining.

clear Room Separation. Model Categories tab. 27 Starting with the Balcony (area near the stair). Tag Level 1 doors 1 If necessary. The rooms are already placed. 28 On the Design Bar. click Modify. in the Project Browser.rvt. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and click OK. click Room Tag. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. and moving clockwise. expand Floor Plans. Tagging Doors and Windows | 165 . under Floor Plans.Level 1. click to place a room tag in each of the 5 rooms. You learn how to add tags to the floor plan and how to simultaneously tag multiple untagged doors and windows.24 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. expand Lines. you learn how to place door and window tags. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress.rvt. Tagging Doors and Windows In this exercise. Tag rooms on upper level 25 In the Project Browser. but they need to be tagged. 26 On the Design Bar.Level 2. double-click Unit 18 Plan . 30 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress.

2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 166 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . click (Properties). for Mark. 4 Select 5 doors in the upper area of the floor plan: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Entry door Kitchen pantry door Pocket door in toilet Closet door in dining room Living room door 5 On the Design Bar. enter U18-1. click Modify. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. and on the Options Bar. 7 Select the kitchen pantry door to the left. clear Leader. click Tag ➤ By Category. enter U18-2. 3 On the Options Bar. under Identify Data. and click OK. and press ENTER. 6 Click the door tag for the entry door.

14 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. click Tag All Not Tagged. select Door Tags. and click OK. 10 Select the tag for the pocket door on the right. rename the other 3 door tags to match the corresponding room tags. Tag Level 2 doors 12 In the Project Browser.9 Using one of the methods you just learned. 11 Select the tag for the closet door and move it to the right of the door. double-click Unit 18 Plan . under Category. and drag it down to center it in the doorway. Tagging Doors and Windows | 167 .Level 2. 13 On the Design Bar.

click Tag All Not Tagged. 16 Edit the numbers of the door tags as shown: Place window tags 17 In the Project Browser. 168 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . 21 Click OK. 23 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Window Tag. 20 In the left pane of the Open dialog.rfa. 18 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. and double-click Level 1. and click OK. click Training Files. 19 In the Tags dialog. expand Floor Plans. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.15 Move the door tags to center them in the doorway. select Window. click Load.

click Zoom To Fit to see the entire drawing. click Training Files. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog.Level 1.rvt. Window tags are placed in the Level 2 plan view. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . click Yes to load a tag. 28 Select Window Tags. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans.rfa. Tagging Other Objects In this exercise. 5 At the confirmation prompt. double-click Level 2. and modify the tag placement and display. 4 Select a dining room chair. Zoom flyout. 27 On the Design Bar. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Furniture Tag. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Tag ➤ By Category. and click OK. Tagging Other Objects | 169 . 7 Select each of the chairs and the table to place tags. Add furniture tags 1 In the Project Browser. click Tag All Not Tagged. select Leader. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise.24 Zoom to the lower-right area of the drawing to view the window tags. 25 Under Floor Plans. you learn how to tag furniture objects. 3 On the Options Bar. 26 On the View toolbar.

and drag it up to form an angled leader. Modify tag placement 10 Zoom to the dining table. 12 Click the elbow control. Notice that the chair and table tags overlap.8 Select the furniture in the living room. 13 Optionally. clear Leader. and on the Options Bar. 9 Click Modify. 14 Click Modify. 11 Select the tag for the table. 170 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . modify the position of the chair tags to move them closer to the chairs. and drag it above the chair tag. 15 Select the tag for the table (TBL-1).

Level 2. under Floor Plans. select M_Furniture tag : Standard. Tag furniture on Level 2 17 In the Project Browser. 18 On the Design Bar. and on the Design Bar. Tagging Other Objects | 171 . click Tag All Not Tagged.16 Drag the table tag to the center of the table. double-click Unit 18 Plan . Change tag style 19 Draw a selection box around the top area of the drawing to select the furniture. click Modify. All furniture in the floor plan is tagged. and click OK. click (Filter Selection). 20 On the Options Bar.

22 In the Type Selector. you learn to add schedules. You also learn to add schedule keys to a project by creating a room schedule and room color diagram. click Check None. you create a window schedule for the building model shown below. select Furniture Tag: Boxed. Creating a Window Schedule In this exercise. and click OK.21 In the Filter dialog. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams In this lesson. Schedule keys allow you to define common items that can be used by multiple objects within a schedule. 172 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . select Furniture Tags. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click Modify.

and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams. you group and sort the windows in the instance schedule. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Finally. click Training Files.rvt. in which windows are listed by window type.You begin by creating a window instance schedule. a schedule that lists every window in the building. You then select a window in the instance schedule and use the Show command to locate it in a view of the building model. Creating a Window Schedule | 173 . you change the window instance schedule to a type schedule. that is. Next.

click the Fields tab. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down. click Schedule/Quantities. select Windows. The Comments field is moved under Scheduled fields. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. right-click in the Design Bar. enter Building Window Schedule. 4 For Name. Define the fields to display as columns in the window schedule 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog. add the following fields to the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Height Level Type Mark Width 8 Under Scheduled fields. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active.Create a window schedule 1 In the Project Browser. select Comments and click Add. 174 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . 9 Click OK. expand Floor Plans. 6 Under Available fields. and click OK. under Category. and double-click Level 1. 7 Using the same method. and click View.

this can be a time-consuming process. The window that corresponds to the information in the schedule row is displayed in a relevant view of the building model. 12 In the Show Element(s) in View dialog. Creating a Window Schedule | 175 . for Sort by. under Other. NOTE By clicking Show. 11 If the confirmation dialog displays. right-click the schedule. and on the Options Bar.A schedule is created that contains every window in the building model. expand Schedules/Quantities. and click OK twice. and click View Properties. 16 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. select Type Mark. 13 In the Project Browser. click Close. However. Group and sort the window schedule by type mark 14 In the drawing area. Select a window in the schedule and locate it in the building model 10 Select a cell in the window schedule with the C14 Type Mark. you are prompted to open one that does. you can display other views of the building model that include the selected window. click Edit. click OK to search through relevant views of the building model. in large building models with many views. click Show. for Sorting/Grouping. If no open view shows the selected element. and double-click Building Window Schedule to redisplay the window instance schedule. 15 In the Element Properties dialog.

Change type mark from the schedule 17 In the window schedule. so that the types are sequentially named from A to H. for Sorting/Grouping. Change the schedule from an instance schedule to a type schedule 19 Right-click on the schedule. clear Itemize every instance. click Edit. and click View Properties. 21 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 176 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . under Floor Plans. The window type schedule is displayed. under Other. as shown: 24 In the Project Browser. and press ENTER. double-click Level 2. 23 Change the Type Mark for the other window types. 22 Click OK twice. 20 In the Element Properties dialog.The window schedule is displayed. 18 Click OK to confirm that you want to change the type mark for all windows of this type. sorted by type mark. change the Type Mark in the first row from 19 to A. The type mark is changed to A and the schedule is resorted.

click Add to create the new parameter. 7 In the Parameter Properties dialog. and sill conditions for a window can be found. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Categories. In this case. The new project parameter Head Detail is displayed in the Project Parameters dialog. for Name. Under Parameter Data. you add schedule columns for parameters that are not standard for the scheduled object. 5 Click OK. enter Head Detail. select Windows to associate the parameter with the Windows category. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. expand Schedules/Quantities. click OK. For Discipline. 6 Use the same method to create 2 more window parameters: Jamb Detail and Sill Detail. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. jamb. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save As. unlike shared parameters.rvt. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog. and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule In this lesson. you want to add columns to the window schedule to describe the detail where head. and double-click Building Window Schedule.25 Zoom to the lower area of the floor plan to see that the window tags have changed. you cannot use them to tag objects. These parameters cannot be shared with other projects and. select Construction. select Type. For Group parameter under.rvt. Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule | 177 .

and Sill Detail. Group headers in the schedule 13 In the schedule. click in the Head Detail header. so that they are listed before Comments. for Fields. select the following fields. 14 On the Options Bar. under Available fields. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ Head Detail Jamb Detail Sill Detail 11 Use the Move Up control to move the new parameters up in the list. TIP To select all 3 headers. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit. and while pressing the left mouse button. click Group. 178 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . under Other. right-click Building Window Schedule. enter Window Details. Jamb Detail. select Head Detail. 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 12 Click OK twice. move the cursor over the Jamb Detail and Sill Detail headers. 15 In the grouping field above the detail headers in the schedule. and click Properties.Add project parameters to the schedule 8 In the Project Browser.

and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Family and Type Head Height Sill Height Width Mark 7 Click the Filter tab. Create a new door schedule for Unit 18 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. enter 2/A107. 4 Click OK. For example. expand Floor Plans. 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select the following fields. Under Name. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Schedule/Quantities. click the Fields tab. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . Verify the Phase is Phase 1. select Doors. and for Sill Detail.Door Schedule.rvt. Select contains in the second field. Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter In this exercise. Verify Schedule building components is selected. for Head Detail. you create a unit-based door schedule and use a filter to limit the selection of doors to a single unit. enter 3/A107. under Type Mark A. and specify the following values for Filter by: ■ ■ ■ Select Mark in the first field.Level 1. Enter U18 in the third field. and place the unit-based door schedule on a sheet with the unit plans.16 You can add values for the new project parameters directly in the schedule. 6 Under Available fields. Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter | 179 . You then hide the column used for the filter. View Level 1 of the building 1 In the Project Browser. enter Unit 18 . enter 1/A107. for Jamb Detail. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. and produces a schedule that includes only the doors in Unit 18. This filter checks each door in the project to see which unit it is associated with. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise.

9 Click the Formatting tab. 10 Under Fields. 11 Under Field formatting. 15 On the Design Bar. click Unit 18 .Door Schedule. 180 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . The schedule includes the count and type for doors in Unit 18 only. but is not included as a column in the schedule. select Mark. The Mark field is used to filter the entries in the schedule. click Modify. Clear Itemize every instance (to group the like door types into one row). expand Sheets (all).Unit 18. and drag it to the sheet. and double-click A102 . 13 In the Project Browser.8 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. 14 Click to place the schedule in the upper-left corner of the sheet. and specify the following options: ■ ■ For Sort by. 16 Zoom in to see the details of the door schedule. and click OK. select Hidden Field. select Family and Type. Place the schedule on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser.

you create a room schedule for the first floor plan. Creating a Room Schedule | 181 . Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. under Category. Select the fields to display as columns in the room schedule 4 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. under Floor Plans.Modify the width of a schedule column on the sheet 17 Select the door schedule on the sheet. right-click in the Design Bar. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. The wider column makes it easier to read the door descriptions. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Notice that several rooms have been defined in the floor plan. Creating a Room Schedule In this exercise. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. 18 Select the control at the top of the schedule for the Family and Type column and drag it to the right to expand the column width. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. 8 Click OK. and click Add. select Rooms.rvt. partial schedules are shown for illustration purposes. 19 On the Design Bar. click Schedule/Quantities. and click OK. Create a room schedule 1 In the Project Browser. select Number. click Modify. You also add programmed rooms to the schedule for the public spaces in the building. NOTE In some cases in this tutorial. under Available fields. add the following fields to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ Name Level Area 6 Click the Appearance tab. The Number field is moved under Scheduled fields. double-click Level 1. and click View. 7 To the right of Header text. select Bold to display the schedule headers in bold font. 5 Using the same method.

and the Level and Area values are displayed as Not Placed because the room is not placed in the floor plan. and press ENTER. For 103. A new row is displayed at the bottom of the schedule. and press ENTER. enter Corridor. 101-106.NOTE The Appearance settings only take effect when the schedule is placed on a drawing sheet. add 5 more rooms. next to Rows. for Name. For 104. enter Storage. 10 Edit the number to be 101. The rooms are displayed at the bottom of the list and numbered sequentially. for room 101. select Corridor. For 105. The bold header is not noticeable until you place the schedule on a drawing sheet. 11 Using the same method. select Storage. Add new rooms to the schedule 9 On the Options Bar. enter Building Entry. 182 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . 12 Edit the room names in the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the schedule. click New. For 102. and press ENTER. The room Number is U17-9.

In the Line Graphics dialog.■ For 106. under Visibility/Graphics Overrides. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 4 Click OK. and click OK. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. 13 Click File menu ➤ Save. double-click Level 1. click the Lines field. You also change the bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas of the plan. Specify style for room separation lines 1 In the Project Browser. click Room Separation. Add room separation lines 5 Zoom in to the center of the building. In the Lines field. 3 Change the display of room separation lines: ■ In the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. For Room Separation. you add room separation lines. For Weight. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. and modify room names.rvt. enter Stair. under Projection/Surface. select 9. click the Color field. Under Custom colors. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List In this exercise. expand Lines. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 183 . click Override. click the bright green swatch. under Floor Plans. place rooms from a program list. and press ENTER. and click OK.

7 Click to add 2 room separation lines to the right side of the drawing in the corridor. First. 8 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Place rooms from a program list 9 On the Design Bar. click Room. draw the horizontal line. Draw a vertical separation line from the wall endpoint to the new corridor separation line. 184 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling .

Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 185 . 13 For Offset. 10 On the Options Bar. for Room. enter 2400 mm. 11 Click to place the room in the newly-defined entry area (lower-right). 12 On the Options Bar.Placed rooms are indicated with a crosshair graphic in the drawing. for Room. select 101 Building Entry. select 102 Storage.

186 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling .14 Click to place the room in the area to the left of Building Entry. Place 105 in the lower space to the left of the kitchen. Place 104 in the space to the left of 103. under Schedules/Quantities. 16 On the Design Bar. as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Place 103 in the space above room 101. and zoom in to the Corridor. double-click Room Schedule. under Floor Plans. click Modify. double-click Level 1. Change the room bounding behavior of walls 17 In the Project Browser. 15 Use the same method to place the following rooms. 18 In the Project Browser. These values will change after you change the room bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas. Place 106 in the space with the stairs. Notice the area values for the Storage rooms in the schedule.

Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 187 .19 While pressing CTRL. under Available fields. The Room Style Schedule displays without data. 27 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Notice that the area for the storage rooms has increased as a result of the change in the room bounding behavior of the walls. click Schedule/Quantities. click New to add a new row. while pressing CTRL. 28 Click OK to create the new room style schedule. clear Room Bounding. and click Add. as shown: 20 On the Options Bar. double-click Room Schedule. 30 For Key Name. under Constraints. 29 On the Options Bar. enter As Selected. 23 In the Project Browser. enter Units. 26 Select Schedule keys. Create key schedule 24 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Floor Finish. click (Properties). and Wall Finish. click Modify. 22 On the Design Bar. 25 In the New Schedule dialog. and for all 3 finishes. select Rooms. select Base Finish. select the 3 small walls (in the 2 storage areas). under Category. and click OK. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK.

36 In the Project Browser. 39 On the View toolbar. right-click Room Schedule. All rooms are selected in the floor plan. 41 On the Options Bar. under Schedules/Quantities. click Zoom To Fit. for Room Style. select Rooms. Specify the Room Style for Level 1 rooms 38 In the Project Browser. and click OK. and click Add. click Room Style. click Edit. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Properties. Zoom flyout.31 Using the same method. 35 Click OK twice. click Check None. 32 In the Project Browser. double-click Room Schedule. add 2 more key names: Service and Public. 40 Draw a selection box around floor plan. double-click Level 1. for Fields. 34 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 188 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . select Units. The Room Style column is added to the Room Schedule. click (Filter Selection). 37 Under U17-8. 42 In the Filter dialog. under Floor Plans. under Other. for Available fields.

select Units. Create a room color scheme 1 In the Project Browser. 46 Edit the Room Style for rooms 101 through 106: ■ ■ For rooms 101. expand Floor Plans. click (Duplicate). For rooms 102 and 105. and double-click Level 1. enter Room Type. under Views (all). enter Room Type. select Room Style. click OK. under Schedules/Quantities. click the Color Scheme field. Creating a Room Color Diagram In this exercise. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. right-click Level 1. you create a room color scheme (based on the type of the rooms in the floor plan). 5 For Title. 9 In the Project Browser. 4 In the New Color Scheme dialog. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Color Fill Schemes. 8 Click OK.43 On the Options Bar. 47 Click File menu ➤ Save. select Service. Notice that the Room Style is Units for all rooms on Level 1. All rooms on Level 1 now have the room style defined.rvt. 7 Since you are creating a new color scheme. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. for Name. and click OK. 11 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 189 . and 106. and apply it to the Level 1 view. 6 For Color. You also edit the colors used in the color scheme and modify the properties of the color scheme legend. at the warning prompt. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. and click Properties. under Identity Data. 45 In the Project Browser. 104. click (Properties). m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. under Floor Plans. and click OK. for Room Style. double-click Room Schedule. The Room Style specification will be used later to determine color fill in a room color diagram. 103. 3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. select Room Type. select Public.

Add a color scheme legend 14 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. click Edit Color Scheme. A legend displays at the tip of the cursor. 20 In the Options panel at the bottom of the dialog. 13 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. 21 In the second row of the table (Public). Change the fill colors applied to the rooms 17 In the drawing area. click the value in the Color column. under Custom color. and clear Room Separation. and click OK twice. expand Lines. 22 In the Color dialog. select Foreground. click Edit. for Display Color Fill in. 18 On the Options Bar. and click OK. clear Visible. 16 On the Design Bar. 15 Click in the lower right of the drawing area to place the legend.12 For Visibility/Graphics Overrides. 19 In the first row of the Scheme Definition table (none). click Color Scheme Legend. select blue. select the color legend. 190 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling .

on the Options Bar. click Edit/New. enter 5 mm. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 191 . 24 Click OK. Specify properties for the legend colors and title 25 With the legend still selected. click 26 In the Element Properties dialog. (Properties).23 Use the same method to change the colors for Service and Units to cyan and gray respectively. 28 Under Title Text. for Size. for Swatch Width. 27 In the Type Properties dialog. under Graphics. and click OK twice. enter 25 mm.

192 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. Creating a Material Takeoff In this exercise. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. You then add formulas to the material takeoff to produce cost estimates. 2 Zoom in to the roof area of the building. you have already determined the roof configuration for the building.29 On the Design Bar. You learn to change the roof family type and create a material takeoff schedule for the roofing materials.rvt. under 3D Views. click Modify. Create a material takeoff 1 In the Project Browser. 30 Click File menu ➤ Save. double-click {3D}.

select Basic Roof : Wood Joist . Clear Itemize every instance. and specify the following values: ■ ■ Under Fields. Select Grand totals. 13 Expand the column widths to see all of the information. select the roof of the building and the smaller roof for the elevator penthouse. and click OK. and click Add. under Available fields. select Calculate totals. 5 On the Design Bar.EPDM. 8 On the Fields tab of the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. 6 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Material Takeoff. add Material: Description and Material: Area to the Scheduled fields. select Material: Area. under Category.Insulation on Plywood Deck . 4 In the Type Selector. click Family and Type. 11 Click the Formatting tab. For Then by. 9 Using the same method. The Roof Materials Takeoff Schedule displays. select Roofs. select Material: Description. 12 Click OK. Under Field formatting. click Modify. select Family and Type. Creating a Material Takeoff | 193 . and specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Sort by.3 While pressing CTRL. 7 In the New Material Takeoff dialog. 10 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab.

and under Fields. enter the following values: Material: Description EPDM Plywood Rigid Insulation Wood Joist Value 16 13. 194 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . 19 For Formula. and click Properties. 18 In the Calculated Value dialog. click Material: Cost. right-click Roof Material Takeoff.40 50. Add cost information and a formula to calculate estimated cost 14 In the Project Browser. click Edit.TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text. for Fields. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 22 For Field formatting. enter Material: Area*Material: Cost /(1000mm^2). under Other. and click Add. 24 In the Project Browser. 23 In the Material Takeoff. under Available fields. enter Estimated Cost. and click OK twice. for the Material: Cost field. 21 Click the Formatting tab. for Name. The /(1000mm^2) is required to remove the formatting of the fields so the cost estimate value can be calculated.80 5.35 The Estimated cost is calculated. and click Properties. click Estimated Cost. 17 Click Calculated Value. select Calculate totals. 16 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. right-click Roof Material Takeoff. 20 Click OK.

28 Click OK 3 times. regardless of category. select Fixed. and are defined and stored in an external file. Scheduling Shared Parameters In this lesson. under Fields. for Formatting.rvt. ensuring consistency across families and projects. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save.25 In the Element Properties dialog. and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. An example of the use of shared parameters is the need to add specific parameters to a family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not present by default. These shared parameters can be added to any family. and reporting the shared parameters. click Edit. tag the line. Adding shared parameters to a family allows you to create a tag and schedule to track this specific information. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 195 . click Training Files. adding the shared parameters to a family. This lesson demonstrates the solution for this situation and covers the process of setting up shared parameters. In this lesson. select 2 decimal places. For Units. creating a generic tag to tag the family. you create a shared parameter file. you learn how to use shared parameters to define additional parameters that are not included in predefined instance and type parameters. click Estimated Cost. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You draw a travel path line. you create an exiting plan for the building. Creating a Shared Parameter File In this exercise. For Rounding. either within family components or within the project template. 27 Click Field Format. Their values may also be aggregated and reported within Revit Architecture multi-category schedules. 26 On the Formatting tab of the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. and schedule the total distance of each path. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

1 Click File menu ➤ Open. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family In this exercise. for File name. click New. enter Travel Distance. click Training Files. You then create a generic tag to tag the family. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog. click Create. and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress.1 In the Project Browser. enter OfficeStandardsParameters. for Name. under Floor Plans. for Name. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. and click OK. 5 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog.rvt. click New.txt. NOTE Shared parameter files are typically stored at a network location for use in all projects. double-click Exiting Plan-Level 1. you add the shared parameters you created to a family file.rvt. 11 Click OK. 9 Under Parameters. and click OK. 3 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. enter Exiting. 6 In the New Parameter Group dialog. under Groups. select Length. and click OK. 7 Under Parameters. click New. 2 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. 12 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 4 In the left pane of the Save As dialog. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. enter Path ID. for Type of Parameter. 196 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . and click Save. for Name. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog.

3 On the Design Bar. 12 Click Apply. Create a tag using shared parameters 15 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Annotation Symbol. The Family Types dialog displays the parameters that are currently available for this family category. 8 Select Instance.rfa. click Family Types. and click OK. select Constraints. and select Instance. in the Load into Projects dialog. If you have multiple projects open. group it under Dimensions. enter Length. and click OK. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 13 On the Design Bar. click Load into Projects. 6 In the Shared Parameters dialog. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 197 . under Dimensions. and click Select. and click OK. under Parameters. 10 Use the same method to add Travel Distance as a shared parameter. under Parameters. verify that Parameter group is Exiting and that Path ID is selected. following the equals symbol (=). 11 In the Family Types dialog. and click OK.2 In the Left pane of the Open dialog. 9 In the Family Types dialog. the Load into Projects dialog displays for you to select the project. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Travel Line. for Travel Distance Formula. 4 In the Family Types dialog. 7 For Group parameter under. click Add.rvt. Click Training Files. select Shared parameter. click Add. select m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. otherwise the family loads into the current project. 14 If necessary.

click Label. and open Metric\Templates\M_Generic Tag. 21 In the Select Parameter dialog. 20 Click the intersection of the reference planes in the drawing window to display the Select Parameter dialog.rft. click Add. 26 On the Design Bar. click Training Files. under Parameters. click Select. select Travel Distance.rft. click Modify.16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 198 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . 17 Select Generic Tag. and click Open. 23 In the Shared Parameters dialog. and click OK 3 times. 24 On the Design Bar. click Label. and use the same method to select the Path ID parameter. 19 On the Design Bar. 22 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 18 Zoom in to the intersection of the reference planes. 25 Click above the intersection of the reference planes.

Tagging. 31 On the Design Bar. enter M_Travel Distance Tag.Level 1. 30 In the Save As dialog.27 In the drawing window. select Path ID.rfa. Create Level 1 exiting travel path 1 In the Project Browser. Placing. 28 Select the Note in the upper-left area of the drawing window. 32 On the Load into Projects dialog.rvt. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. for File Name.Tagging. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters In this exercise. 33 Click File menu ➤ Save. verify that m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_Progress. double-click Exiting Plan . and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 199 . After the lines are tagged. you create a schedule that totals the travel distances in each exiting plan for each path ID. under Floor Plans.rvt is selected. click Load into Projects. and move it down. and click OK. so that it is positioned just above Travel Distance. 29 Click File ➤ Save As. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. You then tag the travel lines and give them a path ID. and click Save. and press DELETE. Placing. you place the travel line family in the Level 1 and Level 2 exiting plans.

2 Zoom in to the corridor. and click in the center of the corridor. click Component. 6 Move the cursor to the right. select Chain. 200 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . above the exterior door as shown. 5 Specify a start point for the path at the left end of the corridor as shown. 4 On the Options Bar. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

click Tag ➤ By Category. under Constraints. 13 While pressing CTRL. click Component. Placing. select the 2 dashed travel lines. 8 On the Design Bar. through the door. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 12 On the Design Bar.Level 2.Tagging. enter 1-1. click Modify. 9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. clear Leader. Create Level 2 exiting travel path 15 In the Project Browser. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. verify that Chain is selected. under Floor Plans. double click Exiting Plan . click Modify. 10 On the Options Bar. and click outside of the building. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 201 . 11 Select each of the travel path lines. and click OK. 17 On the Options Bar. and click (Properties).7 Move the cursor down. for Path ID.

and click above the door to the stair. and click to specify the first segment of the path as shown. 19 Move the cursor up through the door. 20 On the Design Bar. click Component. move the cursor near the right corner. 21 On the Design Bar. move the cursor to the left.18 Click in the horizontal corridor below the door on the right side of the floor plan. and click. 202 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . 22 Click at the center starting point. click Modify.

23 Move the cursor down. 26 Select each of the travel path lines. verify that <Multi-Category> is selected. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select the 2 dashed travel lines for the left exit path. enter Level 1 Exit Distance. click Modify. 30 Use the same method to specify the Path ID for the right exit path to 2-2. under Category. under Constraints. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 203 . and click OK. for Path ID. and click in the stair. enter 2-1. (Properties). 24 On the Design Bar. and click OK. Placing. click Modify.Tagging. and click 29 In the Element Properties dialog. 33 For Name. click Tag ➤ By Category. Create a schedule to total the paths on each plan 31 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 27 On the Design Bar. 32 In the New Schedule dialog. 28 While pressing CTRL.

right-click Copy of Level 1 Exit Distance. and under Field formatting. click Schedule/Quantities. in the first field. 37 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. 204 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . select Path ID. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. and click OK. and click View. Create a wall schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. you create a wall schedule that includes columns for the Uniformat Assembly Codes and assembly descriptions of the scheduled walls. select contains. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. for Filter.34 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. click Training Files. in the second field. right-click Level 2 Exit Distance. 40 Click the Formatting tab. under Schedules/Quantities. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Properties. 42 Click OK. click Edit. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. in the third field. 38 For Sort by. 46 In the Project Browser. 45 In the Rename View dialog. 49 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click Rename. for Filter by. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions In this exercise. enter Level 2 Exit Distance.rvt. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 35 Click the Filter tab. right-click the Design Bar. select Calculate Totals. under Available fields. 48 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Path ID. and click Add. The Level 1 Exit Distance schedule displays. The Level 2 Exit Distance schedule displays. right-click Level 1 Exit Distance. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes In this lesson. 36 For Filter by. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 44 In the Project Browser. enter 1-. 39 Clear Itemize every instance. and in the third field. under Other. select Path ID and Travel Distance. while pressing CTRL. and click OK twice. select Travel Distance. 43 In the Project Browser. you schedule Uniformat Assembly Codes as they are applied to Revit Architecture components. 41 Under Fields. enter 2-.

right-click Generic . expand C .Partitions . and click Properties. click the Value field. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select the following fields. Assign an assembly code to a wall type in the project 6 In the Project Browser. click the Fields tab. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Area Volume Width Length Assembly Code Assembly Description 5 Click OK to complete the schedule. click C1010145 . expand Families\Walls\Basic Wall. and click the browse button. under Categories. 4 Under Available fields. 7 In the Type Properties dialog.Interior Construction\C1010 Partitions\C1010100 .152 mm. and click OK twice.2 In the New Schedules dialog.Drywall w/ Metal Stud. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions | 205 .Interiors\C10 . for Assembly Code. select Walls. 8 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog.Fixed Partitions. and click OK.

2 In the Select Data Source dialog. 11 In the OBDC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. 8 In the New Database dialog.rvt. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. expand the Assembly Description column to see the description. and click Next. tables that list instances only are created for levels and rooms because these categories do not have types. 1 On the File menu. 9 Under Directories. 10 Close the exercise file. Revit Architecture creates 2 tables for the following categories of elements (see below): one that lists all of the element instances in a project and one that lists all of the element types in a project.9 In the schedule. 6 Click Finish. enter Revit_Project. select the Microsoft Access driver (*mdb). click Training Files. you learn how to export project information to an ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity) compatible database. click Create. select a location for the database file. click Export ➤ ODBC Database. under Database. under Database Name. The process that you use to export the database is similar for any other ODBC-compliant database. 3 Click New. click OK. and click Next. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 In the Create New Data Source dialog. Exporting Project Information with ODBC In this lesson. click the File Data Source tab. 7 In the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. 10 When the confirmation displays. and open the database in Microsoft Access.mdb for Database Name. 12 Click OK in the remaining dialogs. Additionally. and click OK to create the database. 206 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . you learn how to export project information into a Microsoft® Access 2000 database. click OK in the dialog. 5 Enter RevitDSN for the name of the DSN. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access In this exercise.

which is used for choosing one of the keys from the key schedule. as long as the category is one of the categories that Revit Architecture exports. and some instance tables include a RoomId column containing the ID of the room that the instance is in. The exported columns are the same as the columns in the key schedule.A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements. These parameters are also exported and contain the ID of the key element. instance tables include a TypeId column containing the ID of the instance’s type. In addition to the tables for instances and types in a category. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access | 207 . The table of types includes an Assembly Code column that references the Assembly Codes table. a table is also created for each key schedule in a project. One final table is also exported: Assembly Codes. Each key schedule gives elements in its category a new parameter. Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different tables. For example. so that each table of elements includes an Id column. 13 Close the exercise file. The columns of the table are Assembly Code and Assembly Description. This table contains one row for each Uniformat Assembly Code. in addition to the Id column.

208 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling .

you learn how to change the base elevation of a project. 209 . and how to annotate and dimension your Revit Architecture 2008 projects.Annotating and Dimensioning 5 In this tutorial.

as the base elevation of most projects is rarely at 0 mm.Changing the Base Elevation of a Project In this lesson. You accomplish this in Revit Architecture by defining levels as either project or shared levels. or you can change the base elevation and add its value to the levels above it. Project levels report elevation relative to other levels in the project 210 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . you learn how to relocate the base elevation of a project. You can change the base elevation without changing the elevation value of every other level in the project.

click Training Files. you relocate the base elevation of a building from 0 m to 10000 m. the height of the elevations above Level 1 report height relative to Level 1. Relocating a Project | 211 . After you define the building levels as shared and relocate the project.rvt.Relocating a Project In this exercise. and open m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

4 In the Element Properties dialog. so changing the height Level 1 would change it only in relation to the other levels in the project. However. The levels in the project are not shared. you specify the point (0 mm) from which you want to relocate the project. you specify the new location of the project. 212 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . to better demonstrate how shared levels work. enter 10000 mm. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. and press ENTER. The south elevation is displayed. enter8 mm Head . Relocate the project 7 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. Level 1 displays an elevation value of 0 mm. In order for the levels to report height relative to the new base elevation after the project is relocated. The base elevation now reads 10000 mm. for Elevation Base. and click OK. 3 On the Options Bar. 8 Select the Level 1 line. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). and you create a new shared level type for only Level 1. and double-click South. expand Views (all).Define Level 1 as a shared level 1 In the Project Browser.Shared Elevation. only the Elevation Base parameter of Level 1 is shared at this time. Under Constraints. In the Name dialog. 9 Move the cursor above the elevation line. If you did that now. By selecting the Level 1 line. By entering 10000 mm in this step. you must set the Elevation Base parameter to Shared. click Edit/New. 5 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Duplicate. the parameter for all the levels in the project would change. 2 Select the Level 1 line to display it as red. 6 Click OK twice. click (Properties). select Shared. 10 On the View menu. The elevation of the other levels remains the same.

The changes in elevation have propagated to this view.Define the remaining project levels as shared 11 Select the Loft level line. as well as other views of the building model. The reported value of the Loft level changes to take the new base elevation value into consideration. double-click North. under Elevations.Shared Elevation. click Modify. 13 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Project Browser. Relocating a Project | 213 . 12 In the Type Selector. select Level : 8 mm Head .

Shared Elevation. All the building levels now report elevations relative to the base elevation. click Modify. 214 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . and the Roof Plan level.15 Define the remaining levels as shared: ■ ■ ■ Press and hold CTRL. In the Type Selector. the Penthouse level. select Level : 8 mm Head . and select Levels 2-4. On the Design Bar.

In Revit Architecture. and angular dimensions. although you must turn on their visibility to view them. and learn to work with dimensioning constraints to control placement of elements in the model. you learn how to use dimensioning tools and constraints in Revit Architecture to dimension and space planter boxes on the north side of the building. you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your building models. Dimensioning | 215 . permanent dimensions are created automatically. expand Views (all).rvt Place an overall linear dimension 1 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. click File menu ➤ Save As. 17 Proceed to the next lesson. You place linear. Dimensioning In this lesson. In this case. except when you sketch profiles to complete families. radial. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.16 If you want to save your changes. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. and double-click Level 1. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Permanent dimensions must be explicitly created. Linear and multi-segmented dimensions Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. multi-segmented. “Dimensioning” on page 215. Temporary dimensions display automatically when you create and insert components. there are 2 types of dimensions: temporary and permanent.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 3 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top left side of the view. dimensions are aligned. 216 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . and when a green dashed line displays along the right side of the curtain wall. snap to wall centerlines. select it. select it. The default dimensioning options display on the Options Bar. 4 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top right side of the view. and are created by selecting individual reference points. click Dimension. By default. and when a green dashed line displays along the left side of the curtain.

click Dimension. 6 Click the lock that displays on the dimension string to lock the dimension. Only aligned and angular permanent dimensions can be constrained in this way. click Modify. indicating that you cannot change the distance between the curtain walls without first unlocking the dimension.5 Move the cursor above the view. 7 On the Design Bar. Creating Dimensions | 217 . The lock displays as locked. and click to place the dimension. Place a multi-segmented dimension 8 On the Design Bar.

above the plan view of the building. click to make all the dimension segments equal and reposition the planters equal distances apart from one another. and select its left exterior face. for Prefer. and continue to select the endpoints and faces of the planters. select the right side of the curtain wall. 218 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . and click to place the multi-segmented dimension. 16 After you select the reference points on the final planter. 10 Press TAB until the left endpoint of the planter displays. 15 Move the cursor to the right. Make the dimension segments equal to space the planters at equal distances 18 With the multi-segmented dimension selected. 14 Move the cursor to the planter on the right. 11 Using the same method. 12 13 On the Options Bar. 17 Move the cursor up. and move the cursor over the left endpoint of the first planter to the right. select Wall Faces.9 Select the left side of the left curtain wall as you did in a previous step. select the right endpoint of the planter. and select it. but below the first dimension that you placed.

For Prefer. 27 Select the blue square grip that displays under the dimension value and drag it slightly up and to the right. Creating Dimensions | 219 . click Modify. Place a radial dimension with a Typ. click Dimension. 21 On the Design Bar.19 On the Basics tab. 23 Move the cursor over the left exterior curved face of the planter until it highlights. select Wall faces. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Radial). suffix 20 Zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4. click Modify. 26 Select the radial dimension. 25 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 24 Move the cursor outside the wall. and specify a point to place the dimension. and select it.

. For Prefer. enter Typ. click (Properties). Place an angular dimension 31 Zoom to the planter near grid line 5.28 With the dimension still selected. 32 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 34 Select the horizontal line. on the Options Bar. and click OK. 220 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . verify Wall faces is selected. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. 30 On the Basics tab. for Suffix. click Dimension. 33 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Angular).

you select only the wall. 36 Move the cursor to the left to resize the dimension arc. 38 Proceed to the next exercise. “Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions” on page 221.This line is the edge of a mass that represents the neighboring building. and click to place the dimension. 35 Select the left exterior face of the planter. click Modify. instead of the wall and each individual opening reference point. 37 On the Basics tab. you learn to automatically dimension a linear wall and its openings (windows) on the Level 3 floor plan of the building. When you dimension the wall. This automatic dimensioning option provides a convenient way to quickly dimension walls with multiple openings. Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions In this exercise. Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions | 221 .

select Openings. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. click Dimension.rvt Open the Level 3 floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click Level 3. select Entire Walls. Select automatic dimensioning options 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. These options ensure that the wall dimension includes the openings. select Wall centerlines. expand Views (all). and select Widths. 222 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . Click OK. and that the opening widths are referenced in the overall dimension string.Automatic wall dimension Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Click Options. 3 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Prefer. expand Floor Plans. 4 In the Automatic Dimension Options dialog: ■ ■ Under Select References. You will dimension the short bottom horizontal wall that includes 3 windows. For Pick.

and click to place the automatic dimension string. click Modify. expand Floor Plans. 2 Zoom to the planter on which you placed a radial dimension. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Controlling Witness Lines | 223 . expand Views (all). for a multi-segmented dimension. “Controlling Witness Lines” on page 223. and double-click Level 1.rvt Override default dimension witness lines 1 In the Project Browser. For example. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. Controlling Witness Lines In this exercise. where the witness lines referring to interior walls would be located on the centerline of each wall. 6 Move the cursor down below the plan view. you learn to override dimension witness line settings as you place dimensions. in some cases. you specify their origin on the Options Bar. However. 7 On the Basics tab. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. and learn how to change the location of witness lines after you place dimensions. you may want to locate the two outermost witness lines on the exterior face of each wall. When you place dimensions.Place the dimension 5 Select the bottom exterior wall. you may need to override their settings on an instance basis.

and select it. select the right edge of the planter. click Dimension. 7 Using the same method. verify Wall centerlines is selected. and click to place the dimension.3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Individual References. move the cursor down. 6 Press TAB to cycle through the selection options until the left face of the planter highlights. 5 Move the cursor over the left side of the planter. 224 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . 4 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Prefer. For Pick.

and select it. 9 Press TAB until the bottom left endpoint is highlighted. 11 Move the cursor down. select the bottom right endpoint.8 Move the cursor over the bottom of the planter on which you placed the angular dimension. Controlling Witness Lines | 225 . and specify a point to place the dimension. 10 Using the same method.

click Modify. 13 On the Options Bar. for Prefer.Dimension the partition walls to center lines 12 On the Basics tab. select the centerline of each of the 6 remaining partition walls. and when the wall centerline highlights. 15 Moving the cursor to the right. and click to place the dimension. and zoom in on the right end of the dimension. 16 On the Design Bar. 226 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . select it. 14 Move the cursor over the left partition wall in the top left corner of the plan. and drag the dimension down the wall. click Dimension. 18 Press and hold SHIFT. select the green grip that displays in the middle of the tick mark. Adjust the witness line location on the end dimensions to align them to the faces of wall 17 Select the dimension that you just placed. select Wall centerlines.

select the top blue grip and drag it up to create a witness line gap. click Modify. “Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions” on page 227.19 Release SHIFT. After you create the new family type. you change the Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 227 . create a witness line gap and align the dimension to the outer left face of the wall. 20 Release SHIFT. and using the same methods. Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions In this exercise. you learn how to duplicate the dimension family type of dimension on the floor plan and then modify its parameters to create an office standard dimension style. 21 Zoom to the partition wall on the left side of the plan. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. and click the blue middle grip until the dimension aligns with the outer face of the partition wall. 22 On the Basics tab.

for Tick Mark. Under Text. click Duplicate. enter 3. and text size parameters to create dimensions that better conform to your office standards. 2 Click (Properties). 5 In the Name dialog.rvt Duplicate an existing dimension type 1 On the Level 1 floor plan. For Text Font. 3 In the Element Properties dialog.dimension tick mark. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. and select the lower dimension. zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4. select CityBlueprint. text font. enter Office Standard. Angular and linear dimensions with office standard text and arrows Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. select Arrow 30 Degree. 228 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . and click OK. Modify the parameters of the new Office Standard type 6 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. for Text Size. 4 In the Type Properties dialog.2 mm. click Edit/New.

10 On the Basics tab. The dimension that you selected previously now displays the new Office Standard family type. select another font. 7 On the Basics tab. ■ Click OK twice. and select the bottom dimension. If CityBlueprint does not display in the list.NOTE Fonts that are available in this list are the Windows fonts installed on your system. 8 Move the cursor to the planter on the right. 9 In the Type Selector. Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 229 . select Linear Dimension Style: Office Standard. click Modify. click Modify.

12 Proceed to the next lesson. You create a new office standard text note type by duplicating the family type of a note on the floor plan. and how to add leaders to the text notes. 230 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . You learn how to change the text font and size of text notes. you add text notes on the Level 1 floor plan of the building. select the angular dimension on the planter.11 Using the same method. “Creating Text Annotation” on page 230. and modify it to use the office standard parameters. Creating Text Annotation In this lesson. create a new angular dimension type.

click (None). and click and drag to create a text box. zoom to planter near grid line 5. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 4 Move the cursor above grid line 4. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.rvt Add a text note 1 On the Level 1 floor plan. for Leader. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. you add text notes to the Level 1 floor plan.Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan In this exercise. click Text. 3 On the Options Bar. but below the upper dimension string. Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 231 .

under Graphics. for Text Size. select and drag the top left blue symbol to relocate the text box. enter 6 mm Arial Notes. Create a new text note family type by duplicating the existing type 6 On the Design Bar. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. 10 In the Name dialog box. click Duplicate. and click . If so.5 In the text box. select Arc Leaders. 8 In the Element Properties dialog box. enter 6 mm. and click OK. and click OK. click Edit/New. 11 Under Text. and click OK. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. enter EXISTING BUILDING. click Modify. You may have to move the text box to avoid overlapping other elements on the floor plan. 7 Select the text box. 232 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning .

and enter Planting Bed. A downward pointing leader displays on the right side of the Planting Bed text box. click Text. click Modify. 15 On the Design Bar.Create a text box with leaders 13 On the Design Bar. 16 Select the Planting Bed text box. Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 233 . 14 Create another text box to the right of grid line 4. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ Click (Add Right Arc Leader).

21 Select the Planting Bed text box to select both the text and leaders. for Text font. 23 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . 20 On the Design Bar. for New. and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. and click OK. enter Standard Notes. Another leader displays on the left side of the Planting Bed text box. Under Graphics. Under Text. 19 Select the blue grip at the end of the left leader. and click 22 In the Element Properties dialog. 24 On the Design Bar. for Leader Arrowhead. In the Rename dialog. click Modify. Click OK twice. Click Rename. select Arrow 30 Degree. click Edit/New. Reposition the leaders 18 Select the blue grip at the end of the right leader. 234 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . click Modify. and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. select CityBlueprint.■ Click (Add Left Arc Leader).

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 235 . 29 Move the cursor up and to the right. 26 In the Type Selector. select Text: Standard Notes. 30 When green dashed lines that indicate it is aligned with the Planting Bed text.Add another note using the Standard Note type 25 On the Design Bar. over the Planting Bed text. 27 On the Options Bar. click Text. 28 Click the inside bottom face of the rounded planter near grid line 3. for Leader. click to place the text box. click (Arc).

and save the exercise file with a unique name. 33 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. Wall.31 Click in the text box. and enter 457 mm Conc. 236 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . 32 If you want to save your changes. click File menu ➤ Save As.

plywood.Detailing 6 In this tutorial. 237 . These components display at the required scale. For a detail that you do not want to associate with the model. you learn how to create details in Revit Architecture 2008. you use a separate drafting view in which to create the detail. and metal studs. You can detail directly in a view of the building information model. The "drafted" detail that you create is not parametrically linked to the building model. like a standard door header condition. using detail components to represent materials like lumber.

Creating a Detail from a Building Model In this lesson. and then complete the detail by adding break lines and text notes. 238 | Chapter 6 Detailing . you detail the roof overhang of a project building. you must define the view in which you want to create a detail. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. as well as detail lines. They are also view specific. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The detail components that you add to the view are two-dimensional family objects. which means that all detail components.rvt. In the callout view. You define that view by creating a callout view within a section view. region objects. and use the model as an underlay for the detail. that you add to the view are visible only in this view. In order to detail from the building model. Detailing the View In this exercise. add detail components. After you add components. You load detail components. and insulation objects. you add notes and dimensions to the detail view. click Training Files. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. you detail the view of the roof edge. you trace over the building model geometry.

click Edit/New. 15 For Spacing. click in the space below the roof overhang to place the component. You load and place the component so that it is in the project to use in a repeating detail. The roof overhang detail displays. and click Open. Load and place a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Detailing the View | 239 . click . click Detail Component. select As underlay. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 13 In the Name dialog. 16 Click OK twice.rfa. enter 406. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files.5mm. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. 5 In the alert dialog. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. navigate to Metric\Families\m_Corrugated Metal. click Repeating Detail. 10 On the Options Bar. 7 In the drawing area. click Yes to load a Detail Items family. and click OK. Exact location is not important. and click OK. 17 In the drawing area.Display a detail view 1 In the upper left corner of the building model. click Duplicate. enter Corrugated Metal Siding. 8 Delete the component. click the bottom of the exterior wall to select the start point. Place a repeating detail 9 On the Design Bar. select Corrugated Metal. double-click the detail callout head. for Pattern ➤ Detail. 11 In the Element Properties dialog.

240 | Chapter 6 Detailing . NOTE The detail component endpoint may not coincide with the geometry extents. 19 On the Design Bar. Add lumber detail components 22 On the Design Bar. ■ Click Modify. Specify a point high enough so the siding reaches the underside of the roof overhang. click Detail Component. click Modify. 23 On the Options Bar. Select the bottom edge of the roof joist as the move end point. Select the endpoint of the geometry of the corrugated metal component as the move start point. and press DELETE. 21 Select the original instance of the corrugated metal component. and on the Edit toolbar. 20 Move the component end point: ■ ■ ■ Select the corrugated metal component. click Load. click (Move).18 Move the cursor up to generate the graphics for the repeating detail.

click Training Files. 32 To properly orient the component. verify that M_Plywood-Section 19mm is selected. and click Open. press SPACEBAR 3 times. and click Open. Load components as a group 27 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Roof Edge Components. 31 In the Type Selector. 33 Click the top right corner of the plywood to select the insertion point. you load them as a group from a single file. click OK. 25 In the Type Selector. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 06-Wood and Plastic\06100-Rough Carpentry\06160-Sheathing\M_Plywood-Section.24 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 26 Place the plywood component to the right of the metal component as shown in the following illustration. click Detail Component. 29 In the Duplicate Types dialog. click Training Files. 34 In the Type Selector. TIP You may need to use the Move command to adjust the position of the plywood. 30 On the Design Bar. and place it in the detail view as shown. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 200mm Nominal. Because you still have several components to load.rfa. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal.rvt. 28 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog. Detailing the View | 241 .

The wallboard segment is now on the underside of the roof joist. 242 | Chapter 6 Detailing . click Insulation. 36 On the Options Bar. select Chain. click the Flip instance arrows. Add insulation 40 On the Design Bar. NOTE You can also press SPACEBAR as you place the component to flip the justification. and click Modify. 38 Click Modify.Add wallboard detail component 35 In the Type Selector. 39 Select the horizontal segment. select M_Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 16mm. 37 Place the wallboard component as shown.

enter 140mm. select to near side. as shown. Select the left midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move start point. ■ Click Modify. and on the Edit toolbar. 47 Click to place the component at the lower left corner of the roof overhang as shown. 44 Move the upper segment: ■ ■ ■ Select the upper segment of insulation. Select the right midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move end point. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 300mm Nominal. For Offset. Detailing the View | 243 . click (Move). click Detail Component. 42 Place 2 segments of insulation. 43 Click Modify.41 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Width. Add lumber components 45 On the Design Bar. 46 In the Type Selector.

53 Proceed to the next exercise. you add lines to your detail. Like detail components.48 In the Type Selector. 52 Click Modify. drag the endpoint up to the top of the 50 x 200mm component. select M_Plywood-Section : 19mm. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 2 In the Type Selector. they are view specific. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 4 Click Modify. select Thin Lines. meaning they display only in this view. click Detail Lines. Adding Detail Lines In this exercise. 244 | Chapter 6 Detailing .rvt. select M_Rigid Insulation-Section : 63mm. 3 Sketch a detail line from the lower right corner of the 50 x 300mm component to the lower left corner of the 50 x 200mm component. as shown. 5 Select the vertical plywood component. and lock the component. “Adding Detail Lines” on page 244. 49 Place the component directly above the 50 x 200mm component. Add rigid insulation 50 In the Type Selector. Add detail lines 1 On the Design Bar. 51 Add the insulation above the plywood you just placed.

select Medium Lines. Adding Detail Lines | 245 . click Detail Lines. 10 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. click Detail Lines. 12 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). select Thin Lines. 13 Add detail lines around the 50 x 300mm component. as shown.Add offset lines 6 On the Design Bar. 9 Select the lines at the top of the 50 x 300mm component and the roof joist. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). Trim and extend the lines as necessary to get the desired result. as shown. For Offset. 7 In the Type Selector. enter 10mm. enter 10mm. For Offset. 11 In the Type Selector. and press ENTER.

as shown. 15 Draw a small diagonal line at the bottom left corner of the 50 x 300mm component. and draw the detail lines as shown. draw the detail lines as shown. 19 Zoom in to the area where the roof joist and the corrugated metal component abut. select Chain. and clear Chain. select Thin Lines.Draw detail lines 14 On the Options Bar. 18 In the Type Selector. 17 Draw a horizontal line as shown. click (Draw). 246 | Chapter 6 Detailing . 16 On the Options Bar.

28 Select the interior edge of the vertical segment of gypsum wallboard. What remains are the detail components and lines that you added. select Vapor Barrier. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. under Views ➤ Detail Views (Detail). and then select the interior edge of the horizontal segment. select Do not display. the model elements such as walls and floors no longer display in this view. 22 In the Project Browser. and click OK. and press ENTER. Modify display properties 21 In the drawing area. Adding Detail Lines | 247 . When you turn the display model off. right-click Roof Overhang Detail. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. 26 In the Type Selector. select the Penthouse level line. For Offset. Add a vapor barrier 25 On the Design Bar. and click Properties. enter 10mm. right-click. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. click Detail Lines. click ➤ Hide Crop Region.20 Move the top horizontal line down so that it overlays the Penthouse level line. 24 On the View Control Bar. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines).

click Text. Add text notes to the detail 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 30 In the Type Selector. press SPACEBAR as necessary. TIP To rotate the break line as you place it.29 On the Design Bar. select M_Break Line. click Detail Component.rvt. 33 If a break line does not completely mask the portion of the detail that it is intended to mask. 248 | Chapter 6 Detailing . Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. you add text notes to complete the detail. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. 32 Click Modify. “Adding Text Notes” on page 248. select the break line and use the shape handle grips to modify it. 31 Add break lines at the bottom and the right of the detail. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Adding Text Notes In this exercise.

and click (Properties). 8 In the Element Properties dialog.. Click again to specify the location of the text box. and click OK. click (Arc) to create an arced leader. 3 Add the leaders and notes as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the detail to specify the location of the arrow. enter Typ. 7 Select the dimension line. and click the left edge of the corrugated metal component. Adding Text Notes | 249 . 6 Click Modify.2 On the Options Bar. click Dimension. Click in the drawing area to end the text insertion command. Add a dimension to the detail 4 On the Design Bar. for Text ➤ Suffix. Enter the text. 5 Click the left outer edge of the 50 x 300mm component.

2 Select Copy of Roof Overhang Detail. click 6 In the Filter dialog. You can also select all the linework by highlighting a segment. The selected lines need to be replaced with detail components in order for them to accept a keynote. select a text note. Create a duplicate drawing 1 In the Project Browser. click Select All Instances. 250 | Chapter 6 Detailing . Creating Detail Components In this exercise. 8 Zoom in to the metal coping. and save the exercise file. on the Options Bar. and selecting the chain. 7 Click Modify. you modify the previously drawn detail so that you can annotate it with keynotes rather than text notes. and click OK. and click OK. and click Rename. (Filter Selection). Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. “Creating Detail Components” on page 250.Keynotes. while pressing CTRL. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). Convert detail lines to components 5 Use a window to select the entire roof detail. right-click. 3 In the Rename View dialog.9 Click File menu ➤ Save. select all the coping linework. enter Roof Overhang Detail . right-click. clear Detail Items and Dimensions. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. Remove text notes 4 In the drawing area. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.rvt. click Roof Overhang Detail. right-click. pressing TAB. and press DELETE.

click the bottom left endpoint of the metal coping. 18 In the Save As dialog. 12 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard.Keynotes view is not the open view. The component family is now part of the roof overhang detail.rft. The original linework remains selected. 24 On the Options Bar. double-click it in the Project Browser. clear Detail Items. Add components to the detail 19 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component. navigate to your preferred location. enter Roof Edge. click Load into Projects. 22 Click Modify. deselect any extraneous lines that are also selected. 10 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. click . and click Open.9 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. for File name. 13 Click the intersection of the reference planes to place the linework. 14 Click Modify. 23 Using a window. and the component can be placed in the detail. and click OK. Creating Detail Components | 251 . NOTE If the Roof Overhang Detail . click Detail Component. 15 Use a window to select all linework. in the Type Selector. 20 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 21 To place the component. and click Save. 16 Click Modify. select Medium Lines. select the coping. While pressing SHIFT. 25 In the Filter dialog. 11 In the left pane of the New dialog. click Training Files.

Add keynotes to components 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Adding Keynotes In this exercise. 63mm Rigid Insulation. The underlying linework is deleted and the detail component remains in the drawing.rvt. Click to place the leader arm. you place keynotes on objects. and click OK. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 28 On the Options Bar.rfa. and click Open. click Detail Component. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07200 ➤ 07210 ➤ 07210. and add keynote data to components that do not have data associated with them. 30 In the drawing area. click Load. click on the upper end point of the drip edge to place the component. 27 On the Design Bar. “Adding Keynotes” on page 252. select the rigid insulation as the object to tag. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Yes to load a Keynote Tag family to the project.26 Press DELETE. Click the rigid insulation on the roof to place the tag.rfa. 4 Add the tag: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the drawing area. 252 | Chapter 6 Detailing . Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 31 Using the same method used previously. navigate to Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Keynote Tag. and click Open. click Keynote ➤ Element. In the Keynotes dialog. click Training Files. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Metal Fascia w_Drip Edge. delete the underlying linework.B5. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. 2 In the alert dialog.

use keynote 06110.D11. For the 50 x 200. For the 19mm Plywood Siding.5 Tag additional components: ■ ■ For the plywood decking.D11. click Keynote ➤ Element.C1. use keynote 06160.F1. For the 2 instances of the 16mm Gypsum Wallboard. Adding Keynotes | 253 . 13 Tag components: ■ (Properties). FasciaProfile_1. use keynote 06110.D1. use keynote 06110. use keynote 07645.G1. Because you defined the keynote parameter as part of the component properties. Roof Edge4. 11 Click OK 3 times.I1. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For the 50 x 300. 12 On the Design Bar.F1. For the metal coping. the keynote is automatically read when you place the tag. navigate to 07645. click Edit/New. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. and click 8 In the Element Properties dialog. use keynote 09250. click in the Value column. Tag the metal fascia with drip edge. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. 6 Click Modify. 19mm Plywood. select the metal fascia with drip edge. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. Assign keynote parameter to a component 7 In the drawing area. For the 50 x 150. use keynote 06160.

22mm Corrugated Steel .14 On the Design Bar. you convert detail lines to detail components so that you can add keynotes to them. 2 In the left pane of the New dialog.rft. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. navigate to your preferred location. and click Modify. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component line based. 6 Lock the line. click Lines.rvt. select the horizontal line under the roof overhang as shown. 8 In the Save As dialog. using keynote 07460. 5 In the drawing area. “Creating Line-based Detail Components” on page 254. select the left end point of the reference line. 254 | Chapter 6 Detailing . 9 On the Design Bar. select Medium Lines. 17 Keynote the component. 16 Place an instance of the component directly on top of the bottom segment of the corrugated metal repeating component. Convert detail lines to components 10 In the drawing area. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. You do this in order to keynote the component. click Training Files. 3 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. for File name. 7 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and click Save.20 Ga. click Detail Component. 15 In the Type Selector. select Corrugated Metal. and click Open.A8. 18 Save the file. enter m_Medium Line Detail Component. 4 In the Type Selector. and select the right end point. a repeating detail cannot be keynoted. click Load into Projects. Creating Line-based Detail Components In this exercise. Create a detail component 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family.

for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. 15 Click Modify. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. 12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. select Medium Line Detail Component. click Detail Component.11 Press DELETE. click Detail Component. 30 Click Modify. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. you create line-based detail components for other line weights (light. select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. and click Open. 35 In the Type Properties dialog. 27 On the Design Bar. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07500 ➤ 07530 ➤ 07530. 23 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 28 In the Type Selector. and m_Light Line Detail Component. m_Invisible Line Detail Component. 20 Click OK 3 times. Add light line components 26 Zoom to the roof overhang. 31 Select the component. 37 Click OK 3 times. click Edit/New.A1. 13 In the Type Selector. 25 Next. click in the Value column. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components. You add the components to the project and keynote them. 24 While pressing CTRL. 16 Select the component. 22 On the Options Bar. Load line-based detail components 21 On the Design Bar. 14 Add the component in the location of the previously deleted horizontal line. click Edit/New. and click . and click OK. 19 In the Name dialog. click Load. The deleted line needs to be replaced with a detail component in order for it to accept a keynote. 18 In the Type Properties dialog. 36 In the Keynotes dialog. enter Prefinished Metal Soffit Panel. and click (Properties). click Training Files. 29 In the drawing area. select m_Light Line Detail Component. 34 In the Name dialog. and hidden) used in the view. click Duplicate. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 255 . Single-Ply Membrane Roofing. click Duplicate. click Detail Component. invisible. enter EPDM Membrane. click the end points at the top of the roof.

click Detail Component. select Chain. select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. click 50 Move the air barrier to the right. 48 Using the same method used previously. and click . (Move).A5. name the component 50 x 200 Framing. click Detail Component. name the component Air Barrier. 44 On the Design Bar. 52 In the Type Selector. on the Edit toolbar. 256 | Chapter 6 Detailing . and click . 42 Using the same method used previously. 47 Select the component. 49 With the component selected. 43 Zoom to the repeating component. Add a vapor barrier component 51 On the Design Bar. and click the lower end at the break line.G1. and assign it keynote 06110. against the 3/4" plywood. 45 Click the upper end of the repeating detail. 40 Click Modify. and assign it keynote 07260. 46 Click Modify. click Detail Component. 53 On the Options Bar. 54 Create the component by drawing over the vertical and horizontal dashed detail lines that represent the vapor barrier. 39 Add the Light Line Detail Component to the underside of the overhang.38 On the Design Bar. 41 Select the component just added.

and click . 57 Select the vertical hidden line component. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 257 . leaving the detail component lines. 58 Using the method used previously. 56 Delete both dashed detail lines. and Vapor Barrier. and assign it keynote 07260.A4. Add keynotes 59 Zoom to the drawing extents. Air Barrier. 61 In the drawing area. add keynotes for the EPDM Membrane. 50 x 200 Framing. click Keynote ➤ Element.55 Click Modify. name the component Vapor Barrier. 60 On the Design Bar.

. and click . 2 Add keynote information for the metal soffit: ■ ■ ■ ■ Position the cursor at the end of the line that begins with 07460. navigate to Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training\Metric. 72 Proceed to the next exercise. Enter 07463. name the component Batt Insul. You are then able to assign the keynote to the component in the drawing.A4.txt. click Load into Projects. Modifying a Keynote Database In this exercise. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. in the Type Selector. click Detail Component.rfa.rfa. 67 In the drawing area. 65 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 63 In the drawing area. Enter 07460. you add keynote information for a detail component to the database text file. 3 In the text editor. and double-click m_Example_RevitKeynotes. add a keynote for the component. and press ENTER. click File menu ➤ Save. Enter Pre-Finished Metal Soffit. 68 Select the component. 258 | Chapter 6 Detailing .A1. Add information to the text file 1 In Windows Explorer. draw a line in the center of the large vertical segment of insulation.Create an invisible line component 62 Click Window menu ➤ m_Medium Line Detail Component.A9.rvt. select the component. 69 Using the method used previously. select Invisible Lines. 66 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and close the text editor. 71 Save the file. and assign it keynote 07210. The database file opens in a text editor. “Modifying a Keynote Database” on page 258. 70 In the drawing area. and press TAB. 64 Save the file as m_Invisible Line Detail Component. and press TAB.

You can create drafted details using the drafting tools in Revit Architecture or by importing details from an existing detail library. 11 Click Modify. navigate to m_Example_RevitKeynotes. Each keynote displays as a simple number. click to place the leader. and click OK. ■ Change the keynote style back to the boxed number type. 6 In the Select Keynote File dialog. 7 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. In the Type Selector. navigate to 07463. 14 Save the file. select M_Keynote Tag : Keynote Number. you can reference it within the model and place it on a sheet. You can create details in drafting views when you do not need to create callout views from the building model. Work with keynotes 8 On the Design Bar. under Path Type. select the metal soffit (horizontal line under the overhang). The descriptive text for each keynote displays. Drafted details are created in drafting views and are not directly based on building model geometry. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. and click to place the note. After you create a drafting view. 13 Click Modify.Update keynote settings 4 In Revit Architecture.A1. as there is no parametric linkage to any building model components. click Browse. Creating a Drafted Detail In this lesson. and click OK. ■ Select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text. and click Open. 12 Apply various keynote styles: ■ ■ In the drawing area. click Settings menu ➤ Keynoting. you learn how to create a drafted detail. select Absolute. 5 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. These details do not update with changes to the building model. under Keynote Table. 9 In the drawing area. Creating a Drafted Detail | 259 . select all the keynotes. click Keynote ➤ Element.txt.

you create a callout in the section view of the building model to reference the metal coping detail that you previously imported. For Layer/Level Colors. select Reference other view. 5 Enter zf to zoom to the detail. For Positioning ➤ Automatically place. Dataset Use the dataset you used in a previous exercise. and click Rename. Navigate to Metric\m_Roof Edge Detail. 4 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane.rvt. select Black and white. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. right-click Drafting 1. The detail that you import is in DWG format. Creating a Reference Callout In this exercise. 7 In the Rename View dialog. select 1 : 5. 3 On the Options Bar. select Center-to-center.rvt. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. Create the callout view 1 In the Project Browser. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Create a new drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. 260 | Chapter 6 Detailing . you place an existing detail in a new drafting view to create a drafted detail. for Scale.Importing a Detail into a Drafting View In this exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click Callout. click Training Files. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. enter EPDM Metal Coping.dwg. The detail is imported as an import symbol. 6 In the Project Browser. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). Click Open. double-click Roof Overhang Detail to open it in the drawing area. Import a complete detail in DWG format 3 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. “Creating a Reference Callout” on page 260. and click OK. and select Drafting View: EPDM Metal Coping. and click OK.

for New. click Modify. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. 5 Click Modify. Modify detail view properties 7 In the Project Browser. delete the existing value. click Edit/New. Display the reference view 13 On the Design Bar.No Reference. click Rename. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. The callout head no longer displays a reference label. and use the callout grips to move the callout head.4 Add the callout bubble by dragging a rectangular bubble around the metal coping. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. 10 In the Rename dialog. and click Properties. enter Detail . Creating a Reference Callout | 261 . 12 Click OK twice. 6 Select the callout. and double-click the callout. right-click EPDM Metal Coping. The metal coping detail that you imported previously displays. for Graphics ➤ Reference Label.

so you use Revit Architecture tools to draft the detail. 3 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all). Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.rvt. verify that the scale is 1 : 5. double-click A105 .Elev. “Creating a Detail in a Drafting View” on page 262 Creating a Detail in a Drafting View In this exercise. drag EPDM Metal Coping onto the sheet. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. 17 Click Window menu ➤ Detail View: Roof Overhang Detail. 262 | Chapter 6 Detailing . 18 Save the file.Add the drafting view to a sheet 14 In the Project Browser. Create a drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. you create a door head condition in the new drafting view. Modeling elements at this level of detail may be time consuming and can reduce the overall performance of the product. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog./Det.No Reference)./Sect. The callout is updated with the sheet information. 15 Under Drafting Views (Detail . There is no existing DWG file for this door detail. enter Header @ Sliding Door. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. for Name. 16 Click on the sheet above the Roof Overhang Detail to place the drafting view.

Add a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select the width dimension. select Wide Lines. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. click Region Properties. select the left and bottom edges of the region. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. click Duplicate. enter Gyp.5mm. Press SPACEBAR to rotate the component as you place it. 16 Select the left edge of the region. click 13 In the Fill Patterns dialog. 18 While pressing CTRL. 5 In the Type Selector. 14 Click OK 3 times. click Filled Region. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal. 15 Draw the region: On the Options Bar. 19 In the Type Selector. click Detail Component. 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click . Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 263 . and enter 20. select Gypsum-Plaster. Create a filled region 7 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 6 Click in the drawing area to place 2 instances as shown. for Name. You sketch filled regions to represent gypsum wall board. 17 Click Modify. Board. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. ■ ■ ■ Select the lower left corner of the 2x6 lumber as the start point. 11 In the Name dialog. . Draw a rectangle as shown. 10 In the Type Properties dialog.

and drag the bottom up to just below the top of the upper 50 x 150. click 22 On the Options Bar. and click above the top of the region as the end point. and on the Edit toolbar. (Draw). 264 | Chapter 6 Detailing . click Finish Sketch.20 On the Design Bar. Select the midpoint of the upper 50 x 150 as the start point. Mirror the region 21 Select the filled region. Move the cursor up. click 23 Draw the mirror line: ■ ■ (Mirror). 24 Select the mirrored region.

enter Wood . Draw a rectangle as shown. 33 Click OK 3 times. select Medium Lines. 29 In the Type Properties dialog. select Wood . 36 Align the wood region to the 50 x 150: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. verify that the thickness is 19mm. click Finish Sketch. 37 On the Design Bar. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 265 . . Add wood filled regions 26 On the Design Bar. click (Align). ■ ■ ■ Select the lower left corner of the left gypsum board region as the start point.25 Click Modify.Finish. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. and select the right edge of the wood region. 35 Select all the linework for the wood region. click Region Properties.Finish. click Filled Region. for Name. 31 In the Type Properties dialog. click . 30 In the Name dialog. in the Type Selector. 34 Draw the region: On the Options Bar. and click OK. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. click Duplicate. click 32 In the Fill Patterns dialog. click Edit/New. 27 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Select the right edge of the lower 50 x 150.

click Finish Sketch. 41 Beginning at the lower right of the wood region. click . 39 In the Type Selector. enter 6mm. sketch the new region as shown. select Medium Lines.38 On the Design Bar. 266 | Chapter 6 Detailing . 40 On the Options Bar. click Filled Region. For Offset. You use the reference plane as an alignment reference for the gypsum board region above it.5mm. 46 On the Tools toolbar. 45 Select the top of the vertical wood region to place the reference plane above it. verify that the width is 19mm and the height is 63. click (Align). 44 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick). click Ref Plane. and press ENTER. 42 On the Design Bar. Add a reference plane 43 On the Design Bar.

47 Click the reference plane. 55 Select the small vertical line of the door panel sketch. 48 Click Modify. and press ENTER. and press ENTER. click Filled Region. click (Trim/Extend). and click the bottom of the gypsum board region. 50 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). Select Chain. Move the cursor right 25mm. ■ ■ ■ For Offset. 53 Draw the door panel outline: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the top endpoint of the offset line. and click to select the point. 52 On the Options Bar: Click (Draw). and click to select the point. and click to select the point. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 267 . For Offset. 56 On the Design Bar. Add a door panel 49 On the Design Bar. Move the cursor down 305mm. Move the cursor left 25mm. 54 On the Tools toolbar. click Finish Sketch. and select the bottom horizontal line. enter 10mm. enter 0. 51 Select the left edge of the horizontal wood region.

Add mounting/sliding hardware 57 On the Design Bar. 58 In the Type Selector. 65 On the Options Bar. Add mounting/sliding hardware 64 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and press ENTER. 268 | Chapter 6 Detailing . 62 Select the left detail line. 59 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines).2mm. 61 Click Modify. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_A307 Bolts-Side. enter 3mm. and click Open. click Training Files. select Medium Lines. 66 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and right edges of the door panel region. enter 76. click Detail Lines. 67 Add the bolt to the right side of the lower wood region as shown.rfa. click Detail Component. click Load. 63 Repeat for the right detail line. select the height dimension. 60 Select the left. top. For Offset. and press ENTER.

select Wide Lines. 74 Select the expansion bolt. and click Open. use the images as a guide. drag the left shape handle until the nut is against the detail line. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 269 . Add detail lines 75 On the Design Bar. 71 On the Options Bar. drag the right shape handle until the bolt end is just past the midpoint of the 50 x 150. click Detail Lines. 70 On the Design Bar. NOTE Exact sizes and positioning are not critical when creating the remainder of the detail.rfa.TIP Press the SPACEBAR as necessary to rotate the bolt to the correct orientation. 76 In the Type Selector. click Training Files. 68 Click Modify. click Detail Component. click Load. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_Expansion Bolts-Side. 72 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 69 Select the bolt. 73 Add the component to the left side of the lower 50 x 150. 77 Draw a line at the base of the bolt head as shown.

click Detail Lines. click Detail Lines. 82 Select the rectangle. 85 On the Options Bar. (Mirror). click 83 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. and on the Edit toolbar. 80 On the Options Bar. 86 Draw a small rectangle between the mirrored rectangles as shown.78 On the Design Bar. 79 In the Type Selector. 84 On the Design Bar. 81 Draw the rectangle to the left of the wide line as shown. 270 | Chapter 6 Detailing . click . select Thin Lines. click .

91 Draw a small line from the midpoint of the left mirrored rectangle to the left. as shown. 89 On the Design Bar. 88 Select the detail line to the left of the lower wood region. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 271 .87 Click Modify. select Medium Lines. click Detail Lines. drag the top end above the mirrored rectangles as shown. 90 In the Type Selector. Do not extend the line to the vertical detail line.

95 On the Design Bar. 96 Beginning at the end of the 3mm line. and on the Edit toolbar. click Detail Lines.92 Select the line. click . and press ENTER. 272 | Chapter 6 Detailing . draw a line up to the height of the other detail line. 93 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. and click to place the arc as shown. 97 On the Options Bar. enter 3mm. select the length dimension. 94 Select the mirrored line on the right. 98 Click the end of the detail line on the left. click (Mirror).

101 On the Design Bar. click Detail Component. select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. and select the right edge of the adjoining vertical region. 105 In the drawing area. 103 Add two break lines as shown. 102 In the Type Selector. Add two break lines 100 Zoom to the drawing extents. and click Modify. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 273 . TIP Rotate and move the break lines as necessary to adjust the masking elements. Add dimensions 104 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. select M_Break Line.99 Click Modify. 106 Click to place the dimension.

click Text. Add text notes to complete the detail 111 On the Design Bar. using the Drag Text grip. Board. and on the Options Bar. 113 In the drawing area. 116 Drag the end of the new leader to the other gypsum board region. 274 | Chapter 6 Detailing . and click Modify. 114 Enter Gyp. 115 Select the note. 110 Select the dimension line. select the gypsum board region on the left. drag the text for the smaller dimension. and click to place the text. click to create an arced leader. 112 In the Options Bar. 109 Add a multi-segment dimension line as shown. select Linear Dimension Style : Linear 2.5mm Arial. 108 In the Type Selector. click (Add Right Arc Leader). click Dimension.107 On the Design Bar. and click Modify.

117 Add leaders and text notes to the detail as shown. 119 Save the file. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 275 . 118 On the Design Bar. click Modify to end the command.

276 | Chapter 6 Detailing .

such as images and text into project sheets ■ ■ ■ 277 .Finishing the Sheets 7 In this tutorial. including: ■ ■ Creating a note block containing typical construction notes Creating a drawing list that is automatically populated based on filter selections Creating the 2 most common types of legends produced for construction: annotation legends and building component legends Tracking and documenting revisions in the project Importing resources from other applications. you perform tasks to provide finishing touches on your project documentation.

for Number of Leaders. you add typical construction notes to sheets and then create a note block to expose the notes text. The note block can be used to schedule parameters assigned to a generic annotation family. 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 278 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . expand Elevations (Building Elevation). 3 Click Yes to load a generic annotation family into the project. Load a generic annotation family 1 In the Project Browser. 8 Drag the endpoint of the leader to position it on the right front door. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Sheet Keynote .rfa. click Symbol.rvt. click Training Files. you create a typical note block to annotate repairs and renovations to the exterior of the building. enter 1. Creating a Note Block In this exercise. 7 On the Design Bar. and double-click East.Hexagon.Finishing-Sheets. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Training Files.Using Note Blocks In this lesson. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 6 Click in the drawing area to the right of the building to place a hexagon tag. 5 On the Options Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Modify.

on the Options Bar. enter Seal existing doors and insulate. for Text. click (Copy). and click above the tag to place a copy. 13 Select the tag. Creating a Note Block | 279 . 11 In the Element Properties dialog. under Identity Data. click (Properties).9 Drag the midpoint of the leader to position it as shown: Create annotation marks for items requiring notes 10 With the tag selected. 12 On the Edit toolbar. and click OK.

17 Click OK. on the Options Bar. 18 Use the same method to make another copy of the tag and place it on the left side of the building. 15 For Text. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. click (Mirror). enter B. click (Properties). enter Repair existing door surround. clear Copy. 20 Select the tag on the left. position the cursor over the hexagon tag until a vertical bar displays. 19 On the toolbar. 16 For Tag. and click. 280 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . and click to create a vertical mirror image of the tag so the leader points toward the building.14 With the copy selected. as shown: NOTE To create a vertical mirror image. and on the Options Bar.

select Tag. and click Add. using the table as a reference. and click OK. Tuckpoint as required. Clean opening and repair as required for new window installation. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. Select Text.21 On the Design Bar. under Available fields. Creating a Note Block | 281 . Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. 25 Specify values in the Note Block Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. and click Add. for Sort by. Clean exterior brick wall. 22 Optionally. Repair as required. and place a note block on a sheet 23 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Note Block. Clean and repair existing stone trim as required. select Tag. Create. Remove all existing windows. Clean and repair stone parapet cap as required. Repair existing door surround. Clean cut and repair wall as required. Clean existing concrete loading dock. click Modify. and moving counter-clockwise. continue tagging the building as shown in the following illustration: Tag A B C D E F G H Text Seal existing doors and insulate. 24 In the New Note Block dialog. for Note block name. Saw cut existing brick wall. format. enter Exterior Construction Notes.

expand Schedules/Quantities. click Modify. 32 Zoom in to see the note block. 282 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets .rvt. enter Mark. 26 Click OK. select Exterior Construction Notes. 28 In the Project Browser. enter Description. and select Bold. verify Arial in the first field. 30 Click to place the block in the upper-left corner of the sheet. 33 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and click Save.■ ■ On the Formatting tab. 29 In the Project Browser. 31 On the Design Bar. 34 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.Elevations. and for Alignment. For Header text. and drag it to the sheet. The Exterior Construction Notes block displays. expand Sheets (all). enter 6 mm in the second field. and double-click A103 . On the Appearance tab. and drag the right column control to expand the column to display the note text. 27 In the column header (text). select Center. for Heading.

for Sort by. 2 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drawing List. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. under Available fields. 7 In the Project Browser. and click Add. Using Drawing Lists | 283 . 1 In the Project Browser. Select Sheet Name. for Filter by. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. select Sheet Number. and drag it to the sheet. in the second field. expand Schedules/Quantities. under Sheets (all).Title Sheet. enter Sheet Index. select Sheet Index. Creating a Drawing List In this exercise. under Sheets (all). select Sheet Number. and in the third field. 6 In the Project Browser. double-click T . and click Add. On the Filter tab. you create an automatically populated drawing list for placement on the title sheet of the project. 5 In the list title field. enter T.Title Sheet. select does not equal. select Sheet Number. The drawing list displays. double-click T . ■ 4 Click OK.Using Drawing Lists In this lesson. in the first field. you quickly create a drawing list that is automatically generated from the drawings available in the project. Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress. 3 Specify values in the Drawing List Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab.rvt.

annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends. On construction documents. enter Typical Symbol Legend. and expand the right column to accommodate the text. Finally. doors. Creating a Symbol Legend In this exercise. you add the completed symbol legend to multiple sheets for easy reference. click Modify. click New ➤ Legend. 284 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . for Name. windows. Building component legends list and identify components such as walls. 9 On the Design Bar. building component legends are often called schedules (wall type schedule. and door frames. 11 Click File menu ➤ Save. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. Annotation legends are made up of components such as section markers and door tags that are paired with text that identifies them. door frame schedule. you create a legend view and add symbols and text to it using a text type you create by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. On construction documents. and so on). and click OK. The two most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and building component legends. and thus is not added to the number of instances of that component listed on a schedule or note block. Using Legends Legends provide a way to display a list of the various building components and annotations used in a project. 10 Zoom in to the drawing list. NOTE A component that is placed in a legend does not count as an additional instance of the component in the Revit Architecture building model. Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. Create a legend view 1 On the View menu.rvt.8 Click to place it on the sheet in the lower-right corner.

6 On the Options bar.Circle M_Door Tag M_Window Tag Sheet Keynote . Because the text size for the symbol legend is not available in the Type Selector. and click OK. enter the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend: ■ ■ ■ Level Indicator Door Tag Window Tag Creating a Symbol Legend | 285 . click Duplicate. enter Legend Text. Add text to the legend 11 In the Type Selector. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. 13 Working from the top down. click . you create a text type with the necessary size. and click to the right of the first symbol to specify the text start point.Add symbols to the legend 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. enter 3mm. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ M_Section Head . click Edit/New. select Arial. selecting each from the Type Selector and placing it in the legend as shown.Filled Level Head . and click OK twice. click Text. You do this by duplicating the standard text type and modifying the type properties. 10 For Text Size. 12 Enter Detail Callout for the text note. 4 Add the following symbols to the legend view. 9 For Text Font. for Name. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. click Symbol.Hexagon : Tag Create a text type 5 On the Design Bar.

expand Legends. 19 In the Project Browser. click Typical Symbol Legend. The symbol legend is added to the project sheet. 15 In the Project Browser. expand Sheets (all). 286 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . 17 On the Design Bar. drag it to the lower-right corner of the sheet. 16 In the Type Selector. under Sheets. and click to place it. double-click A102 . click Modify. click Typical Symbol Legend.■ Sheet Keynote Place the symbol legend on a sheet 14 In the Project Browser. and double-click A101 . select Viewport : No Titlemark.Unit 18. and click to place it. 18 In the Project Browser. drag it to the lower-right corner of the sheet.Site Plan/Floor Plan.

and click OK. For View. Creating a Component Legend | 287 . click Legend Component. 7 Click near the top left of the drawing area to specify the insertion point for the wall. Create a legend view 1 On the View menu. 6 On the View Control Bar. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. A legend view is unlike any other view and can be placed onto multiple sheets for reference where required. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. select Walls: Basic Wall: 4th Floor Balcony Divider. select Viewport : No Titlemark. select Medium for Detail Level.20 In the Type Selector. select1 : 50. enter 900 mm. 22 Click File menu ➤ Save. click New ➤ Legend. you create a building component legend for the wall types in the building model. 21 On the Design Bar. You use the text type that you created in a previous exercise to create annotations that identify the material used in each wall component. 5 On the Options Bar. Add components to the legend 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Family. Creating a Component Legend In this exercise. 8 Click directly below the first wall to place a second wall. enter 4th Floor Wall Types. select Section.rvt. For Host length. and press ENTER. for Name. 3 For Scale. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. You then add the completed legend to a project sheet. click Modify.

click Text. Add titles to the legend components 11 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 12 In the Type Selector. 288 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . select Walls : Basic wall : 4th Floor Exterior. 10 Select the second wall. for Family. click Modify. and on the Options Bar. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected.9 On the Design Bar.

NOTE Press ENTER to force the text to start on the next line. pressing ENTER between component descriptions. click to add text without a leader. 14 Click below the upper wall component to specify the start point for the text.13 On the Options Bar. 20 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the text annotations on the lower wall component. and enter Wall Type 1 Patio Divider. 18 Click to the right of the wall to end the leader and specify the text start point. for example to force a line break between ''Wall Type 1'' and ''Patio Divider. for Leader. 19 Enter the following text. and click Modify on the Design Bar: 33mm Decking 50x100 Stud 33mm Decking. 17 Click the right side of the Wall Type 1 component to specify the leader start point. Creating a Component Legend | 289 .'' 15 Click below the lower wall and enter Wall Type 2 Exterior Wall. The text note with leader is added to the legend. Add text to the legend 16 On the Options bar. click to add text with a single-segment leader.

26 On the Design Bar. double-click Level 4. 24 Click to place the floor plan on the right side of the sheet. under Floor Plans. Tile views in the drawing window 27 In the Project Browser. click Modify to end the command. under Floor Plans. under Legends. The floor plan and legend are added to the new sheet. drag it onto the sheet. and click to place it in the upper left corner of the sheet. 30 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. allowing you to select a component type in one drawing and then apply the type in the second drawing. click OK to accept the default titleblock. double-click 4th Floor Wall Types. 25 In the Project Browser.Place the legend on a sheet 21 In the Project Browser. and drag it to the new sheet. select Level 4. select 4th Floor Wall Types. 29 In the project Browser. 22 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 23 In the Project Browser. right-click Sheets (all). 290 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . The open drawings are both visible. and click New Sheet. 28 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows.

select the Wall Type 2 component. enter ZR to zoom to a specific region. click (Match Type). 32 In the 4th Floor Wall Types Legend view. The view zooms in to the patio divider wall. 34 Draw a rectangle around the lower-right area of the floor plan including the patio divider wall. 33 In the floor plan view. Notice that the eyedropper changes to filled.Match a component type 31 On the Tools toolbar. indicating that it captured the wall type properties. Creating a Component Legend | 291 .

36 On the View Control Bar. click if you do not want to save the change to the wall type. These changes can be due to owner requests. Setting Up a Revision Table There are likely to be changes to your construction documents after you have issued the original set of documents for bid or after you have received a signed contract. Using Revision Tracking Revit Architecture provides tools that enable you to track revisions to your project. and you can draw revision clouds around elements in your project that have changed. You can use revision tags to notate the revision clouds. You can create a sequence of revisions. The wall type in the floor plan matches wall type 2 from the Wall Type Legend. and can then display the revisions in schedules that appear in the titleblock of each project sheet. contractor inquiries.35 Select the patio divider wall. Changing the detail level displays the hatching for each material of the wall component. 38 Click File menu ➤ Save. select Medium for Detail Level. 292 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . 37 Optionally.

If you select By Sheet. In most instances. under Floor Plans. Add a revision to the project 4 For Release Date. enter Relocate 4th floor partition dividing walls. 2 On the Settings menu. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence of revisions in the Revisions dialog.rvt. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence in which they are added to a sheet. This is the date the revisions are sent out for review. 7 Under Visible. Setting Up a Revision Table | 293 . In this exercise.unanticipated changes in construction conditions. you use the Revisions command to open a revision table in which you can add rows that represent a sequence of revisions. the revision is locked and issued to the field. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. In general. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. verify that Cloud and Tag is selected. Specify a revision numbering method 1 In the Project Browser. When you use this option. you can specify the numbering method for revisions in a project. double-click Level 4. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. If Visible is not selected. verify that By Project is selected for Numbering Method. Using the table. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. if the active revision is number 1. all tags and schedules display the numeral 1. 6 Verify that Issued is cleared. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 3 In the Revisions dialog. or changes in building material availability. click Revisions. When Issued is selected. yet as concise as possible. enter a date. For example. 5 For Description. and you can add data such as release date and description to each revision.

2 Zoom in to the left area of the drawing to see the 4th Floor Balcony Divider. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. Sketching Revision Clouds In this exercise. You can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D views. click (Move). and then indicate the changes graphically with a revision cloud. Revision clouds have read-only properties. you make changes to the project floor plan. 5 Select the partition. 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. 4 On the Edit toolbar. Modify a wall 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Select the divider. and click to reposition the divider closer to the upper wall. You can draw multiple revision clouds for each revision.8 Click OK.rvt. including revision number and revision date. 294 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . move the cursor up. under Floor Plans. but each cloud is visible only in the view in which it is sketched. which are inherited from the revision table you created for the project. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. double-click Level 4.

click Finish Sketch. click near the partition you moved. 9 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. 11 On the Design Bar. click Revision Cloud. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. Add a revision cloud 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 8 In the drawing area. 10 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed.6 On the Design Bar. Sketching Revision Clouds | 295 . click Modify. The revision cloud is displayed around the modified partition. Revit Architecture is now in sketch mode.

Load a revision tag 1 In the Project Browser. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. click Tag ➤ By Category. Tagging Revision Clouds In this exercise. under Floor Plans. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 2 Zoom in to the area with the revision cloud.Modify revision cloud style 12 Select the revision cloud. you load a revision tag into the project. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and then apply the tag to the revision cloud in the current drawing. 16 Click OK. click the Annotation Objects tab. double-click Level 4. for Line Weight. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. 15 Under the Revision Clouds category. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. select 6.rvt. The tag number that is displayed in the drawing is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table in a previous exercise. 296 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles.

11 Click to place the tag. you create additional revisions in the revision table. notice that M_Revision Tag is the loaded tag for Revision Clouds. You then issue a revision. 7 In the left pane of the dialog. Because you chose to number by project. select Leader. 8 In the Tags dialog. Working with Revisions | 297 . Tag a revision cloud 9 On the Options Bar. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. Working with Revisions In this exercise. The number is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table. 2 Enter ZR and zoom to the revision schedule in the sheet titleblock. In the Tags dialog. scroll down to Revision Clouds. under Sheets.rvt. which creates a record of the revision and locks it from further changes. The tag displays the revision number of the cloud.rfa. you prevent further changes to the revision. double-click A107 . on which you place a revised view. click Training Files. the tag is displayed inside the cloud. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. you need to add one. You do this by issuing the revision. click Tags. Add a revised view to a sheet 1 In the Project Browser. 10 In the drawing area.4 On the Options Bar. you create a sheet view in your project. After you make the necessary changes to the project and add the revised views to a sheet. If the cursor is just inside the cloud. Because a real-world project can undergo several revisions before it is completed. 5 In the Tags dialog. Because there are no tags loaded for revision clouds. position the cursor just outside the revision cloud to the left. The information you added to the revision table in a previous exercise is displayed in the revision schedule. 12 Click File menu ➤ Save.Unnamed. 6 Click Load. and because the revision is the first in the project. the cloud is tagged as number 1. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Revision Tag. click OK.

you can no longer modify it. 7 Enter the appropriate information for this revision. You cannot add revision clouds to the revision in the drawing area. select Issued. select None for each issued revision. 4 For the Sequence 1 revision. NOTE After you issue a revision. Create additional revisions 5 Your project may have several revisions before it is completed. A new row is added below the existing rows in the revision table. 8 If you want to hide issued revisions in the drawing. under Add. On the Settings menu. click Revisions. and click OK. click Revisions. for Visible. click New. 6 In the Revisions dialog. nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds.Issue a revision 3 On the Settings menu. 298 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . You can continue to add revisions.

you import a logo image in JPG format into a project. into a project.rvt. such as images. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson.Title Sheet.9 Click OK. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save. Importing Image Files In this exercise. you learn to import information from other applications. under Sheets. 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. 4 Click in the upper right area of the sheet to place the logo. and place it on a sheet. 1 In the Project Browser. and spreadsheets. Importing from Other Applications In this lesson. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. text. Importing from Other Applications | 299 .JPG. and open Common\Freighthouse Logo. click Training Files. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. double-click T .

click Text. click to add text without a leader. 6 Select the text.5 On the Design Bar.doc text file in another window. Create a text element on the title sheet 1 In the Project Browser. 3 On the Options Bar. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 7 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.rvt. 300 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . 4 Click and drag to place a text box on the right side of the sheet. for Leader.Title Sheet 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. under Sheets. click Modify. you import text from another application using a cut and paste function to populate a text object on a sheet. Importing Text Documents In this exercise. Copy the text 5 Open the Training Files\Common\Bidding Statement. double-click T .

9 Click to place the image on the sheet.xls.Paste the text on the sheet 8 In the Revit Architecture window. click File menu ➤ Print.JPG. 8 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 11 Click File menu ➤ Save. Importing Spreadsheets In this exercise.rvt. 10 Zoom in to view the pasted text. This exercise demonstrates a common method. The only way to do this is to convert the spreadsheet file to a raster format (JPG or BMP) and import it as an image. click Modify. click Modify. click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. 11 Zoom in to see the Fixture Schedule. you could use a screen capture utility to save the worksheet in BMP or JPG format. and click Save. 6 In the left pane of the Save As dialog. 9 On the Design Bar. click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. and open Common\Fixture Schedule.mdi. NOTE Some formatting may be required once the text is placed in Revit Architecture. 4 Under Printer. under Sheets. with the new text box still selected. 7 In the Revit Architecture window.JPG. Training Files\Common\Lighting Fixtures. NOTE You need to print/export the spreadsheet to a raster format. The text is pasted into the new text box on the sheet. click Training Files. This step has been completed for you. you have existing information in a spreadsheet format and would like to use it in the project. select the document writer. for File name. for Name. enter Fixture Schedule. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 3 In Microsoft Excel. and saved as Fixture Schedule. click Desktop. double-click A102 . 5 Click OK. Importing Spreadsheets | 301 . This process may vary from system to system. 10 On the Design Bar. 2 Open the Microsoft Excel worksheet. 1 In the Project Browser. Now that you have the worksheet in a raster format.Unit 18.

12 Click File menu ➤ Save. 302 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets .

The drawings include the aviary and observation area of the site. or footprint. you break up the plan into sections. called dependent views. 303 . The large floor plan. To effectively document this project. you work with a large project for a bird sanctuary. for the sanctuary will not fit onto a plotted sheet as one plan. as well as a large lab building.Using Dependent Views 8 In this tutorial.

Dependent view of lab building Dependent view of aviary and observation platforms Dependent views can be placed on sheets for documentation purposes. 304 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views .

| 305 .

right-click Dependent on Level 2. 4 In the Rename View dialog. select the crop region. and on the Zoom flyout of the View toolbar. click Training Files. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. The dependent view opens. 306 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . 3 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 2. 5 Click in the drawing area. 6 In the drawing area. you ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan view Add a matchline to the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on sheets Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Apply dependent view specifications to other views Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Using Dependent Views in Documentation In this lesson. for Name.Aviary.rvt Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. click Zoom To Fit. under Level 2. right-click Level 2. and open Metric\ m_Dependent_Views. and click OK. 2 In the Project Browser. enter Level 2 . and click Rename. you ■ ■ ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan and elevation Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split and to provide links to the dependent views Apply the specifications of the dependent views to other views in the project Add dependent views to sheets for documentation Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views In this exercise.

8 Click the inside control on the bottom and drag it up.The following image shows a plan view with the model and annotation crop regions visible. The annotation crop is the exterior crop region. and the model crop is the interior crop region. 7 Select the inside (model crop) control on the right and drag it toward the center of the view to crop out the lab building. confining the view to the upper-left area of the drawing (the aviary). Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 307 .

14 Click in the drawing area. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. click Zoom To Fit. right-click Level 2. right-click Dependent on Level 2. click Zoom To Fit. 10 On the Zoom flyout. click (Hide Crop Region). for Name.Labs. 11 In the Project Browser. 15 Select the crop region. 16 Use the inside controls to crop the view to the lower-right building (the labs). and click Rename. enter Level 2 . and click OK. 13 In the Rename View dialog.9 On the View Control Bar. 12 In the Project Browser. and on the Zoom flyout. 308 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views .

Matchlines are annotation lines that you add to a view to indicate where a view is split.17 Select the outside control on the left and drag it to the left to reveal the notes. 18 On the Design Bar. click Modify. double-click Level 2. click Zoom To Fit. 19 On the View Control Bar. click Matchline. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 309 . Add matchline to indicate split view 21 In the Project Browser. The outside controls adjust the annotation crop region. 22 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 20 On the Zoom flyout. click (Hide Crop Region). under Floor Plans.

310 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . Click above the left corner of the lab building.23 Draw the matchline by specifying the following points: ■ Click above and to the right of the intersection of the lab building and the aviary. 24 On the Design Bar.) ■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor down and click just above the lab building. Click just below the lower intersection of the lab building and the aviary. (Align with the second column of lab cubicles. and click. Move the cursor left about 4800 mm. click Finish Sketch.

expand Sheets. enter Level 2 Aviary.Unnamed. and drag it onto the sheet. select 9. 27 Under Matchline. 31 In the Project Browser. 34 Click to place the view in the center of the sheet. click OK to accept the default titleblock.Aviary. click Level 2 . 28 For Line Pattern. for Name. click the Annotation Objects tab. Create sheets and place dependent views 29 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. and click Rename. 30 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 32 In the Sheet Title dialog. select Double Dash. for Line Weight.25 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. under Floor Plans. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 311 . 26 In the Object Styles dialog. and click OK. right-click A101 . 33 In the Project Browser. and click OK.

You add view references near the matchline to annotate and link to the dependent views. 312 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . and place the Level 2 .Labs dependent view on the sheet. 39 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans.Aviary is selected. double-click Level 2. 40 Click to the left of the top of the matchline. 36 Use the same method to create another sheet. verify that Floor Plan: Level 2 . click View Reference. Add reference annotations to sheets 37 In the Project Browser. for Target view.35 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 38 On the View tab of the Design Bar. rename the sheet Level 2 Labs.

select Floor Plan: Level 2 . click Modify. 41 On the Options Bar.Aviary. 46 In the Project Browser. 43 Use the same method to add View References above (A101) and below (A102) the lower-left end of the matchline. double-click Level 2 . click Zoom To Fit. for Target view. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 313 .The Sheet number of the dependent view displays to the left of the matchline. 44 On the Design Bar. 47 On the View Control Bar.Labs. 45 On the Zoom flyout. under Floor Plans. NOTE Double-clicking a view reference opens the dependent view that it references. click (Show Crop Region). 42 Click to the right of the top of the matchline.

48 Select the crop region. NOTE View references display in all views except for the view that it is referencing. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. 314 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . the tags for Cubicles 3 and 14 display. click the far right control. select the room tag for Cubicle 3 (upper-right room tag) in the annotation area. and drag it slightly to the right to expand the annotation region so you can see the view reference. right-click. leaving 4 rooms visible in the view. 49 If. 50 Use the same method to hide Cubicle 14 (directly below Cubicle 3). Notice that the view reference for the aviary does not display in the aviary dependent view. after modifying the annotation crop region.

right-click Level 2. select all views in the list. After you have set up dependent view configuration for one view. and click Apply Dependent Views. 55 On the Zoom flyout. expand Level 1. click (Hide Crop Region). click Zoom To Fit. Notice that the matchline and crop regions from Level 2 are applied to Level 1. 53 In the Select Views dialog. under Floor Plans. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 315 .51 On the View Control Bar. 54 In the Project Browser. Apply dependent view settings to other plans 52 In the Project Browser. click Zoom To Fit. and double-click Dependent (2) on Level 1. 57 On the Zoom flyout. but are not placed on sheets. and click OK. you can apply the view and crop region specifications to parallel views of the same scale. New dependent views display in the Project Browser under the primary view. 56 Double-click Dependent on Level 1.

5 In the drawing area.rvt Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. 316 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . select the Crop Region. and open Metric\ m_Dependent_Views. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). and click Rename. click Training Files. 3 In the Project Browser. The dependent view opens. right-click Dependent on South Elevation. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Left. expand South Elevation. and click OK. you ■ ■ ■ ■ Create dependent split views of an elevation view Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on a sheet Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and double-click South Elevation. 4 In the Rename View dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent.Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views In this exercise. for Name. right-click South Elevation. enter South Elevation . The matchline is already placed in the view. 2 In the Project Browser.

and drag it toward the center of the view. 8 In the Project Browser. cropping the view to the lab building.Right. 12 Select the inside crop region control on the left. and click OK. Create a sheet and place both dependent views on the sheet 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. under Sheets. 17 In the Sheet Title dialog. and click Rename. for Name. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 317 . 11 Select the crop region. and click OK. 13 On the View Control Bar. click (Hide Crop Region). enter South Elevation . click OK to accept the default titleblock. 7 On the View Control Bar. and click Rename. 16 In the Project Browser. 9 In the Project Browser. and drag it toward the center of the drawing. for Name. right-click South Elevation.6 Select the inside crop region control on the right. click (Hide Crop Region). cropping the view to the aviary. 15 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. right-click A103 Unnamed. right-click Dependent on South Elevation. 10 In the Rename View dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. enter South Elevation.

18 In the Project Browser. 27 Click to the left of the bottom of the matchline. 22 On the Design Bar.Left. and drag it onto the sheet. 318 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . under Elevations.Right. 23 In the Project Browser. click South Elevation . under Elevations. under Elevations. 20 In the Project Browser. 24 On the Views tab of the Design Bar. click View Reference. 25 On the Options Bar. 21 Click to place the elevation view at the bottom of the sheet. for Target view.Left is selected. 26 Click to the left of the top of the matchline at the center of the elevation. and drag it onto the sheet. double-click South Elevation. click Modify. 19 Click to place the elevation view at the top of the sheet. verify that Elevation: South Elevation . click South Elevation .

select Elevation: South Elevation . under Sheets (all). click Modify.28 On the Options Bar.South Elevation. for Target view. double-click A103 . 30 On the Design Bar.Right. 29 Click to the right of the top and the bottom of the matchline. 31 In the Project Browser. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 319 .

and use the annotation crop controls to modify it. you can modify the annotation region for the dependent view from the sheet. and click Activate View. 320 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . Select the crop region.NOTE If the view references are not visible. Right-click the view.

Viewing and Rendering 4 321 .

322 | Chapter 9 Viewing and Rendering .

you learn how to change the visibility of detail components. More specifically. you learn to create and customize views of building information models. You learn how to access and create building model views and how to change the visibility of building components and annotations within views. how to control fill pattern colors. and how to use plan regions within floor plans and reflected ceiling plans.Viewing 9 In this tutorial. 323 .

and learn how to control the visibility of building components and annotations within views. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You create elevations. The current file name is displayed in the Project Browser title bar. 2 In the Project Browser. locate the Project Browser. on the Standard toolbar. expand Elevations.rvt. 324 | Chapter 9 Viewing . and double-click East. TIP If the Project Browser does not display. The Project Browser is displayed by default between the Design Bar and the drawing area. sections. Exploring the Building Model In this exercise. you learn to create and customize user-defined views of a building information model. and open Metric\m_Viewing_Exercise. You also learn how to control the visibility of different building components and annotations within building model views. including elevation and three-dimensional views. and three-dimensional (3D) views. expand Views (all). Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you learn how to access different views of the building model. A new view displays a wireframe view of the east elevation view of the building model. Open an elevation view of the building model 1 On the left side of the drawing area. click Training Files. Both hidden lines and window tags display in the east elevation view. click .Viewing a Building Model In this lesson.

This hides the lines that show through to the exterior of the elevation view. click . the east elevation. The window tags are no longer displayed in this view. 7 Click OK. click Visibility/Graphics. Create a 3D view of the building model 8 On the View toolbar. The default name of the view is {3D}. Turn off the display of window tags in the elevation view 4 On the View menu. This change is applied only to the active view. Notice that window tags continue to display in the view. and click Hidden Line. click Model Graphics Style. This change is applied only in this elevation view. 6 Under Visibility. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides for Elevation: East dialog. The east elevation view displays with hidden lines. The 3D view is displayed in a new viewing window.Display the elevation view with hidden lines 3 On the View Control Bar. Exploring the Building Model | 325 . click the Annotation Categories tab. scroll down and clear Window Tags.

The view follows the movement of the cursor. 16 In the Rename View dialog. Notice that the view name is updated in the title bar of the viewing window and in the Project Browser. you can enable pan mode by pressing and holding the middle wheel button down. right-click {3D}. and click Rename. and expand 3D Views. 15 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. You can pan.9 On the View toolbar. double-click My 3D View. 10 Move the cursor to the drawing window and notice that it now displays as a hand This means you are in pan mode. 18 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all). enter My 3D View. 13 View the Dynamic View dialog in the lower left corner of the screen. Move the mouse to pan the view. under 3D Views. click to reorient the view. zoom. 326 | Chapter 9 Viewing . NOTE If you have a pointing device with a middle wheel. you can enable zoom mode by rolling the middle wheel. 17 In the upper right corner of the viewing window. 12 Press and hold CTRL. NOTE If you have a pointing device with a middle wheel. Save the current 3D view 14 In the Project Browser. and click OK. and spin the building model by clicking the appropriate button in this dialog. click X to close the view. . 11 Pan the view by clicking and dragging the cursor in the drawing area. . and notice that the cursor displays as a magnifying glass This indicates that you are in zoom mode.

Creating a Perspective View with a Camera In this exercise.rvt. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. Create the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. “Creating a Perspective View with a Camera” on page 327. Cameras define the eye point. right-click in the Design Bar. click Camera. and double-click Level 1. expand Views (all). the new view named 3D View 1 is displayed by default in a perspective view. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active.Notice that the view continues to display with hidden lines and no window tags. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. outside of the dimension lines. you create a perspective view of the building model with a camera. Creating a Perspective View with a Camera | 327 . and distance from the target. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. expand Floor Plans. m_Viewing_Exercise. and click View. as shown in the following illustration. 3 Add the camera to the view by specifying two points: one for the camera position and the other for the camera target point: ■ ■ Specify the first point in the top right corner of the drawing. eye height. Specify the second point in one of the rooms in the building. After you specify the second point (the view target).

Press and hold the left mouse button. click the Walkthrough tab located at the bottom of the dialog.4 To resize the view to see the entire floor model. and sideways to see how the view changes. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. You can use the walkthrough controls in this dialog to move the camera position and change the view. 7 In the Dynamic View dialog. Move the cursor up. select the blue control grips on the sides of the crop region and move them out. 5 On the View menu. 328 | Chapter 9 Viewing . 8 To move the camera eye position higher or lower: ■ ■ ■ Click Dolly and move the cursor into the perspective view. 9 To move the camera forward and backward in the view: ■ ■ ■ Click Forward/Back and move the cursor into the perspective view. Press and hold the left mouse button. down. Move the cursor up and down in the view to move the cursor forward and backward. Change the camera projection settings 6 On the View menu. click Dynamically Modify View.

click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. 13 On the View menu. You may need to reposition the view with the other controls. Move the cursor side to side in the view to rotate the view. 11 Adjust the view as shown in the following illustration. Change the camera position. Press and hold the left mouse button. Four views of the model display in the drawing area. and target 12 On the Window menu. click Tile.10 To rotate the camera around the target: ■ ■ ■ Click Turn and move the cursor into the perspective view. height. Creating a Perspective View with a Camera | 329 .

The border of the window that contains the Level 1 view highlights. double-click Level 1.14 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. right-click 3D View 1. and click Show Camera. 16 In the Project Browser. 15 In the Project Browser. double-click 3D View 1. under 3D Views. The camera and the view direction of the camera are displayed in the appropriate views. 330 | Chapter 9 Viewing .

17 In My 3D View. and click Element Properties. click to create a new 3D view. select the camera target point (the magenta grip). ■ 3D View 1 immediately updates to show the change. TIP The updated view depends on the location of the camera before you change the elevation values. click Model Graphics Style. under Camera. 20 On the View Control Bar. right-click. Use a section box to clip the model 19 On the View toolbar. In the Element Properties dialog. and move it to another location. Creating a Perspective View with a Camera | 331 . Click OK. enter 15000 for Eye Elevation and 1700 for Target Elevation. and click Shading. 3D View 1 should update immediately after you move the target point of the camera. 18 Change the target and eye elevation of the camera by modifying its properties: ■ ■ Select the camera in My 3D View.

under Extents. select Section Box.21 Rotate the view as shown in the following illustration. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. 22 On the View menu. and click OK. 24 Click the section box. 332 | Chapter 9 Viewing . The section box highlights and grips are displayed on its faces. A rotation tool is also displayed. 25 Select and move the lower right grip on the section box closer to the model. as shown in the following illustration. click View Properties. A section box is displayed around the model.

and maximize this view. click Section. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. m_Viewing_Exercise. Creating a Section View In this exercise.rvt. you create a section view by sketching a section line in a plan view. “Creating a Section View” on page 333. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Section View | 333 . and rotate the section box around the model. expand Floor Plans. Sketch a section line in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1.26 Click and hold the rotation tool.

and click Find Referring Views. 6 In the Project Browser. or in the Project Browser. expand Sections. 4 On the Design Bar. and double-click Section 1. right-click. 7 In the Go To View dialog. select the section view. double-click the section head. 8 Select the section line. Notice a dashed green box with blue grips is displayed on the section line. You may need to zoom closer to the walls in order to see the fill pattern. View the section 5 To view the section. and drag the section depth grip below the middle horizontal wall as shown in the following illustration. 334 | Chapter 9 Viewing . select Floor Plan: Level 1. and click Open View. The box represents the extents of the section view as well as the viewing direction of the section. NOTE Fill pattern is dependent on the zoom ratio. and then click to the right of the lower right wall to sketch the horizontal section line shown in the following illustration.3 Click to the left of the left wall of the building model. click Modify.

double-click Level 1. 10 Double-click the section head to display the section view. Notice that the elevation symbol arrow points to the nearest wall as you move through the building model. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.rvt. Control arrows are displayed near the section tag. and select and move the section depth grip under the lower wall. click Modify. Notice the change in the view direction. “Creating Elevation Views” on page 335. double-click Level 1. 13 Click the control arrows to flip the section view. Creating Elevation Views In this exercise. m_Viewing_Exercise. You may need to adjust your zoom settings to see the elevation symbol. you learn to create an elevation view in a project by adding an elevation symbol to a plan view. under Floor Plans. Creating Elevation Views | 335 . Change the view direction of the section 11 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. click Elevation. 15 Double-click the section head to display the section view. click Modify. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. An elevation symbol displays at the end of the cursor. move the cursor around the building model. 3 Without clicking in the drawing area. 12 Select the section line. Notice the change in section depth.9 On the Design Bar. Add an elevation symbol 1 In the Project Browser. 14 On the Design Bar.

4 To create an elevation view of the building lobby. Elevation 1 . The check mark in the right box indicates the current elevation view. place the cursor inside the building facing the lobby entrance. double-click Level 1. 336 | Chapter 9 Viewing . 10 In the Project Browser.a by default. and click. under Elevations.b.a. Do not select the arrow. The elevation is named Elevation 1 . The elevation symbol is displayed with four check boxes. 9 Select the box shown in the following illustration to add a new elevation view. Make sure the elevation symbol is pointing towards the lobby doors. click Modify. indicating the possible elevation views that you can create. View the elevation 6 To view the new elevation. zoom in. 8 Select the center of the elevation symbol.b. double-click Elevation 1 . 7 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. Elevation 1 . and double-click the elevation symbol arrow. 5 On the Design Bar.

floors. This means that in views with a coarse level of detail. and the insulation color to pink. such as Brick on CMU. In addition. on the File menu. in this case. you can choose the wall fill color for a wall type. click Training Files. in a compound wall. a shade of gray. You change the color of the cut and surface patterns in the brick material assigned to the exterior wall in the building model.11 If you want to save your changes. 12 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. you can set the color of the coarse scale fill pattern for wall types. Controlling Fill Pattern Colors In this lesson. For example. and save the exercise file with a unique name. and other families. You can control the fill pattern color of the cut and surface patterns for objects that obtain their fill pattern definition from materials. such as the one below. you learn to control the fill pattern colors of a material. Controlling the Fill Pattern Color of a Material In this exercise.rvt. where each layer is assigned a different material. and applies to phasing override materials as well. This includes walls. you learn to control the fill pattern color of a material and set the coarse scale fill pattern color of a wall type. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you can set the fill pattern color for the brick to red. and open Common\c_Showroom. click Save As. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. roofs. Controlling Fill Pattern Colors | 337 .

and click OK twice. select Masonry . 9 In the Materials dialog.Change the color of the brick cut pattern for the exterior walls 1 In the Project Browser. select red. 3 In the Materials dialog. click Materials. 2 On the Settings menu. select Masonry . The surface pattern of the brick is black. expand Views (all). 7 Zoom in on the brick pattern of the exterior walls. expand Views (all). Each layer is designated by the material settings of the layer.Brick for Name. 338 | Chapter 9 Viewing . Change the brick surface pattern from black to white 8 On the Settings menu. expand Sections (Section Head . Notice the different fill patterns assigned to each layer within the floor and wall structure. View the surface pattern of the exterior brick walls 6 In the Project Browser. click Color. The brick cut pattern on the left is displayed as red. 5 In the Color dialog. A color is assigned to both the Surface Pattern and Cut Pattern options in the dialog. and double-click Wall/Floor Join . and double-click 3D.Level 3. 4 Under Cut Pattern. expand 3D Views. click Materials.Brick for Name.Filled).

expand Views (all). 12 Proceed to the next exercise. Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type In this exercise.10 Under Surface Pattern. select white. 3 Click Cancel to exit the dialog without making any changes. click Color. The walls in the floor plan that you work with are displayed with a gray fill pattern when displayed in a view with a coarse level of detail. The view level of this view is set to display in Coarse detail as indicated by the Detail Level instance parameter value under Graphics. View the detail level setting of the view 1 In the Project Browser. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. expand Floor Plans. and click OK twice. you learn to set the coarse scale fill pattern color for a wall type. click View Properties. You change the coarse scale fill pattern from the default color of black to a shade of gray for a wall type. 2 On the View menu. 11 In the Color dialog. Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type | 339 . and double-click Level 1. The surface pattern of the brick is now white. “Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type” on page 339. c_Showroom.rvt.

6 In the Type Properties dialog. 13 Zoom in on the arced wall.Change coarse scale fill pattern color of the arced wall 4 Select the south arced wall. Notice that the surface pattern and color of the brick wall that display in a coarse detail level are not applied because the detail level is set to Fine. click Save As. 15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 7 In the Color dialog. double-click Level 2. and save the exercise file with a unique name. and click Fine. click Edit/New. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. click in the Coarse Scale Fill Color value field. on the File menu. Plan regions are closed sketches that you can create in floor plan and reflected ceiling plan (RCP) views only. and click OK three times. 12 On the View Control Bar. although they may have 340 | Chapter 9 Viewing . 14 If you want to save your changes. The wall type is displayed as solid gray within any view where the Detail Level is set to Coarse. click Detail Level. Creating a View Plan Region In this lesson. right-click. View the arced wall in fine detail 11 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. select Solid fill for Name. 10 On the Design Bar. the plan regions cannot overlap each other. If you create more than one plan region in a file. By default. . click Modify. click in the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern parameter value field and click 9 In the Fill Patterns dialog. the Coarse Scale Fill Color is black and the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern is set to none. select a shade of gray. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. and click Element Properties. you work with a split-level building model that requires a different view range than the rest of the view. and click OK.

click Training Files. you can display the stepped portion of the walls in the Level 1 floor plan. Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan | 341 . refer to the online Help for more information. you create a plan region in the Level 1 floor plan of the following building model. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. line color. Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan In this exercise. By creating a plan region in the view with a different cut plane height. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. If you are not familiar with view ranges in Revit Architecture. and you cannot control their visibility. Because the stepped portion of the walls in the building model is above the cut plane height in the Level 1 floor plan view. and open Metric\m_Plan_Region. line type. it does not display in the Level 1 floor plan.coincident edges. Plan regions do not work with linked Revit Architecture files. or pattern.

Add a plan region to view the stepped portion of the model 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Plan Region. expand Views (all). sketch the plan region using the blue tick marks for guidance: ■ On the Design Bar. The cut plane height of the view range for this view is 1200 mm. so you can view the height of the walls and windows. In the following illustration. expand Floor Plans. right-click in the Design Bar. You use the view range property to control the cut plane. and click View. and double-click Level 1. click Lines. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. 3 In the Level 1 view. ■ ■ ■ Specify a point at the intersection of the two dashed blue lines on the top left. 342 | Chapter 9 Viewing . The stepped portion of the project walls and windows are not displayed because the cut plane does not intersect any of the model geometry above this height. and the view depth plane.View the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. the top and bottom clip planes. view range. Specify a point at the intersection of the two dashed blue lines on the bottom right. Plan regions have a single property. the south elevation is also displayed. On the Options Bar. click . which is similar to the view range for plan views.

5 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 Click Apply. and enter 2800 for the cut plane Offset. and view depth) in the view range is the same as the level used to define the corresponding plane in the parent view. 6 In the View Range dialog. click Edit for View Range. right-click. click Modify. 4 Select the plan region. click Finish Sketch. select Parent View’s Level (Level 1) for Cut Plane. 9 On the Design Bar. The Level 1 floor plan should display as shown in the following illustration. By selecting Parent View’s Level. under Extents. top and bottom clip planes. and click Element Properties. Press ESC to end the command. When you select the plan region. you specify that the level used to define each plane (cut plane.■ ■ On the Design Bar. 7 Because the top clip plane value cannot be set lower than the cut plane. and then click OK twice. the line turns red. Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan | 343 . This means that the plan region view is going to cut all geometry at 2800 mm above Level 1. The plan region displays as a dashed green line. enter 4000 for the Top Offset.

344 | Chapter 9 Viewing .The following illustration demonstrates how the level 1 floor plan view is being viewed with the plan region. 11 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click Save As. 10 If you want to save your changes. on the File menu.

to place and render decals to create signs. AccuRender is the rendering engine incorporated into Revit Architecture that is used to produce rendered views. you learn to use the AccuRender® Radiosity and Raytrace features in Revit Architecture 2008 to create rendered interior and exterior views of your building information model. 345 . and to create walkthroughs of your building information model.Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs 10 In this tutorial. billboards. and posters.

You work with a building model that already has material applied to it. After you create the perspective view. change the material of the front terrace of the building from the default material to asphalt. you learn how to create an exterior perspective view of a building model and render it with the AccuRender Raytrace feature. and then raytrace the view to produce the final rendered exterior view. you raytrace a region of the building that includes the exterior wall. You learn to create and apply materials to a building model. add realistic three-dimensional trees to the building site. and the curtain wall to view and verify the material and texture changes. you learn how to view and modify the material that is applied to a building component in a building model. you select a scene that defines the model environment. the floor.Rendering an Exterior View In this lesson. In this exercise. You also learn to create a new material and apply it to a building component. and create the perspective view that you want to render. When you complete these changes. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model In this exercise. 346 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . define a new polished aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions on the front curtain wall. you: ■ ■ ■ change the texture of the brick material applied to the exterior walls of the building.

and click the tab in the context menu.Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 8 In the Materials dialog. 3 On the Options Bar. click . click Edit for Structure. In the left pane of the Open dialog. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. select Masonry . 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Materials. under Name. 6 Click Cancel three times to return to the 3D view of the building model without making any changes to the exterior finish at this time. click Wall. click next to Texture to display the Material Library.rvt. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. View the finish material of the exterior walls 1 Verify that the 3D view of the townhouse building model is displayed. and click Edit/New.Heavyweight block is displayed for Type.Brick. 9 Under AccuRender. Change the brick texture of the exterior wall finish material 7 On the Settings menu. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 347 . under Construction. right-click in the Design Bar. Verify that the material defined for the exterior finish layer (Layer 1) of the building model is Masonry .Cavity Wall . verify that Co-house .Brick. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. click Training Files.

enter Aluminum. under Name. 25 Under Name. under Name. 18 In the Materials dialog. You can view the new brick texture when you raytrace a region of the building in a later step. under _accurender. expand Metals. Polished and click OK. 14 On the Options Bar. 22 In the New Material dialog. click Edit for Structure. 19 Click OK four times. 26 Click OK twice. Define a new polished aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions 20 On the Settings menu. expand Masonry and click Brick. under _accurender. 23 Under AccuRender.Plain. select Carib. 10 In the left pane of the Material Library dialog. and click 15 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify.Asphalt. click Materials. 28 Select one of the curtain wall mullions on the exterior face of the building. and click Aluminum.200mm. 16 In the Type Properties dialog. 27 On the Design Bar. select Site . click next to Texture to display the Material Library. . 21 In the Materials dialog. click Edit/New. click Modify and select the terrace in front of the building.Running. for Layer 2.A preview of the brick texture that is currently assigned to the walls is displayed in the right pane of the Material Library. 24 In the Material Library. under Construction. Change the material of the terrace from the default material to asphalt 13 On the Design Bar. and click . verify that Floor : Floor 1 displays in the Type Selector. 348 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 12 Click OK twice. 11 Under Name. click in the Material field that contains Default Floor. select Polished. 17 In the Edit Assembly dialog. click Duplicate.

click No. 33 Click OK three times. click Region Raytrace. This completes the changes in materials and textures that you make for the building model. 37 If you are prompted to turn off the lights in the scene. 36 In the Scene Selection dialog. floor. and draw the rectangular region shown in the following illustration. and curtain wall mullions to which you made material changes. 31 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. under Materials and Finishes. Raytrace a region of the building to view the material changes that you made 34 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. click . 30 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. and then click . 32 In the Materials dialog. under Name. click in the Material field. select the curtain wall mullion again. press TAB to cycle your selection through different building model components. When Curtain Wall Mullions: Rectangular Mullion displays in the Status Bar at the bottom of the screen. verify that New is selected. Polished. select Exterior under Type. Make sure the region includes the exterior walls. 29 On the Options Bar. select Aluminum. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 349 .TIP If you do not select the curtain wall mullion on the first selection. 35 Move the cursor over the building model.

38 On the Design Bar. floor. 39 Proceed to the next exercise. click Display Model to end the Region Raytrace command and redisplay the building model in hidden line wireframe. Adding Trees to the Site In this exercise. In a later exercise. when you render an exterior view of the model. and curtain wall mullions are rendered (this takes a few moments). expand Floor Plans. you place two different types of trees on the building site. the leaves of the trees display as indicated by the season and location specified in the render scene settings. expand Views (all).The portion of the building that you selected is raytraced and the materials that you changed and applied to the exterior walls. and double-click 1st Flr. m_Cohouse. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Add red maple trees to the site 1 In the Project Browser. 350 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . “Adding Trees to the Site” on page 350.rvt. producing a photorealistic effect. Cnst.

select M_Tree . 7 In the Type Selector. 3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. and add it to the site 6 On the Design Bar. Create a new type of tree. and click Site Component. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed. The tree that you selected in this step is a red maple. click Modify. and click . and click Site. Continue to place trees until you have added several red maples to the building site as shown in the following illustration. Adding Trees to the Site | 351 . Available tree types are listed in the Type Selector by their Latin names. 4 In the Type Selector. and click to place a tree. right-click in the Design Bar. 5 Move the cursor to a location on the building site.2 Zoom out so you can easily view the area surrounding the building model. click Site Component.Deciduous : Acer Rubrum .9 Meters. select any of the deciduous trees.

The black oak is shorter than the red maple trees that you added to the site. to 17 Press ESC to end tree placement. under Identity Data. as shown in the following illustration. Black. 12 In the Plant Library. and click OK. select Black Oak for Type Comments. and click OK. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 16 Move the cursor to the building site. you define the exterior perspective view of the building model that you want to render. enter 7000mm for Plant Height. click in the Value field for Plant Name. “Creating a Perspective View” on page 352. and then click display the Plant Library. and click Deciduous. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. expand Trees and Shrubs. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. m_Cohouse. under Other. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. Creating a Perspective View In this exercise. under accurender. and place two black oak trees. 15 Under Other. 13 Under Name. enter Black Oak. click Edit/New. and click OK twice. 352 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . select Oak. click Duplicate.8 In the Element Properties dialog.rvt. 18 Proceed to the next exercise. 10 In the Name dialog.

Place a camera in the first floor view 1 With the 1st Flr. on the View tab of the Design Bar. 3 Select and move the crop boundary grips until the perspective view displays as in the following illustration. Cnst. Specify the second point in front of the building facade to define the target point of the camera. view open. click Camera. The new perspective view is displayed. Creating a Perspective View | 353 . 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and the camera target point: ■ ■ Specify the first point on the site facing the building to position the camera.

Cnst. 354 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and click Show Camera. double-click 1st Flr. The red triangle represents the FOV (field of vision) angle and the back clipping plane of the view. view. The camera position is displayed in the 1st Flr. 6 Select and move the FOV boundary grip to adjust the field of vision and back clipping plane as shown in the following illustration. right-click 3D View 1 (the default perspective view name). expand 3D Views. 5 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. Cnst.Modify the camera position and back clipping plane in the perspective view 4 In the Project Browser under Views (all).

under 3D Views. Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View In this exercise. lighting. Display the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. enter Exterior. place. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.7 In the Project Browser. “Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View” on page 355. right-click 3D View 1. m_Cohouse.rvt. double-click Exterior. and click Rename. and environment settings that you use to render the view. 8 In the Rename View dialog. 9 Proceed to the next exercise. and click OK. Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View | 355 . you select a scene and specify time. date.

You must define a scene because this is the first time settings are being applied to this view. 6 Select By Date. Time. Notice that the name of the tab changes to Date and Time. click OK to accept the existing scene (Scene 1). 4 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. click the Solar Angles tab. and click Sun. 8 Under Time. under Scene Settings. click Settings. Select the render scene settings 2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. 7 Under Date. 356 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . verify that Daylight Savings Time is selected. and Place from the Specify Solar Angles list. 3 In the Scene Selection dialog. and drag the slider to set the time to 2:30 PM. clear Use Sun and Shadow Settings from view. TIP Use the left and right arrow keys to adjust the minutes precisely. 5 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog. enter 10 (October) for Month and 5 for Day.

00 (many clouds. click No. Render the perspective view 24 On the Design Bar. 17 Under Advanced. and select Boston. click Raytrace. MA. select Autumn for Plant Season. 27 On the Options Bar.9 Click the Place tab. select Ground Plane. click Image Size. The Ground Plane tab displays. click Capture Rendering. under Scene Settings. click Site. under _accurender. and enter bo. verify that Automatic Sky is selected. 15 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. The rendered exterior perspective view is displayed. click Environment. select Good for Quality. 23 Under Raytrace Settings.) 14 Click OK. and click OK. 18 Click Material. 26 On the Design Bar. This setting produces a level of cloudiness in the sky that ranges from 0 (no clouds) to 1. Save the rendered view 29 On the Design Bar. USA. Rye. under Scene Settings. Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View | 357 . 11 Scroll down. 28 If you are prompted to turn off the lights in the scene. Dark. 20 In the Name list. 16 In the Environment dialog. under Background Color. 10 Click in the Cities list. 25 Enter 150 for Resolution. The rendered view is saved in the project and can be accessed from the Project Browser. 21 Click OK twice. click . 12 Click the Settings Tab. and click OK. 22 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. 19 In the Material Library. 13 Enter .20 for Cloudiness. select Grass.

click Save As. you render an interior view of the building model that you worked with in the previous lesson. you add two RPC people to the interior view that you render in a later exercise. define the view and render scene settings. expand Renderings. expand Floor Plans. and double-click Exterior to display the rendered view of the townhouse that you saved. 33 Proceed to the next lesson. Open second floor plan to display the interior scene that you will render 1 In the Project Browser under Views (all). Rendering an Interior View In this lesson. “Rendering an Interior View” on page 358. on the File menu. RPC people are represented by a circle in plan view and resemble real people only when rendered in a 3D view. m_Cohouse. and double-click 2nd Flr.rvt. use both Radiosity and Raytracing to render the view. Adding RPC People In this exercise. 32 If you want to save this exercise. Cnst. To create the rendered scene. Redisplay the rendered view 31 In the Project Browser under Views (all). and finally.30 On the Design Bar. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. you add ArchVision realpeople (RPC people) to the floor plan of the second floor. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click Display Model to end rendering and redisplay the wireframe perspective view of the building model. 358 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .

select Rotate after placement. and then move the cursor to rotate her so she is facing up and to the right (northeast).6 to select and place M_RPC Male: Alex to the right of Cathy and facing up and to the left (northwest). click Component. 6 Click to place Cathy to the right of the sofa and below the table. 7 Repeat steps 4 . 5 On the Options Bar. Adding RPC People | 359 . 4 In the Type Selector.2 Zoom in on the left side of the living room as shown. select M_RPC Female: Cathy. 3 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar.

“Creating the Interior Perspective View” on page 360. Add a camera 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar.rvt.8 Proceed to the next exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and target point: ■ Specify the first point on the floor plan facing the table and RPC people to place the camera. 360 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . m_Cohouse. click Camera. you create the interior perspective view that you will render in the final exercise in this lesson. Creating the Interior Perspective View In this exercise.

■ Specify the target point of the camera in front of the corner of the table. Cnst. double-click 2nd Flr. but you must adjust the field of vision and far clipping plane to display more of the view. The interior perspective is displayed. 3 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 361 .

Resize the perspective view 6 On the Options Bar. double-click 3D View 1 to redisplay the interior perspective view.4 Select and move the FOV boundary grip to adjust field of vision and back clipping plane as shown in the following illustration. right-click 3D View 1. and click Rename. 8 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. under Size. 5 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. enter 178 mm for Height. 362 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . enter 229 mm for Width. and click OK. click the dimensions for Size. 7 In the Crop Region Size dialog.

under Extents. click View Properties. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. 11 On the View menu. click to display the 3D view of the building model.9 In the Rename View dialog. Add a section box to limit the extents of the rendered view 10 On the View toolbar. A section box is displayed around the building model. enter Interior. and select the section box. Grips are displayed on the section box. 15 Select and move the section box grips until only the room that you added RPC people to and that you want to render is visible. and click OK. 14 On the Design Bar. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 363 . click Shading to view the effects of the section box when you add it. select Section Box. click Modify. and click OK. 12 On the View menu.

and click OK. 15 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog.This process allows you to limit the geometry that will be rendered when you create a rendering of your interior view. and enter bo. By limiting the geometry. specify a file location and name for the scene settings. Notice that the name of the tab changes to Date and Time. Creating a New Render Scene In this exercise. double-click Interior to display the interior perspective view. click OK. and click Sun. TIP Use the left and right arrow keys to precisely adjust the minutes. click Settings. under Scene Settings. Select the render scene settings 2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. 7 Select By Date. 17 In the Environment dialog. on the Main tab. 4 Under Type. under 3D Views. under Background Color. clear Use Sun and Shadow Settings from view. 5 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. m_Cohouse. USA. click the Solar Angles tab. place.rvt. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. and select Boston. click Environment. and drag the slider to set the time to 8:30 PM. 6 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog. “Creating a New Render Scene” on page 364. 9 Under Time. MA. select New. you create a render scene to specify the time. 364 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Time. and Place from the Specify Solar Angles list. you reduce the rendering time. Display the interior perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. date. and enter Interior Scene for Name. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 10 Click the Place tab. enter 6 (June) for Month and 6 for Day. 3 In the Scene Selection dialog. select Interior. verify that Daylight Savings Time is selected. 11 Click in the Cities list. and click Save. verify that Automatic Sky is selected. and environment settings used to render the view. 16 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. 14 Click Save. under Scene Settings. 13 Click the Settings tab. 12 Scroll down. 8 Under Date.

Defining Daylights and Rendering the View In this exercise. 21 In the Name list. Defining Daylights and Rendering the View | 365 . click Radiate. Curtain Wall 1). you allow sunlight to pass through the panels when you render the view. double-click {3D}.rvt. 6 In the Radiosity Information dialog. 23 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. select Grass. click Site. 3 Select the curtain wall on the second floor (Walls: Curtain Wall. Rye. double-click Interior. 20 In the Material Library. you define daylights for the glazed panels of the curtain wall and render the view. under accurender. The 3D view of the building model with the section box is displayed. 24 Under Scene Settings. 22 Click OK twice. 2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. as daylight sources. click Daylights. click OK. select {3D}. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. You can select families with transparent materials. under Use View’s Section Box. such as windows and doors. Render the perspective view 4 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. and click OK. Define daylights for the glazed panels of the curtain wall 1 In the Project Browser. The Ground Plane tab displays. m_Cohouse. 19 Click Material. select Ground Plane. When you define daylights for the curtain wall panels. select Summer for Plant Season.18 Under Advanced. “Defining Daylights and Rendering the View” on page 365. 5 On the Design Bar. Dark. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. under 3D Views.

you rendered an exterior and an interior view. select Medium (150 dpi) for Resolution. begins. on the File menu. and save the exercise file with a unique name. . 7 On the Design Bar. 8 On the Options Bar.The radiosity process. The RPC people do not display in the view until you raytrace them in the next steps. which can take several minutes. By completing the two rendering lessons included in this tutorial. 10 Close the exercise file. click Raytrace. click Save As. When radiate completes. 9 If you want to save your changes. 366 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . the following rendered view is displayed. You learned to use both the Radiosity and Raytracing features included in the AccuRender render engine. and click The raytraced perspective view is displayed and now includes the RPC people. Light bounce is calculated for each individual light.

and you create it by specifying points that create the spline. you learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of your building models in Revit Architecture 2008. Usually you define the walkthrough path in a plan view. which is the path that a camera will follow through your building model. you can record the walkthrough by exporting it to an AVI file that you can play with any available video player independent of your Revit Architecture software. Additional frames that comprise the walkthrough are created between the key frames. Each point becomes a key frame in the walkthrough. NOTE Some Imperial values are used by default in this exercise. click Training Files. Recording a Walkthrough After you create a walkthrough. proceeds through the dining room. Creating and Editing a Walkthrough The first step in creating a walkthrough is to define the walkthrough path. elevation.rvt. you learn how to create and edit a walkthrough of the first floor of a townhouse. you can select one of the following display options for the building model in your walkthrough: ■ ■ ■ ■ Wireframe Hidden Line (wireframe view with hidden lines) Shaded or Shaded with Edges AccuRender (Raytrace) IMPORTANT If you record your walkthrough AVI with the AccuRender display option. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs | 367 . A walkthrough is created in a 3D perspective view by default. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In a plan view. and open Common\c_Townhouse. but you can also create it in a 3D orthographic view. you can also specify the height of the camera along the walkthrough path. The walkthrough path is a spline. but you can also define it in a 3D. When you export your walkthrough to an AVI. and ends in the far corner of the living room. You create a walkthrough that begins in the breakfast room of the townhouse. or section view.Creating and Recording Walkthroughs In this lesson. Creating a Walkthrough In this exercise. If you prefer to use Metric values. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you must select or define a scene. click Settings ➤ Project Units. and change unit formats as desired. You can edit the walkthrough path by selecting and moving the key frames.

5 Specify four additional points to define key frame positions on the walkthrough path as shown in the following illustration. and double-click Walkthrough 1. expand Walkthroughs. of the walkthrough. 3 On the Options Bar. expand Views (all). click . or the first key frame. click Walkthrough. Edit and play the walkthrough 7 In the Project Browser under Views (all). 6 After you specify the final point of the walkthrough path in the Living room. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. 368 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .Create a walkthrough of the first floor of the building model 1 In the Project Browser. and click the tab in the context menu. on the Options Bar. expand Floor Plans. and double-click 1st Floor. 4 Move the cursor under the text label in the Breakfast room. verify that Perspective is selected to create the walkthrough in a 3D perspective view. right-click in the Design Bar. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. The floor plan of the first floor of the townhouse is displayed. and click to specify the start point.

enter 16" for Width and 9" for Height. and click OK. click Zoom ➤ Zoom Out (2x). 12 On the View menu. click the dimensions for Size to change the size of the walkthrough frame crop region. Your frame may look a bit different from the frame in the illustration because the walkthrough path is not precisely the same. 8 Verify that the crop boundary of the walkthrough frame is selected and is displayed as red with blue grips. 9 On the Options Bar. If it is not. The walkthrough controls are displayed on the Options Bar. click Edit Walkthrough. Creating a Walkthrough | 369 . 13 On the Options Bar. The frame that is displayed is frame 300 of 300 frames in the walkthrough. Two options are displayed on the Options Bar: Edit Walkthrough and Size. 10 In the Crop Region Size dialog. and select the crop boundary. 11 Under Change. verify Field of view is selected. surrounded by a crop boundary with grips as shown in the following illustration. select the crop boundary.The last frame of the walkthrough is displayed. 14 Click .

under Extents.15 In the Walkthrough Frames dialog. press ESC. enter 1 for Frame. and press ENTER to set the walkthrough to play from the beginning (the key frame). The walkthrough plays. double-click 1st Floor. 370 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . The walkthrough path is displayed in the floor plan of the first floor. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position In this exercise. “Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position” on page 370. enter 60 to reduce the total number of frames in the walkthrough from 300 to 60. clear Far Clip Active. proceed to the next exercise.rvt. and click OK. NOTE To stop playing the walkthrough at any time. Edit the walkthrough path 4 On the Options Bar. 16 On the Options Bar. you learn how to edit the walkthrough path and change the camera position in the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise. 17 Click . click Edit Walkthrough. c_Townhouse. click . and click OK. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. The current display is wireframe with hidden lines. Change the properties of the camera 1 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. Clearing this option disables the far clipping plane of the camera. 2 On the Options Bar. 18 When the walkthrough stops playing.

select Path for Controls. 6 On the Options Bar. Your walkthrough path may vary from the one in the illustration so do not be concerned if the camera displays at a slightly different location. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position | 371 . and adjust it to view the kitchen as shown in the following illustration. Blue grips are displayed at each key frame.The camera is displayed at the first key frame position on the walkthrough path in the breakfast room. You can move any camera target or key frame position. 5 Select the target point of the camera (the magenta grip).

the Full Frames (Uncompressed) option is available to all users. under Walkthroughs. select <Shading> for Display mode. If you are unsure of what option to use. and drag it to the location shown in the following illustration. 4 Under Format. 2 In the Save As dialog. 5 In the Video Compression dialog. you record the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise by exporting it to an AVI. c_Townhouse. but that do not suffer loss due to compression quality. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.7 Click the third key frame position. click Export ➤ Walkthrough. you can select to display the walkthrough in wireframe. and click Save. hidden line. Play the walkthrough to view the changes that you made 8 In the Project Browser. and then click to play the walkthrough. and click OK. It produces files that are larger than compressed files. 3 Under Output Length. specify a path and a file name for the AVI. specify 15 for Frames per Second. Recording the Walkthrough In this exercise. shaded. select any codec (compression/decompression) that is available on your system for Compressor. “Recording the Walkthrough” on page 372. without opening Revit Architecture 2008. shaded with edges. double-click Walkthrough 1. 10 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. 6 Double-click the AVI file to play the walk-through from the location that you specified in step 3. 1 On the File menu. NOTE The available Compressor options are specific to your current computer system. When you export the walkthrough. The AVI is recorded. 372 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 9 On the Options Bar. click Edit Walkthrough. or with AccuRender raytracing.

specifying the number of frames. on the File menu. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 8 If you want to save this exercise. Reducing the size of the output images and managing the frame rate lets you create realistic and smooth movement. perhaps to 6” wide x 4” height. then you are moving from the breakfast area to the living room window in 10 seconds. click Save As. and with a frame rate of from 15-30 frames per second.7 Try creating other walkthroughs. If you had 150 frames and a frame rate of 15 seconds. reducing the size of the image. Recording the Walkthrough | 373 .

374 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .

Exterior solar studies can show the impact of shadows on a site by the terrain and the surrounding buildings. You specify settings for summer and winter solstice solar studies and export one solar study as a video and the other as a series of images.Creating Solar Studies 11 The ability to create solar studies for a specific project and site can be very valuable for creating sustainable designs. More specifically. you learn how a solar study of different perspective views of a building can support passive solar design by showing where shadows fall during the warmest time of the day and at different times throughout the year. 375 . In this tutorial. you create interior and exterior views of a building information model to be used in solar studies that you define. Interior solar studies can illustrate how effectively natural light penetrates inside a building during specific times of the day and year.

you learn to create three 3D views of a building information model for use with solar studies.Courtyard View In this exercise. A cut section view enables you to see the effect of shadows and light on the interior of a building. and double-click 01 Entry. you customize a 3D external view of the building to enhance Solar Study analysis. as shown. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. expand Views (all). Creating a Solar Study .rvt. The view you create may differ slightly from the illustrations in the exercises because of minor variations in camera placement. expand Floor Plans. 1 In the Project Browser. 376 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . A plan view provides information on how sunlight and shadows play on the floor of a building. click Training Files.Creating Views for Solar Studies In this lesson. click Camera. A 3D view is created. ■ ■ ■ A courtyard perspective view illustrates how shadows impact the site and buildings. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Click in the lower right corner of the drawing area outside of the courtyard to place the camera and click in the upper left corner above the courtyard to place the camera target point. and open Common\c_Solar_Study.

you create a section cutaway view. as shown. right-click 3D View 1. under Floor Plans. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. click to reorient the view. as shown. double-click 01 Entry. and drag the blue circular controls to see more of the perspective view. Create section 1 In the Project Browser. 5 In the Dynamic View dialog. 9 In the Rename View dialog. 2 Enter ZR to zoom in on the house. if necessary. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View | 377 . Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. 6 On the Design Bar.Courtyard View. enter Solar Study . click Modify.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. click Save As. expand 3D Views. 10 On the File menu. “Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View” on page 377. 8 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. click Spin and move the cursor in the drawing area to adjust the view. and click OK.4 On the View toolbar. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View In this exercise. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 7 Click the view boundary to select it.

3 On the Design Bar. double-click the section head. expand Sections. click Modify. and click OK. right-click Section 1. 7 In the Project Browser. to reorient the view. and then click to the left outside of the house to sketch the horizontal section line shown in the following illustration. click 10 On the View toolbar. and click Rename. click . 4 Click to the right of reference plane 9 between A and B and. 6 To view the section. 378 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . Create 3D section view 9 On the View toolbar. click Section. enter Section for Solar Study Cutaway. 5 On the Design Bar. 8 In the Rename View dialog.

NOTE A plan view of a shadow study should be created in a 3D view with top orientation. “Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View” on page 379. select Section: 12 In the Dynamic View dialog. On the Annotation Categories tab. such as floor plans and ceiling plans. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View In this exercise. to expand the dialog. click Detail Level ➤ Coarse. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. so no shadows will be cast from these elements. NOTE With the detail level set to Coarse. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. you create a plan cutaway view. then select Medium. as shown. In some cases. then Fine. right-click {3D}.11 In the Dynamic View dialog. 17 To hide the section box. Typical plan views. click Modify. some structural elements are shown as a single line rather than solid and do not cast a shadow. double-click 01 Entry. 15 In the Rename View dialog. do not display many elements in 3D. click Save.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. and click OK. 3 Click in the upper left corner and lower right corner to sketch a selection around the site. click Section for Solar Study Cutaway. 13 On the Design Bar. changing to Medium or Fine provides a better view for a shadow study. click Spin and move the cursor to adjust the view down and to the right. as shown. 14 In the Project Browser. Create callout 1 In the Project Browser. click Callout. and click OK. under Floor Plans. clear Section Boxes. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. and under Orient to a View. including the house. 18 On the File menu. under 3D Views. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View | 379 . 16 On the View Control Bar. enter Solar Study Section Cutaway. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click Rename.

4 In the Project Browser. Create 3D Plan View 7 On the View toolbar. 5 In the Project Browser. 10 In the Dynamic View dialog. click Spin and move the cursor to adjust the view to the right and back to view the front side. as shown. click Modify. double-click Callout of 01 Entry. as shown. 9 In the Dynamic View dialog click to expand the dialog. and click Rename. enter Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. and under Orient to a View. 380 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . to reorient the view. under Floor Plans. 13 Select the blue down arrow control at the bottom of the model and drag down to expose the full first level of the model. 14 Select the blue up arrow control in the center of the model and drag up to expose the second floor of the building. click 8 On the View toolbar. right-click Callout of 01 Entry. and click OK. click . 6 In the Rename View dialog. 12 Select the section box in the drawing area. select Floor Plan: Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. 11 On the Design Bar.

Courtyard View Solar Study Plan Cutaway Solar Study Section Cutaway These views will be used in additional lessons in this tutorial. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. under 3D Views. under 3D Views. enter Solar Study Plan Cutaway. right-click {3D}. 17 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. 18 In the Project Browser. 20 On the View Control Bar. and click Rename. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View | 381 . double-click each of the sun study 3D views that you created in this lesson: ■ ■ ■ Solar Study . click Save. 19 In the Rename View dialog. 16 On the View Control Bar. Display study views 22 In the Project Browser. so you can see into the building from the top. click Detail Level ➤ Fine. 21 On the File menu.15 Select the Roof.

You can change the intensity of the shadows by dragging the slider in the Shadow field. MA.Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations In this lesson. and click OK. For the Multi-Day solar study. date. expand 3D Views. 382 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . 8 Confirm that One Day Solar Study . 9 In the Name dialog. enter Summer Solstice. 6 Click the Multi-Day tab. leave the slider at 50.rvt dataset you used in the previous lesson.Boston. and click Duplicate. date range. 3 Select Cast Shadows. 4 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. Dataset Continue to use the customized c_solar_study.Summer and Winter Solstice In this exercise. 7 Create a Single-Day study from an existing study. click . you create a single-day solar study for the summer solstice. For this study. you create a solar study for winter and summer solstice. click . 11 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. click Changing the place in this dialog changes the setting defined for the project. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. single-day. The animations of solar activity at a particular place and time allow you to study the impact of natural light and shadows on the buildings and site. USA. for City. and time range. 5 Click the Single-Day tab. 2 On the View Control Bar. Click the Single-Day tab.Courtyard View. and double-click Solar Study . 10 Under Place. USA is selected. select Los Angeles. expand Views (all). You can create a still. as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. CA. For the Single-Day solar study. and preview the effects of each study as an animation. The Sun and Shadows Settings dialog displays. or multi-day solar study. Los Angeles. and time. and click OK. . you specify the location. Create summer solstice study 1 In the Project Browser. Creating Solar Studies . you specify the location.

20 Proceed to the next exercise. for Date. Under Frame.12 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog: ■ ■ For Date. on the Single-Day tab. Clear Ground Plane at Level. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 18 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. Los Angeles. click OK. 16 In the Name dialog. Create winter solstice study 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click . 2006. and click Duplicate. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. under Frame. confirm that Summer Solstice. select June 22. select Winter Solstice. ■ For Time Interval. you can specify the start and stop times for the solar study. Previewing Solar Study Animation In this exercise. click the control buttons to preview the animation: ■ To display the previous key frame. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. 13 Select Ground Plane at Level. Notice that 01 Entry is selected as the level. you want to see how the shadows fall on the terrain and not for a specific level. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 19 On the File menu. enter Winter Solstice. . You can select the level to be used for shadow display. and click OK. ■ ■ To display the previous sequential frame. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 6 On the View Control Bar. you preview the solar studies you created in the previous exercise. For Time Range. “Previewing Solar Study Animation” on page 383. NOTE If you clear Sunrise to sunset. verify that Sunrise to sunset is selected. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. Los Angeles is selected. 7 On the Options Bar. and click OK. and click OK. 2 On the View Control Bar. enter 20 and press ENTER. select December 22. click . under Sun and Shadows Settings.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. click OK. Los Angeles.Courtyard View is currently displayed. 2006. click . Previewing Solar Study Animation | 383 . Preview winter solstice animation 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study . click To display the next key frame. you can specify to go to a specific frame in the solar study animation: ■ ■ Under Frame. 8 On the Options Bar. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. verify that the value is set to 15 minutes. 14 In this case. enter 10 and press ENTER. click Save.

Each PNG is a still image of a sequential frame in the animation. Annotate view for solar study 1 In the Project Browser. 384 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . you annotate a floor plan to identify different activities for the building and export a solar study for a cutaway view as an AVI video file. ■ NOTE You can stop viewing the animation at any time by clicking Cancel in the Status Bar. 2 Enter ZR and zoom in on the house. 3 Label areas in the house: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. under Sun and Shadows Settings. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. AVI files are standalone video files that can be easily distributed and viewed by colleagues or clients. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. The solar study animation plays. . click .rvt dataset you saved in the previous lesson. click OK. 13 On the View Control Bar. click . double-click 01 Entry. click . Preview summer solstice animation 9 On the View Control Bar. click Text. Click and enter Dining. Exporting Solar Studies In this lesson. PNG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. You also export the winter solstice solar study as a series of PNG format images. Exporting the Study as AVI In this exercise. under Floor Plans. and click OK. Click outside of the text box to end the command. you export the summer solstice solar study as an AVI file. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. Click in the drawing area and enter Living Area. 14 On the Options Bar. on the Single-Day tab. select Summer Solstice. approximately as shown. showing the progression at 15-minute intervals for the location and date specified. click To play the animation from start to finish. 12 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 11 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog.■ To display the next sequential frame. approximately as shown. Los Angeles.

click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. NOTE The building is a shell and you are considering alternative layouts for the interior space. On the Annotation Categories tab. click . On the Options Bar. Los Angeles. 11 To display the section box. verify that Cast Shadows is selected. as shown. expand 3D Views. 6 On the View Control Bar. as shown. select Section Boxes. Click in the drawing area and sketch around the Dining area. 5 In the Project Browser. on the Single-Day tab. Exporting the Study as AVI | 385 . click . click OK. 8 Under Sun and Shadows Settings.4 Sketch rooms: ■ On the Design Bar. click Lines. and double-click Solar Study Section Cutaway. and click OK. ■ ■ ■ Click in the drawing area and sketch a rectangle around the living area. select Summer Solstice. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. and click OK. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Sketching the living and dining room areas in the house and using a solar study to determine where direct light is in the floor plan helps to determine the best layout. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog.

select Frame range. 13 Click the right blue control and drag the right edge of the section box to reveal the roof overhang. select AVI Files. clear Section Boxes. For Dimensions. For File name. if necessary. enter Summer Solar Study Section Cutaway . For Frames per second. you only enter one dimension and the other one is calculated automatically. Under Output Length. and enter ZF to zoom to fit the building to the drawing area. 386 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . To maintain the proportions of the frame. Under Format. and click OK. NOTE ZR for Zoom To Region to make it easier to select the control.12 In the drawing area. enter 450 in the first field (width). and enter 5 to 50. 15 To hide the section box. for Model Graphics Style. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 14 Click outside of the section box. For Save as type.Los Angeles. On the Annotation Categories tab. The equivalent zoom percentage is also set if you specify frame dimensions. 17 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Desktop icon on the left to save the file to the computer Desktop. as shown. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. select the section box. Export as AVI 16 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. verify that the value is set to 15. verify that Hidden Line is selected.

and enter 5 to 10. To view the animation. For Dimensions. click . click Save. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the Desktop. or any single-frame format. and click OK. verify that Hidden Line is selected. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. or GIF. select Winter Solstice. Under Format. select Frame range. For Frames per second. enter 450 in the first field (width). click Save. of the animation separately. for Compressor. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. such as JPEG. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. TIFF. click Save. 19 In the Video Compression dialog. Exporting a Study as PNG In this lesson. verify that the value is set to 15. Limiting the range from 5 to 50 omits these frames. “Exporting a Study as PNG” on page 387. The animation plays as the files are saved to the Desktop. 2 On the View Control Bar. 7 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Desktop icon. The resulting PNG images are date and time stamped. NOTE Uncompressed AVI files can be zipped to reduce the file size. enter Winter Solar Study Section Cutaway . and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. click OK. 20 On the File menu. NOTE When you export to PNG. depending on the Frame Range. Under Output Length. select PNG. the Frame Range was set to just 5 files to avoid cluttering the Desktop. Export as PNG 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study Section Cutaway is displayed. on the Single-Day tab. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. as shown: Exporting a Study as PNG | 387 . it is recommended that you first create a folder to export to because the export process creates several files. for Model Graphics Style.NOTE The first and last few frames (sunrise and sunset) show large triangular shadows from the terrain. Los Angeles. or frame. For Save as type. 18 In the Save As dialog. and click OK.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. 3 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. 6 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. 8 In the Save As dialog.Los Angeles. you export the Winter Solstice Solar Study to create a solar animation that is output as individual ping (PNG format) graphics. For File name. The AVI can then typically be played from within the zip file. BMP. In this example. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. you open each image.

9 On the File menu. you create a 3D view of a plan and create a solar study to animate the effects of natural light on the inside of the building. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study In this lesson.rvt dataset you saved in the previous lesson. 388 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . under 3D Views. you create an internal solar study for a plan to determine where shadows fall inside the building during the warmest part of the day. 2 Select the section box in the drawing area. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. Create plan interior view 1 In the Project Browser. Creating an Internal Plan Study In this exercise. click Save.

as shown. Creating an Internal Plan Study | 389 .NOTE Enter ZF for Zoom To Fit if necessary to see the entire building on the screen. 5 Select the roof. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. Hiding the roof allows you to see how shadows fall on the interior floor of the building. and on the View Control Bar. 3 Select the blue left arrow control and drag it to the left to expose the roof overhang and posts. 4 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Top.

On the Annotation Categories tab. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. In the Save As dialog.Create multi-day solar study 6 To hide the section box. and click OK. click 10 On the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click Save. 390 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . for Compressor. 15 Export the animation: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. under Sun and Shadows Settings.Boston. and click Save. 18 On the File menu. 8 On the View Control Bar. click Shadows ➤ Solar Study Off. USA.Week Interval. for name enter 2pm Los Angeles Plan Cutaway. Notice that the dining area receives full sun during the warmest part of the day. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. 9 On the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. for File name enter 2pm . select Full Frames (Uncompressed). 16 In the Video Compression dialog. click OK. Orienting to True North for Solar Studies In this lesson. For Time Interval. 11 Select Multi Day Solar Study . select One week. and click OK. 17 On the View Control Bar. For Time. 13 Specify values for the multi-day study: ■ ■ ■ . Click the Desktop icon.Los Angeles . 14 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. specify 2:00 pm. 7 Adjust settings on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Shadows ➤ Shadows On. clear Section Boxes. MA. and click OK. and click Duplicate. Click Detail Level ➤ Fine. click the Multi-Day tab. you compare how shadows display when the project is oriented to Project North and when it is changed to True North. and click OK. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Clear Ground Plane at Level so that the shadows fall on the terrain. 12 In the Name dialog.

NOTE Solar Studies do not have a Daylight Savings setting. 7 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. Orienting to True North | 391 . and click OK. 4 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. and click OK. you change the orientation to True North to see how the change in orientation can impact solar study accuracy. 9 Under Date and Time. 5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog.Orienting to True North Drafting convention is that project north is the top of the view. Then. specify 11:00 AM for time. Notice that the shadows display in an upward direction in the cutaway view. and click OK. click . so you may need to make your own adjustment for specific studies. you create still solar studies and observe that the shadows extend straight up when the project is set to the default orientation of Project North. 6 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. select Cast Shadows. 10 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. and select Winter Solstice. click Apply. click . click . to see the sun at its highest point on June 22. change the time back to 12:00 PM. View still solar studies 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study Plan Cutaway is displayed in the drawing area.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. click the Still tab. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 2 On the View Control Bar. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. on the Still tab. 11 Under Date and Time. 8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. For example. select Summer Solstice. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. In this exercise. you would set the time to 1:00 PM rather than 12:00 PM.

12 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. and click OK. under Floor Plans. click . 16 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 13 On the View Control Bar. 392 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . for Orientation. click the Still tab. 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. double-click 01 Entry. click OK. enter 45 and press ENTER to set the angle of rotation. click OK. On the Options Bar. 18 Orient the project to True North: ■ ■ ■ ■ Right-click in the drawing area. NOTE You must go to a plan view to set True North and you must change the view graphics to True North before you can change the angle value. 14 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. under Graphics. In the Element Properties dialog. Notice that the project rotates in the view. Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Rotate True North. select True North. and click OK. and select View Properties. and select Winter Solstice. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. Rotate project to True North 17 In the Project Browser. in the Angle from Project to True North field.

Export animated solar study 26 Export the animation: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. verify that AVI Files is selected. Los Angeles. 19 In the Project Browser. click Summer Solstice. click OK. click . 25 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 23 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. for File name. For Save as type. In the Save As dialog. click the Still tab. 20 Click View menu ➤ Refresh. click the Single-Day tab. Orienting to True North | 393 . 24 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. 22 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. under 3D Views. and click OK. enter True North Summer Solstice Plan Cutaway. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 21 On the View Control Bar. are saved with the project.NOTE Settings for the location and orientation. select Summer Solstice. Notice that the shadows lengthen now that the project is oriented to True North. and click Apply. including the angle from True North.

for Resolution. double-click 01 Entry. Rendering an Interior View Shadow calculations are not reliable for camera views in which a shadow would fall onto the camera’s location in the view. select Winter solstice 2pm in LA. 2 In the Project Browser. 4 Render the scene: ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. 1 In the Project Browser. and click Save. and click in the second dimension field to see the value calculated automatically. NOTE Retain the 45° value for the Angle from project to True North to maintain accuracy in shadow display for this project. select Draft (75 dpi). Click the Desktop icon. and select View Properties. In this exercise.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 29 On the File menu. 3 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. under 3D Views. enter 600 in the first field. under 3D Views. for Orientation. click Save. and click OK. Rendered views will also show shade from plants and seasonal foliage. and click OK. In the Element Properties dialog. for Compressor. double-click each of the following views to review the available views for rendering: ■ ■ ■ to house from SW to west facade of house living area This view most accurately shows the interior of the living room. select Project North. Rendered views do not have this limitation. Rendering Interior Shadow Views In this lesson. for Scene.■ Under Format. 394 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . click GO. This would include some exterior views and most interior views. click Raytrace. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. 28 Once you are finished with the study. On the Options Bar. for Dimensions. under Graphics. capturing it. On the Options Bar. you confirm that the winter solstice has sunlight in the living room by creating one rendering. Refer to “Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs” on page 345 for additional information on rendering. and exporting it as a JPEG image. you render an interior view to observe how sunlight and shadows play in a specific room. JPEG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. The scene is rendered in full color at draft resolution. Since a rendered image is temporary. under Floor Plans. ■ 27 In the Video Compression dialog. Right-click in the drawing area. it is a best practice to change the view graphics setting back to Project North for documentation and annotation purposes: ■ ■ ■ In the Project Browser. you also capture the image and export it as a JPEG file for future use. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway.

click GO. In the Save As dialog. 6 Export the image as a JPEG: ■ ■ on the Design Bar. click Save. so use the Capture Rendering option to save the view in the project. select Presentation (300 dpi). select JPEG. double-click each of the following images: ■ ■ ■ living area summer living area winter to house and studio summer solstice 8 On the File menu. In the Project Browser. Notice that you can clearly see where light enters the windows and how the shadows fall on the floor.■ ■ On the Options Bar. for Resolution. click Capture Rendering. 5 On the Design Bar. and click Save. Rendering an Interior View | 395 . click Export Image. On the Options Bar. for Save as Type. The scene is rendered in high resolution. under Renderings. NOTE Rendered views are temporary. 7 Review some captured images of the building.

396 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies .

sections. Whether the audience is the general contractor. They include the Accurender® Plug-in for Rendering. Advanced Model Graphics. elevations. an outside reviewer. and line quality without the measurement of its thickness is to transcend "building" and to recognize the "architecture. length. To express texture beyond material specifics. there are several options for expressing the architecture. you learn various methods of effectively communicating your design intent to your audience by creating presentation views. tailoring the presentation is just as important as the accuracy of the content. There are two directions you can choose when organizing presentation graphics: realism and stylistics. In this series of exercises. and Section Boxes. you explore the stylistic approach. a consultant. and other quantifiable elements within the context of contract documents. For the realistic approach. the Linework Tool. The architect's primary goal in documentation is to communicate the intent of the design. There remain many options in the software that do not quantify specific dimensions so much as they explain the subjective complexity of the work." The analytique is a classic Beaux Arts method of representing a work of architecture for analysis by graphically showing the relationship among plans." In Revit Architecture. A majority of tools in Revit Architecture 2008 are intended to describe number. You can use the analytique to graphically compare the organization and forms of a particular 397 . type.Presentation Views 12 In this tutorial. In this tutorial. you learn several graphic techniques using these above mentioned tools to create an "analytique. or the client. and details. tutorials on the Accurender features of Revit Architecture can be found under “Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs” on page 345.

Using the pre-built building model.building or space by superimposing and overlapping measured drawings at multiple scales. 398 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . you organize an analytique by creating and modifying several views. Co-house.

Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique In this exercise. change the visibility settings to remove unwanted documentation. you create a presentation floor plan. A copy of the floor plan is created and opened. expand Views (all).rvt. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. In order for the floor plan to fit into the analytique. expand Floor Plans. Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique | 399 . click Training Files. Cnst. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you create a copy of a floor plan in preparation for the analytique. Copy the floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. right-click 2nd Flr.Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique In this lesson. you create a copy of the plan. and place the plan on a dark background for contrast.

This turns off the visibility of all tags. Notice that no annotations display in this view. click Visibility/Graphics. dimensions. Modify visibility/graphics 4 On the View menu. 7 Under Visibility. and clear DOWN Text. expand the Stairs category. Notice the immediate change in the line weights. 5 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. NOTE Stair text is considered part of a stair component rather than an annotation. Down Arrow. UP Text. sections. and click Rename. elevations. click Save As. and so on in this view. 400 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . exit the menu. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. 6 Click the Model Categories tab. this represents the view getting smaller. and click OK. Up Arrow. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. click the Annotation Categories tab. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 8 Click OK. under Floor Plans. click in the drawing area.2 In the Project Browser. enter Presentation Second Floor Plan. 10 On the File menu. click the Scale control and select 1:100. Modify view scale 9 On the View Control Bar at the bottom of the drawing area. right-click Copy of 2nd Flr. Cnst.

double-click it in the Project Browser. and click Advanced Model Graphics. 5 Under Settings. Time and Place. select Cast Shadows. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. At that place. USA for City. navigate to the folder of your choice. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. The Shadow intensity dictates the darkness of the shadow display. and click Save. Using Advanced Model Graphics In this exercise. 8 Select Boston.11 In the Save As directory. and click OK.rvt. ■ Under Sun and Shadows Settings. NOTE Shadows can be cast in all view styles except Wireframe. Under Shadows Properties. ■ Under Intensity. MA. Changes made within the Advanced Model Graphics dialog are applied only to the active view. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. “Using Advanced Model Graphics” on page 401. name the project m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. click the Place tab. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. 7 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. The Sun and Shadows Settings are shared with Accurender and can also be used when rendering. Using Advanced Model Graphics | 401 . click for Place. select By Date. and delete multiple locations in order to analyze a single prototype. you can create. 2 On the View Control Bar. specify the following: ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. the darker the shadows.rvt. select Sun and Shadow Settings. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. on the Still tab. Modify advanced model graphics settings 1 If the Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan is not the active view. modify. specify 35 for Shadow. you can specify one place where the project resides within the world. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 6 Under Settings. The higher the number. click . you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows and add a sense of texture to the new floor plan view. Within a Project.

“Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet” on page 403. under Settings. Turn off the ground plane shadows 13 On the View Control Bar. This gives the plan depth and creates a sensation of space beyond what you can normally express in a plan view. click . however.NOTE For this step. 10 Select Ground Plane at Level. under Sun and Shadows Settings. and click Advanced Model Graphics. This is the level the shadow will be cast upon. click OK. and click OK. 16 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 402 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 11 Click OK. 18 Proceed with the next exercise. Cnst. 14 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. 17 On the File menu. This plan view is now ready to be added to a sheet. 12 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. click OK. be aware that if you enter a different city. you can enter any city you wish. click Save. and select 1st Flr. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. most of the images in the remainder of this tutorial may differ from those on your screen depending on the settings that you choose. Notice the series of shadows based on the specified sun angles. specify 10/27/2006 for Date and 1:00 PM for Time. This turns off the shadows cast on the ground. clear Ground Plane at Level. 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog.

right-click the Design Bar. Create a new sheet 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. you add the floor plan to a sheet and modify the view to enhance the contrast. 7 Zoom in around the viewport. select Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan. and click OK. and click View. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 403 . and notice a view title displays. select Arch Portrait. Notice the blank D-sized sheet is portrait oriented. 5 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet as shown. click Add View.Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet In this exercise. click Sheet. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 6 On the Design Bar. 4 In the Views dialog. The viewport displays at the tip of the cursor. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. TIP If the View tab is not available. click Modify. and click Add View to Sheet. and click to place it.

12 In the Name dialog. select No for Show Title. Notice the viewport no longer displays a view title. click OK. under Graphics.Because the view title needs to be removed for the analytique. you need to create a base of contrast for the centered plan. click Edit/New. Create a new viewport type 8 Select the viewport in the center of the sheet. For this analytique. you need to create a new viewport type that does not display the view title. enter Presentation. click . 9 On the Options Bar. and click Activate View. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. Create a solid fill background for contrast 15 Right-click the viewport. and click OK. To accomplish this. 404 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click Duplicate. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. you will create a dark filled region for the floor plan view. This activates the Presentation Second Floor Plan within the context of the sheet.

18 On the Options Bar. click . Now that you have defined the outer perimeter of the filled region. for Fill Pattern. 19 Draw a rectangle around the view as shown. click Region Properties. use the Trim tool to clean up gaps or overlapping intersections. You may want to zoom in while sketching some details. select Invisible Lines. 21 Starting at the upper-left corner of the building model. 24 In the Type Properties dialog. When you are finished drawing the chain. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. If necessary. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. create the interior chain of lines using Medium or Wide lines. The space between the perimeter of the building model and each line should be equidistant. TIP If you have difficulty sketching using invisible lines. and you should take advantage of endpoint snapping when available. click . click Duplicate. 25 In the Name dialog. You enter sketch mode where you define the line type. click Edit/New.16 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and select Chain. click . 22 On the Design Bar. 17 In the Type Selector. draw a chain of lines around the exterior face of the building model as shown. fill properties. The lines shown below are enhanced for training purposes. 20 On the Options Bar. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 405 . select the entire chain (use TAB) and change the line type back to Invisible lines by selecting it from the Type Selector. you must define the inner perimeter by drawing a chain of lines around the perimeter of the building model. TIP Use care when sketching this chain. click Filled Region. enter Solid Black. under Graphics. and the boundary of the region.

“Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique” on page 406. select Solid Fill. Notice how the filled region enhances the view contrast. Name the sheet 31 Right-click anywhere on the sheet. and click OK.27 In the Fill Patterns dialog. under Name. Preparing the Elevation Analytique In this exercise. click OK. you create an elevation and add it to the presentation sheet that you created in the first exercise. 32 Right-click the edge of the sheet. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. 34 On the File menu. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. under Identity Data. verify that the Background is Opaque and the Color is Black. and click OK. 406 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click Finish Sketch. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique In this lesson. 30 On the Design Bar. and click View Properties. 35 Proceed with the next lesson. you copy an elevation view and use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the view. click Save. and click OK. and click Deactivate View. scroll down. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Presentation for Sheet Name.

right-click Copy of South. expand the Doors category. under Elevations. on the Model Categories tab. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. under Pattern Overrides. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 3 In the Rename View dialog. scroll up. A copy of the south elevation view becomes the active view. Preparing the Elevation Analytique | 407 . 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. and click OK. enter Presentation South Elevation. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. 6 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. and click Rename. clear Visible. 8 Click the Annotation Categories tab. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. click Override. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click OK. and clear Elevation Swing. 9 Click OK. under Visibility. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 4 On the View menu. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. exit the menu. under Visibility. Copy and rename the elevation view 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. right-click South. 7 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. expand Elevations. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. click in the drawing area. under Views (all). 2 In the Project Browser. click in the Walls row. click Visibility/Graphics. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise.

click . click Duplicate. 21 Proceed with the next exercise. 16 In the Name dialog. and click OK. verify that Hidden Line is the selected Style. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Elevation. Time and Place. 11 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. Changes made within the Advanced Model Graphics dialog are applied only to the active view. 408 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . select Cast Shadows. click Save. click OK. 14 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. 18 Specify 2:30 PM for Time.Apply advanced model graphics 10 On the View Control Bar. 13 Under Intensity. 19 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. and click Advanced Model Graphics. you add the Presentation South Elevation view to the Presentation sheet. 12 Under Shadow Properties. 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. “Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet” on page 408. 20 On the File menu. under Settings. you can create more interesting shadows on the elevation view. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet In this exercise. select By Date. specify 35 for Shadow. and click OK. By changing the angle of the sun. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog.

expand Sheets (all).Presentation. click Add View. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Add a view to the sheet 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.rvt. and double-click A105 . select Elevation: Presentation South Elevation. Notice the viewport displays a view title. and click Add View to Sheet. TIP Use the snap feature to snap the viewport to the center reference plane.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. under Views (all). 4 Center the viewport above the presentation plan view as shown. 3 In the Views dialog. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet | 409 .

6 Drag the Presentation South Elevation viewport downward until it shares an edge with the presentation floor plan. Notice the view title no longer displays. 410 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click Modify.5 In the Type Selector. select Viewport: Presentation. 7 On the Design Bar.

You also create a view template for presentation views and apply it to other views. You add silhouette edges and filled regions to the views. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 411 . Preparing a Section View for the Analytique In this exercise. you create and modify the section view that you later add to the analytique.8 On the File menu. 9 Proceed with the next lesson. click Save. Adding Section Views to the Analytique In this lesson. “Adding Section Views to the Analytique” on page 411. you create section and callout views and place them in the analytique.

Create a callout of the section view 5 In the Project Browser. click Section. and double-click Section 2. expand Sections (Callout 1). The section should cut through the center of the building model and extend past the front of the building (lower wall). Add a section in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. To fit correctly in the analytique. select 1: 100 for Scale. To accomplish this. TIP You can also change the scale of the section view after you create it. and use the flip arrows if necessary. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you will create a callout around the building model components within the section view. Cnst. 412 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .rvt.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. this view needs to be rotated 180 degrees. Adjust the controls to modify the extents. 4 Add the section shown below. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Section 2 is added to the building model. double-click 1st Flr. 3 On the Options Bar.

enter Presentation Section 2. Use the controls to adjust the precise location of the boundary and to move the callout head so it is readily identifiable. and click Rename. 16 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 8 Draw a callout around all the building model components within the section view as shown. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. under Sections (Callout 1). under Sections (Callout 1). right-click Callout of Section 2. select 1 : 100 for Scale. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. and click OK. and click OK. double-click Presentation Section 2.6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. clear Visible. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. 12 In the Project Browser. under Pattern Overrides. click the Model Categories tab. 11 In the Rename View dialog. click Visibility/Graphics. click in the Walls row. 10 In the Project Browser. Rename the callout 9 On the Design Bar. click Modify. TIP You can also open the callout in the Project Browser by double-clicking Callout of Section 2 under Sections (Callout 1). click Override. click Callout. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 413 . 15 Under Visibility. 7 On the Options Bar. Modify Visibility/Graphic Overrides 13 On the View menu.

18 Turn off the visibility of the following model categories: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Casework Ceilings Furniture Lighting Fixtures Specialty Equipment 19 Click the Annotation Categories tab. 22 On the Options Bar. clear Crop Region Visible. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. The outer crop boundary (indicated with dashed lines) shows the crop region for annotation elements. Revit Architecture displays 2 boundaries. and click OK. and clear Elevation Swing. The inner crop boundary shows the crop region for model elements. Notice that the crop regions no longer display. 20 Click OK. click . under Extents. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. expand the Doors category. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view.17 Under Visibility. scroll up. Hide the crop boundary 21 Select the crop boundary. clear Annotation Crop. When you select the crop boundary. 414 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .

Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View In this exercise. you apply silhouette edges to contrast the edges of the view. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View | 415 . click Save. 2 On the View Control Bar. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. “Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View” on page 415. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. In addition. 25 Proceed with the next exercise. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. Add shadows to the section view 1 If Presentation Section 2 is not the active view. Notice that the shadows displayed do not offer much contrast.24 On the File menu. under Sections (Callout 1). Click Apply. Under Intensity. Under Shadows Properties. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the section view. specify 35 for Shadow. double-click Presentation Section 2. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise.rvt. and click Advanced Model Graphics. open the Project Browser and. select Cast Shadows. TIP You may need to move the dialog off to the side in order to see the view.

and click OK. TIP You can also use the linework tool to emphasize individual surface edges. select Directly. click OK. select Relative to View. select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style. “Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique” on page 417. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. click . 416 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. ■ Under Sun and Shadows Settings. Notice the shadows on the view provide more contrast and a sense of depth. select Override Silhouettes. 10 Under Silhouette Edges. Notice application of heavy line weights to the edges of the building model. click Duplicate. and click Advanced Model Graphics. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. under Silhouette Edges. was added to this dataset for training purposes. click Save.In the steps that follow. you create a new Sun and Shadow setting in order to make a presentation view with more contrast. 11 On the File menu. and click OK. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Section. and click OK. Apply silhouette edges 8 On the View Control Bar. specify an Altitude of 70 degrees. NOTE The line style. You can modify this line style by selecting Line Styles from the Settings menu. Silhouette Edges. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. 9 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 5 In the Name dialog. under Settings. 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. specify an Azimuth of 135 degrees. TIP The current view of your model may vary from the illustrations in the tutorial based on the placement of the section line in the previous exercise.

The view title no longer displays. 6 On the Design Bar. 4 Move the cursor under the centered plan view as shown.Presentation. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Sheets (all). Add the view to the presentation sheet 1 In the Project Browser. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. you add the Presentation Section 2 view to the analytique and rotate the view 180 degrees. click Add View. 5 In the Type Selector.Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique In this exercise. and click to place the selected view. click Modify. select Section: Presentation Section 2. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique | 417 . select Viewport: Presentation. 3 In the Views dialog. and click Add View to Sheet. double-click A105 . Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise.rvt.

In the steps that follow. To rotate an object. 8 Select the callout that you added previously. move the cursor in the direction of the rotation. under Sections (Callout 1). 9 On the Edit toolbar. click . Using a clock as a reference. double-click Section 2.Notice the section needs to be rotated 180 degrees. 11 Move the cursor a slight distance counter-clockwise. and enter 180 to specify the number of degrees of rotation. Rotate the callout view 7 In the Project Browser. 10 Specify the start radius to the right of the callout. and either enter the degrees of rotation or click to specify the end radius. 418 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . you click to specify the start radius. specify 3 o’clock as the rotation start point. you accomplish this by rotating the callout within the section view. and press ENTER.

Presentation. the callout rotates 180 degrees. and drag it up and to the left as shown. Notice the extents need to be adjusted to fit around the edges of the building model. Notice that the Presentation Section 2 view has rotated 180 degrees and now needs to be repositioned. Reposition the viewport 13 In the Project Browser. 12 Drag the callout extents until they extend just past the perimeter of the edges of the building model as shown. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique | 419 .After you enter the rotation value and press Enter. double-click A105 . under Sheets (all). 14 Select the Presentation Section 2 viewport.

420 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . double-click Presentation Section 2. you create a view template for presentation views in order to reduce repetitive work while creating subsequent views. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise.rvt. Working with a Presentation View Template In this exercise. click Modify. click Save.15 On the Design Bar. 2 On the View menu. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. click OK. 17 Proceed with the next exercise. click Create View Template from View. under Sections (Callout 1). you add the modified view to the presentation sheet. 16 On the File menu. 4 In the View Templates dialog. After applying the view template to a new section view. 3 In the New View Template dialog. and click OK. enter Presentation. “Working with a Presentation View Template” on page 420. Create a presentation view template 1 In the Project Browser.

Apply presentation view template 8 On the View menu. under Sections (Type 1). enter Presentation Section 1. rather than repeat numerous steps to prepare this view for the analytique. double-click A105 . and click Add View to Sheet. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. annotations. select Section: Presentation Section 1. lighting fixtures. under Sections (Type 1). select Viewport: Presentation. Notice the furniture.Create a new presentation view 5 In the Project Browser. Rather than use a callout to rotate this view after it is added to a sheet. 6 In the Project Browser.Presentation. right-click Section 1. Add the view to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. Now. click Apply View Template. and click Rename. 9 In the Select View Template dialog. 13 Place it to the left of the plan view. right-click Copy of Section 1. Working with a Presentation View Template | 421 . 12 In the Views dialog. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Add View. 14 In the Type Selector. click View Properties. you can use a view property to accomplish the same thing. you can simply apply the presentation view template. and click OK. and click Activate View. 15 Right-click the viewport. under Sheets (all). select Presentation. 7 In the Rename View dialog. and elevation swings no longer display. 16 On the View menu. and click OK.

18 Right-click the viewport. under Graphics. click Save. “Working in a Callout Analytique” on page 422. Working in a Callout Analytique Typically. you create a wall section and add it to the right side of the analytique. 19 Move the view so the walls line up similar to the image shown. 20 On the File menu. and click Deactivate View. and click OK. 21 Proceed with the next exercise. such as a tracery window or column capital. select 90 degrees Counterclockwise for Rotation on Sheet. In this exercise. traditional analytiques contain a detail.17 In the Element Properties dialog. 422 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .

and click Rename. 6 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Project Browser. and modify the extents and the callout head location as shown.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. After you add the callout. under Sections (Callout 1). Working in a Callout Analytique | 423 . double-click Presentation Callout. under Sections (Callout 1). right-click Callout of Section 1. 3 Draw a callout around the front balcony as shown. under Sections (Type 1).rvt. click Modify. enter Presentation Callout. Create callout 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. double-click Section 1. select the callout. click Callout. 5 In the Rename View dialog. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

9 In the Element Properties dialog. clear Crop Region Visible. under Extents. This gap is used later in the exercise to place a fill region. 424 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and click OK. clear Annotation Crop.7 Select the crop boundary and adjust the bottom so that there is a small gap as shown. 8 Right-click. and click View Properties.

click View Properties. 19 Right-click the callout presentation view. and click OK. select Viewport: Presentation. and click Deactivate View. under Sheets (all). 14 In the Type Selector. select Custom for View Scale. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. 13 Place it on the right side of the presentation sheet. specify a value of 22 for Scale Value 1. and move it into the position shown below. Modify presentation callout on sheet 16 Right-click the presentation callout viewport. click Modify. 20 Select the callout presentation viewport. Working in a Callout Analytique | 425 . double-click A105 . 17 On the View menu. select Section: Presentation Callout. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar.Add callout to presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. click Add View. 15 On the Design Bar. and click Add View to Sheet.Presentation. and click Activate View. 12 In the Views dialog.

and click OK. Although there are several methods you could use to create these areas of contrast. under Sections (Callout 1). In the steps that follow. 23 On the Design Bar. click Region Properties. 426 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .NOTE If the presentation callout view does not fit properly on the sheet. turn on the crop region from the view properties dialog. Apply filled regions to presentation callout 21 In the Project Browser. the easiest method is to apply filled regions to the presentation callout. select Solid Black for Type. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. The composition set for the analytique is now complete. You can sketch all of them at once or one filled region at a time. and make adjustments as necessary. Click Finish Sketch on the Design Bar when you are finished. click Filled Region. You do not have to replicate the image exactly. sketch the filled regions on the floors and roof shown below. 25 Using the drawing tools on the Options Bar. you add a heavy base to the floors and a poche to the base. When finished. double-click Presentation Callout. hide the crop region and deactivate the viewport. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. The intent of the analytique is not so much a measured construction document as it is a stylized representation of the architectural forms. activate the viewport.

Add poche region 27 Right-click the presentation callout viewport.Presentation. Working in a Callout Analytique | 427 . and sketch the rectangle shown below. click . under Sheets (all). 28 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Filled Region. 29 On the Options Bar. and click Activate View. double-click A105 .26 On the Project Browser.

32 In the Element Properties dialog. 33 Select the crop region. and click OK. 31 On the View menu. click Finish Sketch. and drag the left and bottom extent until the entire poche region displays. select Crop Region Visible. under Extents.30 On the Design Bar. Notice the entire poche region does not display because the crop region does not encompass the new filled region. 428 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click View Properties.

34 On the View menu. “Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes” on page 429. 37 On the File menu. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 429 . 38 Proceed with the next lesson. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views In this exercise. click View Properties. 36 Right-click the presentation callout viewport. 35 In the Element Properties dialog. you create isometric 3D views and use section boxes to create cutaways with shadows. you create three similar isometric views with different cutaways. and click Deactivate View. You then add each view to the presentation sheet. clear Crop Region Visible. click Save. under Extents. and click OK. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes In this lesson. You then add perspective views to the presentation and annotate the sheet. and apply shadows to the views.

Under Shadows Properties. click the Scale control. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. select Cast Shadows. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. specify 35 for Shadow. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. and click OK. 430 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. under 3D Views. Apply advanced model graphics 4 On the View Control Bar. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. click . 3 On the View Control Bar. 7 In the Name dialog. Under Sun and Shadows Settings.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. double-click Isometric. click Orient ➤ Southwest. Under Intensity. 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog.rvt. 2 On the View menu. and click 1 : 200. and click Advanced Model Graphics. click Duplicate. Create southwest isometric view 1 In the Project Browser.

Add a section box to Isometric 2 17 In the Project Browser. Cnst. 15 In the Project Browser. select Override Silhouettes. Specify an Altitude of 45 degrees. Rename and duplicate isometric views 12 In the Project Browser. 11 Under Silhouette Edges. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. select Section Box. right-click Copy of Isometric 1.8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. under 3D Views. under 3D Views. Select Relative to View. and click Rename. double-click Isometric 2. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click Rename. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 431 . in the list. and click OK. enter Isometric 2. Select Ground Plane at Level. under 3D Views. Specify an Azimuth of 135 degrees. under 3D Views. 9 Click OK. 13 In the Rename View dialog. select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style. under Silhouette Edges. and click OK. right-click Isometric. 16 In the Rename View dialog. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. under Settings. under Extents. 18 On the View menu. 14 In the Project Browser. click View Properties. and click OK. and click OK. enter Isometric 1. Notice the section box that displays around the building model. right-click Isometric 1. Select 1st Flr. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Directly.

and click Rename. TIP Notice there is also a rotation symbol. make a duplicate of the view. You can use this to rotate the section box.20 Select the section box. 23 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of Isometric 2. Before turning off the visibility of the section box. 432 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . under 3D Views. These allow you to modify the extents of the section box. 21 Select the controls for the top plane of the section box. right-click Isometric 2. click Modify on the Design Bar. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. under 3D Views. Notice the grips that display on each face of the section box. 22 In the Project Browser. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the second floor as shown. When you are finished.

select Viewport: Presentation. in the Type Selector. under 3D Views. When you are finished. and click OK. 27 On the Annotation Categories tab. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 433 . and click OK. click Modify on the Design Bar. double-click Isometric 2. Notice the section box no longer displays. enter Isometric 3. 29 Select the section box. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the first floor as shown. 26 To hide the section box. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. clear Section Boxes. Modify the section box of Isometric 3 28 In the Project Browser. clear Section Boxes. either adjust the plane location. 34 In the Project Browser.24 In the Rename View dialog. drag Isometric 3 underneath the left section view as shown and. 31 To hide the section box. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. NOTE Depending on the precise location of the top plane of the section box. 30 Select the controls for the top plane of the section box. under 3D Views. 32 On the Annotation Categories tab. and click OK. the stairs and railings may display.Presentation. Add isometric views to the presentation sheet 33 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. 25 In the Project Browser. In such a case. under Sheets (all). Next. double-click A105 . or turn off the visibility of railings and stairs using the Visibility/Graphics dialog. double-click Isometric 3. you stack the three isometric views in a vertical column on the presentation sheet to show the continual erosion of the structure.

in the Type Selector. select Viewport: Presentation. drag Isometric 1 underneath Isometric 2 as shown and. under 3D Views. under 3D Views. select Viewport: Presentation. You resolve this problem in the steps that follow. 434 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . drag Isometric 2 underneath Isometric 3 as shown and. 36 In the Project Browser.35 In the Project Browser. in the Type Selector. Notice the filled region partially covers the view.

Modify filled region boundaries 37 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. 38 Select the poche filled region. The image below shows the lines redrawn. click Lines. select Concrete for Type. and click OK. select Transparent for Background. You change this back to solid fill when you are done. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 435 . under Graphics. This will make it easier to draw lines. 45 On the Design Bar. 42 Click OK twice. and on the Options Bar. click Region Properties. click Edit. 44 Using the drawing tools. 46 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Activate View. 43 On the Design Bar. 41 In the Type Properties dialog. 47 On the Design Bar. redraw the portion of the filled region so it follows the boundary of Isometric 1. select Solid Black for Type. 40 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Deactivate View. 39 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. click Region Properties. and then click Edit/New. 48 Right-click the Presentation Callout view. You may need to use the split tools and trim tools to modify lines along the way.

Create a perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. double-click 1st Flr. click Save. then you specify the eye direction and range. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and specify the range and direction just outside the upper right corner of the building model.rvt. you add it to the presentation sheet. After adding shadows and silhouette edges to the view. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views In this exercise. a cutaway perspective view. 436 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 3 Place the camera in the southwest corner of the view as shown. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise.49 On the File menu. Adding a camera is a two-click process: first you specify the eye location. 50 Proceed with the next exercise. you create the final view for the analytique. “Creating Cutaway Perspective Views” on page 436. Cnst. under Floor Plans. click Camera.

Add shadows and silhouette edges 5 On the View Control Bar. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 437 . Under Sun and Shadows Settings. Under Shadows Properties. click .The view opens immediately. and click Advanced Model Graphics. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. 4 Adjust the crop boundary so the entire building model fits within it. Under Intensity. specify 35 for Shadow. select Cast Shadows. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. 6 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog.

438 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click View Properties.7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. A section box now cuts through the building model. and click OK. and click OK. select Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric for Name. Notice the controls that display on each plane. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. under Extents. and click OK. select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style. 12 Select the section box. under Silhouette Edges. select Section Box. 13 Use the section controls to modify the location of each respective plane until your view resembles the following image. select Override Silhouettes. Add a section box 10 On the View menu. 9 Under Silhouette Edges. 8 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. You may need to adjust the location of the crop boundary as well.

drag 3D View 1 onto the presentation sheet. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog. and click OK. under 3D Views. under Sheets (all). go to the Type Selector and select Viewport : Presentation. double-click A105 . under Change. Clear Crop Region Visible. you must specify the actual size of the image. 17 Under Model Crop Size. and click OK. and click OK. On the Annotation Categories tab. select Scale (locked proportions). click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. After placing it. enter 165 mm for Width. 18 To hide the crop region.14 Select the crop boundary.Presentation. Add the view to the presentation sheet 20 On the Project Browser. Because scale does not apply to perspective views. clear Section Boxes. click Size. 19 To hide the section box. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 439 . click View menu ➤ View Properties. 15 On the Options Bar. and place it in the upper-left corner as shown. 21 In the Project Browser.

select a font. Create new text types 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Edit/New. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. Annotating the Analytique In this exercise. and click OK. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. under Text. select the same font as the title. click Text. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. click Save. enter Description. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.rvt. 2 On the Options Bar. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. under Text. click Edit/New. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. specify a text size of 6 mm. and click OK. click . 23 Proceed with the next exercise. and click OK. specify a text size of 40 mm. and click OK. “Annotating the Analytique” on page 440. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. enter Title. 440 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click Duplicate. click OK. select Text : Title. you complete the analytique by adding text to the presentation sheet. Add a title and description 12 In the Type Selector. 9 In the Name dialog. 5 In the Name dialog. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 13 Add a title to the analytique as shown.22 On the File menu.

14 Click in the drawing window to complete the title text. select Text : Description. 17 On the Design Bar. 15 In the Type Selector. This completes the Presentation Views tutorial. click Modify. click Save. 18 On the File menu. Annotating the Analytique | 441 . 16 Add a description of your choosing and add it to the analytique as shown.

442 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .

Importing and Exporting 5 443 .

444 | Chapter 13 Importing and Exporting

Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

13

In this tutorial, you learn how to export a Revit Architecture building model to Autodesk®3ds Max® or Autodesk®VIZ, where you render it and create a daylight analysis. Autodesk 3ds Max is a professional three-dimensional animation package that provides robust animation, modelling, and workflow functionality for the most complex problems in design visualization and visual effects. Autodesk VIZ is a 3D modelling, rendering, and presentation software application that provides state-of-the-art image creation technologies for communicating and sharing your design intent. For simplicity, this tutorial uses 3ds Max, but the same workflow applies in VIZ. NOTE To complete this tutorial, you must have Autodesk 3ds Max 9 installed on your system. If you do not have 3ds Max installed on your system, or if you have an earlier version of the software, you can download a free trial from the Autodesk website.

445

Render a Revit Architecture Building Model in 3ds Max
In this exercise, you export a Revit Architecture building model to Autodesk 3ds Max and render it. To export the building model to 3ds Max, you select a 3D view of the building in Revit Architecture and export its geometry and data to a DWG file. You then link the DWG file to a new 3ds Max scene. NOTE You can also import the DWG file into 3ds Max, but linking allows you to easily update the 3ds Max scene with any changes that you make to the Revit Architecture model after you initially import it. After you link the DWG file in 3ds Max, you quickly render a view of the building model. The AccuRender materials that are applied to elements in the Revit Architecture building model can be rendered in 3ds Max. After you make some minor adjustments to the materials, you add a daylight system and a sky to produce a more polished rendering.

Dataset
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_Export to 3DS.rvt.

Export a Revit Architecture building model to a DWG file
1 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), expand 3D Views, and double-click To Building. The view of the building that you want to render in 3ds Max displays.

446 | Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

There are a few steps you can take to reduce the geometry and data in the model to make the export process more efficient. You can change the detail level of the view, use a section box to limit the view geometry, and turn off visibility of building elements. Because this building model is small, it is not necessary to use any of these options at this time.

2 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ CAD Formats. 3 In the Export dialog:

For Save in, browse to C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training\Common. Under File Naming, verify that Automatic and Long are selected. If these options are selected, a file name that consists of the dataset name appended with the view name automatically displays for the File Name.

Click Options.

4 In the Export Options dialog, under Solids (3D views only), select Export as ACIS solids, and click OK. The 3D elements in the building model will be exported as ACIS solids, or as 3D objects with multiple sides. If you select to export as polymesh, each element would be exported as an object made up of multiple polygons that are joined, or ''meshed'' together. When exporting to a DWG for use in Max, it is recommended that you export building models to DWG as ACIS solids. 5 In the Export dialog, click Save. 6 In the alert dialog, click OK to ignore the view crop boundary. The building model is exported to a DWG file in the Training location that you specified. 7 Minimize Revit Architecture but keep it open, as you modify the building model and reload it later in the tutorial. Next, link the file to a 3ds Max scene and render it. Link a DWG file to 3ds Max if you anticipate making changes to the building model that you want to reexport to 3ds Max. Import files when you want to export only one iteration of a design for use in 3ds Max.

Create a 3ds Max scene
8 Open 3ds Max, and if the Welcome screen displays, click Close. 9 Click File menu ➤ New. 10 In the New Scene dialog, select New All, and click OK. 11 Click Customize menu ➤ Units Setup.

Render a Revit Architecture Building Model in 3ds Max | 447

12 In the Units Setup dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under Display Unit Scale, select US Standard. Verify Feet w/Fractional Inches is displayed. Under Lighting Units, select American. Click OK.

13 Click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the file as RAC Building.max.

Link the Revit Architecture building model to 3ds Max
14 Click File menu ➤ File Link Manager. 15 In the File Link Manager dialog, click the Presets tab. 16 Under Named Presets, select Revit, and click Modify. This preset contains the desired settings for linking Revit Architecture building models. 17 In the File Link Settings: DWG Files dialog, click the Advanced tab. 18 Verify Use scene material assignments on Reload is selected. This setting ensures that material changes that you make in 3ds Max will be preserved if you reload the DWG file. 19 Click Cancel. 20 In the File Link Manager, click the Attach tab, and click File. 21 In the Open dialog:

For Look in, browse to C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training\Common. Select c_Export_to_3DS.rvt-3DView-ToBuiliding.dwg, and click Open.

22 In the File Link Manager dialog:
■ ■ ■

For Preset, select Revit. Click the Attach tab. Click Select Layers to include. A dialog listing all the layers that were created when you exported the Revit Architecture building model to the DWG displays.

23 In the Select Layers dialog:
■ ■

Select Select from list. Scroll to view the layers, and verify that a check mark displays to the left of each layer name to indicate it is selected. In this tutorial, you want all the layers visible, but you can use this dialog control the layers that display in your 3ds Max scene.

Click OK.

24 In the File Link Manager, click Attach this file. 25 In the Proxy Object dialog, click Yes.

448 | Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

The file opens in the 3ds Max, and 4 different views of the building model display. Only the single camera position that created the 3d To Building view was exported with the Revit Architecture building model.

26 Close the File Link Manager.

Adjust a scene for rendering
27 On the bottom right of the screen, click in the Perspective viewport to set it current. The edges of the viewport are highlighted in yellow when the viewport is current. 28 In the top left corner of the viewport, right-click the Perspective viewport label, and click Views ➤ Camera: To Building.

29 Adjust the view:

■ ■

In the lower-right corner of the screen, click Click in the Camera: To Building viewport.

(Dolly Camera).

Render a Revit Architecture Building Model in 3ds Max | 449

Press and hold the mouse button, and drag the cursor toward you until the view is adjusted as shown.

Render the scene

30 On the Main toolbar, click

(Quick Render).

The scene renders and the rendering displays in the Render window. There are a couple of adjustments that you want to make to the rendering, including the quality of the glass and stone materials. Because this is an exterior view, you also want to add a daylight system (a sun) and a sky in the background.

31 Close the render window. NOTE If you want to save any of your renderings as you progress through this tutorial, at the top of the render window, click .

450 | Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

Improve the quality of the glass and stone materials in 3ds Max

32 On the Main toolbar, click

(Material Editor). (Get Material).

33 In the Material Editor, under the bottom left side of the material slots, click 34 On the left side of the Material/Map Browser, under Browse From, select Scene.

All of the materials applied to the Revit Architecture elements that were exported to the DWG file with the elements display in the right pane of the browser. 35 In the list of materials, select and drag Glass to one of the material slots at the top of the Material Editor.

36 In the Instance (Copy) Material dialog, verify Instance is selected, and click OK. 37 In the Material Editor, change the color of the glass:
■ ■ ■

Under Templates, select Glass - Clear. Under Physical Qualities, for Diffuse Color, click the color swatch. In the Color Selector, specify a golden brown color, and click Close.

38 Change the quality of the stone material on the retaining wall:

■ ■

In the Material Editor, select another slot, and click

(Pick Material from Object).

In the Camera: To Building viewport, move the cursor over the retaining wall and click to select it.

■ ■

In the Material Editor, under Templates, select Stone. Close the Material Editor and the Material Map Browser.

Render a Revit Architecture Building Model in 3ds Max | 451

Add a sun and sky
39 Click in the Top viewport and zoom out until you can see the entire building and the camera. 40 Click Create menu ➤ Lights ➤ Daylight System. 41 In the Daylight Object Creation dialog, click Yes.

42 In the Top viewport, to the right of the building, click and drag to place and size the compass rose. 43 Move the cursor down and to the right to place the sun.

44 On the right side of the screen, locate the Command panel and click 45 Under Daylight Parameters, under Position, click Setup. 46 Under Location, click Get Location. 47 In the Geographic Location list, select Boston, MA, and click OK. 48 Under Site, for North Direction, enter 250. 49 Under Time:
■ ■ ■

(Modify).

For Hours, enter 12. For Month, enter 7. For Day, enter 21.

452 | Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

For Year, enter 2007.

50 Click Rendering menu ➤ Environment, and verify that the Environment tab is displayed. 51 Under Common Parameters, and under Background, click the color swatch, and set the background color to a sky blue color.

Render the scene

52 On the Main toolbar, click

(Render Scene Dialog).

53 At the bottom of the panel, for Viewport, select Camera: To Building, and click the lock that displays next to the selector. The lock lets you adjust the scene in other viewports (which become active as you use them), and then click Render to render the viewport you originally chose. When off, Render always renders the active viewport. 54 Under Output size, click 640 x 480. 55 Click the Advanced Lighting tab, and under Select Advanced Lighting, select <no lighting plug-in>. 56 Click Render. The scene is rendered and displays the adjustments you made to the glass and stone materials, as well as the addition of the daylight system and sky.

57 Click File menu ➤ Save. 58 Proceed to the next exercise, “Rendering Cutaway Views in 3ds Max” on page 453.

Rendering Cutaway Views in 3ds Max
In this exercise, you create and render 2 similar cutaway views of the building model. You use 2 different techniques to create the cutaway views. You create the first view in Revit Architecture using a section box to limit or ''cut away'' geometry from the building in the front of the To Building 3D view. You then export the geometry to the DWG file you created in a previous exercise, and reload it in the Autodesk 3ds Max scene. You learn how to use a section box to limit the building model geometry that you export, a technique that is useful and time-saving when exporting large building models.

Rendering Cutaway Views in 3ds Max | 453

A cutaway view created by a section box in Revit Architecture and rendered in 3ds Max

After you create the first cutaway view, you create a similar view in 3ds Max by adjusting the visibility of the curtain wall elements so they are not visible to the camera, and then rendering the scene in the To Building viewport. Dataset

Continue to use the datasets you used in the previous exercise, c_Export to 3DS.rvt and RAC Building.max.

Create a Revit Architecture cutaway view
1 Maximize Revit Architecture. 2 In the 3D To Building view, right-click, and click View Properties. 3 In the Element Properties dialog, under Extents, select Section Box, and click OK. 4 Click View menu ➤ Zoom Out.

454 | Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

A section box displays around the view.

5 Select the section box so that grips display. 6 Select and move the grips until a cutaway view displays as shown.

7 Click File menu ➤ Save.

Reload the cutaway view in 3ds Max and render it
8 Export the building model to the DWG file again, and reload the DWG in 3ds Max. 9 When the file is reloaded, render it again.

Rendering Cutaway Views in 3ds Max | 455

Create a cutaway view in 3ds Max
10 Open Revit Architecture. 11 In the To Building view, right-click, and click View Properties. 12 To restore the view, in the Element Properties dialog, under Extents, clear Section Box, and click OK. 13 Export the building model to the DWG file again, and reload the DWG in 3ds Max.

14 In 3ds Max, on the Main toolbar, click

(Select Objects by Name).

15 At the top of the Select Objects dialog, enter curtain to select all the Curtain Wall Panel and Curtain Wall Mullion objects that display in the left side of the dialog. 16 At the bottom right of the dialog, click Select. The components of the curtains wall are selected. You will create a named selected set to control the camera’s visibility of these objects.

17 On the Main toolbar, click

(Edit Named Selection Sets).

18 In the Named Selection Sets dialog, click set name. 19 Close the Named Selection Sets dialog.

(Create New Set), and enter Curtain Wall for the selection

20 Right-click in the view, and click Object Properties. 21 In the Object Properties dialog, click the General tab. 22 Under Rendering Control, clear Visible to Camera, and click OK.

23 On the Main toolbar, click

.

A cutaway view, similar to the one that you created with the Revit Architecture section box displays. 24 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating a Daylight Analysis” on page 457.

456 | Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

Creating a Daylight Analysis
In this exercise, you create a daylight analysis of the Revit Architecture building model in 3ds Max. The analysis will uses daylight levels in a specific location to display a spectrum of colors on the building model. The colors indicate the different levels of light incident on each building surface. The blue and green colors indicate low light levels, while the red, yellow, and orange colors indicate high levels of light. A daylight analysis can be a useful tool in determining the sustainability of your Revit Architecture building models.

Dataset

Continue to use the datasets you used in the previous exercise, c_Export to 3DS.rvt, and RAC Building.max. 1 In 3ds Max, click Rendering menu ➤ Environment. 2 In the Environment and Effects dialog, under Exposure Control, select Pseudo Color Exposure Control. Pseudo Color Exposure Control is a lighting analysis tool that provides you with an intuitive way of visualizing and evaluating the lighting levels in your scenes. It maps luminance or illuminance values to pseudo colors that show the brightness of the values being converted. 3 Under Pseudo Color Exposure Control:

Under Display Type, for Quantity, select Illuminance. Illuminance displays values of light incident on surfaces.

■ ■ ■ ■

For Style, select Colored. For Scale, select Logarithmic. Under Display Range, for Min., enter 100. For Max, enter 8000. The display range sets the lowest and highest values to represent in the rendering. Although this tutorial provides display range values, when you create your own daylight analysis you will probably want to test different display ranges to get the results that you want.

4 On the Main toolbar, click

(Render Scene).

Creating a Daylight Analysis | 457

The scene renders and displays a true color rendering in the Render window. The 256 color daylight analysis is then created.

5 If desired, in the Render window, click 6 Save and close the 3ds Max scene. 7 Maximize Revit Architecture.

, and save the file.

8 Save the exercise file with a unique name, or close the file without saving it.

458 | Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

Importing SketchUp Files

14

The ability to import SketchUp® files directly into Revit Architecture allows you to quickly integrate sketch concepts into the Revit environment and reuse the SketchUp model without having to manually rework it. Once the model has been imported, you can easily add detail with Revit components. In this tutorial, you import a SketchUp file into a Revit Architecture project as an in-place mass family.

After you import the SketchUp model, you create a small building from the front mass form. You use the mass faces of the mass form to create Revit elements, such as walls, curtain walls, and roofs, that compose the building.

459

460 | Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files

Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass
In this exercise, you create a Revit Architecture project, and import a SketchUp model into the project as an in-place mass family. The in-place mass family is saved only in context of the project, and not in the library.

Create a Revit project
1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. 2 In the New Project dialog, under Template file, click Browse. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric.rte. 4 In the New Project dialog, click OK. 5 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 6 In the Save As dialog, for File name, enter Import SketchUp, and click Save.

Import a SketchUp model
7 On the Design Bar, click the Massing tab. TIP If the Massing tab does not display in the Design Bar, right-click in the Design Bar, and click Massing on the context menu that displays. 8 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar, click Create Mass. 9 In the informational dialog, click OK. 10 In the Name dialog, enter SketchUp Model, and click OK. 11 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. 12 In the Import/Link dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Click the Training Files icon. Double-click the Common folder. For Files of type, select SketchUp Files. Click the Sketchup file, buildings.skp. Under Import or Link, for Layers, select All. This option allows you to select what to import: all elements, visible elements, or select from a list.

■ ■ ■

Under Layer/Level Colors, select Preserve colors. Under Positioning, select Manually place, and select Cursor at center. For Place at level, select Level 1. In a new project, Level 1 is the only choice. An existing project may have options for many levels to choose from, depending on the complexity of the project.

Under Scaling, for Import units, select Auto-Detect.

Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass | 461

You can have Revit automatically detect and convert incoming units to project units (Auto-Detect) or you can specify the units for the SketchUp drawing if you know that information.

Click Open.

The model displays in the view on the Level 1 floor plan. 13 Click to place the lower right building inside of the elevation markers.

14 On the View toolbar, click

.

15 Enter ZR to zoom in on the lower right building. 16 On the Design Bar, click Finish Mass. NOTE A warning message displays because the mass contains only mesh geometry. The mesh geometry (faces) will be used in another exercise to create Revit elements, such as walls, curtain walls, and roofs. 17 In the warning dialog, click the Close button.

18 Proceed to the next exercise, “ Creating a Building from Mass Faces” on page 462.

Creating a Building from Mass Faces
In this exercise, you use the faces of the front mass form to create Revit Architecture elements, such as walls, curtain walls, and roofs, that compose the building. The mass faces are not converted to Revit elements: they remain in the project. You turn their visibility off to view only the building.

462 | Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files

After you create the building from the mass faces, you modify the roofs and add doors to complete the design.

Create roofs from mass faces
1 Zoom in to the front mass form, and on the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.

2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar, click Roof by Face. 3 In the Type Selector, verify Basic Roof: Generic - 400mm displays. 4 On the Options Bar, for Level, verify Level 2 is selected. 5 Move your cursor over the top face of the left mass, and when the cursor displays a plus sign, select the face so that it highlights in red. The cursor displays a plus or a minus sign, indicating that you are adding or subtracting faces to and from the selection.

6 On the Options Bar, click Create Roof. A roof is created from the mass face. (It is difficult to see the roof in the current view. To see the new roof, on the View toolbar, click to turn off mass visibility in the view. Click again to display masses.)

7 With the Roof by Face command still active, on the Options Bar, verify that Select Multiple is selected. This option enables you to select more than 1 face when you create a roof. 8 Select the top 3 faces of the mass on the right.

Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 463

9 On the Options Bar, click Create Roof. 10 Adjust the view:

■ ■

On the View toolbar, click

.

In the Dynamic View dialog, click Spin, and move the cursor in the drawing area until you can see the middle mass.

11 Right-click, and click Cancel to end the Spin command. 12 On the Design Bar, click Roof by Face. 13 Select the top 4 faces of the mass.

14 On the Options Bar, click Create Roof.

464 | Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files

20 In the Type Selector. click Modify to end the command. 16 On the View toolbar. 19 On the Design Bar. click . 21 On the Options Bar.200mm displays. verify Basic Wall: Generic . and adjust the view so you can see the front of the mass form. to turn off the mass visibility in the view.15 On the Design Bar. and display only the roofs that 17 Click again to redisplay the masses. select Core Face: Exterior. 22 Select the 4 mass faces that have been highlighted in red below. Create walls from mass faces 18 On the View toolbar. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 465 . click you created. This option lets you create the walls on the inside of the mass. for Loc Line. click Wall by Face.

28 On the Options Bar. 26 In the Type Selector. 24 Click to redisplay the masses. 466 | Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files . verify Curtain System: 1500 x 3000mm displays. 29 Using the same technique. 27 Select the left face of the left mass. click Curtain System. Create curtain systems from mass faces 25 On the Design Bar. create the 2 curtain systems shown below. click to view only the walls and roofs. click Create System.23 On the View toolbar.

click . select the other wall. click Roof by Face. and adjust the view so you can see the back of the mass forms. 32 Select the 5 walls highlighted below. press TAB until the desired wall highlights. and on the Options Bar. click Wall by Face. Create walls from mass faces 31 On the Design Bar. and select it.30 On the View toolbar. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 467 . 34 Select the mass face shown below. click Create Roof. TIP If you have difficulty selecting a wall that shares an edge with another wall. Create a roof from a mass face 33 On the Design Bar.

and on the Options Bar. 36 Select the 4 mass faces shown below. click Create System. 39 Click to redisplay the masses. click Wall by Face. click Curtain System. 38 On the View toolbar. and select the mass face shown below.Create additional curtain systems from mass faces 35 On the Design Bar. click to view the building that you have created. Create the final wall 37 On the Design Bar. 468 | Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files .

42 Place the camera and its target: ■ ■ ■ On the View tab of the Design Bar. specify a point to place the camera. roofs. In the far left corner of the building that you created. The perspective view created by the camera displays. 43 Resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can see the building. to view only the walls. 41 Zoom out beyond the drawing extents. specify a point for the camera target.Create a 3D perspective view of the building with a camera 40 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. Below the right corner of the view. click in the view. The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display. double-click Level 1. and curtain systems that make up your building Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 469 . 44 On the View toolbar. and click in the drawing area to hide the grips. as shown. click Camera.

Click OK. Under Grid 1 Pattern. for Justification. click Modify. for Justification.You may need to resize the view again. click 47 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . and select the left curtain system in the view. Change the justification of the curtain systems 45 On the Design Bar. click . Modify the roofs 49 On the Views toolbar. select Center. Click the frame to display its grips. Under Grid 2 Pattern. 470 | Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files . 48 Repeat the preceding steps to change the justifications of the 2 other curtain systems in the view. 46 On the Options Bar. select Center.

56 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 58 Add doors to the building as shown below. 52 In the Project Browser. and move the roof edges as shown below. 51 Right-click. Add doors to the building 54 In the Project Browser. click Door. and click Cancel to end the command.50 Select each roof to display its grips. verify M_Single-Flush: 0915 x 2134mm displays. and adjust the view so you can see the front of the building. 57 In the Type Selector. double-click {3D}. 55 On the View toolbar. under 3D Views. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 471 . double-click 3D View 1. 53 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. under 3D Views. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. click .

472 | Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files .59 Save and close the drawing.

Creating Families 6 473 .

474 | Chapter 15 Creating Families .

or other parameter variables as designed by the family creator. Even though various types within a family can look completely different. thus the term family.” The term family describes a powerful concept used throughout Revit Architecture to help you manage your data and make changes easily. they are still related and come from a single source. This keeps everything coordinated and saves you the time and effort of manually keeping components and schedules up to date. each with a different size. material set. Each family element can have multiple types defined within it. Changes to a family type definition ripple through the project and are automatically reflected in every instance of that family or type within the project. shape. In this tutorial. you learn about the various types of families and the Family Editor. 475 .About Families and the Family Editor 15 All elements in Revit Architecture 2008 are “family based.

Family templates assist you in creating and manipulating component families. Some family types are pre-defined within Revit Architecture and cannot be created or modified outside of the project environment. In this lesson. and partition wall styles. Introduction to Families Most families are created in the Family Editor and saved as separate files with an . you learn about the three types of families and how they are used within a project and how they are created. transfer them from one project to another. There are. such as a dome roof. you create a family within predefined templates that contain the intelligent objects needed to create the particular family type. Family templates are either host-based or standalone. and furniture. if you create a family called "double-hung window" that includes types with several sizes. You can load them into projects. You can either duplicate and modify an existing component family or create a new component family based on a variety of family templates. and when and how to use it. however.Using Families and the Family Editor One of the many advantages of using Revit Architecture is the ability to create your own families of components without having to learn a complex programming language. because there is only one file to track. For example. and roofs. Walls. 476 | Chapter 15 About Families and the Family Editor . The basic walls system family. the types would all be saved as one file which can then be loaded into any project. This makes file management much easier. Revit Architecture has three types of families: ■ ■ ■ System Standard Component In-place System Families System families are pre-defined within Revit Architecture and comprise principle building components such as walls. and save them from a project file to your library if needed. NOTE You can use “Transfer Project Standards” to copy system families from one project to another. trees. All different types that you create are stored with the master family file. Standard Component Families Standard component families are loaded by default in project templates. Using the Family Editor. An example is a door family hosted by a wall family. floors. Standalone families include columns. for example. The following illustration shows different types within the basic walls family. You work with the Family Editor to create and modify components. exceptions to this rule. exterior. You can duplicate and modify existing system families.rfa extension. In addition. there is another type of family that allows you to create any shape or form required for a particular project and have Revit Architecture recognize it as a particular component type. Host-based families have components that require hosts. but you cannot create new system families. has wall types that define interior. while many more are stored in component libraries. You also learn about the Family Editor.rfa extension. foundation. You provide the information necessary to uniquely describe the family geometry. and roofs are examples of these types of families. Standard component families can exist outside of the project environment and have an . floors. generic.

The following illustration shows a building model of the Pantheon without a roof and with an in-place roof family. you can drag it into the document window.The following illustration shows host-based window and door family components in a wall. Family element visibility can be dependent of your viewing direction. or you can load it using the Load From Library. click Load From Library ➤ Load Family. However. Introduction to the Family Editor You can use the Family Editor to create both real-life building components and graphical/annotation components. To add a family to your project. it is saved with the project. You have a choice of categories when you create in-place families. Families store all of the necessary geometry to display the two-dimensional (2D) and three-dimensional (3D) versions of particular objects. In-place Families In-place families are either model or annotation components in a particular project. and when to use it. you need to reload the family in the project to see the updated family. 4 Select the family file name and click Open. elevation. if you change the original family. such as plan. Adding a family to a project 1 Open or start a project. and also a standalone furniture family component. you learn about the Family Editor. In this section. you learned about the different types of Revit Architecture families and when to use them. and the category that you use determines the component’s appearance and display control within the project. for example. Families are listed in the Project Browser under their respective component category. or 3D. Load Family command on the File menu. 2 On the File menu. In the final exercise. as well as the level of detail associated with that view. Introduction to the Family Editor | 477 . After the family has been loaded in the project. custom wall treatments. 3 Navigate to the library or location of the family. You do not have to carry the original family file along with the project. how to access it. You create in-place families only within the current project. so they are useful for objects unique to that project.

5 Finally. With Revit Architecture open. you learn when to use the Family Editor. General procedure for creating a standard component family 1 Select the appropriate family template. you can search the component library loaded on your local hard drive. 3 Next. consider checking the web library and other web resources. This will be apparent because the only Design Bar tab available is Family. it should be available within the Type Selector. When the family opens. 7 Specify 2D and 3D geometry display characteristics with sub-category and entity visibility settings. if you have exhausted your external resources. It is far easier to modify an existing component within the Family Editor than to create it from scratch. Within the Windows® environment. such as newsgroups. 9 Save the newly-defined family. and the general procedure for creating a standard component family. 478 | Chapter 15 About Families and the Family Editor . presume it is a bay window that you require. you can double-click any file with an . you should create a new component family using one of the family templates as a starting point. You can have a project open and the Family Editor open simultaneously. click File ➤ New ➤ Family. When to use the Family Editor During the design process. open it in the Family Editor. How to use the Family Editor You can access the Family Editor in several ways. 3 Lay out reference planes to aid in drawing component geometry. and click Open. 2 Define sub-categories for the family to aid in controlling visibility of the object. Also consider any internal family libraries that may exist on the network. how to access it. select the appropriate template. 4 Add dimensions to specify parametric component geometry. In this case. There is a logical thought process that you should follow: 1 Is there a component of this type already loaded into this project? If so. To start a new family. it opens within the Family Editor. you will inevitably come to a point where you need a specific component for your design. If you find a close match. you should then try to find the component that most closely resembles it. 6 Flex the new model to verify correct component behavior. 4 If you can’t find the component you require. 8 Define family type variations by specifying different parameters. and then load it into the project.rfa extension and it will open Revit Architecture in the Family Editor.In this exercise. modify it as needed. navigate to a family file. you can click File ➤ Open. 2 If there isn’t a component family loaded in the project. and then load it into a new project and see how it performs. 5 Add label dimensions to create type or instance parameters. and click Open.

In each lesson. In addition. you create it within the project file. This allows you to create the family in the context of the current project. you create an in-place family. you learn how to create a different type of component. not within the Family Editor. and several annotation families. a lighting fixture. 479 .Creating Components in the Family Editor 16 In this tutorial. Using the installed templates. you start with a simple door family and then move onto a window family. you learn how to create specific Revit Architecture 2008 families. When you create an in-place family. You create a furniture family.

it automatically cuts the solid. The sketches must not touch or intersect each other. There can be more than one closed loop in the sketch but they must not touch or intersect each other. You can also join the geometry of different solids with the Join Geometry tool. Blend. use the Cut Geometry tool to create the cut. There are four different methods to create Solid geometry and/or Void geometry in the Family Design Bar: Extrusion. and export settings for selected geometry. Step 3: Use the Element Properties dialog to define the reference planes that represent the origin of the family. Revolve: The sketch for a revolved object must be a closed loop with no intersection between the sketch lines. Base and Top. Solids and Voids are sketch based. ■ ■ ■ When a void is placed on a solid. fill patterns. lineweight settings. if the family includes a host. tests at this point ensure that the skeleton of the family works correctly. Step 2: Define additional subcategories. Each sketch is set to a different height. Note that no geometry is created. and Sweep. Step 10: Repeat the flex procedure until reasonably complete. To quit the sketch mode. continue to incrementally add reference planes. The first line of the path defines the work plane for the profile. Step 11: Test the family in a project environment. line patterns. Step 7: Add 2 or more types in the Family Types dialog with different values for the parameters. Sweep: A sweep contains two sketches: a 2D Path that can be a closed or open. and a Profile that must be a closed loop with no intersection between the sketch lines. both of which must be a closed loop with no intersection between the sketch lines. materials. Step 8: Test (flex) the family: switch between the types. and pin those reference planes. you can no longer select or modify an element that is not in the sketch. line colors. create different host types for testing purposes. Step 5: Dimension the reference planes and create parameters. build geometry. Blend: A blend contains two sketches. click Finish Sketch on the Design bar. You can unjoin solids or cancel the cutting of a void on a solid using commands available on the Tools toolbar: ■ ■ ■ ■ Join Geometry Unjoin Geometry Cut Geometry Don’t Cut Process Overview: Creating a Family Follow this best practice process for creating a family: Step 1: Select a family template. If you place the void before you add the solid. 480 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Step 4: Create the skeleton of the family by adding reference planes in all required views. Revolve. The sample below shows a start angle of 0° and an end angle of 180°.Creating 3D Geometry All tools for creating 3D geometry can be accessed in the Family Design Bar. Step 6: If the selected family template is a host-based template. When you are in sketch mode. ■ Extrusion: The sketch for an extrusion must be a closed loop with no intersection between the sketch lines. and test after each step. Step 9: Create a single level of 2D and 3D geometry and lock it to the selected reference planes. Subcategories are used to define visibility settings. if required. switch between the different host types. The start and end angles of the revolution can be defined in the Revolution properties.

therefore new reference planes are required in plan and elevation views. and the family contains 2 reference planes in this floor plan. The floor plan Ref. 2 Create a horizontal reference plane above the existing horizontal reference plane. click to pin the reference planes. click Ref Plane. 5 While pressing CTRL. 2 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. and click OK. Select a family template 1 Close all open projects or families. click Training Files. 8 Using the same method.rft. 6 Select the horizontal reference plane named Center (Front/Back). click 7 In the Element Properties dialog. NOTE The direction of the reference planes is not important. Level is open. . verify that Other ➤ Defines Origin is selected. You can control which reference planes are used as origin in the Element Properties dialog. The intersection of these reference planes now defines the origin and the insertion point of the family in plan view. and click OK. You should name reference planes to easily identify them in all views. select both reference planes. select Metric Furniture. on the Edit toolbar. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. 1 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. The furniture family in this lesson has the shape of two boxes. Defining the Origin of a Family | 481 .Defining the Origin of a Family The intersection of 2 reference planes in a view defines the origin and the insertion point of a family in a project. 3 Create a vertical reference plane to the left of the existing vertical reference plane. and on the Options Bar. 4 Navigate to Metric ➤ Templates. and create one below. You have created a new furniture family. verify that Defines Origin is selected for the Center (Left/Right) reference plane. you define the skeleton of the family with reference planes in plan and elevation views before you create geometry. and click Open. Adding Reference Planes Next. and create one to the right.

4 Click Modify. Name reference planes 5 Select the left reference plane and. click . 482 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . on the Options Bar. and click OK. enter Left. for Identity Data ➤ Name. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. You name reference planes so that you can identify them in different views.

top). as shown. If a reference plane defines the left edge of a family. 2 In the Element Properties dialog. name the other reference planes Right. and on the Options Bar. for Other ➤ Is Reference. the strong reference is always captured first. These are predefined system priorities that define a direction (for example. 1 Select the Left reference plane. Is Reference Value Not a Reference Definition The reference plane can be used in a family. Defining Priorities for Reference Planes | 483 . The reference allows minor strength snapping. Weak Reference Strong Reference Directional References According to these rules. but cannot be accessed in a project for alignment or dimensioning. Front. Shape handles display if the reference plane is dimensioned with an instance parameter. The priority is specified as the Is Reference value in the Element Properties dialog for the reference plane. When you dimension a family and a strong and a weak reference are close together. Shape handles display if the reference plane is dimensioned with an instance parameter. and click OK. use Left for the Is Reference value. The reference plane can be accessed in a project for alignment or dimensioning. click . The reference does not snap and shows no shape handles. Defining Priorities for Reference Planes Revit Architecture includes several predefined priorities that you can apply to a reference plane. and Back. The reference plane can be accessed in a project for alignment or dimensioning. The reference plane allows minor strength snapping. define the priorities of the reference planes you have created. These behave the same as strong references.7 Using the same method. right. select Left. left.

2 Dimension the vertical reference planes: ■ ■ ■ Select one of the new reference planes. Click the temporary dimension. For Group parameter under. Note that the Length parameter has been added to the dimension string. and press ENTER. Dimensioning Reference Planes The dimension controls the behavior of the location of reference planes. Click OK. Repeat for the other reference plane. enter 300mm. and press ENTER. and Back).3 Using the same method. enter Length. 5 Click Modify. We want drive Length. Click the temporary dimension. select Dimensions. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. Front. enter 750mm. 484 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 3 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. Repeat for the other reference plane. select Add Parameter. and Height as parameters of the furniture family. and click above the planes to place the dimension. 7 On the Options Bar. The dimension can have a fixed value or can be driven by a parameter. for Name. Width. 6 Select the dimension line. 1 Dimension the horizontal reference planes: ■ ■ ■ Select one of the new reference planes. click Dimension. specify the Is Reference value to correspond to the name of each reference plane (Right. 4 Select the Left reference plane and the Right reference plane. for Label.

dimension the outer horizontal reference planes with the Width parameter. Dimensioning Reference Planes | 485 . dimension the horizontal reference planes.9 Using the same method. click Dimension. Add a multi-segment dimension 10 On the Design Bar. and click the EQ symbol above the dimension. click to place the dimension. 11 Click each of the vertical reference planes. 12 Using the same method.

and click . 14 Create 2 horizontal reference planes and 2 vertical reference planes within the existing outer reference planes. Now the reference planes can be used in the family. you need to specify the Is Reference values. 486 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Because the base planes should not be used as a reference for dimensions or alignments. and press ENTER. but do not appear in the project. Base Right. 16 While pressing CTRL. 18 Click the Base Left reference plane. Position and dimension the 4 new reference planes with a fixed distance from the outer reference planes. click the base reference planes. name them Base Left. and Base Back. select Not a Reference. 15 Using the Element Properties dialog. Base Front. for Other ➤ Is Reference. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. click Ref Plane. enter 50mm for the left temporary dimension.Add base reference planes 13 On the Design Bar. and click OK.

and lock the dimension. Dimensioning Reference Planes | 487 . 21 Select the Left and Base Left reference planes. 20 On the Design Bar. position the remaining new reference planes.19 Using the same method. click Dimension.

select Not a Reference. the family contains a level and a reference plane that defines the origin of the family in the elevation view. and lock the dimensions. Next. under Elevations.22 Using the same method. you add a reference plane and the Height parameter of the family in the Front view. You can dimension reference planes in plan. 24 On the Design Bar. and section views. dimension all other reference planes for the base with the outer reference planes. enter Base Bottom. 25 Create 2 horizontal reference planes above the existing horizontal reference plane. and click 27 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . 23 In the Project Browser. 28 Change the lower temporary dimension to 150mm. For Identity Data ➤ Name. Under Is Reference. Make sure that you use consistent views to add dimensions. Click OK. By default. The front view displays. 26 Select the middle reference plane. 488 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . double-click Front. elevation. click Ref Plane.

For Identity Data ➤ Name. and save the file as Cabinet. 35 Dimension the lower reference plane and the Top reference plane. for Label. navigate to Training/Metric/Families. 38 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. The basic skeleton of the furniture family is completed. for Name. In the next exercise. Click OK. enter Height. on the Options Bar. you create 2 types of the family in the Family Types dialog. Under Group parameter under. 37 Select the last dimension added. and click to place the dimension.29 Select the top reference plane and change the temporary dimension to 1450mm. 34 Lock the dimension. select Add Parameter. 32 On the Design Bar. click 31 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . Under Is Reference. enter Top. Click OK. 39 Click File menu ➤ Save. 36 Click Modify. click Dimension. select Dimensions.rfa. select Top. 33 Select the lower reference plane and the Base Bottom reference plane. Dimensioning Reference Planes | 489 . 30 With the top reference plane still selected.

enter 2800. under Floor plans. create a new type named 1000 x 2000 x 2800. Family types allow you to predefine variations of a family. 2 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. create a new type named 800 x 1000 x 1800. Note that the reference planes and the dimensions adjust according to the entered values. enter 1000. Level. 5 Using the same method. each type is represented with selected parameters. 3 In the Family Types dialog. for Width. enter 1800. enter 1000. for Name. 490 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 6 In the Family Types dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 11 Click OK. clicking OK adjusts the geometry and closes the dialog. 8 Using the same method. 1 In the Project Browser. for Height. parameters. but no geometry has been added. and dimensions are specified. NOTE In order to see changes applied to the reference planes. double-click Ref. click Family Types. the types defined in the family editor appear in the project. enter 800. clicking Apply adjusts the geometry without closing the dialog. When a family is loaded in a project. Family types are also a good way to test your family for correct behavior. 4 In the Name dialog. and click OK. Best practice is to perform the first tests when the reference planes. For Length. enter 600 x 1500 x 1600. for Width. enter 2000. For Length. check the family as often as possible by switching between different types. 10 Click Apply. for Height. under Family Types. click New. NOTE In the Family Types dialog.Managing Family Parameters and Family Types Parameters and their values can be managed in the Family Types dialog. 7 Click Apply. Note that the name of the type you have created is displayed in the Name selection box at the top of the dialog. 9 In the Family Types dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. click in the titlebar of the Family Types dialog and drag it so that both the dialog and the drawing area are visible.

Creating Geometry In this lesson. Lock geometry to reference planes | 491 . Defining Work Planes Any solid/void form is created on a work plane. In such an instance. and click Edit Work Plane on the Options bar. Reference planes have the ability to define a work plane if they are named. You constrain the extrusions to the reference planes you created in previous exercises. double-click Ref. Creating Solid Forms Use the simplest form to create solid geometry for a furniture family. create an extrusion from the plan view.Lock geometry to reference planes Locking sketch lines: Lines of a sketch can be locked to a reference plane in plan view to ensure that the edge of the solid is maintained if the dimension of the reference plane changes. Sketch an extrusion 1 In the Project Browser. where you can define the plane. you only need to lock the top and bottom edges of the solid geometry. select the geometry. The Family Editor offers multiple tools to set a work plane current: Define a work plane before adding geometry: Using the Work Plane dialog. This option will display the Work Plane dialog. there is an option on the Sketch tab of the Design Bar to Set Work Plane. you use extrusions to model the solid geometry of a cabinet family. Level. Because you lock the planar edges in plan view. 2 On the Design Bar. Define a work plane in sketch mode: While in sketch mode. you access the Work Plane dialog by clicking (Plane) on the Tools toolbar. under Floor Plans. Make sure that you have set an appropriate work plane when you create 2D or 3D geometry in your family. you can select a named reference plane or define a work plane by picking a plane or a line in the drawing area before you sketch geometry. edges of a solid form can also be locked to reference planes. In that case. Change a work plane for existing geometry: You can also use the Work Plane dialog to change the work plane for existing geometry in a drawing. Locking edges of solid/void forms: In elevation view. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. A work plane is a planar surface on which you can add sketch lines or others components.

3 On the Options Bar. The sketch of the extrusion is now locked to the outer reference planes in plan view. do not sketch directly on the reference planes. When the parameters Length and Width change. An example of sketch lines drawn off of reference planes An example of sketch lines aligned on the desired reference plane 492 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 5 Lock each line of the sketch with the reference plane. click Finish Sketch. NOTE Only sketch directly on the desired reference planes when the situation is clearly arranged. with multiple reference planes or when you need to sketch with the Line tool. the extrusion is changed accordingly in plan view. When the setup is more complex. 6 On the Sketch tab. click . You can use the Align tool to align the sketch lines with the desired reference planes. 4 Sketch the rectangle directly on the outer reference planes.

under Elevations. Creating Solid Forms | 493 . double-click Front. 10 Lock the dimension. click (Align). and click the top edge of the extrusion to align to this reference plane. 9 Select the Top reference plane as the alignment reference. 8 On the Options Bar. NOTE You can also drag the top edge of the solid geometry with the extrusion shape handle to the top reference plane and lock it.Adjust extrusion height 7 In the Project Browser.

click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 22 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. and lock all the sketch lines with the reference planes. under View Specific Display. 21 Click the base geometry and on the Options Bar.11 Align the bottom of the extrusion to the Base Bottom reference plane and lock the dimension. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Visibility. 20 Click Modify. 17 In the Project Browser. 494 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . under Elevations. 19 Select the Base Bottom reference plane as the alignment reference. click . 18 On the Tools toolbar. The base should display only in elevation and 3D views. under Floor Plans. and click OK. 15 Sketch the rectangle directly on the reference planes for the base (the inner reference planes). Create the base geometry 12 In the Project Browser. 14 On the Options Bar. 23 Save the file. click . Level. 13 On the Design Bar. clear Plan/RCP. click Finish Sketch. double-click Ref. and click the top edge of the extrusion to align to this reference plane. double-click Front.

6 Draw a line from the top left corner of the reference planes to the lower right corner. double-click Ref. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. 8 While pressing CTRL. NOTE You have to exit Symbolic Line mode to lock the geometry. lines need to be added as symbolic illustration in plan views. the software automatically creates the correct plan. 12 In the Family Types dialog. select both lines and. elevation. they show only in views that are parallel to their creation view. Hiding the existing solid geometry before you create the symbolic lines helps you create the lines on the intersections of the reference planes. click Visibility. clear Coarse. click Family Types. and section views. By design. For the furniture family. the lines need to appear in medium and fine detail levels. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. and section views of the family.Creating 2D Geometry You can create families using 3D and 2D geometry. When you use 3D geometry. 3 On the View Control Bar. The family geometry should change each time you apply a different type. The lines are greyed out. 10 On the View Control Bar. use model lines to display additional lines in the 3D view of the family. 5 On the Options Bar. and click the locks to create the constraint. Symbolic lines: these can be added in plan. click Detail Level ➤ Fine. Level. Click Modify. and click Apply. under Detail Levels. select the symbolic line. but not in coarse. 7 Draw a symbolic line from the lower left corner to the top right corner. There are 2 methods for adding 2D geometry available from the Family tab of the Design Bar: Model lines: these can be added in all views. verify that the Line tool is active. and lock the geometry. as the current displayed detail level is Coarse. 4 On the Design Bar. 13 Click OK. Creating 2D Geometry | 495 . For example. on the Options Bar. Test the family 11 On the Design Bar. click Symbolic Lines. and lock the geometry. 14 On the View Control Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. select a different family type. 2 While pressing CTRL. and click OK. under Floor plans. elevation. select the base geometry and the furniture geometry. 9 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. The lines display again. They are view direction specific. Model lines and symbolic lines can also be constrained to reference planes.

The geometry of the furniture family is complete. This opens a predefined 3D view. under 3D views. 496 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Save a 3D view 1 In the Project Browser. set a 3D view of the family current. 3 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northwest. 2 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 5 Save the file. double-click View 1. The last view creates the thumbnail view of the family. Loading a Family into a Project Families can be loaded directly from the family editor into selected open projects. Before you save the family. 4 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Save View.

After you create the door leaf as an extrusion. If required. You can press SPACE to change the orientation of the type. click Load into Projects. expand Families ➤ Furniture ➤ Cabinet. you create new door types based on size and assign parameters respectively. 9 In the Project Browser. under Cabinet. click . 7 Click Window menu ➤ Cabinet. 8 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. The family is loaded into the new project. 11 Click Modify. Creating a Door Family In this lesson. this view is maintained when the family is opened again. you can create additional types with different dimensions in a project. 10 In the Project Browser.NOTE If you save the family in a 3D view different than the default {3D} view and if you have saved the orientation of your view. click (3D). drag each of the types into the drawing area. you create a custom door family based on the definition of a flush exterior door.rfa 3D View: View 1 to switch to the family. Create a project 6 On the Standard toolbar. 12 On the Views toolbar. 13 Close all open projects or families. and click to place them. All the family types you created are listed as options. Creating a Door Family | 497 .

and thickness.rft. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Door. 2 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. 498 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . you draw the plan view components for the new door family. click Training Files. The door type has a variable height and width. Create a new family based on the default door template 1 Close any open projects or families. Drawing the Door Plan View Components In this exercise.You also learn how to constrain the door design by adding labelled dimensions to specify values for the door width. height.

are also displayed. click . Labelled dimensions. Drawing the Door Plan View Components | 499 . 5 On the Window menu. click Symbolic Lines. Level. this is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit. select Doors [projection]. Floor Plan: Ref. 9 In the Type Selector. 10 On the Options Bar.4 On the View menu. 11 Starting at the door hinge point on the lower left corner of the door opening. 6 Maximize the window. click Tile. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit. and represent the door opening profile. 7 Enter ZF. Draw the door panel plan view representation 8 On the Design Bar. Notice the four tiled views. The door opening is aligned and locked to the reference planes. sketch a 1000 mm x 50 mm rectangle for the door leaf as shown. The reference planes that display are part of the default door template. part of the door properties.

Dimension the door panel 12 On the Design Bar. 500 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 13 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge to the right edge of the door panel as shown. click Dimension. 14 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge of the door panel to the bottom edge as shown.

NOTE This same label is applied to the dimension referencing the door opening. Because labelled dimensions are parameters. Drawing the Door Plan View Components | 501 . select Width for Label. 18 Select the horizontal dimension that references the door thickness. 16 Select the vertical dimension that controls the door width. 17 On the Options Bar.Add dimension labels to the door leaf 15 On the Design Bar. click Modify. a user can change the value of the Width parameter and all dimensions labelled with it change accordingly. select Thickness for Label. 19 On the Options Bar.

Draw the door opening plan view arc 20 Select the dimension with the two EQ symbols and move it. click the down arrow button. click . 23 On the Options Bar. you first specify the arc center. along with the witness line controls. In the image below. then you specify each end point. 24 Enter SI. When drawing an arc from center and end points. so it doesn’t visually interfere with the door swing location. TIP If the Arc from Center and End Points command is not visible on the Options Bar. and select the intersection at the upper left corner of the door opening for the arc center point. 22 In the Type selector. 25 Select the upper right corner of the door opening for the arc start point. and select the command from the menu. 26 Select the upper left corner of the door leaf for the arc endpoint. the arc is selected so you can see the arc center and each end point. 21 On the Design Bar. click Symbolic Lines. as shown. select Plan Swing [cut]. 502 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

5 On the Design Bar. “Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry” on page 503. 3 On the Design Bar. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. select Reference Plane: Exterior for Name. enter 50 mm for Depth. Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry | 503 . you create the solid geometry of the door leaf with an extrusion.Add a reference plane for the exterior face of the door 27 Proceed to the next exercise. 6 On the Options Bar. and then select the lower right corner of the door opening for the second corner of the rectangle. double-click Exterior. under Elevations. 7 Select the upper left corner of the door opening for the first corner of the rectangle. click Set Work Plane. 2 On the Design Bar. 4 In the Work Plane dialog. 1 In the Project Browser. under Specify a new Work Plane. and click OK. and click . Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry In this exercise. click Lines. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion.

9 In the Project Browser under Elevations. then click to specify the dimension witness line. use the TAB key to toggle to the extrusion reference. 11 Add a horizontal dimension from the exterior face of the door extrusion to the interior face of the door extrusion. click Dimension. double-click Left.8 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. TIP When you add the witness line to the exterior face of the extrusion. 504 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 10 On the Design Bar.

and Fine are selected. select Thickness for Label. 19 Under Detail Levels. 16 Select the door leaf extrusion. click Modify. 13 On the Options Bar. double-click Ref. Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry | 505 . Medium. and click OK.12 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 17 On the Options Bar. 18 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. click Modify and select the dimension. Left/Right. click Visibility. Level. and When cut in Plan/RCP. and clear Plan/RCP. 14 In the Project Browser. select Front/Back. Specify the visibility of the door leaf in plan view 15 On the Design Bar. under View Specific Display. verify that Coarse.

click Modify. 506 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click OK. 6 Click OK. 22 Proceed to the next exercise. Assign the Oak Door material to the door leaf 8 Select the door leaf extrusion. The door leaf is assigned the new Oak Door material. 3 In the New Material dialog.20 On the Options Bar. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. you assign a material to the door leaf. click . This material designation controls how it displays in shaded and hidden line views. 4 In the Materials dialog. navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Oak. 7 In the Materials dialog. click OK.No Gloss. for Material. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. click Materials.Dark. and click OK. 19 Repeat the previous five steps for the exterior frame extrusion. 15 On the Options Bar. 5 In the Material Library dialog. click . Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. and click OK. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. click for Texture. for Material. and click OK. under Materials and Finishes. It also defines its appearance when rendered. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. select Oak Door. click 11 In the Materials dialog. 2 In the Materials dialog. enter Oak Door for Name. Assigning Materials to the Door Components In this exercise. and click OK. click OK. click Duplicate. select Oak Door for Name.Red/Stained. under Name. Assign the Oak Door material to the door frame 14 Select the interior door frame extrusion. “Assigning Materials to the Door Components” on page 506. 13 On the Design Bar. Create a new material based on the existing red oak material 1 On the Settings menu. The solid geometry of the door is now complete. select Panel for Subcategory. 9 On the Options Bar. under AccuRender. click 17 In the Materials dialog. click .

View the new door 20 In the Project Browser. Assigning Materials to the Door Components | 507 . 22 Zoom in on a door corner. click the Model Graphics Style control.The door frame is assigned the new Oak Door material. and select Shading with Edges. double-click View 1. 21 On the View Control Bar. under Views (all). under 3D Views. The Oak Door material is now assigned to the door leaf and door frame. Flex the door model 23 Zoom out to view the entire door.

25 In the Family Types dialog. Click Apply. “Defining New Door Types” on page 508 Defining New Door Types In this exercise.Flexing the new family is an important part of the design process. you define new door types based on the door model that you have created. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Click Apply. Under Other. enter 2000 mm for Height. In the Family Types dialog. By flexing the new component. enter 2500 mm for Height. Define new door types with various heights and widths 1 On the Design Bar. Try to move the dialog off to the side so you can still see the door family next to it. you ensure it adjusts to the changes it may encounter once loaded into a project. under Family Types. This allows you to apply changes made in the dialog and see how the new door reacts. 508 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . enter 75 mm for Frame Width. Under Other. click New. click Family Types. enter 925 x 2000mm for Name. Notice the door geometry adapts to the new dimension values. Enter 1500 mm for Width. 2 In the Family Types dialog. and click OK. 26 Return the door parameters to their original values. enter 125 mm for Frame Width. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. click Family Types. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 28 Proceed to the next exercise. Enter 1000 mm for Width. 27 Click OK. 3 In the Name dialog. 24 On the Design Bar.

Click Apply. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. Enter 925 mm for Width. select it. Click Apply. click Save.4 In the Family Types dialog. 15 In the New Project dialog. click Wall. 16 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. 11 Click OK. 18 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Training Door. click New. Defining New Door Types | 509 . enter 750 x 2100mm for Name. enter 1220 x 2134mm for Name. Enter 750 mm for Width. 22 Draw a wall segment 8000mm long. enter 2100 mm for Height. and click Open. 6 In the Name dialog. Define the third new door type. 10 In the Family Types dialog. select Project. click Door. Enter 1220 mm for Width. navigate to the location where you saved the door family. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. click New ➤ Project. enter 2000 mm for Height.rfa. click New. Training Door. 7 In the Family Types dialog.rfa. 20 In the Open dialog. and click OK. Use the default wall selection in the Type Selector. 17 Under Create new. Click Apply. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. and click OK. 5 Under Family Types. 8 Under Family Types. 12 On the File menu. You now have three new door types defined within your door family. under Template file. click Training Files. enter 2134 mm for Height.rte. 19 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 9 In the Name dialog. Place new door types in the project 21 On the Design Bar. Define the second new door type. click Load. 13 Navigate to the folder of your choice and save the new door family with the name. Load the new door family into a new project 14 On the File menu. click Browse.

29 Add this door to the center of the wall as shown. click . 25 On the Design Bar. 28 In the Type Selector. 27 Add the door to the left side of the wall as shown. select Training Door : 750 x 2100mm. 26 In the Type Selector. 24 On the View Control Bar. 510 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click the Model Graphics Style control. select Training Door : 925 x 2000mm. and select Shading with Edges.23 On the View toolbar. click Door.

You now have three new flush exterior doors based on the new door family prototype. select Training Door : 1220 x 2134mm. You then assign parameters to the window family to allow for the creation of different-sized versions of the nine-light prototype. 32 You can close all files without saving.30 In the Type Selector. you assign new dimension values to the window to create new types within the window family. and create the window sash as a sweep. Creating a Door Family. you create a custom window family based on the definition of a fixed rectangular window with nine lights. and mullion offset. You create the window frame. This completes the lesson. glazing and mullions as extrusions. Creating a Window Family | 511 . and specify values for the window width. default sill height. Creating a Window Family In this lesson. height. 31 Add the third door type to the right side of the wall as shown. Finally.

Height and Default Sill Height. you specify the parameters for the new window family. click Training Files. The window type has a variable height and width. these specific type parameters are adjustable once the window is part of a project. When you add labels to dimensions. The label name. 6 Two dimension strings display with their labels. click New ➤ Family. and the height of the top and bottom row of lights is adjustable. Create a new family based on the default window template 1 Close any open projects or families. 5 Enter ZF. 2 On the File menu. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Window. 512 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . also one of the window properties.Specifying the New Window Parameters In this exercise.rft. 4 Maximize the Elevation: Exterior view. this is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit. equally spaced vertical mullions. is one of the type parameters.

click Family Types.” and it is done to avoid conflicts and to ensure that all model geometry adjusts to changes as designed. 9 Enter 1000 mm for Height and 2000 mm for Width. “Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry” on page 513. This process is called “flexing the model. and click Apply. Create a sweep path for the window frame solid geometry 1 On the Design Bar. Change the height and width values again. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. Move the dialog off to the side so you can see the window opening. enter 1300 mm for Height. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry In this exercise. Enter 1800 mm for Width. 3 On the Design Bar. Creating sweep geometry requires first sketching the sweep path. click Sketch 2D Path. then sketching the sweep profile. The profile is swept along the path to create the solid geometry. 4 On the Options Bar. 8 In the Family Types dialog. 10 Click OK. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry | 513 . Snap the cursor to each corner. you create the solid geometry of the window frame with a sweep. Click Apply. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. click Lines.Modify the new window type height and width parameters 7 On the Design Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Sweep. 5 Sketch a rectangle to represent the sweep path starting at the upper left corner of the opening and ending at the lower right corner. 2 On the Design Bar. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. This is the starting point for the new window. and click Apply. click . Notice how the window opening adapts to the changing dimension values.

6 Click the locks so the sweep is locked to the opening size. click Sketch Profile. Add a reference plane for the sweep profile 8 On the Design Bar. 13 On the Options Bar. click . The red dot indicates the intersection of the sweep path and the profile plane. and click Open View. select Elevation: Right. 11 Zoom in on the red dot in the middle of the wall. and specify an offset of 50 mm. 12 On the Design Bar. click Ref Plane. 7 On the Design Bar. 14 Pick the exterior wall face so that a reference line is offset 50 mm to the left of the exterior wall face as shown. and select 1:10. 10 On the View Control Bar. 9 In the Go To View dialog. click the Scale control. click Finish Path. 514 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

Sketch the window frame profile 23 On the Design Bar.15 On the Design Bar. 21 On the Options Bar. 19 Drag the value control off to the side as shown. 20 On the Design Bar. 18 On the Design Bar. 25 Below the red dot. select Prefer: Wall faces. under Identity Data. and select the dimension. click Modify. click Lines. click Dimension. 17 Add a dimension between the exterior wall face and the new reference plane. and select the reference plane. select Chain and click . Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry | 515 . enter Sash for the Name. click . and click OK. 16 On the Options Bar. 24 On the Options Bar. click Modify. sketch the frame profile approximately as shown. 22 In the Element Properties dialog.

When the lock displays. the frame profile should extend beyond the edges of the wall. click Modify. 28 Select the left edge of the frame section. When the lock displays. and drag it to the exterior face of the wall. 27 Select the right edge of the frame section. the exact dimensions are not critical.NOTE When you sketch the frame profile. and drag it to the interior face of the wall. However. Precise dimensions are assigned to the frame profile in subsequent steps. click it to constrain the left edge of the frame to the interior face. click it to constrain the frame to the exterior wall face. 26 On the Design Bar. 516 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

31 Add a vertical dimension of 40 mm to the left side of the frame and another vertical dimension of 20 mm to the right side of the frame. select the line you want to move. TIP After adding the dimension.29 Select the short line parallel and to the right of the Sash reference plane. 30 On the Design Bar. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry | 517 . Drag it to the left and align it with the Sash reference plane. When the lock displays. click it to lock the line to the reference plane. as shown. and specify the dimension value. click Dimension. click Modify.

click the lock to constrain the present value. 36 On the Design Bar. click the lock to constrain the present value. click . TIP If you don’t see the lock icon.Modify each dimension if necessary. 33 Select the 20 mm dimension. 37 On the Design Bar. 518 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . select the top horizontal line of the frame profile. click Finish Sweep. 35 Select the horizontal reference plane that intersects the red dot. When the lock displays. this is the top of the window opening. click Finish Profile. 34 On the Tools toolbar. Align the new profile to the window opening edge 32 Select the 40 mm dimension. Lock the alignment when the lock icon displays. zoom out until it displays. When the lock displays. Next.

and select the option. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. expand 3D Views.45 mm for Depth. and enter . under Views (all). Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry In this exercise. select Reference Plane: Sash for Name. under Elevations. click Lines. 4 On the Design Bar. and double-click View 1. and select Lock. 39 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Work Plane dialog. under Specify a new Work Plane. 40 Proceed to the next exercise. If necessary. you create the solid geometry of the window sash with an extrusion. click . Specify the window sash extrusion parameters 1 On the Design Bar. 38 In the Project Browser.The window frame profile is swept around the window opening. Chain of walls or lines. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. “Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry” on page 519. 2 On the Design Bar. spin the model so you can see the interior of the frame. click Set Work Plane. 5 On the Options Bar. double-click Exterior. Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry | 519 . Pick the sash profile lines 6 Place the cursor over the left side of the frame. press TAB to cycle through the selection options. and click OK.

Draw offset extrusion lines 7 On the Options Bar. and lock icons display on each line. set the following options: Click . 520 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .The entire sash outline is selected. and then specify the lower right inside corner for the second corner of the rectangle. You specify a negative offset value to indicate an extrusion direction inside of the window frame. click Finish Sketch.50 mm for Offset. ■ Click . ■ ■ Enter . 9 On the Design Bar. 8 Specify the upper left inside corner of the window frame for the first corner of the rectangle.

double-click View 1. under Elevations. 12 Proceed to the next exercise.10 In the Project Browser. “Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry” on page 521. 11 In the Project Browser. Notice the sash is aligned with the Sash reference plane. The window sash extrusion is now complete. under 3D Views. double-click Right. Spin the model if necessary to view the sash and frame at various angles. you create the solid geometry of the window glass with an extrusion. Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry In this exercise. Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry | 521 .

double-click Right. 3 On the Options Bar. under Elevations.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. and enter 30 mm for Offset. click Ref Plane. Add a reference plane to specify the glass work plane 1 In the Project Browser. click . 4 Select the left edge of the sash so that a vertical reference plane is added 30 mm to the right. as shown. 2 On the Design Bar. 522 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

under Specify a new Work Plane. under Elevations. 7 On the Design Bar. 17 Select each of the sash extrusion lines to create the glass boundary. and click OK. under Identity Data. click Set Work Plane. 6 Add a horizontal dimension of 30 mm between the left edge of the sash and the reference plane. click Lines. 13 On the Design Bar. 16 On the Options Bar. 9 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. click Dimension. Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry | 523 . 15 On the Design Bar. select Reference Plane: Glazing for Name. click . enter Glazing for the Name instance parameter. double-click Exterior. 8 Select the reference plane. 14 In the Work Plane dialog. click . click Modify. and select Lock. Pick lines to define the glass extrusion 12 On the Design Bar.5 On the Design Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. enter -12 mm for Depth. 11 In the Project Browser.

View the window model with frame. NOTE Assigning subcategories to model elements is important. click Modify. under Identity Data. specify Glass for the Subcategory instance parameter. 524 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . double-click Right. After the family is loaded into a project.18 On the Design Bar. sash. you can control subcategory visual style using the Objects Styles dialog. 20 Select the glass extrusion. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. under Elevations. 21 On the Options Bar. and glass 19 In the Project Browser. click Finish Sketch. 23 On the Design Bar. click .

make sure the window frame stretched with the opening and that the glass extrusion remains attached to the interior edge of the sash. For example. Enter 1500 mm for Width. double-click View 1. Spin the model if necessary to view the sash and frame at various angles. Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters. Click Apply. You should flex the model at regular intervals to catch problems early. Move the Family Types dialog off to the side so you can see the window model. 26 In the Family Types dialog. Flex the window model 25 On the Design Bar. it is important to verify that all model elements adapted to the changes as expected. click Family Types. Under Other.24 In the Project Browser. Most problems can be resolved by aligning and locking lines. enter 1500 mm for Height. under 3D Views. Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry | 525 . do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height. NOTE After flexing the model.

the exact location is not critical. click to return the window to its original dimensions. 3 Add two horizontal and two vertical reference planes inside of the window opening to approximate the mullion centerline locations as shown. click Dimension. 4 On the Design Bar. you create the solid geometry of the window mullions based on reference planes and extrusions. Add reference planes to specify the location of the new window mullion centerlines 1 In the Project Browser. Precise dimensions are assigned to the reference planes in subsequent steps. click Ref Plane. 2 On the Design Bar. 28 On the Edit toolbar. “Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry” on page 526. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. 526 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . under Elevations. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. double-click Exterior. NOTE When you draw each reference plane.27 Click Cancel. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry In this exercise.

Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 527 . 8 Select the dimension on the upper-right that references the top two horizontal reference planes. 5 Add a dimension between the top of the window opening (top reference plane) and the horizontal reference plane below it. click the EQ symbol to make the dimension segments equal. click Modify. as shown. as shown. 6 Add a dimension between the bottom of the window opening (bottom reference plane) and the horizontal reference plane above it.Add a multi-segmented dimension referencing all of the vertical reference planes except the center (Left/Right) as shown. Add a mullion offset family parameter 7 On the Design Bar. After adding the dimension. Do not be concerned with dimension values. Do not be concerned with dimension values.

Click OK. 13 Select the horizontal reference plane second from the bottom. select Family parameter. you may want to drag the dimension value as shown. 528 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . under Dimensions. Select Instance. enter 350 mm for Mullion Offset. enter Mullion Offset for Name... Notice the dimension value becomes editable. Under Group parameter under. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog.> for Label. select <Add parameter. specify the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Type. select Dimensions. 11 On the Design Bar. Under Parameter Data. 12 In the Family Types dialog. click Family Types.9 On the Options Bar. TIP Due to the length of the dimension label. and click OK.

However. 18 On the Design Bar. As you did before. 15 On the Design Bar. and enter 350 mm as the new value. click Modify.14 Click the dimension value. click Lines. move the dimension value as shown. click Modify. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. it is critical that the short horizontal lines align with the horizontal edges of the sash. select Mullion Offset for Label. click Set Work Plane. and click OK. 17 On the Options Bar. Watch the Status Bar to be sure that the lines are snapping to the sash. select Reference Plane: Glazing for Name. Create the vertical mullion extrusions 19 On the Design Bar. 24 Sketch a rectangle centered on the left vertical mullion reference plane approximately as shown. under Specify a new Work Plane. 16 Select the dimension on the lower-right. 23 On the Options Bar. Do not be concerned with precise dimensions. 22 On the Design Bar. enter 14 mm for Depth. 21 In the Work Plane dialog. and click . Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 529 . 20 On the Design Bar.

Move the dimension values as shown. click Dimension. and to the right edge of the mullion extrusion. 25 Click both of the locks so the mullion adapts to changes in window height. 26 On the Design Bar. notice lock icons display on the interior horizontal edges of the sash. 530 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .After you complete the sketch. Click the EQ symbol to make both horizontal dimensions equal. 27 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge of the mullion extrusion to the reference plane centered between the vertical mullion extrusion sketch lines.

29 On the Design Bar. Move the Mullion Width value to the left as shown. and select the dimension you added in the previous step. Under Parameter Data. select Family parameter. 31 In the Parameter Properties dialog. select Dimensions. 30 On the Options Bar. Under Group parameter under. specify the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Type. click Modify. select <Add parameter> for Label.28 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge to the right edge of the mullion extrusion. enter Mullion Width for Name. and place it above the dimension you placed in the previous steps. Click OK. Select Type. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 531 .

532 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . follow these basic steps: ■ Sketch the rectangle similar to the mullion on the left. Remember.32 Repeat the previous steps to create an identical mullion centered on the right vertical reference plane as shown. Select the dimension. Specify the mullion width parameter 34 On the Design Bar. 33 On the Design Bar. enter 40 mm for Mullion Width. This is changed in later steps. click Family Types. select Mullion Width for Label. 35 In the Family Types dialog. click Finish Sketch. Move the dialog off to the side so you can see the window in the drawing area. and click Apply. and on the Options Bar. NOTE Do not lock the lines to the sash edge as you did previously. ■ ■ Do not be concerned with the value of the mullion width. ■ Dimension mullion edges and the reference plane at the center of the mullion and click the equality constraint. Add a dimension between the left and right mullion edges.

Most problems can be resolved by aligning and locking lines. You should flex the model at regular intervals to catch problems early. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 533 . under Specify a new Work Plane. In this case. and click OK. Flex the window model 36 In the Family Types dialog. click Set Work Plane. it is important to verify that all model elements adapted to the changes as expected. Enter 1500 mm for Width. evenly spaced. enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 37 Click Cancel. 38 On the Edit toolbar. Under Other. and aligned with the sash edge. 41 In the Work Plane dialog. you should pay close attention to the new mullions and make sure they remain centered. Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters. Click Apply. Sketch the horizontal mullion extrusions 39 On the Design Bar. or undoing the same.Notice the mullions remain centered and equally spaced on the reference planes. NOTE After flexing the model. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. enter 1500 mm for Height. 40 On the Design Bar. and the mullions stretch with the new window height. select Reference Plane : Glazing for Name. click to return the window to its original dimensions.

44 Sketch a rectangle centered on the upper horizontal mullion reference plane approximately as shown. click Modify. click Lines. click Dimension. and move the EQ values off to each side as shown. and then to the bottom edge of the mullion extrusion. 45 On the Design Bar. 48 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge to the bottom edge of the mullion extrusion. and then click the lock icons to lock the left and right edges to the edge of the sash. 46 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge of the mullion extrusion to the reference plane at the center of the mullion. 47 On the Design Bar. click . 43 On the Options Bar. as shown. Click the EQ symbol to make both vertical dimensions equal. and select the dimension you added in the previous step. Do not be concerned with the dimension value. click Dimension. 49 On the Design Bar. Notice the Depth value on the Options Bar remains at the previously specified value. 534 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .42 On the Design Bar.

50 On the Options Bar. select Mullion Width for Label. and on the Options Bar. 51 Repeat the previous steps to create an identical mullion centered on the lower horizontal reference plane as shown. Move the dimension value as shown. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 535 . NOTE Do not lock the lines to the sash edge as you did previously. Add a dimension between the upper and lower mullion edges. ■ ■ 52 On the Design Bar. Select the dimension. select Mullion Width for Label. Remember. click Finish Sketch. follow these basic steps: ■ Sketch the rectangle similar to the mullion you just completed. ■ Dimension mullion edges and the reference plane at the center of the mullion and click the equality constraint.

The horizontal mullion extrusions are now complete. under 3D Views. 54 Select the horizontal mullions. If necessary. 55 In the Project Browser. spin the model to get a good view of the mullions. Join the mullion geometry 53 On the Tools menu. click Join Geometry. and select the vertical mullions. 536 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . double-click View 1.

you can still see the window. click Family Types. Click Apply. enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height. 59 Click Cancel. Flex the window model 56 Adjust the location of the window model within the drawing area. Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters and the mullions stretch with the new window height. enter 1500 mm for Height. Enter 1500 mm for Width. 57 On the Design Bar. Under Other. 58 In the Family Types dialog. so when you open the Family Types dialog.Notice the mullion extrusions are joined. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 537 .

and mullions 7 In the Project Browser. sash. select Stained. 4 In the Materials dialog. under AccuRender. Yellow/. 61 Proceed to the next exercise. and the mullions. enter Pine Frame for Name. Assign the Pine Frame material to the frame. and mullions that you want to display in renderings of the new window. navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Pine.60 On the Edit toolbar. 3 In the New Material dialog. click the Model Graphics Style control. 538 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . TIP Hold the CTRL key down as you select the sweep and various extrusions. and select Shading with Edges. click OK. click for Texture. 2 In the Materials dialog. click Duplicate. Dark. click Materials. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. and click OK. 6 In the Materials dialog. the sash. click to return the window to its original dimensions. Assigning Materials to the Window Components In this exercise. Create a new material based on the existing yellow pine material 1 On the Settings menu. 5 In the Material Library dialog. you assign materials to the frame. and click OK. No Gloss. 8 On the View Control Bar. sash. 9 Select the window frame sweep. “Assigning Materials to the Window Components” on page 538. under Elevations. double-click Exterior.

17 In the Element Properties dialog. 23 Under Detail Levels. 22 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. click Modify. under 3D Views. under View Specific Display. select Front/Back and When cut in Plan/RCP (if category permits). clear the other view options. click . click for Material. Medium. select Pine Frame for Name. and click OK. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click Right. The window frame is assigned the new Pine Frame material. 16 Under Detail Levels. 15 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. Assigning Materials to the Window Components | 539 . under View Specific Display. Medium. verify that Coarse. and Fine are selected. and Fine are selected. 20 Select the glass extrusion. select Frame/Mullion for Subcategory. double-click View 1. 13 In the Materials dialog. Modify the glass visibility 19 In the Project Browser under Elevations. click OK. and click OK. 21 On the Options Bar. under Graphics. 24 In the Project Browser. under Identity Data. and click OK. verify that Coarse. select Edit for Visibility. click Visibility. 18 On the Design Bar. 12 Under Materials and Finishes. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. select Front/Back and When cut in Plan/RCP (if category permits).10 On the Options Bar.

you define new window types based on the window model that you just created.25 Zoom in on a window corner. You begin by adding a formula to the mullion offset parameter to specify horizontal divisions of one third the overall height of the window. The window frame. and glass display their assigned materials. mullions. You then create multiple window types that will be available to the user after the family is loaded into a project. sash. “Defining New Window Types” on page 540. 540 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Defining New Window Types In this exercise. 26 Proceed to the next exercise.

Flex the window model 4 In addition to flexing the model after the addition or modification of model geometry. enter Height/3 in the Formula column for Mullion Offset. 3 In the Family Types dialog. it is also a good idea to flex the model after a new formula is applied. The horizontal mullions are now spaced apart at one third the height of the window.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. click Family Types. Defining New Window Types | 541 . verify that 2000 mm is specified for Height. 2 On the Design Bar. and click Apply. Add a mullion offset formula to the family type 1 Zoom to fit and move the window model off the side of the drawing area so it will be visible after you open the Family Types dialog. and click Apply. In the Family Types dialog.

click New. Enter 1250 mm for Height. 8 In the Family Types dialog. enter 2500 w x 1250mm h for Name. but the one third height spacing is maintained in the horizontal mullions. under Family Types. enter 1000 mm for Height. Define new window types with various heights and widths 6 In the Family Types dialog. 5 In the Family Types dialog. and click OK. and click Apply.The window height is doubled. 7 In the Name dialog. 542 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Click Apply. verify that the following parameter values are specified: ■ ■ ■ Enter 2500 mm for Width.

14 In the Family Types dialog. Click Apply. enter 1800 w x 1500mm h for Name and click OK. enter 2600 w x 1300mm h for Name. click New. 19 On the Options Bar. 15 On the File menu. You now have three new window types defined within your window family. Enter 1300 mm for Height. specify the following parameter values: ■ ■ ■ Enter 2600 mm for Width. Enter 1500 mm for Height. 18 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 11 In the Family Types dialog. Load the new window family into a new project 17 On the Standard toolbar. 13 In the Name dialog. Define the final window type 12 Under Family Types. Training Window.9 Under Family Types. 16 Navigate to the location of your choice and save the new window family with the name. specify the following parameter values: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter 1800 mm for Width. click to start a new project based on your default template. 10 In the Name dialog. click New. click Save. and click OK. click Window. Defining New Window Types | 543 . click Load. Click Apply. Click OK.rfa.

24 On the Options Bar. clear Tag on Placement. 23 On the Design Bar. 27 In the Type Selector. 22 Draw a generic wall segment 12000 mm long. 32 On the View menu. click Window. 30 Add the third window to the right side of the wall.rfa file.20 In the Open dialog. select it. Place new window types in the project 21 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Notice the detail that displays. and select Shading with Edges. This is because you set the visibility values to display when cut in plan/RCP. and click Open. 544 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 29 In the Type Selector. click the Model Graphics Style control. click . select Training Window : 2500 w x 1250mm h. 26 Add the window to the left side of the wall. 31 On the Design Bar. select Training Window : 1800 w x 1500mm h. navigate to the location of your Training Window. 34 On the View toolbar. 25 In the Type Selector. 35 On the View Control Bar. 28 Add this window to the center of the wall. select Training Window :2600 w x 1300mm h. 33 Zoom in on the center window. click Thin Lines. click Wall.

and section views of a family. where type parameters drive the geometry for each family type. and create a complex window family with a complex opening. Revit Architecture allows you to specify a parameter as instance or type parameter. Solid geometry: Use solid geometry as often as possible to represent a family because it automatically gives you the correct plan. Instance parameter means. You can also switch on/off selected subcategories in a project. you should sketch the design of the family and make notes of the desired behavior: ■ Subcategories: Solid geometry. ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a Complex Model Family | 545 . a parameter drives geometry in a family. Model lines are displayed in every view. Solid Blend. model lines. that each family in a project can have a different value for an instance parameter. Planning a Complex Model Family Before you start to create a complex model family. Creating a Complex Model Family In the following exercises.You have three new fixed nine-light windows based on a new window family prototype. Solid Sweep) you can decide in which view you start to create your solid geometry. The window family includes nested families for the outer sill and uses shared parameters for evaluation purposes. you plan. line colors. sketch. Solid Revolve. and symbolic lines are usually assigned to selected Subcategories. For example. A large number of parameters reduce the performance of the family. This allows you to drive lineweights. line patterns. the easiest way to create a window frame is to create an extrusion including two rectangles for the frame edges in an elevation view of the family. Formulas between parameters drive the behavior of parts of the family. and materials of the subcategories. Basically. Linework: You can create model lines and symbolic lines in a family. This completes the Creating a Window Family lesson. elevation. where symbolic lines are view direction specific: they show only in views that are parallel to the view where they have been created. Creating solid geometry: Based on the 4 ways to create solid geometry in Revit Architecture (Solid Extrusion. Parameters: You should carefully define the parameters in a family.

Section. you can use a parameter with the Parameter Data Type Yes / No. Assigning material: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Directly: The solid geometry in the family has material explicitly assigned. By instance: Each single instance of the family can have different material assignments for selected solids in the family. Level of detail: Revit Architecture allows you specify the visibility of each solid form and line geometry for the Detail Levels Coarse. and Elevation views. Detail Level View Plan Coarse Medium Fine Section Elevation Additionally. where a Shared parameter can appear in schedule and tags and can be exported to ODBC. By family type: Each type of the family can have different material assignments for selected solids in the family. Sketching the requirements The window family should be modelled with different detail levels in Plan. By category: The solid material gets its material from the selected category or subcategory in a project. you should define different widths for each of the casements. A Family parameter does only appear in the family itself. ■ Visibility settings: If specific visibility settings are required for selected geometry or linework.■ Scheduling/exporting parameters: Revit Architecture differs between different parameter types. Various parameters drive the behavior of the family. 546 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and should account for instances when either of the casements is toggled off. Medium and Fine.

You should test your family often as you incrementally build geometry in the next steps. select Metric Window. you open a template that you use as the basis for the complex window family. The family editor is opened with a new window family. create a second wall type with a different wall thickness so that you can test the family. 2 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. One test scenario consists in switching between the wall types with different thicknesses to check whether the constraints work correctly. 1 Close all open projects or families. click Training Files.rft. Selecting a Family Template | 547 . and click Open. navigate to Metric ➤ Templates.The window contains the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A: Insertion depth B: Frame depth C: Frame width D: Sash width E: Center post width F: Wall offset G: Left width H: Right width I: Width J: Wall offset top K: Top frame height L: Bottom frame height M: Height Outer sill: ■ ■ ■ Fixed front height: 30mm Fixed back height: 50mm Fixed offset: 30mm ■ Glass fixed width: 20mm Selecting a Family Template In this exercise. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. The family template uses a wall as host.

so you model the new opening first. Create reference planes for the opening 6 On the Design Bar. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ Under Construction. click Edit/New. Verify that Defines Origin is selected. In the Type Selector. accept the default name. Creating the Skeleton for a Complex Wall Opening The window contains a more complex wall opening than a standard rectangular opening. select Wall Closure. and click OK. click 2 In the Element Properties dialog. 9 Click Modify. TIP Press TAB until the reference plane is highlighted. This means that the exterior wall layers that have wraps assigned will end at this reference plane. for Name. 548 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . refer to the command line to verify what is selected. select Basic Wall : Wall 1. 10 Click OK 3 times. Under Other. click Edit. 9 In the Edit Assembly dialog. and click OK. select Weak Reference. and on the Options Bar. for Is Reference. enter 400. in the Edit toolbar. 3 Select the horizontal reference plane. select Defines Origin. and on the Options Bar. 11 Switch back to the previous wall settings: ■ ■ Select the wall. and click . 8 In the Type Properties dialog. This requires that the standard rectangular opening be deleted and replaced with voids cut out from the default wall. 8 Create a vertical reference plane to the left of the Right reference plane. for Construction ➤ Structure. click . 5 Select the Center (Left/Right) reference plane. Prepare the centered reference planes 1 Select the Center (Left/Right) reference plane. for Structure ➤ Thickness. 7 Create a vertical reference plane to the right of the Left reference plane. click Ref Plane. .4 Select the wall. ■ ■ ■ ■ For Identity Data ➤ Name. under Other. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate. click 5 In the Element Properties dialog. 7 In the Name dialog. enter Insertion Edge. . Click OK.

13 Select the Exterior horizontal reference plane on the top wall edge. and click . 22 Dimension the Left and Wall Offset Left vertical reference planes. 17 Click Modify. 16 Dimension the Exterior and Insertion Edge horizontal reference planes. because each inserted value should have a different insertion depth. for Identity Data ➤ Name. Click OK. on the Options Bar. for Name. For Group parameter under. Dimension vertical reference planes 21 On the Design Bar. for Label. name the other new reference plane Wall Offset Right. 14 Using the same method. refer to the status bar to verify what is selected. 18 Select the Exterior reference plane. Next. enter Wall Offset Left. select Add Parameter. and click OK. you can more easily select it because it doesn’t overlap with other elements in the drawing. 20 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. Dimension horizontal reference planes 15 On the Design Bar. Creating the Skeleton for a Complex Wall Opening | 549 . TIP Press TAB until the reference plane is highlighted. use the blue circle grip to drag the left edge of the reference plane to line up with the left side of the Insertion Edge reference plane. and select Instance. for the temporary dimension. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Insertion Depth. By extending the reference pane. dimension the vertical reference planes. click Dimension. 23 Click Modify. The horizontal reference plane defines the inner edge and the new vertical reference planes define the left and right edges of the wall offset for the opening. click Dimension. select Constraints. drag the Interior horizontal reference plane to the left side.10 Select the first reference plane you created. This parameter is defined as an instance parameter. 19 Select the dimension. enter 75. 12 Using the same method.

31 Create a horizontal reference plane below the Head reference plane. 30 On the Design Bar. 38 Select the dimension. and click . for Label. select Add Parameter. and press ENTER. 32 Click Modify. for Name. Click OK. 25 Select the dimension. 28 Select the dimension. double-click Exterior. enter Wall Offset Top. 37 Select the Wall Offset Top reference plane. enter Wall Offset. for the temporary dimension. for the temporary dimension.24 Select the Wall Offset Left reference plane. under Elevations. 33 Select the new reference plane. 35 On the Design Bar. dimension the Right and Wall Offset Right reference planes. click Ref Plane. For Group parameter under. on the Options Bar. 27 Using the same method. you apply the same method to reference planes in an elevation view. for Identity Data ➤ Name. 36 Dimension the Head and Wall Offset Top reference planes. select Construction. enter 100. on the Options Bar. Dimension reference planes in elevation 29 In the Project Browser. Next. 26 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. 39 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. select Add Parameter. on the Options Bar. select Construction. select Wall Offset. for Name. for Label. enter Wall Offset Top. and click OK. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 100. 550 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Dimension. for Label. The skeleton for the opening is complete. Click OK. The reference planes and parameters for the plan view are defined. For Group parameter under.

2 On the Tools toolbar. 1 In the Project Browser. Modelling a Complex Wall Opening You model the opening with voids that are cut from the wall geometry. 8 Using the same method. Level. click (Plane). double-click Ref. 6 On the Tools toolbar. under Floor Plans. lock the other sketch lines to the Insertion Edge. and click OK. Wall Offset Left. click Void Form ➤ Void Extrusion.40 Save the file as Casement Window.rfa. and lock the alignment. for Name. select Reference Plane : Sill. 3 In the Work Plane dialog. click (Align). NOTE Zoom in as necessary so that the rectangle does not snap to reference planes. 4 On the Design Bar. Modelling a Complex Wall Opening | 551 . and sketch the extrusion as shown. select the top edge of the sketch. and Wall Offset Right reference planes. click . 5 On the Options Bar. under Specify a new Work Plane. 7 Select the Exterior reference plane.

click (3D). align and constrain the top and bottom edges of the other void to the Head and Sill reference planes. click Finish Sketch. double-click Exterior. and lock the alignment. click (Align). create and constrain a void extrusion for the inner part of the opening as shown. Lock the sketch lines to the Insertion Edge. Interior. the voids need to be cut from the wall geometry. 16 On the Views toolbar. 10 Using the same method. 13 Align the top edge of the smaller void to the Wall Offset Top reference plane. 11 In the Project Browser. 17 Select the left vertical edge of the default opening (Opening Cut). and Left reference planes. 14 Align the bottom edge of the smaller void to the Sill reference plane. 552 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .9 On the Design Bar. 15 Using the same method. Right. NOTE Create the void extrusion directly below the one you just created. under Elevations. and press DELETE. you need to delete the standard rectangular opening cut. and lock the alignment. 12 On the Tools toolbar. In order to use the voids as a new opening. Also.

and then select the wall geometry. cut the second void from the wall. 18 On the Tools toolbar. 20 Using the same method. 19 Select the void.The opening in the wall is deleted. click (Cut Geometry). The first void is cut from the wall. Modelling a Complex Wall Opening | 553 . you control correct behavior of the new wall opening by changing the wall offset parameters. Next.

You can also test the opening by flexing the wall types and thicknesses. 2 Create a vertical reference plane to the right of the Wall Offset Left reference plane. For Wall Offset. enter 50mm. Level. 9 Select the reference plane. For Other ➤ Is Reference.Change wall offset parameters 21 On the Design Bar. for the temporary dimension. 3 Select the reference plane. 7 Select the Frame Left reference plane. Note that the opening has changed correctly. 554 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 5 On the Design Bar. enter 100mm. 8 Create a vertical reference plane to the left of the Wall Offset Right reference plane. under Floor Plans. click Family Types. 6 Dimension the Left and Frame Left vertical reference planes. select Not a Reference. Creating Window Frame Geometry The reference planes and parameters for the window frame are defined in the plan and exterior elevation views. and click 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . Click OK. enter 50mm. click Dimension. Click OK. double-click Ref. enter Frame Left. For Identity Data ➤ Name. 1 In the Project Browser. and click . 22 In the Family Types dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Construction ➤ Wall Offset Top.

14 Select the right dimension. For Group parameter under. select Construction. for Name. enter 100mm. for Label. create a horizontal reference plane below the Insertion Edge reference plane. on the Options Bar. name it Frame Interior. click Dimension. 12 Dimension the Right and Frame Right vertical reference planes. 11 On the Design Bar. on the Options Bar. for the temporary dimension. enter Frame Right. For Other ➤ Is Reference. 13 Select the Frame Right reference plane. 16 Select the left dimension. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. Click OK. select Frame Width. select Not a Reference. and create a Frame Depth type parameter dimension as shown. enter Frame Width. for Label. Click OK. select Add Parameter.10 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Identity Data ➤ Name. 17 Using the same method. Creating Window Frame Geometry | 555 .

18 Create 2 more vertical reference planes to the left of the Center (Left/Right) reference plane. NOTE The positioning of the center post will be specified later in the exercise. The exact vertical position of the reference planes is not important. and create a Center Post Width type parameter dimension. dimension the planes at 120mm. 556 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . name the reference planes Center Post Left and Center Post Right. 19 Using the same method used previously.

28 Select the lower dimension. select Add Parameter. for the temporary dimension. Click OK. for Label. 27 Using the same method. Click OK. 26 Select the Frame Bottom reference plane. 24 On the Design Bar. create a horizontal reference plane below the Wall Offset Top reference plane. on the Options Bar. 30 Select the other dimension. 22 Select the reference plane. on the Options Bar. under Elevations. select Add Parameter. click Dimension. enter Frame Height Bottom. double-click Exterior. 25 Dimension the Sill and Frame Bottom horizontal reference planes. enter 150mm. select Not a Reference. enter Frame Bottom. select Construction. For Group parameter under. enter Frame Height Top. For Group parameter under. 31 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. select Construction. For Identity Data ➤ Name. name it Frame Top. for Label. and click 23 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . 29 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. For Other ➤ Is Reference.Create parameters in elevation 20 In the Project Browser. Creating Window Frame Geometry | 557 . Click OK. 21 Create a horizontal reference plane above the Sill reference plane. and dimension the Head and Frame Top reference planes at 150mm.

For Wall Offset. For Width. Family types allow you to set different values for parameters and to save this state as a specific type of the window family. enter 60mm. Under Other. For Frame Height Top. enter 2000mm. enter 50mm. enter 1500 x 1400 1-Swing Sash 400 and Click OK. for Height. For Center Post Width. 37 In the Name dialog. 35 In the Name dialog. Additional values for new parameters will be set continuously after each reasonable step of completeness. enter 50mm. 36 Under Family Types. 33 In the Family Types dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. A family type manages type parameters only. enter 50mm. enter 1500mm. click New. enter 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200. For Frame Width. click Family Types. Under Dimensions. for Frame Depth. Before you model the frame geometry. 558 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . enter 80mm. 34 Under Family Types. click New. enter 80mm. and click OK. instance parameters can be changed on an instance level for each inserted window instance. 38 In the Family Types dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints.The skeleton of the window frame is complete. For Wall Offset. enter 100mm. for Wall Offset Top. for Wall Offset Top. Under Construction. enter 80mm. enter 100mm. Under Construction. For Frame Width. enter 100mm. You create 2 family types for the Casement Window family. enter 100mm. Create family types 32 On the Design Bar. enter 70mm. add 2 window types with different parameters to check whether the parameters work correctly. For Frame Height Bottom. for Insertion Depth. for Insertion Depth.

and lock the alignments to create a constraint for all edges as shown. 43 On the Design Bar. Note that the reference planes adjust to the new dimensions. enter 70mm. enter 120mm. enter 1400mm. select 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200. Center Post Right. for Height. enter 80mm. one on the right. Sill. select Reference Plane : Frame Interior. Head. Rectangle position in view Left Right Outside (larger rectangle) Lock to reference planes Frame Top. NOTE Refer to the following table for information on the alignment reference planes. and click OK. click (Plane). For Width. under Specify a new Work Plane. click . For Center Post Width. and sketch the extrusion with 3 rectangles as shown. Frame Top. enter 1500mm. Frame Bottom. Frame Right. for Name. 40 Under Name. 45 On the Tools toolbar. Left Creating Window Frame Geometry | 559 . for Frame Depth. Right. enter 120mm. Frame Bottom. For Frame Height Bottom. Center Post Left. and a third rectangle outside the intersection of the reference planes. Under Other.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Frame Height Top. 46 Align all sketched edges to the reference planes. Model frame geometry 41 On the Tools toolbar. 42 In the Work Plane dialog. Under Dimensions. click (Align). click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. NOTE Create 3 rectangles: One on the left. 44 On the Options Bar. Frame Left. and click OK. 39 Click Apply.

click 50 Align edges: ■ ■ (Align). Align the bottom edge of the extrusion to the Frame Interior reference plane. and click 54 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Identity Data ➤ Subcategory. 57 On the View Control Bar. Frame material will be assigned later in the tutorial. clear Plan/RCP. Under Detail Levels. clear Coarse. 55 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog: ■ ■ Under View Specific Display. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. click Finish Sketch. The window frame is complete. 560 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . . click (3D). 53 Select the extrusion solid geometry. double-click Ref. 49 On the Tools toolbar. 52 On the Views toolbar. For Graphics ➤ Visibility/Graphics Overrides. 51 Click Modify. and lock the alignment. 56 Click OK twice. select Frame/Mullion. click Edit. under Floor Plans. Align the top edge of the extrusion to the Insertion Edge reference plane. and lock the alignment. 48 In the Project Browser.47 On the Design Bar. Level.

click (Thin Lines) to work with heavier lineweights. and click 6 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ . under Name. 4 Create 4 vertical reference planes as shown. 2 On the View Control Bar. select 1500 x 1400 1-Swing Sash 400. For Identity Data ➤ Name. click Family Types. double-click Ref. 3 On the Views toolbar. click Scale ➤ 1:10. 59 In the Family Types dialog. because the visibility settings are different for the left and right sashes. 60 Select 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200. However. Level. Changing the scale makes it easier to work in detail. you model each sash separately. under Floor Plans. and click Apply. enter Sash Left Left. Defining the Window Sash Parameters You use known modelling procedures to create the geometry for the window sash. Defining the Window Sash Parameters | 561 . Define parameters in plan view 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Select the leftmost reference plane you just created.Test the family again 58 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. and click OK.

For Other ➤ Is Reference. 16 Select the reference plane. specify each dimension as 50mm. select Not a Reference. specify the properties for the remaining new reference planes. working from left to right: Reference Plane 2 3 4 Properties Name: Sash Left Right Is Reference value: Not a Reference Name: Sash Right Left Is Reference value: Not a Reference Name: Sash Right Right Is Reference value: Not a Reference 8 Dimension the reference planes with adjacent reference planes for the window frame as shown. Click OK. select Sash Width. select Add Parameter. 18 On the Design Bar. For Identity Data ➤ Name.■ ■ For Other ➤ Is Reference. Define parameters in elevation view 13 In the Project Browser. 11 Select the next dimension. 15 Click Modify. Click OK. enter Sash Bottom. on the Options Bar. select Construction. under Elevations. 14 Create a horizontal reference plane above the Frame Bottom reference plane. for Label. For Group parameter under. 562 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Click OK. for Label. 9 Select the left dimension. You can drag dimension text to the left or right side using the Drag Text grip. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. and click 17 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . add parameters to the remaining dimensions. 12 Using the same method. select Not a Reference. click Dimension. on the Options Bar. 7 Using the same method. enter Sash Width. double-click Exterior.

for Sash Width. for the temporary dimension. select 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200. 31 On the Tools toolbar. Create solid extrusions 29 On the Design Bar. extend the 2 window types with different values for the new parameter to check whether the parameter work correctly. 26 Under Construction. Note that the reference planes adjust to the new dimension. and sketch 2 rectangles to form the right sash extrusion as shown. 21 Using the same method. enter 50mm. for Label. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. click Family Types. 28 For Name. click . Before you model the sash geometry.19 Dimension the Frame Bottom and Sash Bottom reference planes. create a horizontal reference plane below the Frame Top reference plane: ■ ■ ■ Name it Sash Top. and click OK. for the temporary dimension. 27 Click Apply. and lock the alignment to create a constraint for all edges as shown. click (Align). 24 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. select Sash Width. 22 Select the Sash Top reference plane. on the Options Bar. 23 While pressing CTRL. 30 On the Options Bar. Specify it as Not a Reference. The skeleton of the window sash is complete. 32 Align all sketched edges to the reference planes. enter 70mm. enter 50mm. select both dimensions. select 1500 x 1400 1-Swing Sash 400. 25 For Name. Defining the Window Sash Parameters | 563 . 20 Select the Sash Bottom reference plane. Dimension the Frame Top and Sash Top reference planes.

switch to the Exterior Elevation view and create the solid extrusion for the left sash. NOTE Modifying the cut plane offset value allows you to see the sash extrusion in the view. Align the top edge of the extrusion to the Insertion Edge reference plane. Level floor plan view to align the edges as you did for the right sash. Frame Right. click (3D). click Edit. 41 Using the same method. click Finish Sketch. 36 In the Element Properties dialog. Level. 43 On the Views toolbar. and lock the alignment. 42 Switch back to the Ref. Center Post Right. Sash Top. Sash Right Left. for Cut plane ➤ Offset. and click OK twice. 33 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and lock the alignment. 37 In the View Range dialog. Sash Right Right. Rectangle position in view Outside Inside Lock to reference planes Frame Top. under Floor Plans. enter 1500. for Extents ➤ View Range. Align the bottom edge of the extrusion to the Frame Interior reference plane. 564 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Sash Bottom. 38 On the Tools toolbar. 35 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. click 39 Align edges: ■ ■ (Align). Frame Bottom. double-click Ref. 40 Click Modify.NOTE Refer to the following table for information on the alignment reference planes. 34 In the Project Browser.

For Group Parameter under. Defining Visibility Parameters | 565 . 1 Select the right solid geometry of the window sash. For Identity Data ➤ Subcategory. 47 Click OK twice.44 While pressing CTRL. click Add parameter. 3 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. For Graphics ➤ Visibility. and click . click the rectangular button on the right side. Under Detail Levels. for Graphics ➤ Visible. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. 2 In the Element Properties dialog. 46 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog: ■ ■ Under View Specific Display. enter Sash Right. select Frame/Mullion. clear Coarse. 5 Click OK 3 times. create a visibility parameter for the left sash named Sash Left. 7 On the Design Bar. 6 Using the same method. select Construction. note the parameters you have just created with checkboxes in the Value column. select the 2 extrusions. clear Plan/RCP. and click 45 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ . click Family Types. Defining Visibility Parameters You add visibility parameters so that you can display the left and right sashes separately. click Edit.

5 On the Design Bar. double-click Exterior. 10 Under Construction. click Dimension. Click OK. 6 Using one dimension string. Glass Axis Left. clear Sash Left. select Not a Reference. For Identity Data ➤ Name. under Elevations. The glass is located in the center of the frame / sash with a fixed thickness of 20mm. 7 Click EQ to center the reference plane for the glass axis between the reference planes for the window frame. and Frame Interior reference planes. and click Apply. and name them Glass Axis Right. 9 Create 3 more reference planes as shown. Creating Reference Planes for the Glass Geometry The glass geometry will be dimensioned directly in the sketch. the geometry is only greyed out if the visibility parameter is not assigned. 8 In the Project Browser. dimension the Insertion Edge. select 1500 x 1400 1-Swing Sash 400. and click OK. and click 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . 1 In the Project Browser. and Glass Axis Horizontal. enter Glass Axis. Glass Axis. 9 Select 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200. NOTE Any 3D geometry assigned to a Yes/No parameter is still visible in the family editor. not aligned to reference planes. For Other ➤ Is Reference. 3 Select the reference plane. 2 Create a horizontal reference plane between the Insertion Edge and Frame Interior reference planes. under Floor Plans. This is because the glass width and height will be extended to the window frame if the sash is switched off.Test the family 8 For Name. 566 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . double-click Ref. Level.

click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. You create parameters that define the dimensions of the glass geometry. for Name. 4 On the Options Bar. create EQ dimensions with the adjacent sash reference planes.10 For each of the new reference planes. under Specify a new Work Plane. and sketch the right glass extrusion as shown. Creating the Glass Geometry | 567 . Creating the Glass Geometry In this exercise. This centers the glass reference planes between the window sashes. you use extrusions to create the glass for the complex window family. select Reference Plane : Glass Axis. 3 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. click (Plane). Sketch the right glass extrusion 1 On the Tools toolbar. 2 In the Work Plane dialog. click .

and the right edge of the sketch. enter Glass Length Right. 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. dimension the top and the bottom of the sketch. dimension the left edge of the sketch. select Other. dimension the top and bottom edge of the sketch. the Glass Axis Right reference plane. Click OK. click Dimension. 12 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. click Dimension. 568 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . For Group Parameter under. and create a Glass Height Right parameter. 6 Using one dimension string. 7 Click EQ. select Add Parameter. 11 Select the dimension line and.Dimension the sketch 5 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. for Label. 8 Using the same method. 13 Using the same method. on the Options Bar. 10 Dimension the left edge and right edge of the sketch.

0.14 On the Design Bar. For Constraints ➤ Extrusion End. 20 Assign the same Element properties to the left extrusion that you assigned to the right. click Edit. 18 Click OK twice. For Extrusion Start. click Finish Sketch. and click 16 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ . clear Coarse. Assign properties 15 Select the glass geometry. enter -10. Under Detail Levels. Create the left glass extrusion 19 Using the same method. click (3D).0. 17 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog: ■ ■ Under View Specific Display. For Identity Data ➤ Subcategory. enter 10. clear Plan/RCP. 21 On the Views toolbar. select Glass. create the glass geometry for the left sash with the new parameters Glass Height Left and Glass Length Left. Creating the Glass Geometry | 569 . For Graphics ➤ Visibility.

set the height to 2000) as well as mathematical expressions. as it will minimize performance hits. Formulas are typed directly into the Family Types dialog box. x raised to the power of y log sqrt(Value) sin cos tan asin acos atan exp abs 570 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . The formulas in the following chapters of this tutorial should give you mainly an impression of how complex formulas can be set.22 On the View Control Bar. you should do it. Expressions for formulas Mathematical Function Addition Subtraction Multiplication Division Exponentiation Logarithm Square Root Sine Cosine Tangent Arcsine Arccosine Arctangent e raised to an x power Absolute Value Expression + * / x^y. Formulas can use logic such as IF statements (IF the width is 1000. However. Creating Formulas to Define Width Formulas are one of the many powerful aspects of Revit Architecture Families . if you can build your family without using formulas.used to control families in many ways. where all of the parameters for a family are listed. They can also be used to control Yes/No parameters. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading With Edges.

select Add Parameter. 3'-0" ) Simple IF . <result-if-true>. enter 1000. The width of the right sash will be determined using formulas. For Group parameter under. 2'-6". under Parameters. double-click Ref. 8' ) ) ) IF . For Type of Parameter. <result-if-false>) IF ( Length < 35' . 8 . NOTE Do not dimension the right sash using the same method. enter Width Sash Right. 8 . 8 . 4 Click Modify. 9 In the Family Types dialog.(2*30) Simple IF IF ( <condition>.6. click Family Types. select Length. 3 ) Multiple IF IF ( Length< 35' . IF ( Length < 45' . 6 Select the dimension. Creating Formulas to Define Width | 571 . 7 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name.OR IF ( OR ( A = 1 . IF ( Length < 55' . 3 ) Simple IF . 5' . This would overconstrain the family. select Dimensions. Click OK. enter Width Sash Left. 3 ) Yes/No Controlling the state of a Yes/No parameters A with a next Yes/No parameter B: Not (B) Position the center post 1 In the Project Browser. on the Options Bar. 3' . 5 Select the Center Post Left reference plane. 8 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. under Floor Plans. click Add. 3 Dimension the Frame Left and Center Post Left reference planes. for the temporary dimension. B = 3 ) . 2' 6" .AND IF ( AND (x = 1 . y = 2). for Label.11 Samples for formulas Standard Width . 2 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. Level."A" is less than or equal to "B": IF ( NOT ( A > B ) . 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name.

(Width Sash Left . 16 Adjust the parameters: ■ For Width Sash Left. (Height . in the Formula row for Glass Length Right. ■ Click Apply. In the Formula row for Glass Length Left. enter if(Sash Left.■ ■ For Group Parameter under. for Dimensions ➤ Width Sash Right ➤ Formula. enter 400.Center Post Width 12 Press ENTER. 11 In the Family Types dialog. Width Sash Right). enter if(Sash Right.Frame Height Bottom . Height . enter 1200.(Frame Width * 2) . select 1500 x 1400 1-Swing Sash 400. 19 In the Family Types dialog. and Center Post Width.Frame Height Top . 17 For Name.Frame Height Bottom). The value for Width Sash Right is updated by the formula entered previously. (Width Sash Right . 14 Adjust the parameters: ■ For Width Sash Left.2 * Sash Width). and click OK.2 * Sash Width). and press ENTER.Frame Height Bottom). In the Formula row for Glass Height Right.Frame Height Top Frame Height Bottom . enter if(Sash Right.Frame Height Top . Width Sash Left. The value is greyed out. click Family Types. select Dimensions. select 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200. Height . (Height . the new value is 560. and cannot be changed in the Family Types dialog. The glass dimensions are now dependent on the visibility settings for the window sashes. the new value is 880. Frame Width. enter formulas: ■ Under Other. enter the formula to get the calculated width: (Width . Test the family 13 Under Name. 572 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 15 For Name. ■ ■ ■ 20 Click OK. and press ENTER. You can test the formulas by switching between the different window types in the Family Types dialog. In the Formula row for Glass Height Left. select 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200. Define glass width and length 18 On the Design Bar. enter if(Sash Left. The value for Width Sash Right is now calculated dependent on the values for Width. ■ Click Apply.Frame Height Top .2 * Sash Width). The value for Width Sash Right is updated by the formula entered previously.Width Sash Left) . Width Sash Left).2 * Sash Width). Click OK.

7 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. They should be placed on a selected subcategory. 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. expand Windows.Creating Elevation Lines The best method to create the elevation lines for the sashes is to create them in the exterior elevation view. 2 In the Object Styles dialog. select Elevation Swing [projection]. and lock all alignment constraints. 5 On the Tools toolbar. 6 In the Work Plane dialog. under Elevations. 8 In the Type Selector. 9 On the Options Bar. Creating Elevation Lines | 573 . clear Chain. double-click Exterior. under Category. click Symbolic Lines. 10 Create single symbolic lines as shown. click (Plane). select Reference Plane : Insertion Edge. under Specify a new Work Plane. 4 In the Project Browser. for Name. note the Elevation Swing subcategory. and click OK. 3 Click OK.

unless the default value is < By Category >. sash. 15 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. and click . 5 In the Materials dialog. select Default. and click the button on the right side of the column. check whether the solid geometry has the correct subcategory assigned. click in the Material column. 17 Using the same method. for Name. When you assign default materials in a family. 2 In the Object Styles dialog. and click OK three times. 13 While pressing CTRL. for Windows ➤ Frame/Mullion. Material parameters override the material assignment of the subcategories in the Object Styles dialog. select the rectangular button on the right side. and click Duplicate. If the subcategory already exists in the project. select Sash Right. When the family is added to a project and the subcategory does not exist in the project. 18 Save the file. 574 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . for Visible. Creating Material Parameters Material parameters for selected solid geometry make the family more flexible in terms of materials assignments for different window types. clear Coarse.Matte. enter Window Frame. and on the Options Bar. and click OK. Next. 3 In the Materials dialog. 4 In the New Material dialog. while pressing CTRL. click Visibility. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. the object styles settings of the project define the default material. select all symbolic lines. associate the symbolic lines on the right side with the Sash Left family parameter. Assigning Default Materials You can assign a default material for each subcategory. under Detail Levels. 7 Select Cool. for Name. expand accurender ➤ Solid Colors. this subcategory is added to the project and has the material assignment from the family. and glass. Assign a default material 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. you create material parameters for the frame. select the 2 symbolic lines on the left side. click . under Category. 12 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. under AccuRender. 6 In the Material Library dialog. under Graphics.11 In the drawing area. and click OK. The default material is assigned to the Frame/Mullion category. and select Whites. 16 Click OK twice.

and click 3 In the Element Properties dialog. For Group parameter under. and click Open. 2 Select the solid geometry of the window frame. Open the families and explore the design of them. You can override it on a type level. enter Frame. under Floor Plans. Using family type parameters in the main family. Level. double-click Ref. a Depth instance parameter. You can then model parts of the family separately from the main family model. If this parameter is defined as shared. and associate the sash and glass solid geometry with the respective parameter. In this lesson.1 On the Views toolbar. The concrete sill family consists of a solid extrusion. Creating Nested Families | 575 . 9 Click OK. create 2 material parameters named Sash and Glass. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and a fixed dimension for the sill overhang. Creating Sill Families There are 2 window sill families available in the training folders. which nests them. navigate to Metric/Families/Windows/m_Concrete Sill. click Family Types. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. 8 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. you can switch between imported families of the same category. When the family is loaded into a project.rfa. click Training Files. 6 Click OK three times. you learn how to import window sill families into the window family and associate parameters of the nested families to the main family. Note the new Material parameters under Material and Finishes. click Add parameter. . click the rectangular button on the right side. Concrete sill family 1 Close all open projects or families. 4 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. the solid geometry has the material that is assigned to its subcategory in the Object Styles dialog. 4 In the Project Browser. a Width type parameter. for Materials and Finishes ➤ Material. 7 Using the same method. 2 Click File menu ➤ Open. The Back and Center (Left/Right) reference planes define the origin of the family. select Materials and Finishes. The default value is By Category. click (3D). 10 Save the file. parameters of nested families can be associated with parameters of the main family. Creating Nested Families Families can be imported into families.

The Bottom reference plane defines the origin of the family. The sketch lines of the extrusion are locked to all exterior reference planes.rfa. navigate to Metric/Families/Windows/m_Metal Sill. 11 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. and click . 6 In the Project Browser. Metal sill family 9 Close all open projects or families. double-click Left. under Elevations. 8 Click OK. The sill is placed on a subcategory Window Sill.5 In the Project Browser. 10 Click File menu ➤ Open. and is visible only in detail level Fine. and click Open. 576 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . has a fixed material Window Sill Concrete assigned. under 3D views. The elevation view shows reference planes with fixed dimensions. 12 Select the solid geometry. and click . double-click View 1. 7 Select the solid geometry.

and verify thatm_Concrete Sill. 5 In the Load into Projects dialog. and verify that m_Metal Sill. 4 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. Parameters. Load the concrete sill 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 8 On the Design Bar.rfa.rfa is cleared. and click Open. Both sill families were created with the Generic Model family template and changed to a window family. The concrete sill family is now loaded into the Window family. and then load families into the casement window family you have created. The category of a family can be changed under Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. 13 Click OK. 9 In the Load into Projects dialog. You open the main family first. The metal sill family is now loaded into the Window family. and is visible only in detail level Fine.rfa. 6 Click OK. 11 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. Loading Sill Families into the Window Family Families opened in the family editor can be loaded directly into other families. click Load into Projects. open m_Concrete Sill. and Origins are as in the concrete sill family. navigate to Casement Window. select Casement Window. has a fixed material Window Sill Metal assigned.rfa. 3 Using the same method. 10 Click OK.The sill is placed on a subcategory Window Sill.rfa is cleared. 2 In the Open dialog. Reference Planes. Load the metal sill 7 Click Window menu ➤ Metal Sill. select Casement Window.rfa -3D View: View1. click Load into Projects. Loading Sill Families into the Window Family | 577 .rfa.

Click OK.rfa. Associate the parameter to nested families 6 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. 13 Maximize Casement Window. enter Width . select Construction. As both sill families have been defined as Window families.rfa. Create the parameter 1 On the Design Bar. 578 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . enter Sill Length. For Group parameter under. under Parameters. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog.12 Close and save m_Metal Sill. click Family Types. Creating a Length Parameter The sill length needs to be equivalent to the exterior width of the window family. select Length.2* Wall Offset. they appear in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Windows.rfa and m_Concrete Sill. for Construction ➤ Sill Length. click Add. in the Formula column. 2 In the Family Types dialog. you create a parameter that determines the true sill length in the window family. double-click Concrete Sill. For Type of Parameter. under Families ➤ Windows ➤ Concrete Sill. 5 Click OK.

9 Click OK twice. Level. The Length type parameter of the nested families now has the same value as the calculated value of the Sill Length parameter of the window family. click the rectangular button on the right side.7 In the Type Properties dialog. for Dimensions ➤ Width. 9 Click OK twice. Placing the Sill Family In this exercise. under Floor Plans. 10 Using the same method. and click . click Detail Level ➤ Fine. Place the family 1 In the Project Browser. select Sill Length. 8 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. for Dimensions ➤ Length. select Insertion Depth. you place the concrete sill in the project. 3 In the Project Browser. click the rectangular button on the right side. 4 Drag Concrete Sill into the drawing area. 11 Select the Center (Left/Right) reference plane of the window family. aligning it to reference planes in both plan and elevation views. Align the sill 10 On the Tools toolbar. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. The sill family needs to be positioned and aligned in plan and elevation views. expand Families ➤ Windows ➤ Concrete Sill. The Width instance parameter of the nested families now has the same value as the Insertion Depth parameter of the window family. Placing the Sill Family | 579 . 2 On the View Control Bar. select the hidden Center (Left/Right) reference plan of the Sill family. click (Align). 8 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. associate the Length parameter of the Metal Sill family. 5 Click Modify. double-click Ref. and lock the alignment. Associate an instance parameter 6 Select the solid geometry of the concrete sill. and click to place it.

TIP If the sill does not display. double-click Left. you add a Sill Type parameter. 580 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . double-click View 1. The sill is placed in the desired position. under 3D Views. 18 On the View Control Bar. click and spin the wall. under Elevations. 15 On the Tools toolbar. and lock the alignment. align the bottom edge of the sill family. 14 On the View Control Bar. click (Align). align the lower horizontal edge of the sill to the Insertion Edge reference plane of the Window family. 16 Select the Sill reference plane of the window family. 17 In the Project Browser. and lock the alignment. click Detail Level ➤ Fine. 13 In the Project Browser. Creating a Shared Parameter In order to switch the sill from concrete to metal on an instance level.12 Using the same method. click Detail Level ➤ Fine.

under Parameters. 6 In the New Parameter Group dialog. for Name. 2 In the Family Types dialog. The metal sill replaces the concrete sill. the parameter appears on the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog in the available fields list. and select Instance. Create the shared parameter 1 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. 2 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog. you must define the parameter as a shared parameter. navigate to Training. 3 Click Apply. Associate the parameter to geometry 17 In the drawing area. click OK. 5 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. for Group parameter under. select Sill Type. and click Select. for Label. select <Family Type>. 4 Under File name. 12 In the Family Types dialog. enter Windows. enter Training Shared Parameter. Testing Nested Families You can test the correct behavior of the nested families directly in the window family. select the Concrete Sill family. and click OK. If the family is then loaded into a project. Add the parameter to a family 11 On the Design Bar. under Groups.To display the custom parameter in a schedule. enter Sill Type. 7 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. select Metal Sill. Under Type of Parameter. click Shared parameter. click Create. click Family Types. for Constraints ➤ Sill Type (default). 18 On the Options Bar. click New. 9 In the Select Category dialog. 16 Click OK twice. under Parameters. 3 In the Save As dialog. 1 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 14 In the Shared Parameters dialog. select Constraints. under Parameter Type. click Family Types. Note that the last created Shared Parameter file has been automatically opened. and click Save. 13 In the Parameter Properties dialog. select Windows. 10 Click OK 3 times. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Name. click Add. click New. Testing Nested Families | 581 .

Testing the Family in a Project Environment Finally. click Detail Level ➤ Fine. Test windows and sills 1 On the Standard toolbar. and create a horizontal wall.4 Click OK. 8 On the Views toolbar. 6 In the Type Selector. select Casement Window : 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200 and place the window in the wall. 7 Using the same method. check all views at all levels of detail. use best practice to test the window in multiple wall thicknesses in the project environment. click Load into Projects. 5 On the Design Bar. click the Window tool. 2 Click Window menu ➤ Casement Window.rfa -3D View: View 1. click . This creates a new project with the default template. click the Wall tool. 9 In the View Control Bar. click (3D). click and spin the wall. insert a Casement Window : 1500 x 1400 1-Swing Sash 400 in the wall. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 582 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . TIP If the sill does not display. 3 On the Design Bar.

Creating a Furniture Family | 583 . add the fields Mark. select Windows. and click OK. Click OK. Create a window schedule 12 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. You begin by creating the desktop. and drawers as extrusions. 13 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Category. and click OK. rolltop. You then assign parameters to the furniture family to allow for the creation of different-sized versions of the prototype. 14 In the Schedule Properties dialog.10 Select the smaller window. Height. select Metal Sill. you create a custom furniture family based on the definition of a rolltop desk. Creating a Furniture Family In this lesson. Under Name. for Constraints ➤ Sill Type. and click . drawer base. Sill Type is now displayed in the schedule table. enter Window Schedule with Sills. and Sill Type to the Scheduled fields list. Width. Note that the window sill has changed. 11 In the Element Properties dialog.

click New ➤ Family. Level.Finally. Floor Plan: Ref. click Training Files. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Furniture. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. Precise dimensions are assigned to the reference planes in subsequent steps. and specify values for the furniture length and depth. you add reference planes and specify the parameters for the new rolltop desk furniture family. 584 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters In this exercise.rft. 2 On the File menu. NOTE When you draw the reference planes. one above and one below the existing horizontal centerline reference plane as shown. their exact location is not critical. Create a new family based on the default furniture template 1 Close all open projects or families. 7 Draw two horizontal reference planes. 5 On the View menu. they represent the furniture centerline axes. Draw additional horizontal and vertical reference planes 6 On the Design Bar. The reference planes that display are part of the default furniture template. click Ref Plane. 4 Maximize the view. you assign new dimension values to the furniture to create new types within the furniture family.

10 Near the bottom of the drawing area. proceeding to the centerline reference plane. one to the left and one to the right of the existing vertical centerline reference plane as shown. Dimension the reference planes 9 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. add a horizontal dimension string beginning at the left reference plane. Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters | 585 . and ending at the right reference plane. as shown.8 Draw two vertical reference planes.

Click the EQ symbol to make the segments equal. 12 On the Design Bar. 11 Add an overall horizontal dimension underneath the dimension you just added. 13 Select the left reference plane. 586 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Modify. It should reference the left reference plane and the right reference plane as shown. 14 Change the horizontal dimension to 2000 mm.

add a vertical dimension string beginning at the upper reference plane. as shown. and ending at the lower reference plane.15 On the Design Bar. 16 On the right side of the drawing area. 17 To the right of the dimension you just created. Click the EQ symbol to make both segments equal. Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters | 587 . add an overall vertical dimension from the upper reference plane to the lower reference plane. as shown. proceeding to the centerline reference plane. click Dimension.

click Modify.18 On the Design Bar. 19 Select the upper. 21 On the Design Bar. Afterwards. 20 Change the vertical dimension to 1000 mm. click Modify. select each reference plane and drag the extents to the new position. 588 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . horizontal reference plane. TIP To do this. select each dimension and drag the witness line controls as needed. 22 Clean up the extents of the reference planes and the dimension witness lines as shown.

25 In the Parameter Properties dialog. select <Add parameter. select <Add parameter. Select Type. For Group parameter under. 26 Select the 1000 mm dimension.> for Label. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type.. enter Length for Name. 28 In the Parameter Properties dialog. specify the following: ■ Under Parameter type. select Family parameter. Click OK. 24 On the Options Bar... Under Parameter Data.. Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters | 589 . 27 On the Options Bar. select Family parameter.Add length and depth family parameters 23 Select the 2000 mm dimension.> for Label. select Dimensions.

Enter 1500 mm for Depth. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. For Group parameter under. When the solid geometry is snapped to the reference planes. 31 In the Family Types dialog. Flex the design 29 Adjust the location of the reference planes within the drawing area. Click OK. These reference planes will be the skeleton that you snap the solid geometry to. so when you open the Family Types dialog. select Dimensions. click Family Types. you should flex the design now to ensure the reference planes and labelled dimensions adapt to changes as expected. enter Depth for Name.■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. you can still see the model. 590 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Select Type. Notice the reference planes adapt to the new dimension parameters. Therefore. enter 3000 mm for Length. Click Apply. 30 On the Design Bar. it will also adapt to the same changes.

8 On the Options Bar. the symbolic line thickness was modified for training purposes. 4 On the Design Bar. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 2 On the Options Bar. enter 2000 mm for Length. Your lines may have a lighter weight. Enter 1000 mm for Depth. Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry | 591 . click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. “Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry” on page 591.32 In the Family Types dialog. Level for Name. select Level: Ref. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 9 Move the cursor over one of the symbolic lines. click Set Work Plane. Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry In this exercise. click . under Specify a new Work Plane. and click OK. you create the solid geometry of the desktop with an extrusion. press TAB until the chain of lines is offered as a selection option. and click to select all four symbolic lines. 5 On the Design Bar. Click Apply. 7 On the Design Bar. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. click . Create the desktop using an extrusion 1 On the Design Bar. 6 In the Work Plane dialog. and then select the lower right reference plane intersection for the second corner of the rectangle. NOTE In the image below. click Symbolic Lines. 3 Select the upper left reference plane intersection for the first corner of the rectangle. and enter 100 mm for Depth. Click OK. click Lines.

click Dimension. 11 In the Project Browser. 14 Drag the top edge of the desktop upward until the temporary dimension value is 750 mm. press TAB until Extrusion : Shape handle displays in the Status Bar. press TAB until Extrusion : Shape handle displays in the Status Bar. Move the desktop up 12 On the Design Bar. Add height and thickness dimensions 17 On the Design Bar. double-click Front. click Finish Sketch. The desktop extrusion extends 100 mm above the reference level. under Elevations. and select the bottom edge. 592 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 16 Drag the bottom edge of the desktop up until the desktop is 100 mm thick. click Modify. 15 Move the cursor over the bottom edge of the desktop. 13 Move the cursor over the top edge of the desktop. and select the top edge.10 On the Design Bar.

Under Parameter Data.. For Group parameter under. 21 Select the 750 mm dimension. 19 Add a vertical dimension from the bottom of the desktop to the top edge. select <Add parameter..> for Label. Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry | 593 . Click OK. Select Type. 22 On the Options Bar. select Family parameter. select <Add parameter. Click OK. 27 On the Design Bar. For Group parameter under.18 Add a vertical dimension from the reference level to the top edge of the desktop. select Family parameter. 26 n the Parameter Properties dialog. click Modify. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. Under Parameter Data. select Dimensions. 25 On the Options Bar. 23 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 24 Select the 100 mm dimension. click Modify. as shown. enter Height for Name. Select Type. enter Thickness for Name. select Dimensions.> for Label. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type.. Add height and thickness family parameters 20 On the Design Bar..

3 On the Options Bar. 29 On the Design Bar. enter 2000 mm for Length. Level. 594 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .Flex the design 28 Adjust the location of the model within the drawing area. Click Apply. Click OK. 4 Move the cursor over the left vertical reference plane. and click to locate a new vertical reference plane offset 100 mm to the right. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry In this exercise. so when you open the Family Types dialog. click . you create the solid geometry of the desk drawer base. Enter 1200 mm for Height. click Ref Plane. and click Apply. Enter 150 mm for Thickness. and enter 100 mm for Offset. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. Offset two reference planes to locate the first drawer base corner 1 In the Project Browser. enter 4000 mm for Length. “Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry” on page 594. 30 In the Family Types dialog. you can still see the model. double-click Ref. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. Enter 750 mm for Height. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. and click Apply. and click Apply. 31 In the Family Types dialog. click Family Types. 2 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Notice the desk top adapts to the new dimension parameters.

click Dimension. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry | 595 . and click to locate a new horizontal reference plane offset 100 mm below it. Lock the dimension as shown. 8 Add a dimension to the top horizontal reference plane and the offset plane below it. 7 Add a dimension referencing the left vertical reference plane and the offset plane you added. Click the lock icon as shown. 6 On the Design Bar.5 Move the cursor over the upper horizontal reference plane.

Sketch the left drawer base 9 On the Design Bar. 13 On the Options Bar. and then specify a point 300 mm to the right and 800 mm down for the second corner of the rectangle. 10 On the Design Bar. as shown. click . click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. After you complete the rectangle. 12 On the Design Bar. 15 Click both of the lock icons to lock the edges of the extrusion to the reference planes. click Set Work Plane. select Level: Ref. two lock icons display. Level for Name. click Lines. 596 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and click OK. under Specify a new Work Plane. 11 In the Work Plane dialog. 14 Select the intersection of the new offset reference planes for the first corner of the rectangle.

click Dimension.16 On the Design Bar. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry | 597 . . using the TAB key. 21 Select the vertical centerline reference plane as the mirror axis. 19 Select the four sketched lines. click Modify. You can also highlight the entire line chain. and then click the lock icon to lock the dimension. 17 Add a vertical dimension from the lower reference plane to the lower edge of the drawer base. 20 On the Tools toolbar. Mirror the left rectangle to create the right drawer base 18 On the Design Bar. TIP You can select multiple elements by holding the CTRL key down. click the Mirror tool.

click . 23 For the align-to reference. 22 On the Tools toolbar.A duplicate of the left drawer base is mirrored to create the right drawer base. 24 Select the top horizontal line of the right drawer extrusion as shown. 598 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . as shown below at the cursor. select the horizontal reference plane second from the top.

and then click the lock icon to lock the dimension. click Dimension. Add a dimension from the lower reference plane to the lower edge of the drawer base. and then click the lock icon to lock the dimension. ■ Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry | 599 . 27 Add and lock the following two dimensions to the right drawer extrusion: ■ Add a dimension from the right vertical reference plane to the right edge of the drawer base.A lock icon displays. 25 Click the lock icon to lock the extrusion edge to the reference plane. 26 On the Design Bar.

Click OK. 600 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . For Group parameter under. Select Type. as shown.. 31 In the Parameter Properties dialog. select <Add parameter. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. enter Drawer Base Width for Name. 30 On the Options Bar. one on each extrusion that references the width of the drawer base. Under Parameter Data.28 Add two final dimensions. select Dimensions. 29 Select the dimension referring to the drawer width on the left extrusion.> for Label. select Family parameter..

35 On the Design Bar. Extend the drawer base extrusions up to the desktop 36 In the Project Browser. select Drawer Base Width for Label. 34 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click . click Finish Sketch. 37 On the Tools toolbar. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry | 601 . 33 On the Options Bar. under Elevations.32 Select the dimension referring to the drawer width on the right extrusion. double-click Front. 38 Select the lower edge of the desktop as the align-to reference.

a lock icon displays. 602 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 45 On the View Control Bar. After the alignment. you can still see the model. However. notice that annotations display in this view. click the Scale control and select 1:20. Flex the design 46 Adjust the location of the model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog. The solid geometry for the desk drawer base is now complete. 41 On the View toolbar.39 Select the upper edge of the drawer base. click Modify. 44 Clear Show annotation categories in this view. click it to lock the alignment. 42 On the View menu. 43 Click the Annotation Categories tab. click Visibility/Graphics. 40 On the Design Bar. click . and click OK.

click Family Types. Enter 150 mm for Thickness. and click Apply. and click Apply. “Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry” on page 603. Notice the desk adapts to the new dimension parameters. you create the solid geometry of the desk rolltop. Click OK. Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry In this exercise. 48 In the Family Types dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. enter 2000 mm for Length. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. Enter 750 mm for Height.47 On the Design Bar. under Elevations. 49 In the Family Types dialog. Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry | 603 . and click Apply. Click Apply. Enter 1200 mm for Height. double-click Right. Create the rolltop extrusion 1 In the Project Browser. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 50 Proceed to the next exercise. enter 4000 mm for Length.

2 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 5 On the Design Bar. and click to specify the upper left corner. 6 On the Options Bar. then move the cursor up 300mm and to the left 400mm. 4 In the Work Plane dialog. 8 On the Tools toolbar. as shown. 3 On the Design Bar. 9 Select the desk top. click Set Work Plane. click . then the lower horizontal sketch line. 604 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . under Specify a new Work Plane. click Lines. click . select Reference Plane: Center (Left\Right) for Name. and click the lock icon to lock the alignment. 7 Sketch the rectangle beginning at the intersection of the desktop and the right reference plane. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion.

Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry | 605 . 12 Add one dimension referring to both vertical sketch lines. 11 On the Design Bar.10 Select the right vertical edge of the desktop extrusion. and lock it. and lock it. click Dimension. and lock the alignment. Add another dimension to both horizontal sketch lines. then select the right parallel sketch line.

13 On the Design Bar. 606 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Finish Sketch. TIP You may need to click the down arrow button. 14 On the Options Bar. . 16 On the Design Bar. and then select the fillet arc tool from the menu. the upper sketch line. and then move the cursor down and to the right until you create and arc similar to the image below. click the Fillet arc tool. click Lines. 15 Select the left vertical sketch line. Do not be concerned with the precise dimension of the arc radius.

and click the lock icon. select the right edge of the rolltop. Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry | 607 . 19 Select the left edge of the left drawer base. Align the left and right edges of the rolltop with the drawer bases 17 In the Project Browser.The rolltop extrusion outline is complete. under Elevations. 20 Select the right edge of the right drawer base. click . double-click Front. 18 On the Tools toolbar. and click the lock icon. select the left edge of the rolltop.

24 In the Family Types dialog. If not. and click Apply. 23 On the Design Bar. and click Apply. The solid geometry of the rolltop is now complete. you may need to align and lock problematic edges that did not remain aligned. and click Apply. and click Apply. Flex the design 22 Adjust the location of the desk model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog. click Family Types. click .21 On the View toolbar. Enter 1500 mm for Height. 608 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Enter 1500 mm for Depth. The desk should adapt to all the changes. You can also use dimension constraints. enter 4000 mm for Length. you can still see the model. Enter 200 mm for Thickness. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions.

26 Proceed to the next exercise.25 In the Family Types dialog. Click OK. select Pick a Plane. under Specify a new Work Plane. Create the desk drawer extrusions 1 On the Design Bar. 3 In the Work Plane dialog. Enter 1000 mm for Depth. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry | 609 . Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry In this exercise. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. you create the solid geometry of the drawers and apply material to the desk. Click Apply. 2 On the Design Bar. and click OK. enter 2000 mm for Length. click Set Work Plane. 4 Select the front plane of the right drawer base. “Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry” on page 609. Enter 750 mm for Height. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions.

14 On the Tools toolbar. click . 12 On the Options Bar. After selecting the line of an upper drawer. 6 On the Design Bar. 10 Add a dimension between the vertical edges of the drawer base and the vertical lines of each bottom drawer. 13 To constrain the four upper drawers. There should be four dimensions as shown. click . and then select the corresponding left vertical lines of the two drawers above it. If you modify the desk length or the drawer base width. click Lines. Lock each dimension as you add it. 11 On the Tools toolbar. NOTE Adding and locking these dimensions is very important. 8 Sketch six drawers similar to the image below. NOTE The exact configuration of the rectangles representing the drawer fronts is not critical. 7 On the Options Bar. click the lock that displays to lock the alignment. If you cannot see the locks on the dimensions. select the left vertical line on the left lowest drawer first. under Elevations. click Dimension. these locked dimension assure that the drawers flex as expected.5 In the Project Browser. . 9 On the Design Bar. click drawer set on the left. zoom the view until you do. select Multiple Alignment. and repeat the previous step by selecting the right vertical lines of the 610 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . double-click Front.

27 In the Material Library dialog. and select Shading with Edges. 29 In the Materials dialog. click OK. Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry | 611 . click Duplicate. click OK. and repeat the previous two steps on the right set of drawers. Dark. click Finish Sketch. click 24 In the Materials dialog. 28 Click OK. Polished. navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Cherry and select Stained. Apply material to the desk 21 Draw a pick box around the entire desk to select all the extrusions. 17 On the Design Bar. under Materials and Finishes. for Material. and click OK. Cherry. 22 On the Options Bar. under Constraints. 30 In the Element Properties dialog.15 On the Tools toolbar. click . enter Desk . 31 On the View Control Bar. click Modify. click . 19 On the Design Bar. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. 20 On the View toolbar. click . 18 In the Element Properties dialog. 25 In the New Material dialog. enter 20mm for Extrusion End. click for Texture. click Extrusion Properties. 16 On the Design Bar. These steps ensure the top drawers remain aligned and flex with the constrained bottom drawer. under AccuRender. click the Model Graphics Style control. 26 In the Materials dialog.Wood. and click OK.

enter 2000 mm for Length. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. you may need to align and lock problematic edges that did not remain aligned. The desk should adapt to all the changes.Flex the design 32 Adjust the location of the desk model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 34 In the Family Types dialog. If not. you can still see the model. enter 4000 mm for Length. you define new furniture types based on the rolltop desk model that you just created. and click Apply. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Enter 1000 mm for Depth. “Defining New Furniture Types” on page 612. 35 In the Family Types dialog. Enter 1500 mm for Depth. Click OK. and click Apply. 36 Proceed with the final exercise in this lesson. 33 On the Design Bar. Defining New Furniture Types In this exercise. click Family Types. 612 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and click Apply. Enter 750 mm for Height. You can also use dimension constraints. Click Apply. Enter 200 mm for Thickness.

9 In the Name dialog. 20 Specify a point in the drawing area to add the first desk. select Rolltop Desk 200 x 1000mm. click Component.rfa. click New. to start a new project based on your default template. 3 In the Name dialog. under Family Types. and click OK. and click Apply. click Family Types. 8 Under Family Types. click 14 On the View toolbar. click Apply.rfa file. 7 In the Family Types dialog. click the Model Graphics Style control and select Shading with Edges. click Load. enter 2250 mm for Length and 1250 mm for Depth. click . and click OK. 10 In the Family Types dialog. and click OK. 17 On the Options Bar. Defining New Furniture Types | 613 . Define new furniture types with various widths and depths 1 On the Design Bar. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. enter Rolltop Desk 2250 x 1250mm for Name. 6 In the Name dialog. 19 In the Type Selector. click New. 11 On the File menu.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. Training Furniture. and click Open. 15 On the View Control Bar. click New. enter Rolltop Desk 2000 x 1000mm for Name. 4 In the Family Types dialog. 5 Under Family Types. 2 In the Family Types dialog. enter Rolltop Desk 2100 x 1100mm for Name. and click OK. 18 In the Open dialog. enter 2100 mm for Length and 1100 mm for Depth. navigate to the location of your Training Furniture. 12 Navigate to the folder of your choice and save the new furniture family project with the name. click Save. select it. and click Apply. Load the new furniture family into a new project 13 On the Standard toolbar. verify that Length is 2000 mm and Depth is 1000 mm. You now have three new furniture types defined within your furniture family.

and click to add the third desk. Creating a Baluster Family In this lesson. 24 Specify a point in the drawing area to the right of the previous two desks. Drawing a Baluster In this exercise. This completes the Creating a Furniture Family lesson. you draw a baluster with an extrusion. 614 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . You now have three new rolltop desks based on the new rolltop desk furniture family prototype. select Rolltop Desk 2250 x 1250mm. and add the second desk. 23 In the Type Selector.21 In the Type Selector. you create a custom baluster and apply it to a set of stair railings. Balusters are simply profile extrusions with an assigned height family parameter. 22 Specify a point to the right of the first desk. select Rolltop Desk 2100 x 1100mm.

However. 5 On the Design Bar. click Set Work Plane. The reference planes that display are part of the default baluster template. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. Draw the baluster plan profile 3 In the Project Browser. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs. expand Views (all). 9 On the Design Bar. The bottom of the baluster is at the reference level and the baluster has an assigned default height of 750mm. 7 On the Design Bar.rft. Level. their exact location is not critical. In the left pane of the New dialog. Draw your profile approximately 30mm wide by 60mm deep. 8 Draw the closed baluster plan profile as shown. click Finish Sketch. click Training Files. Create a new family based on the default profile template 1 Expand the left elevation view. the baluster profile should be centered on the vertical and horizontal reference planes. click Lines. and click OK. and double-click Ref. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Baluster. Drawing a Baluster | 615 . 4 On the Design Bar. Top and bottom cut angles for the baluster are also displayed.Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. 2 On the View menu. select Ref. click New ➤ Family. 6 In the Work Plane dialog. expand Floor Plans. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit. Level for Name.

By default. the extrusion has a height of 250mm. 616 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 5 Draw a straight stair run as shown. 13 Select the top reference plane and select the top edge of the extrusion. 6 On the Design Bar. you assign the new baluster that you just created to a stair run. 2 In the left pane of the New Project dialog. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. The new custom baluster is now complete. Load the new baluster family into a new project 1 On the File menu. Draw a straight stair run 3 On the Design Bar. 12 On the Options Bar. click Stairs. 4 On the Design Bar. Assigning the New Baluster to a Stair Run In this exercise. click .rfa. 7 On the File menu. 14 Click the lock icon.rte. click Training Files. click New ➤ Project. click the Modelling tab. click Modify and select the extrusion.Extend the baluster extrusion to the top reference plane 10 In the Project Browser under Elevations. 11 On the Design Bar. double-click Front. click Finish Sketch. 15 Save the new baluster family with the name Training Baluster. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric.

15 In the Type Properties dialog. 16 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog. 22 Zoom in on the new balusters. navigate to the location of your Training Baluster. click . click OK. click Edit/New. click Orient ➤ Southwest. Assigning the New Baluster to a Stair Run | 617 . click Shading with Edges.8 In the Open dialog. click Edit for Baluster Placement. under Baluster Family. 13 On the Options Bar. click . 9 On the View toolbar. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. 17 Clear Use Balusters Per Tread on Stairs. click Modify and select the existing railing. 11 On the View menu. 20 In the Type Properties dialog. click OK. select it. select Training Baluster : Training Baluster for the Regular baluster. 14 In the Element Properties dialog.rfa file. and click Open. 18 Specify Start and End posts as Training Baluster. 10 On the View menu. 19 Click OK. Apply the custom baluster to the stair run 12 On the Design Bar.

and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile-Rail. a stair nosing.The stair run is now assigned the new baluster that you created. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs. click New ➤ Family. Creating Profile Families A profile is a series of closed two-dimensional lines and arcs. a railing. However.Sweep. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile. a reveal. Create a new family based on the default rail profile template 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. Use profiles to define object cross sections such as railings. In this lesson. Level is open. click Lines. Create profiles to define frequently used shapes in your details. 2 Starting at the reference plane intersection. Drawing a Rail Profile In this exercise. Create a new family based on the default profile template 1 On the Design Bar. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. Drawing a Sweep Profile In this exercise. soffits. and a host sweep. under Floor Plans. In the left pane of the New dialog. cornices. 3 Save the new profile family with the name Profile .rft. In the left pane of the New dialog. 618 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . you create a rail profile. This completes the Creating a Baluster Family lesson. balusters. You then create an in-place sweep based on a 2D path and apply the host sweep to a wall. the sweep profile should begin at the reference plane intersection. and other sweep-defined objects. you create five different profiles: a sweep.rfa. draw the sweep profile with line and arc segments as shown.rft. their exact location is not critical. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. click Training Files. The new sweep profile is now complete. you draw a sweep profile. verify that Ref. click New ➤ Family.

with the vertical reference plane labeled as the riser face and the horizontal reference plane labeled as the tread surface. Create a new family based on the default stair nosing profile template 1 Notice the existing planes and text provided within the template. click Lines. The rail height is measured from the floor elevation to the rail top. Drawing a Stair Nosing Profile In this exercise. However. draw the rail profile with line segments as shown. Additional text specifies the lower-left quadrant as the location for the stair nosing. you create a stair nosing profile.rft. 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection. Drawing a Stair Nosing Profile | 619 . their exact location is not critical. Draw the rail profile 2 On the Design Bar. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile-Stair Nosing. click Training Files.The reference planes that display are part of the default rail profile template. The new rail profile is now complete. with the vertical reference plane labeled as the rail centerline and the horizontal reference plane labeled as the rail top. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs. 4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile .rfa. the top of the rail profile should coincide with the rail top reference plane. In the left pane of the New dialog.Rail. The reference planes that display are part of the default stair nosing profile template. click New ➤ Family. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu.

The horizontal reference plane represents the offset from floor level to the reveal. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile-Reveal. In addition. The new stair nosing profile is now complete. the top of the stair nosing profile should coincide with the tread surface reference plane and the right edge of the stair nosing profile should coincide with the riser face reference plane. under Floor Plans.Draw the stair nosing profile 2 On the Design Bar. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs. you create a reveal profile. 620 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .rfa. 4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile . Create a new family based on the default reveal profile template 1 In the Project Browser. Level is open. their exact location is not critical. you must draw the stair nosing in the lower-left quadrant. Drawing a Reveal Profile In this exercise. In the left pane of the New dialog. with the vertical reference plane labeled as the wall face. Reveal profiles are used with the Reveal tool in the project environment to define a wall cutout. click Training Files.Stair Nosing. The reference planes that display are part of the default reveal profile template. verify that Ref. and the wall body indicated to the right of the wall face reference plane.rft. click New ➤ Family. draw the stair nosing profile with line and arc segments as shown. click Lines. 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection. However.

3 Starting at the reference plane intersection.Reveal. their exact location is not critical. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines. 4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile . which may be any vertical surface. draw the reveal profile with line segments as shown. Drawing a Host Sweep Profile | 621 . Host Sweep profiles are similar to reveal profiles and are used with the Host Sweep tool in the project environment to define a shape to add to a host surface. Drawing a Host Sweep Profile In this exercise.rfa.rft. Create a new family based on the default host sweep profile template 1 In the Project Browser. The new reveal profile is now complete. click Training Files. click New ➤ Family. the left edge of the reveal profile must coincide with wall face reference plane and the reveal must be drawn within the wall body (to the right of the wall face reference plane). Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile-Hosted. Level is open. However. you create a host sweep profile. click Lines. In the left pane of the New dialog.Draw the reveal profile 2 On the Design Bar. verify that Ref. under Floor Plans.

click OK. 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection.rte. 4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile . click Create. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. 4 In the New Project dialog. However. with the vertical reference plane labeled as the host face and the host body indicated to the left of the host face reference plane. you apply the sweep profile that you just created to a 2D path. Draw the host sweep profile 2 On the Design Bar. Create a new project 1 On the File menu. click Lines. 622 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Training Files.The reference planes that display are part of the default host sweep profile template. Specify the family category 5 On the Modelling menu.rfa. Applying a Sweep Profile to a 2D Path In this exercise. The new host sweep profile is now complete. click Browse. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines. click New ➤ Project. their exact location is not critical. The reference plane intersection is the origin of the host sweep profile. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog.Host Sweep. the left edge of the host sweep profile must coincide with the host face reference plane. 2 In the New Project dialog. and the host sweep profile must be drawn outside of the host body (to the right of the host face reference plane). draw the reveal profile with line and arc segments as shown.

11 On the Design Bar. select it. the exact location of the path is not critical. click Load Profiles. click Finish Path. Modify the sweep profile configuration 18 In the Project Browser. click Lines and sketch the 2D path approximately as shown. 14 In the Type Selector.Sweep. and double-click South. beside Load Profiles. click Finish Sweep. select Generic Models for Family Category. expand Elevations. 15 On the Design Bar. 10 On the Design Bar. Apply the sweep profile to the 2D path 12 On the Options Bar. and click OK. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Sweep. click Sketch 2D Path. select Profile . NOTE When you sketch the 2D path.rfa. 19 Zoom in on the right end of the sweep. 17 On the View toolbar.6 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. enter Sweep for Name. click Ref Plane. 16 On the Design Bar. click Finish Family. 7 In the Name dialog. 13 In the Open dialog. and click OK.Sweep. 9 On the Design Bar. click . navigate to the location of Profile . expand Views (all). Applying a Sweep Profile to a 2D Path | 623 . Sketch the 2D sweep path 8 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. and click Open. 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

27 On the View toolbar. Applying a Host Sweep Profile to Walls In this exercise. click Browse. select Profile Is Flipped. Under Constraints.rte. you apply the host sweep profile that you created to a group of walls. on the Options Bar. enter 600 for Vertical Profile Offset. 26 On the Design Bar. 2 In the New Project dialog. on the Options Bar. Create a new project 1 On the File menu.21 Draw a vertical reference plane coincident with the left edge of the profile as shown. 4 In the New Project dialog. Draw a wall group 5 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Wall. The sweep profile application is now complete. Under Other. click . 23 Select the sweep profile again and. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. 25 Click OK. and open Metric Templates\DefaultMetric. click Edit. do the following: ■ ■ ■ . click 24 In the Element Properties dialog. click OK. 624 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Finish Family. Enter 25 degrees for Angle. click New ➤ Project. click Training Files. 22 Select the sweep profile and.

9 On the Options Bar. 10 Select a point on the left wall for the wall sweep. 7 On the View toolbar. click . 8 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.NOTE When you draw the walls. their exact location is not critical. 6 Draw four walls as shown. 11 Select a point on the right wall for the next wall sweep. verify that Horizontal is selected. Applying a Host Sweep Profile to Walls | 625 . click Host Sweep ➤ Wall Sweep.

click 16 In the Element Properties dialog. click Spin [Shift]. click . navigate to the location of Profile . 14 In the Open dialog. click Training Files. on the Options Bar. The reference planes that display are part of the default room tag template. 17 In the Type Properties dialog. click OK. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit. Replace the default wall sweep with the new host wall sweep 13 On the File menu. 21 Move the cursor to rotate your viewpoint to view the host sweep from underneath. 626 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .rfa. Creating a Room Tag In this lesson. you specify the room tag parameters. . floor and ceiling finish. Create a new tag based on the default room tag template 1 On the View menu.rft. 20 In the Dynamic View dialog. select Profile . 19 On the View toolbar. The default wall sweep is replaced with your host sweep profile.Host Sweep : Profile . 18 In the Element Properties dialog. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 15 Select the wall sweep and. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. and open Metric\Templates\M_Room Tag.12 On the Design Bar. click Modify. and click OK.Host Sweep for Profile. In the left pane of the New dialog. and area with labels added to extract project data. under Construction. click Edit/New. and click Open. This completes the Creating Profile Families lesson. Specifying Room Tag Parameters In this exercise. select it.Host Sweep. you create a room tag which displays room name. click New ➤ Annotation Symbol.

click Label. and click OK. 19 In the Select Parameter dialog. The name label is displayed with the text underlined. and click OK.Edit the 3mm label 2 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. click OK. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 23 In the Select Parameter dialog. and click OK. and click OK. click . and click OK. 15 In the Select Parameter dialog. Combine labels into a room tag 11 On the Design Bar. enter 2 for the Text Size parameter. click Label. 12 In the Type Selector. 8 In the Name dialog. click Edit/New. 14 Specify the location for the first label as shown. 7 In the Type properties dialog. 17 In the Type Selector. Specifying Room Tag Parameters | 627 . enter 2mm for Name. select Label : 2mm. 21 In the Select Parameter dialog. 22 Specify a point below the Ceiling Finish label for the last label location. select Area. 20 Specify a point below the Floor Finish label for the next label location. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. select Floor Finish. click Duplicate. clear Underline. Add a 2mm label 6 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. 13 On the Options Bar. and click OK. verify that Label : 3mm is displayed. 16 Zoom in on the label. select Underline. select Ceiling Finish. 3 On the Options Bar. select Name. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. verify that Center and Middle are selected for Text Alignment. and click OK. 18 Specify a point below the Name label for the next label location. 9 In the Type Properties dialog.

rfa. The new room tag is now ready for use. click New ➤ Annotation Symbol. 3 On the Options Bar. click Training Files. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. The reference planes that display are part of the default generic annotation template. click Lines. Notes included with the template specify annotation parameters. 24 Save the new room tag with the name Finish Area Tag. you create a custom north arrow annotation symbol with a circle and lines. Creating a Custom North Arrow Annotation Symbol In this exercise. Creating an Annotation Symbol In this lesson. 4 Specify the reference plane intersection for the circle center point.rft.The Area label has a predefined value of 150 SF. and open Metric\Templates\Generic Annotation. 628 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click . notice that there is only one view available. Create a new annotation symbol based on the default generic annotation template 1 In the Project Browser. This completes the Creating a Room Tag lesson. Sketch a north arrow symbol 2 On the Design Bar. you create a custom north arrow annotation symbol and place it in a new project. In the left pane of the New dialog.

Creating a Custom North Arrow Annotation Symbol | 629 .5 Drag the cursor and specify a radius of 8mm. 9 Draw a vertical line from the center point to the bottom of the circle. 8 Draw a vertical line from the top to the center point of the circle. click Modify. click . 7 Draw a horizontal line from the left side to the right side of the circle through the center point. 6 On the Options Bar. 10 On the Design Bar.

Add an annotation objects subcategory 11 On the Settings menu. click OK. 8 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet. select 3 for Line Weight. 7 Click OK. 4 In the New Project dialog. in the North Line row. click New. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. click Modify. click Modify. enter North Line for Name. 18 Select the template notes and press DELETE. 9 On the File menu. 16 In the Type Selector. click Sheet. 17 On the Design Bar. click Browse. under Modify Subcategories. Apply the new line weight to the upper vertical line 15 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 19 Save the new north arrow with the name. select A1 metric. Load the new north arrow into a new project 1 On the File menu.rte. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 5 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. 630 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 14 In the Object Styles dialog. 6 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. and select the upper vertical line.rfa. Training North Arrow. click New ➤ Project. you add the new north arrow annotation symbol that you created to a project. Adding the New North Arrow to a Project In this exercise. select North Line.The new north arrow annotation symbol is ready to edit. verify that Generic Annotations is selected for Subcategory of. and click OK. 13 In the New Subcategory dialog. 12 In the Object Styles dialog. 2 In the New Project dialog. click Object Styles. The north arrow annotation symbol is now complete. click Training Files.

text.10 In the Open dialog. click Symbol. Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet In this exercise. navigate to the location of Training North Arrow. In the left pane of the New dialog. and open Metric\Templates\A0 Metric. select Training North Arrow. and your project data. select it. Creating a Titleblock Family | 631 . Create a new family based on the default titleblock template 1 The default titleblock template consists of 4 border lines. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. you draw all of the linework necessary to create a custom A0-size sheet. click Training Files.rfa. Creating a Titleblock Family In this lesson. The titleblock has linework. 14 On the Design Bar. and click Open. 13 Specify a point in the lower right corner of the sheet to place the symbol. This completes the Creating an Annotation Symbol lesson. click Modify. 11 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.rft. You customize the titleblock with a new text style. graphics. and labels. 12 In the Type Selector. you create a custom titleblock sheet based on the A0 metric titleblock template. click New ➤ Titleblock.

and click to draw a new vertical line. 11 Draw a horizontal line 120mm above the lower inside border as shown. and enter 140 for Offset.Sketch the inside border 2 On the Design Bar. 9 Draw a horizontal line 140mm below the upper inside border as shown. click Lines. Add vertical and horizontal lines 5 On the Options Bar. click . . click 8 Enter 0 for Offset. 10 Draw a horizontal line 120mm below the last horizontal line as shown. 3 On the Options Bar. click . 4 Specify the upper left corner of the sheet for the first rectangle corner. and enter -25 for Offset. 7 On the Options Bar. and click . 632 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and then specify the lower right corner of the sheet for the second corner of the rectangle. 6 Move the cursor over the right inside border line.

and select the second and third horizontal lines. and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the existing line.12 On the Design Bar. 24 Move the cursor over the eighth horizontal line. 16 In the Type Selector. click Modify. click Modify. 26 Zoom out to view the entire sheet. 21 On the Options Bar. and enter 20 for Offset. 17 On the Options Bar. 20 Move the cursor over the fifth horizontal line. and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the existing line. and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the existing line. enter 30 for Offset. press CTRL. click . select Title Blocks. 13 In the Type Selector. 23 Move the cursor over the seventh horizontal line. 19 Move the cursor over the fourth horizontal line. 18 Move the cursor over the third horizontal line. Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet | 633 . and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the existing line. 25 On the Design Bar. and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the existing line. and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the existing line. select Wide Lines. 14 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet. 22 Move the cursor over the third horizontal line. click Lines. 15 On the Design Bar.

2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Place the image in the upper right corner of the sheet as shown. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock In this exercise. and labels to your titleblock. 6 On the Options Bar. you add a company logo.jpg. click Edit/New. 634 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and open Common\Company Logo. Add a company logo 1 On the File menu. click Duplicate. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. text notes. click . Create a new 10mm text style 5 On the Design Bar. 4 Zoom in on the logo.The titleblock linework is now complete. click Import/Link ➤ Image. click Text. click Training Files.

and select Bold. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. and add an address and phone number as shown. click Modify. and select the last text note. Press ENTER to add each new line of text and click outside of the text box to complete the text. 14 Click outside of the text box to complete the text. 11 Click OK twice. enter 10mm Bold for Name. and drag the text note down as shown. 13 Enter Arch Design Inc. 18 Select the drag handle. in the text box. enter 10 for Text Size. 17 On the Design Bar. Add company address and phone number text 15 In the Type Selector. and click OK. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 635 . select Text : 8mm.9 In the Name dialog. Add company name text 12 Draw a text box under the first horizontal line as shown. under Text. 16 Draw a text box below the initial text.

636 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . select Constrain and Multiple. and select the consultant text note. 25 Click inside the Consultant text group. and enter the following text: ■ ■ ■ ■ Consultant: Address: Address: Telephone: 22 On the Design Bar. 24 On the Options Bar. click . click Text. 23 On the Edit toolbar. address. and phone number text 20 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Add consultant name.19 Click outside the text box to complete the modification. 21 Draw a text box below the second horizontal line.

27 Move the cursor down another 120mm and click to specify the second copied text note location.26 Move the cursor down 120mm and click to specify the first copied text note position. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 637 .

and enter Checked By:. and enter Drawn By:. 32 In the Name dialog. select Text : 5mm. 34 Click OK twice. click Text. enter 5 for Text Size. Add drawing data text 35 In the Type Selector. and click OK. 638 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 38 Draw a text box in the next space up. 30 In the Element Properties dialog. click Duplicate. 31 In the Type Properties dialog. and enter Date:. 29 On the Options Bar. 37 Draw a text box in the next space up. click Edit/New.Create a new 5mm text style 28 On the Design Bar. and enter Sheet Number:. click . 36 Draw a text box in the lower right space of the titleblock. enter 5mm for Name. 39 Draw a text box in the next space up. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. under Text.

and click OK. 43 In the Select Parameter dialog. NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. select Right and Bottom for Text Alignment. select Project Issue Date. 42 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Date field. 44 Select the left drag handle on the label. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. click Label.Add drawing data labels 40 On the Design Bar. 41 On the Options Bar. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 639 . and click to specify the label location. The label displays a default value wrapped to 3 lines.

click Center and Middle. 52 In the Type Properties dialog. 640 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. enter 15mm Label for Name. 58 In the Select Parameter dialog. select Sheet Number. select Checked By and click OK. and click OK. 55 Click OK twice. and click OK. and click OK. 54 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate. 51 In the Element Properties dialog. Add sheet number and project data labels 56 In the Type Selector. select Project Number. and click to specify the label location. select Label : 15mm Label. NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. select Drawn By. click Edit/New. 57 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Sheet Number field. 53 In the Name dialog. and click to specify the label location. and click to specify the label location. 59 On the Options Bar. 47 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Checked By field. under Text. 46 In the Select Parameter dialog. 60 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Date field. 48 In the Select Parameter dialog. and click to specify the label location. and click OK. click . enter 15 for Text Size. Create a new 15mm label style 49 On the Design Bar. click Label.45 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Drawn By field. 61 In the Select Parameter dialog. 50 On the Options Bar.

Create a 4mm label style 69 On the Design Bar. select Client Name. 64 In the Select Parameter dialog. and click to specify the label location. and click OK. and click to specify the label location. 65 Select the left drag handle on the label. and click OK. click Label. select Project Name. 66 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Name field. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 641 . and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. 68 Select the left drag handle on the label. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. 63 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Number field.62 Select the left drag handle on the label. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. 67 In the Select Parameter dialog.

under Text. 78 Place the cursor in the border area below the left side of the Sheet Number field. 77 On the Options Bar. 80 On the Design Bar. 72 In the Type Properties dialog. The titleblock graphics. click New ➤ Project. and click Open. click Left and Middle. and click to specify the label location. and labels are now complete. 71 In the Element Properties dialog. Load the new titleblock family into a new project 1 On the File menu. and click OK. 73 In the Name dialog. click OK.rfa file. click Duplicate.rte. and then adjust the width of the File Path field so that it is approximately equal to the width of the Sheet Number field. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. select 4mm Label. navigate to the location of Training A0Horizontal Titleblock. you add the titleblock that you created to a new project. 79 In the Select Parameter dialog. click Load. 5 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 6 In the Select a Titleblock dialog.70 On the Options Bar. 8 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. 9 Click OK. click . click Browse. enter 4mm Label. text. 642 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 75 Click OK twice. enter 4 for Text Size. click Sheet. Add Project Path label 76 In the Type Selector. select File Path. select Training A0Horizontal Titleblock. 4 In the New Project dialog. click Edit/New. 74 In the Type Properties dialog. click Training Files. 2 In the New Project dialog. select it. click Modify. and click OK. 7 In the Open dialog. Adding the Titleblock to a New Project In this exercise. 81 Save the new titleblock family with the name Training A0Horizontal Titleblock.rfa.

click Project Information. Enter Office Building for Project Name. 15 In the Type Properties dialog. click . and click OK. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. Adding the Titleblock to a New Project | 643 . Enter In Progress for Project Status. Enter Jane Smith for Client Name. 2005 for Project Issue Date. Enter 2005-01 for Project Number. click Modify and select the titleblock. enter Name for Drawn By. 16 Click OK. 14 On the Settings menu. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter January 1.Modify titleblock properties 10 On the Design Bar. 11 On the Options Bar. 13 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet. under Other.

Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. on the Settings menu. you start with an incomplete building information model of the Pantheon. In-place families interact with the building model according to their assigned family category.rvt. Set the Length units to millimeters.This completes the Creating a Titleblock Family lesson. In the left pane of the Open dialog. NOTE This project was created using an imperial template and components. Sketch the roof cross-section with a closed profile in an elevation view. 644 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . You create an in-place family in your current project rather than in the Family Editor. and add a dome roof and a concave floor with revolved forms as in-place families. Open the existing Pantheon building model 1 On the View menu. set the Area to Square meters. To change the units of measurement to meters. format the Area to use 2 decimal places. Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family In this exercise. and open Common\c_Pantheon. and set the suffix to None. click Project Units. click Orient ➤ Southeast. you create the dome roof with a revolved form. Creating In-Place Families In this lesson. click Training Files.

select Section: Wall Section . Specify the dome roof revolved form parameters 6 On the Design Bar. and click OK. expand Elevations. 9 Select the Center East/West reference plane as shown. 2 In the Project Browser. and click Open View. you add a dome roof with oculus (circular opening) to the Pantheon building model.Center. 4 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. Specify the Roofs family category 3 On the Modelling menu. and double-click South. and click OK. 5 In the Name dialog. and click OK. 10 In the Go To View dialog. 8 In the Work Plane dialog. select Pick a Plane. click Set Work Plane. 7 On the Design Bar. Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family | 645 . select Roofs for Family Category. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Revolve. click Create.Next. enter Dome for Name. expand Views (all).

15 On the Options Bar.The center wall section view is displayed. click . 646 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 13 Specify the bottom endpoint of the Center East/West reference plane for the start point of the axis. click Lines. 12 On the Options Bar. Draw the axis of rotation for the dome roof revolved form 11 On the Design Bar. 16 Specify the intersection of the Upper Cornice horizontal reference plane and vertical axis as the circle center point. click . click Axis. and then specify the top endpoint of the reference plane for the endpoint of the axis. Draw the lower face of the dome roof 14 On the Design Bar.

The reference planes that display are guides for drawing the oculus rim profile. The circle is tangent to the interior wall face and the level 1 reference plane at the floor line. until it creates an intersection with the level 1 reference plane. Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family | 647 . Draw the oculus rim profile 18 Zoom in on the top of the circle. and draw the five rim profile line segments in the shape of a reverse C as shown.17 Move the cursor out. and select Chain. 19 On the Options Bar. click . 21 Snap to reference plane intersections. 20 Specify the reference plane intersection for the start point of the rim profile as shown.

click . Draw the upper face of the dome roof 26 On the Design Bar. 27 On the Options Bar. click . 648 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .Split the circle 22 On the Tools toolbar. The circle is trimmed between the rim profile and the first split point. 28 Specify the endpoint of the upper left rim profile line segment as the arc start point. 23 On the Options Bar. 24 Select a point on the circle to the right of the rim profile. select Delete Inner Segment. click Lines. 25 Select the intersection of the circle and the lower left vertical line of the profile as shown.

32 On the Options Bar. 33 Draw a horizontal line from the arc endpoint to the interior edge of the wall. 35 Select the interior face of the wall. Draw two lines to close the dome roof profile 31 On the Design Bar. 30 Specify a point on the arc approximately as shown. click .29 Specify the top of the stairs in the wall section as the arc endpoint. and then select a point on the arc above the tangent point as the segment to keep. click Lines. and then draw a vertical line down the interior wall face to the lower dome roof face tangent point. Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family | 649 . click and select Chain. Trim the arc below the tangent point 34 On the Tools toolbar.

2 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family In this exercise. and click OK. click Finish Sketch. 650 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 40 On the Design Bar. click for Material. click OK. under Materials and Finishes. The dome roof in-place family is now complete. click Revolution Properties. you create the concave floor slab for the Pantheon building model. and click OK. 39 In the Element Properties dialog. click Create. 41 On the Design Bar. 42 On the View toolbar. 38 In the Materials dialog. click . select Concrete .Cast-in-Place Lightweight Concrete for Name. select Floors for Family Category.The dome roof closed profile is now complete. 37 In the Element Properties dialog. Specify the concave floor revolved form parameters 1 On the Modelling menu. click Finish Family. Specify lightweight concrete for the dome roof material 36 On the Design Bar.

12 Specify the bottom endpoint of the Center East/West reference plane for the start point of the axis. 5 On the Design Bar. 8 Select the Center East/West reference plane as shown. 9 In the Go To View dialog. click . click Set Work Plane. enter Concave Floor for Name. click Axis. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Revolve. 11 On the Options Bar. and then specify the top endpoint of the reference plane for the endpoint of the axis. and click OK. select Pick a Plane. double-click South.Center. and click Open View. 6 On the Design Bar. select Section: Wall Section .3 In the Name dialog. and click OK. 7 In the Work Plane dialog. Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family | 651 . 4 In the Project Browser under Elevations. Draw the axis of rotation for the floor revolved form 10 On the Design Bar.

and select Chain. click Lines. 16 Drag the cursor up 800 mm. and specify the next point for the floor profile as shown.O. 14 On the Options Bar. 15 Specify the intersection of the T. 17 Specify the intersection of the level 1 reference plane and the interior wall edge for the next point of the floor profile as shown. 652 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Footing level line and the axis. NOTE You may need to zoom in closer to the intersection to select the first point.Draw the concave floor profile 13 On the Design Bar. click . for the start point of the floor profile as shown.

25 On the Design Bar.18 Specify the intersection of the T. Based on the template you select. Revit Architecture differs between templates for model families. 22 In the Materials dialog. Footing level line and the axis for the last point of the floor profile. Appendix A . Appendix A . and title blocks.O. When you create a new family. 19 Specify the intersection of the of the T. The concave floor closed profile is now complete. 26 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. This completes the Creating In-Place Families lesson. the new family has specific default contents. 24 On the Design Bar.Exploring Family Templates Revit Architecture ships with a large number of family templates. Specify cobblestone for the concave floor material 20 On the Design Bar. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. Footing level line and the interior wall edge for the next point of the floor profile. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click 3D Section View. such as reference planes and sub-categories. click OK. and click OK.Exploring Family Templates | 653 . click for Material. click Revolution Properties. you start with the selection of a family template. click Finish Sketch. select Cobblestone for Name. annotation families. click Finish Family.O.

Category: Casework Casework Family template for casework. Contains sample wall geometry. Category: None Casework wall based Family template for casework. Wall based families can only be placed on wall faces in a project.Post Family template for posts of balusters. 654 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Category: None Baluster . Geometry can be locked to upper and lower reference level in elevation views.Model Family Templates The templates for model families are in Documents and Settings/All Users/Application Data/Autodesk/RAC 2008/Metric Templates.rft Baluster Description Family template for baluster families. The following table gives an overview of the templates for model families: Template Name *.

Template Name *. Geometry can use length parameter as “stretch” value. Includes the filled region tool. Geometry can be locked to upper and lower reference level in elevation views. Category: Detail Items Model Family Templates | 655 . If a column intersects a wall. includes the filled region tool. is used to create 2D detail components. contains a reference line and left and right reference planes. Category: Curtain Panels Detail Component line based 2D family.rft Description Column Family template to create columns. Category: Detail Items Detail Component 2D family. Category: Columns Curtain Wall Panel Family template for filling elements of curtain walls. the column inherits the material of the wall.

Category: Doors Electrical Equipment Family template to create electrical equipment families. Category: Curtain Panels Door Family template for doors. Category: Electrical Equipment Electrical Fixture ceiling based Family template to create electrical equipment families. 656 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .Curtain Wall Description Family template for door elements of curtain walls. Ceiling based families can only be placed on any ceiling in a project.rft Door .Template Name *. Contains a sample ceiling geometry.

Wall based families can only be placed on wall faces in a project. Category: Furniture Model Family Templates | 657 . Contains sample wall geometry.Template Name *.rft Description Category: Electrical Fixtures Electrical Fixture wall based Family template to create electrical equipment families. Category: Furniture Systems Furniture Family template to create furniture families. Category: Electrical Fixtures Electrical Fixture Family template to create electrical equipment families. Category: Entourage Furniture System Family template to create furniture system families. Category: Electrical Fixtures Entourage Family template to create entourage families.

Category: Generic Models Generic Model face based Family template to create any generic model geometry.Template Name *.rft Generic Model ceiling based Description Family template to create any generic model geometry. Ceiling based families can only be placed on ceiling in a project. Category: Generic Models Generic Model floor based Family template to create any generic model geometry. Category: Generic Models 658 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Floor based families can only be placed on a floor face in a project. Face based families can only be placed on any face in a project. Contains sample floor geometry. Contains a sample ceiling geometry.

Template Name *. Contains sample wall geometry. Contains a reference line and left and right reference planes. Includes the filled region tool. Category: Generic Models Generic Model wall based Family template to create any generic model geometry. Model Family Templates | 659 . Geometry can use length parameter as “stretch” value.rft Generic Model line based Description Family template to create any generic model geometry. Category: Generic Models Sample: Wall Opening with 2D graphics in plan view and a void extrusion. Wall based families can only be placed on wall faces in a project. Contains sample roof geometry. Roof based families can only be placed on any roof face in a project. Category: Generic Models Generic Model roof based Family template to create any generic model geometry.

Category: Lighting Fixtures 660 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . The family has illumination properties for the rendering tools. Contains sample roof geometry.Template Name *. Contains sample floor geometry. Category: Lighting Fixtures Lighting Fixture roof based Family template to create lighting fixtures.rft Generic Model Description Family template to create any generic model geometry. Category: Generic Model Lighting Fixture floor based Family template to create lighting fixtures. Roof based families can only be placed on a roof face in a project. The family has illumination properties for the rendering tools. Floor based families can only be placed on a floor face in a project.

Contains the same defaults as the Lighting Fixtures. The family has illumination properties for the rendering tools.Template Name *. Contains sample wall geometry. Ceiling based families can only be placed on a ceiling face in a project. Linear Lighting Fixture roof based. Category: Lighting Fixtures Linear Lighting Fixture floor based.rft Lighting Fixture ceiling based Description Family template to create lighting fixtures. Linear Lighting Fixture wall based. The family has illumination properties for the rendering tools. Contains sample ceiling geometry. Category: Lighting Fixtures Model Family Templates | 661 . Linear Lighting Fixture ceiling based. The family has illumination properties for the rendering tools. Category: Lighting Fixtures Lighting Fixture wall based Family template to create lighting fixtures. Category: Lighting Fixtures Lighting Fixture Family template to create lighting fixtures. The family has illumination properties for the rendering tools. Wall based families can only be placed on a wall face in a project. Linear Lighting Fixture Family templates to create linear lighting fixtures.

Contains sample wall geometry. Wall based families can only be placed on wall faces in a project. Faces of masses can be used to create other model elements like walls. gross surface area. Mechanical Equipment ceiling based Family template to create mechanical equipment families. Category: Mechanical Equipment 662 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and gross floor areas. slabs.rft Mass Description Family template to create massing families. and roofs Massing families can also be generating floor area faces.Template Name *. Masses can report gross volume. Ceiling based families can only be placed on ceiling faces in a project. Category: Mechanical Equipment Mechanical Equipment wall based Family template to create mechanical equipment families. Category: Mass Sample: Mass families from the content library. Contains sample ceiling geometry.

Category: Plumbing Fixtures Plumbing Fixture Family template to create plumbing fixture families.rft Mechanical Equipment Description Family template to create mechanical equipment families. Category: Plumbing Fixtures Model Family Templates | 663 .Template Name *. Category: Planting Plumbing Fixture wall based Family template to create plumbing fixture families. Category: Mechanical Equipment Parking Family template to create parking families. Category: Parking Planting Family template to create planting families. Wall based families can only be placed on wall faces in a project. Contains sample wall geometry.

Category: Profiles. Families based on this template can be used in a project with the tools in the Modelling menu ➤ Host Sweeps. mullion. wall sweep) can be explicitly assigned under Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. Category: Profiles. gutter.Template Name *. Profile usage can be explicitly assigned.rft Profile Description Family template to create 2D profiles. Profile-Hosted Family template to create 2D profiles for hosts. Category: Profiles. Category: Profiles. Profile-Rail Family template to create 2D profiles for rails. A profile is only used in combination with system families. Contains default reference planes Rail Centerline and Rail Top. Profile usage can be explicitly assigned. slab edge. A profile is only used in combination with system families. A profile is only used in combination with system families. Profile-Reveal Family template to create 2D profiles for wall sweeps and wall reveals. 664 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Profile usage (fascia. A profile is only used in combination with system families.

Category: Entourage Site Family template to create Site families. A profile is used only in combination with system families. Wall based families can only be placed on wall faces in a project. Category: Specialty Equipment Speciality Equipment Family template to create specialty equipment families.Template Name *. The family has an rpc file link included. Category: Profiles. Category: Specialty Equipment Model Family Templates | 665 .rft Profile-Stair Nosing Description Family template to create 2D profiles for stair nosing. RPC Family Family template for models using the Real People Collection product family. Category: Site Speciality Equipment wall based Family template to create specialty equipment families. Contains sample wall geometry.

Spot Lighting Fixture ceiling based. specific settings for symbolic representation and the structural material type can be defined. Category: Lighting Fixtures Family template to create structural columns.Beams and Braces Family template to create structural framing families. Geometry can be locked to upper and lower reference level in elevation views.Template Name *. Spot Lighting Fixture Structural Column Description Family templates to create spot lighting fixtures.rft Spot Lighting Fixture floor based. specific setting for symbolic representation and the structural material type can be defined. Category: Structural Columns Structural Foundation Family templates to create structural foundation families. Contains the same defaults as the Lighting Fixtures. If a structural column intersects a wall. the column cuts out the wall. A structural column can be defined as a room-bounding element if the structural material type is set to concrete or precast concrete. such as beams and braces. If a structural foundation family is placed below a column. Beams can be placed on structural columns. Spot Lighting Fixture roof based. Spot Lighting Fixture wall based. it moves its position if the base of the structural column is moved. The family has illumination and spot properties for the rendering tools. Category: Structural Foundations Structural Framing . 666 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Under Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. The family templates contain specific reference planes for members and stick symbols. Under Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters.

Complex and Trusses Family template to create structural framing families.rft Description Category: Structural Framing Structural Framing . such as trusses.Curtain Wall Family template for window elements of curtain walls. Category: Curtain Panels Window with trim Family template for windows including trim on the exterior side. Category: Windows Model Family Templates | 667 . Category: Structural Framing Window .Template Name *.

Template Name *. The category can be set under Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters.rft Callout Head Door Tag Generic Annotation Description Family template for the tag of a callout. Category: Level Heads Family template for Multi-Category tags. Category: Multi-Category Tags Family template for room tags. filled regions. Category: Room Tags Family template for section heads.0mm has a size of 2. In the family the intersection of the horizontal and right reference planes define connection location with the system section line. A MultiCategory tag needs a shared parameter as filter parameter. Category: Generic Model Tags Family template for the grid heads.rft Window Description Family template for windows. Category: Callouts Family template for door tags. The intersection of 2 reference planes defines the insertion point of a tag. text. Category: Section Marks Family template to define the symbol for spot elevations. Annotation families are scale-dependent. and parameters. click Tag ➤ Multi-Category to add a tag. parameter text created with a text height of 2. and parameter text size are always related to the current scale of the View Control Bar. Category: Door Tags Family template for generic annotations. Thus. Category: Grid Heads Family template for level heads. Annotation families consist mainly of lines. text size. Category: Spot Elevation Symbols Generic Tag Grid Head Level Head Multi-Category Tag Room Tag Section Head Spot Elevation Symbol 668 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Category: Generic Annotation Family template for tags. Category: Windows Annotation Family Templates The templates for annotation families are in Documents and Settings/All Users/Application Data/Autodesk/RAC 2008/Metric Templates/Annotation. Symbol size.0mm on a plotted sheet. The category can be set under Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. The following table gives an overview of the templates for annotation families: Template Name *. the same shared parameter is added to a project as a project parameter and can be used to filter selected elements to be tagged with the MultiCategory tag.

rft ■ C .rft ■ New Site Metric.36 x 24.rft ■ E1 .17 x 11.11 x 8. all loaded title block families are listed for selection.rft Metric ■ A0 metric.Template Name *.5.rft ■ A3 metric.rft ■ A2 metric.rft View Title Window Tag Description Family template to define view title of a view in a sheet. Imperial ■ A . filled regions.rft ■ A4 metric. In a project. In the Select a Titleblock dialog.42 x 30. and parameters. Category: Window Tags Titleblock Family Templates The templates for titleblock families are in Documents and Settings/All Users/Application Data/Autodesk/RAC 2008/Metric Templates/Titleblocks.rft ■ B . Category: View Titles Family template for window tags.24 x 18. The following table gives an overview of the templates for title block families: Template Name Comments Family templates for title blocks using common standard sizes. Title block families consist mainly of lines for the plan border. text.rft Titleblock Family Templates | 669 .rft ■ D . You import images to your title block.rft ■ A1 metric. the title block can be assigned to a sheet using View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet.

670 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

In exercises that become increasingly complex.Parametric Component Design Techniques 17 In this tutorial. The truss also has multiple types. and the specific techniques for creating a parametric component. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you the proper approach to parametric component creation. At the end of this tutorial. This type of component uses a broad spectrum of design techniques within the Family Editor. During this tutorial. the length of the trimmable truss determines the size and grade of the truss chords. and detail level controls. you learn specific techniques and best practices that you can apply broadly when creating other families in Revit Architecture 2008. you learn the process and methodology of creating a new family. methodology. 671 . you create a new parametric component within the Family Editor. In the center of the truss is a mechanical service clearance to accommodate HVAC systems. formula-based parameters. you will understand the process. assigned subcatecories. The parametric component that you design in this tutorial is an open web wood floor truss. not specifically how to make a floor truss. In this case.

you select the best available template with which to begin the new structural beam family. If the design requirements can be met with a simple design. Because this component has to interact closely with other structural components. In this case. Knowing why you are creating a particular family and what you need it to do will drive the specific design process. Decide component type and design requirements 1 What type of component are you designing? In this case. planning ahead is one of the most important steps. Take this into consideration during your design planning. This decision dictates which family template you begin with. In this case. then you should design only what is needed to satisfy the requirements. It should also be an available option within a beam system. For every complexity added to a family. 2 What additional design requirements affect the design plan for this beam family? Additional design requirements ■ ■ ■ The truss should automatically adjust depth as the length changes. and structural walls. imagine that your firm specializes in light commercial and residential design. this must be a structural beam component. In the next exercise. In this lesson. a generic floor-based component might work. a 2x3 truss and a 2x4 truss. Using the new family within a project 3 How will you use the family within a project? 672 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . beams. the beam design must be advanced in order to have the flexibility that the specs require. For training purposes. there is a computing performance cost that must be paid within the project. you determine the requirements of the new component. you accomplish two main tasks: you determine the component needs and select the family template that is suited to those needs.Planning a Parametric Component Family Creating a new parametric component family is no different than any other design process. the component should use the point-to-point insertion method with the joist web members adjusting parametrically. A rectangular mechanical clearance opening must be centered within the beam. The design requirements dictate how simple or complex a family must be. it is an open-joist wood floor truss. and also works intuitively with them. Although this solution is possible. the design specification requires that the floor truss snaps to columns. NOTE When creating a new family. it is not the best solution. Your assignment is to create a truss that adapts parametrically to changes in the building design. If the component did not have to interact so closely with other structural components. In addition. you should avoid over-designing the component. Two types should be created. Determining Component Needs In this exercise.

the planning stage and questions may differ. only the 2x3 and 2x4 trusses with wood web members are required. especially if you are going to be nesting subcomponents that may require separate scheduling. ■ How will the component need to be scheduled? This is an important question. you determined that the component type is a structural beam. such as wood type. ■ What types are most commonly used? In this training case. Selecting the Family Template In this exercise. Depending on the family you are designing. “Selecting the Family Template” on page 673.For instance: ■ What materials need the most control? These materials. ■ What materials remain constant throughout a project? The chord and web material will always be wood. In addition. you determine which family template provides the best starting point for the new beam family. the means by which you gather the information you require within the schedule needs to be built into the component. 4 Continue with the next exercise. These materials can be applied using Object Styles. You have completed the planning stage for the new family. In the previous exercise. would require Instance or Type parameters. Selecting the Family Template | 673 . This critical decision reduces the quantity of template options.

In addition. 4 Scroll through the various template options. 2 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. notice the preview. The New dialog opens to the templates folder that is specified in your Settings ➤ Options dialog. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. for example: wall based or floor based. click Training Files.rft 674 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . scroll to the structural framing templates.rft. You should be in the Metric Templates folder. ■ Metric Structural Framing .Beams and Braces. There are two structural framing templates provided. Usually.Review the template options 1 Close any open projects or families. it provides two intersecting reference planes: Center (left/right) and Center (front/back). However. 6 In the New dialog. the template name often includes information how the component would be used with a project. you will access them from the Training Files folder. NOTE Do not double-click the template or open it. Notice that most of the template names include the component type. to ensure you are using the templates referenced in this tutorial. 5 Select Metric Generic Model floor based. and open Metric\Templates. Like most generic family templates. Select it so that the preview displays. On the right side of the New dialog. this is where you access family templates.

Open the family template 9 Double-click Metric Structural Framing . ■ Metric Structural Framing . 8 Select Metric Structural Framing . Floor Plan: Ref.Beams and Braces. spacing. and display functions required by structural beams. it is not the best starting point for the beam family. Notice this template offers three vertical planes on each side of the center (left/right) reference plane.Complex and Trusses. It provides two intersecting reference planes: Center (left/right) and Center (front/back). Level.rft. These planes are designed specifically to accommodate point-to-point beam insertion and the special snapping and display requirements of beam components.rft to open it.Complex and Trusses. it is not designed to create a component capable of point-to-point insertion. 7 Select Metric Structural Framing . Level Selecting the Family Template | 675 .This template is design specifically to accommodate point-to-point insertion and the specific snapping. This template is the best starting point for the new family. Although the template name suggests this is the appropriate template. 10 Maximize the view. Floor Plan: Ref.rft This template is designed for complex framing components and trusses.rft and notice the preview.Beams and Braces. and notice the preview. Because of its simplicity.

This beam extrusion is supplied within the template as a starting point. Dimensioning the solid geometry directly also works. under 3D Views.In this view. however. you add reference planes to the beam design. Adding Reference Planes In this exercise. you can see the rectangular beam extrusion and a symbolic line. 2 Place the cursor over the leftmost vertical reference plane until the tooltip displays the name of the plane. lines. “Creating the Component Skeleton” on page 676. Creating the Component Skeleton In this lesson. the geometry supplied can be used or discarded as needed. double-click View 1. you snap and lock the solid geometry to these reference planes and lines. 13 Proceed to the next lesson. using reference planes and lines is considered more reliable and is therefore a best practice. Reference Plane: Left. under Elevations. 12 In the Project Browser. Level. Notice that the beam extrusion is centered on the level line. and dimensions that provide a skeleton for the solid geometry. Like many templates. Therefore. These reference planes act as part of the skeleton to which the solid geometry will align and lock. As you add solid geometry later in the tutorial. TIP The name also displays on the Status Bar. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you started in the previous exercise. When a beam family based on this template is added to a project. creating a skeleton to build upon is the foundation of a new component family. double-click Front. 676 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Review existing reference planes 1 In the Project Browser. it is not necessary to create a skeleton of reference planes or lines and then align and lock the solid geometry to it. double-click Ref. the top of the beam extrusion is aligned to the associated level of the plan view. under Floor Plans. NOTE When creating or modifying a family. you add the reference planes. 11 In the Project Browser.

they do not display when the family is loaded into a project. In the project plan view image below. Reference planes that display within a family file do not display within a project. The reference planes and their respective explanations are listed below. notice the location of the beam extents.3 Repeat this step for the other two vertical planes on the left side. In the image below. two steel columns and a steel beam have been added to a project. NOTE The reference planes shown in the project image below were added as a training reference. ■ Left and Right: These two planes mark the points where the beam intersects with other columns. ■ Stick Symbol Left and Stick Symbol Right: Adding Reference Planes | 677 . The reference planes in this template are designed to accommodate the point-to-point insertion of a beam component. ■ Member Left and Member Right: These two planes refer to the left and right extent of the beam solid geometry when displayed in a medium or fine display view of a project. The six reference planes shown in the project below were added as a training reference. The two arrows point to the snap points that the left and right reference planes refer to.

8 Add a reference plane approximately 50 mm below the horizontal reference plane: Center (Front/Back). Delete existing solid geometry 4 Select the rectangular beam extrusion. it is important to be familiar with the template so you do not create duplicate or conflicting planes.These two planes refer to the extents of the stick symbol when it is loaded into a project and the plan view display setting is coarse. Add new reference planes 6 On the Design Bar. click . you add the solid geometry for the truss as a sweep. Each family template has a different set of reference planes established within it. 5 On the Edit Toolbar. You will use these two reference planes to control the beam width and keep it centered on the reference plane: Center (Front/Back). click Ref Plane. NOTE Be careful not to select the symbolic line. Before adding new reference planes. 7 Add a reference plane approximately 50 mm above the horizontal reference plane: Center (Front/Back). In a later exercise. 678 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques .

These two reference planes mark the top and bottom extents of the beam. under Elevations. click . Level. planes to control beam depth 9 In the Project Browser. click Ref Plane. double-click Front. 11 Add a reference plane approximately 150 mm below the Level: Ref. select the lower horizontal reference plane. 10 On the Design Bar. To do this. TIP You can control the direction of the offset by moving the cursor slightly to either side of the line you intend to pick. and specify an Offset of 38 mm. click Ref Plane. 15 Place the cursor over the top horizontal reference plane. 13 On the Design Bar. click on the Edit toolbar. and select the Level: Ref. TIP You can also use the mirror tool to accomplish this task. Level as the mirror axis. When a copy of the reference plane displays below it. click to place it. Level. Adding Reference Planes | 679 .Add ref. The next four reference planes that you add mark the thickness of the truss chords. 12 Add a reference plane approximately 150 mm above the Level: Ref. 14 On the Options Bar. This beam requires additional reference planes to complete the truss skeleton.

click to place it as shown. you must add four additional reference planes to accommodate the center chase.16 Place the cursor over the lower horizontal reference plane and when a copy of the reference plane displays above it. 18 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Member Right. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the left of it. You have completed the reference planes that make up the skeleton of the chords. 17 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Member Left. click to place it as shown. click to place it as shown. Before you move on to the next exercise. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the right of it. specify an Offset of 200 mm. 19 On the Options Bar. 680 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques .

Although there is nothing technically incorrect regarding the reference planes in this view. 23 Use the Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right) to add reference planes to the left and right of it as shown below. 22 On the Options Bar. click to place it as shown. Level. specify an Offset of 238 mm. Notice the reference planes that you added in the elevation view. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the right of it. double-click Ref.20 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right). click to place it as shown. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the left of it. 24 In the Project Browser. cleaning up some of the extents would make the view easier. Adding Reference Planes | 681 . which you do in the next exercise. 21 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right). under Floor Plans.

and click Save. 26 Starting with one of the reference planes you added to define the center chase. NOTE You use this family for the remainder of this tutorial. you add dimensions and constraints to the to the skeleton. you can make sure the new family adapts to changes in geometry as expected before adding solid geometry to it. enter Wood Floor Truss for File name. you add some of the dimensions and constraints that control how the open web floor truss adapts to changes in its geometry. navigate to the folder of your choice. In the following exercise. 28 In the Save As dialog. Repeat this step for the remaining extents so that your plan view resembles the image below. You have finished creating the initial skeleton of the open web wood floor truss. “Adding Dimensions and Constraints” on page 682. 682 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . select the reference plane and adjust the extents similar to the image below.25 On the Design Bar. Adding Dimensions and Constraints In this exercise. 27 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Modify. Make sure you remember where you saved it. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. By applying dimensions and constraints directly to the skeleton of the family.

4 On the Design Bar. click Modify.Dataset Continue to use the dataset. 6 On the Design Bar. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.rfa. After adding the dimension. This tool is the aligned dimension tool. Dimension chord width 1 On the Design Bar. 5 Select the dimension you added in the previous step. 2 On the Options Bar. Wood Floor Truss. It allows you to dimension between parallel lines. TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings during this procedure. 3 Select each of the horizontal reference planes and place the dimension to the left as shown. click Dimension. click Dimension. click . This ensures that changes to the chord width are distributed equally across the center reference plane. Adding Dimensions and Constraints | 683 . separate the overriding values by dragging the value controls as shown. and click the EQ symbol when it displays.

click Dimension. the Center reference plane. 9 On the Design Bar. 684 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . under Elevations. and the lower horizontal reference plane.7 Add a dimension referring to the upper horizontal reference plane and the lower horizontal reference plane. place the dimension to the left as shown. Place the dimension as shown. You may need to use the TAB key to toggle the selection to the reference plane. 11 Add a dimension referring to the upper horizontal reference plane and the lower horizontal reference plane and move it to the left of the equality constrained dimension you added previously. 10 Select the upper horizontal reference plane. Level. NOTE The center horizontal reference plane overlaps the level line: Ref. Add the depth dimension and equality constraint 8 In the Project Browser. double-click Front. and click the EQ symbol to apply the equality constraint.

Dimension chord thickness 14 On the right side of the model. 13 Add a dimension referring to the reference planes to the left and right of the Center (Left/Right) reference plane. 15 Add four dimensions as shown. and place it below the dimension you added previously. These dimensions refer to the chord thickness. place the dimension under the lines as shown and click the EQ symbol to apply the equality constraint. Adding Dimensions and Constraints | 685 . add two dimensions as shown.Dimension and constrain the center chase width 12 Add a dimension referring to the three vertical reference planes in the center of the model. These dimensions refer to the chord thickness of the vertical members and the members that border the center chase.

Create the chord width parameter 1 In the Project Browser. consider making it a type parameter. When you label a dimension in the Family Editor.You have finished adding the dimensions and constraints that control how the truss skeleton adapts to changes. Things to consider when deciding “instance” or “type:” ■ ■ ■ If the component comes in standard sizes that must be maintained. you create new length parameters that control the basic dimensions of the floor truss. ■ Dataset Continue to use the dataset. Throughout the tutorial. If the component has material that varies per component. consider making the material parameter an instance parameter. If the parameter controls something that usually remains constant by its nature. under Floor Plans. and constraints as needed. These parameters are the key to providing flexibility within a project. In the next exercise.rfa. you will add additional reference planes. The parameters that you create when designing a family are the same parameters used within a project to control the instance and type parameters of that family. In addition. Wood Floor Truss. There are many types of parameters and various ways to create them. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. Level. you label the dimensions that you added in the previous exercise. it is important to decide how much control over the component will be required after the component is loaded into a project. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. In this exercise. 686 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . You should lean towards simplicity whenever possible. double-click Ref. they allow you to “flex” the model in order to test your design. If the component is something that is cut or otherwise extremely flexible. consider making it an instance parameter. 2 Select the dimension that refers to the width of the chord as shown. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. “Creating New Length Parameters” on page 686. you label the dimensions to create instance and type parameters. You choose whether to make it an instance or type parameter. When you design a new family. dimensions. consider making it a type parameter. Creating New Length Parameters In this exercise. it becomes a parameter.

Under Parameter Data.3 On the Options Bar. select Family parameter. enter Chord Width for Name. select Add parameter for Label. double-click Front. 7 On the Options Bar. enter Depth for Name. Under Parameter Data. This indicates whether the parameter is a type or instance parameter. Creating New Length Parameters | 687 . 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog. Click OK. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog. ■ Click OK. Select Type. select Add parameter for Label. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. Select Type. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. select Family parameter. Create truss depth parameter 5 In the Project Browser. 6 Select the dimension on the left that refers to the depth of the truss. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. under Elevations.

Create center chase width parameter
9 Select the dimension that refers to the width of the center chase interior.

10 On the Options Bar, select Add parameter for Label. 11 In the Parameter Properties dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Parameter Type, select Family parameter. Under Parameter Data, enter Center Chase Width for Name. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. Select Type. Click OK.

Create chord thickness parameter
12 On the right side of the model, select the dimension that refers to the thickness of the lower horizontal truss chord as shown.

13 On the Options Bar, select Add parameter for Label. 14 In the Parameter Properties dialog, specify the following:

Under Parameter Type, select Family parameter.

688 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

■ ■ ■ ■

Under Parameter Data, enter Chord Thickness for Name. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. Select Type. Click OK.

TIP You may need to drag the text label downward as shown.

Apply chord thickness label to other dimensions
15 On the right side of the model, select the dimension that refers to the thickness of the upper horizontal truss chord. 16 On the Options Bar, select Chord Thickness for Label.

17 Apply the Chord Thickness label to the vertical chords and the vertical members on the left and right side of the center chase as shown.

Creating New Length Parameters | 689

18 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. In the Family Types dialog, notice the labelled dimensions display under the list of parameters and under the group, Dimensions. When you load this family into a project, these parameters will be available within the Type Properties dialog for the beam. 19 Click Cancel. 20 On the File menu, click Save. 21 Proceed to the next exercise, “Flexing the Component Model” on page 690.

Flexing the Component Model
One of the most important steps in the process of creating a new parametric component is the flexing of the model. Flexing the model means to change parameter values, thus forcing the model to adapt to the changes. This is not limited to length parameters. If you add a new material parameter, you should also test it to make sure it works as expected. You should flex the model after any major change to the design.

You should flex a new family after:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Adding or modifying an element. Adding or modifying a parameter. Adding a new constraint. Nesting a component. Adding or modifying a parameter formula.

When you flex a family, you should always do it from the Family Types dialog, rather than by manually stretching or manipulating the objects within the family. When you change a parameter value and apply the change, this is the most accurate way of testing how the family will behave within a project.

690 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

In this exercise, you flex the model to test the various length parameters that you added in the previous exercise. Even though you have yet to add any model geometry to the family, it is important to verify that the reference lines adjust to changes as constraints are maintained. After you verify this, you can add the model geometry to the skeleton and be relatively certain that it will also flex as expected. Dataset Continue to use the dataset, Wood Floor Truss.rfa, that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.

Preparing the family for flexing
1 When flexing the model, you need to be able to see the model within the drawing area and also apply new values within the Family Types dialog:

Maximize the Revit window and adjust the zoom settings so the model is in one corner of the drawing area. When you open the Family Types dialog, you can drag it to the opposing corner. or

Reduce the Revit window and keep the model centered in the drawing area. When you open the Family Types dialog, you can drag it off the Revit window as shown.

Adjust your display using one of the two methods before opening the Family Types dialog. 2 On the Design Bar, click Family Types, and drag the dialog so that you can view the model.

Flex the truss depth
3 In the Family Types dialog, under Dimensions, enter 600 mm for Depth, and click Apply. Notice the depth of the truss adapts to the change in dimension value. Also notice the equality constraint spreads the additional depth evenly above and below the Ref. Level. In addition, notice that the reference planes marking the chord thickness adapted to the change in depth while maintaining their specified value. Verifying that the entire model adapts to changes and making sure nothing “breaks” is the essence of flexing.

Flexing the Component Model | 691

4 Enter 450 mm for Depth, 80 mm for Chord Thickness, 800 mm for Center Chase Width, and click Apply. Notice that the model adapts to all of the changes.

Reset parameters
5 In the Family Types dialog, reset the parameters back to their original values:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Enter 300 mm for Depth. Enter 38 mm for Chord Thickness. Enter 400 mm for Center Chase Width. Click Apply. Click OK.

When working within the Family Editor, you should always flex the design after you add new elements or modify the existing design in any way. 6 On the File menu, click Save. 7 Proceed to the next lesson, “Adding Solid Geometry” on page 693.

692 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Adding Solid Geometry
In this lesson, you add the solid geometry using extrusions for the chords and trimmable plywood ends. After creating the extrusions, you constrain them using a combination of locked alignments and labelled dimensions. After flexing the design, you load the truss into a project to verify that it works as designed.

Creating Solid Extrusions
In this exercise, you create the top and bottom chords of the truss. After adding the chords, you align and lock their position. Dataset Continue to use the dataset, Wood Floor Truss.rfa, that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.

Add chord extrusions
1 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Left. 2 Zoom in around the center of the truss design.

3 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 4 In the Work Plane dialog, click Name, select Reference Plane: Member Left, and click OK. 5 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 6 On the Options Bar, click , and select Lock.

7 Select the four reference planes that border the top chord as shown.

Adding Solid Geometry | 693

Notice that the sketch lines are automatically locked to the reference planes. 8 On the Tools toolbar, click .

When using the Trim tool, click the part of the line you want to keep. 9 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to create the top chord sketch as shown.

10 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 11 On the Options Bar, click , and verify that Lock is selected.

12 Select the four reference planes that border the bottom chord as shown. NOTE A warning dialog displays notifying you that there are overlapping lines. You can ignore this warning because after you finish trimming, the lines will no longer overlap.

13 On the Tools toolbar, click

.

14 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to create the bottom chord sketch as shown.

694 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

15 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 16 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click View 1. Notice the chord extrusions and the symbolic line. The chords need to be aligned and locked to the correct reference planes in order for them to flex with changes in the geometry.

17 On the File menu, click Save. 18 Proceed to the next exercise, “Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry” on page 695.

Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry
In this exercise, you add constraints to the chord extrusions and then flex the family to verify that it works as designed. Dataset Continue to use the dataset, Wood Floor Truss.rfa, that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.

Constrain the extrusion ends
1 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Front. 2 Enter SD; this is the keyboard shortcut for Shading with Edges. This makes the chord extrusions more visible within the view. 3 Select the chord extrusions.

4 Drag the right arrow control to the right until it snaps to the reference plane: Member Right, as shown. Click the lock symbol to lock the extrusion edge to the reference plane.

Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry | 695

5 Drag the left arrow control to the right until it snaps to the reference plane: Member Left, as shown. Click the lock symbol to lock the extrusion edge to the reference plane.

Flex the design
6 Prepare the view for flexing in the same way you did during the flexing exercise. You’ll want to set up your screen so you can see the model truss while the Family Types dialog is open. On the Design Bar, click Family Types.

7 In the Family Types dialog, enter 6000 for Length, and click Apply. Notice that the extrusions did not move or change their length. This is because the length dimension references the extreme left and right reference planes, not the member right or member left reference planes. Therefore, you must add a new constraint before flexing the length. 8 In the Family Types dialog, enter 3000 for Length, click Apply, and click OK.

Add a new dimension and constraint
9 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 10 Add a dimension between the reference plane: Left and the reference plane: Member Left as shown. Click the lock symbol to lock the dimension value.

696 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

11 Add a dimension between the reference plane: Right and the reference plane: Member Right as shown. Click the lock symbol to lock the dimension value.

In this particular case, adding this constraint to the model has no impact on how it works within a project. This is a two-point placement beam family that uses the member left and member right reference planes as the determining extents of this component. Later in this lesson, you load this family into a project to test how it works within a project environment.

Flex the length
12 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 13 In the Family Types dialog, enter 6000 for Length, and click Apply. Notice that the extrusions adjusted to the change in length. This tells you that the constraints on the extrusion ends are working.

TIP If one of the extrusion ends did not adjust as expected, use the Align tool and add the constraint. Afterwards, flex the model once again to make sure the fix works as expected. 14 Click OK.

Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry | 697

In a later exercise, you add the web members. Therefore, you need a truss long enough to add web arrays and do not need to return the truss back to its original length value.

Flex the chord width, depth, and thickness
15 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click View 1. 16 Enter SD for Shading with Edges.

17 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 18 In the Family Types dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■

Enter 600mm for Depth. Enter 200mm for Chord Width. Enter 76mm for Chord Thickness. TIP When flexing, it is important to remember the original values so you can reset them afterwards. Therefore, try picking a method, such as doubling, that allows you to easily return to the original values.

Click Apply.

The chords should adjust to each of the new values. 19 Specify the beam values shown below:
■ ■ ■ ■

Enter 286mm for Depth. Enter 89mm for Chord Width. Enter 38mm for Chord Thickness. Click Apply, and click OK.

20 On the File menu, click Save. 21 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating Additional Solid Geometry” on page 698.

Creating Additional Solid Geometry
In this exercise, you add the extrusions for the truss ends and the center chase.

Dataset

698 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Continue to use the dataset, Wood Floor Truss.rfa, that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.

Add the center chase extrusions
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Ref. Level. 2 Zoom in on the center of the truss and select the model line that represents the beam stick symbol. 3 On the View Control Bar, click the Hide/Isolate control, and click Hide Element. This will make it easier to sketch the center chase extrusions. 4 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 5 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 6 On the Options Bar, click , and verify that Lock is selected.

7 Select the four reference planes that border the left, vertical member of the center chase as shown.

Notice that the sketch lines are automatically locked to the reference planes. 8 On the Tools toolbar, click .

9 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to create the left, vertical member of the center chase sketch as shown.

10 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 11 On the Options Bar, click , and verify that Lock is selected.

12 Select the four reference planes that border the right, vertical member of the center chase as shown.

Creating Additional Solid Geometry | 699

NOTE A warning dialog displays notifying you that there are overlapping lines. You can ignore this warning because after you finish trimming, the lines will no longer overlap.

13 On the Tools toolbar, click

.

14 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to complete the center chase sketch as shown.

15 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 16 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Front. 17 Zoom in on the center chase.

Align and lock the new extrusions
18 On the Tools menu, click Align. This next process is very important. The ends of the chase extrusions must be aligned and locked to the horizontal reference planes coincident with the interior edges of the chords. Although you can align and lock extrusion to extrusion, it is considered a best practice to align and lock to reference planes. 19 For the align-to reference, select the reference line on the top of the lower chord as shown. You may need to press TAB to toggle the selection options.

700 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

20 Click the bottom edge of one of the chase extrusions, and after the alignment, click the lock symbol to lock the alignment.

21 Align the top edge of the chase extrusions with the reference line coincident with the lower edge of the upper chord, and lock the alignment as shown.

22 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Flex the center chase
23 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 24 In the Family Types dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■

Enter 486mm for Depth. Enter 800mm for Center Chase Width. Click Apply.

The truss should adapt to all the changes. If it does not, redo any problematic alignments and constraints. 25 In the Family Types dialog, reset the values as follows:
■ ■ ■

Enter 286mm for Depth. Enter 400mm for Center Chase Width. Click Apply, and click OK.

Clean up the view
26 Zoom to Fit.

Creating Additional Solid Geometry | 701

27 Clean up the view by moving the dimensions off to the side as shown. This will make subsequent work much easier.

Add the truss end extrusions
28 Select the Chord Thickness dimension in the lower-left corner as shown.

29 On the Options Bar, select Add Parameter for Label. 30 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Enter Trimmable End Length for Name. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. Select Instance. Click OK.

31 Select the Chord Thickness dimension in the lower-right corner of the view. 32 On the Options Bar, select Trimmable End Length for Label. 33 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 34 In the Family Types dialog, under Dimensions, enter 300mm for Trimmable End Length, click Apply, and click OK.

Sketch the right end extrusion
35 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Right. 36 Zoom around the truss elements. 37 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 38 In the Work Plane dialog, select Reference Plane: Member Right for Name, and click OK. 39 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 40 On the Options Bar, click , and verify that Lock is selected.

702 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

41 On the upper chord, select the lower horizontal reference plane; on the lower chord, select the upper horizontal reference plane. These two lines represent the upper and lower boundary of the sketch.

42 On the Options Bar, enter19mm for Offset. 43 Select the Center (Front/Back) reference plane twice to add a sketch line to each side as shown.

44 On the Tools toolbar, click

.

45 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to complete the end sketch as shown.

Creating Additional Solid Geometry | 703

46 On the Design Bar, click Extrusion Properties. 47 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, verify that 300mm is specified for the Extrusion End value, and click OK. 48 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

Sketch the left end extrusion
49 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Left. 50 Zoom around the truss elements. 51 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 52 In the Work Plane dialog, select Reference Plane: Member Left for Name, and click OK. 53 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 54 On the Options Bar, click , and verify that Lock is selected.

55 On the upper chord, select the lower horizontal reference plane; on the lower chord, select the upper horizontal reference plane. These two lines represent the upper and lower boundary of the sketch. 56 On the Options Bar, enter 19mm for Offset. 57 Select the Center (Front/Back) reference plane twice to add a sketch line to each side as shown.

704 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

58 On the Tools toolbar, click

.

59 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to complete the end sketch as shown.

60 On the Design Bar, click Extrusion Properties. 61 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, specify -300mm for the Extrusion End value, and click OK. NOTE This extrusion value must be negative in order to push the extrusion towards the center of the truss. 62 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

Add alignment constraints
63 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Front.

Although the truss ends line up with the reference planes controlling the length of the trimmable ends, they are not aligned and locked to those reference planes and would not pass a flex test. 64 Zoom in on the left end of the truss. 65 On the Tools menu, click Align. 66 Select the Member Left reference plane as the align-to point.

67 Select the left edge of the left end extrusion, and lock the alignment.

Creating Additional Solid Geometry | 705

68 Select the reference plane coincident with the right edge of the left end extrusion; this is the align-to point. 69 Select the right edge of the left end extrusion, and lock the alignment.

70 Repeat the previous five steps for the right end of the truss. Make adjustments to account for the right side. TIP When you finish the alignments, if you select the end extrusion, a lock displays on each side indicating the constraints to the reference planes. 71 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Flex the design
72 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 73 In the Family Types dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■

Enter 486mm for Depth. Enter 600mm for Trimmable End Length. Click Apply.

The truss should adapt to all the changes. If it does not, fix any problematic alignments and constraints. 74 In the Family Types dialog, reset the values as follows:
■ ■ ■

Enter 286mm for Depth. Enter 300mm for Trimmable End Length. Click Apply, and click OK.

75 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click View 1.

76 Save the Family. A new dataset is provided for you beginning with the next lesson. It is identical to the truss you have been designing. If you are comfortable with your design, you can continue using it in the next lesson. If you have experienced any errors or have deviated from the exercises in any way, you should close the file and begin with a fresh dataset. 77 Proceed to the next lesson, “Testing the Family in a Project” on page 707.

706 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Testing the Family in a Project
In this lesson, you load the family into a project to test it in a real-world environment. After you load it into the project, you add several beam instances and then modify the shape of the foundation to see how the beams adapt.

Loading a Family into a Project
In this exercise, you load the truss family into a project that consists of foundation walls, a sill, and a rim joist. NOTE Close any open families or projects. The truss family that you use in this lesson is identical to the truss you have created in the previous exercises. Although you could continue using the previous family, it is recommended that you use the new family in order to ensure consistency. Datasets

Open the truss family
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\m_Wood Floor Truss_1.rfa.

Open the project file

Click File menu ➤ Open.

Testing the Family in a Project | 707

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_WWF1.rvt.

Load the truss family into the project
1 On the Window menu, clickm_Wood Floor Truss_1.rfa. 2 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. The truss family is loaded directly into the only other open file. If you had multiple projects or families open, a dialog would have displayed asking for you to specify which projects you wanted to load the family into. Notice that the project file is now active. 3 In the Project Browser, expand Families, expand Structural Framing, and notice that the Wood Floor Truss_1 family has been loaded. 4 Proceed to the next exercise, “Testing a Family Instance in a Project” on page 708.

Testing a Family Instance in a Project
In this exercise, you add several instances of the truss family to the project, and then modify the project to see how the beams adapt. Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you used in the previous exercise.

708 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

a wood sill. This project consists of foundation walls.Southeast Isometric. and click Structural. select m_Wood Floor Truss_1. and a wood rim joist. double-click Level 1. add three vertical beams that snap to the rim joist at each end. click Beam. The rim joist was added as a beam. 4 In the Type Selector. TIP If the Structural tab of the Design Bar is not active. expand 3D Views. and double-click 3D . verify that Chain is not selected. 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. the truss family you loaded will interact with it as one beam does to another. a slab. under Floor Plans. right-click in the Design Bar. Testing a Family Instance in a Project | 709 .Add beams to project 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views. 2 In the Project Browser. 5 On the Options Bar. 6 Using point-to-point insertion. therefore.

710 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Try to make them approximately equidistant as shown. 8 In the Project Browser. double-click 3D .NOTE Do not be concerned with the exact location of the three beams. NOTE Make sure you drag the grid line. 7 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. Notice the wood truss sits on top of the sill and attaches to the rim joist as expected.Southeast Isometric. You do not need to be precise. not the wall or rim joist. 9 Select Grid 2 and drag it downward until the walls form an approximate square. under Floor Plans. you are merely testing the new floor truss to verify that it adapts to the changes. double-click Level 1.

click Undo Drag. The project and family need to interact based on a consistent file name. 11 On the Edit menu. In the next lesson. under 3D Views. Testing a Family Instance in a Project | 711 . you nest the web components into the truss and create an array that adapts to changes in length. The center chase remained the same width while remaining centered. 13 In the Save as dialog. 12 On the File menu. IMPORTANT Do not change the name of the family.10 In the Project Browser. ■ ■ The truss ends remained constant and adapted to the new beam length. Notice the wood truss adjusted to the changes. This should return the project to its original dimension. click Save as. navigate to a folder of your choice and save the project with its existing name.Southeast Isometric. double-click 3D .

Adding a Nested Component In this exercise.rfa is the active file. Prepare the view for nesting 1 Make sure that m_Wood Floor Truss_1. 16 When prompted to open the truss family for editing. Working with Nested Subcomponents In this lesson. 17 Proceed to the next lesson. 5 On the File menu.Edit a family from within a project 14 Select one of the wooden truss components. 15 On the Options Bar. and create a formula controlled array to fill in the truss. under Floor Plans. Level. 3 Select the symbolic line in the center of the truss. You then align and lock the web extents before applying a formula-controlled array. the wood floor truss family becomes the active view. and click Hide Element. Dataset Continue to use the datasets from the previous exercise.rfa. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. “Working with Nested Subcomponents” on page 712. This will aid in the placement of the wood web. 712 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . click Yes. you nest two wooden web members into the truss. 2 In the Project Browser. 4 On the View Control Bar. click Hide/Isolate. Because the family is already open. double-click Ref. Load the wood web family ■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. click Edit Family. and open Metric\Families\m_Wood_Web. you nest wood web members into the floor truss.

Align the nested web components 12 Enter AL. they are visible only when you place the cursor over the component. The geometry is driven by formula-based parameters that link to the host family. 7 In the Type Selector.This family is a single extrusion as shown. Also notice that the depth of the web members needs to be changed. you align the web panel using these lines rather than the extrusion edges. Notice the model lines that surround the web component. You will align the left web component first. This will be accomplished in the next exercise when you link the nested parameter with the host parameter. Do not select it. Add two wood web components 6 On the Design Bar. This will make aligning the wood web easier. click Component. 13 For the align-to point. verify that m_Wood_Web: Wood Web is selected. Leave a slight gap between the chase and the web. double-click Front. In the following steps. 9 On the Design Bar. select the reference plane that is coincident with the left edge of the left center chase extrusion. The extrusion is aligned and locked to invisible model lines that make it easier to array within the truss. 11 Place the cursor over the left wood web. Snap the center line of the web to the center reference plane of the truss. IMPORTANT Make sure you snap the center line of the web components to the center reference line of the truss. Place one wood web on each side of the center chase. this is the keyboard shortcut for Align. under Elevations. Adding a Nested Component | 713 . 8 Add two instances of the wood web component as shown. 10 In the Project Browser. click Modify.

In addition. it is important to note that you should avoid adding unnecessary constraints. IMPORTANT Do not lock the alignment 15 Repeat the previous two steps to align the left edge of the right web component to the right edge of the center chase as shown. 714 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . click Modify. NOTE You do not have to align the top or bottom the web components because the height of the web members will adapt to the truss height after you create and link the parameters in the next exercise. 16 On the Design Bar.14 Select the right vertical model line of the left web component as shown. Add reference planes for array anchors 17 On the Design Bar. Place each reference plane just to the outside of the center of the web components. Each of these web components represents the starting point of the web arrays that you add later in this lesson. click Ref Plane. 18 Add two reference planes as shown.

22 Click the lock to lock the reference plane to the centerline of the web component. Dimension and label array anchors 24 On the Design Bar. 23 Repeat the previous two steps to align and lock the right web component and the reference plane as shown. you align the reference planes to the center of the web components. 20 Select the center of the left web component as the align-to point. The reference plane you added in the previous step represents half the web width. In the steps that follow. 21 Select the reference plane that you added to the left of the web components center as shown.19 On the Tools menu. click Dimension. 25 Add the following two dimensions: Adding a Nested Component | 715 . click Align.

click Save As. Creating Formula-controlled Parameters In this exercise. Create a new parameter for web depth 1 On the Design Bar. You also add a formula to the parameter in order to maintain the web position as the truss changes depth. 2 In the Family Types dialog. 26 On the Design Bar.Left web dimension ■ ■ Select the reference plane that you aligned to the center of the left web component. click Family Types. Place the dimension as shown. you label these dimensions. Place the dimension as shown. length. under Parameters. Select the reference plane that is coincident with the right edge of the left web component and the outside edge of the center chase. 28 In the Save As dialog. Select the reference plane that is coincident with the left edge of the right web component and the outside edge of the center chase. click Add. you add new parameters to control the web components. You then link the nested web parameters to the new host parameters. 716 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 27 On the File menu. ■ Right web dimension ■ ■ Select the reference plane that you aligned to the center of the right web component. ■ In the next exercise. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you saved in the previous exercise. click Modify. “Creating Formula-controlled Parameters” on page 716. or the width of the center chase. navigate to the same directory in which you saved the project file and save this family there with its current name.

specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter WebDepth for Name. 4 In the Family Types dialog. 12 On the Design Bar. and click Element Properties. click OK. Click OK. click Edit/New. click Modify. Select Length for Type. Select Type. This formula ensures that the web depth will account for any changes in the chord thickness or truss depth. ensure you enter it exactly as it is named. click OK. click the button to the right of the WebHeight value. Link the nested component to the new parameter 6 Right-click the left web component. Creating Formula-controlled Parameters | 717 . In addition. select WebDepth. TIP You can expand the width of the Family Types dialog to facilitate typing within the formula field. and click OK. In the Type Properties dialog. enter Depth . notice that “= “displays within the WebHeight button. 9 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. under Other. Select Constraints for Group parameter under. Select Common for Discipline.3 In the Parameter Properties dialog. Notice the web members are resized to fit more precisely between the chords. under Constraints.(Chord Thickness * 2) for the WebDepth Formula. notice the center of each nested web component is locked to the reference plane that bisects it. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 5 Click OK. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. NOTE Formulas are case sensitive. under Parameter Data. When you refer to another parameter within a formula. 7 In the Element Properties dialog.

Create new formula-controlled parameter for center chase
13 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 14 In the Family Types dialog, under Parameters, click Add. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data, specify the following:

Enter CC for Name. This parameter is primarily for convenience. It will use a formula to add the center chase width and the thickness of the two bordering chords.

■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Select Other for Group parameter under. Select Common for Discipline. Select Length for Type. Select Instance. Click OK.

16 Under Other, enter Center Chase Width + (2*Chord Thickness) for CC Formula. After you enter the formula, the resulting value is displayed as an inactive field.

Create WebArrayLength formula-controlled parameter
17 In the Family Types dialog, under Parameters, click Add. 18 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Enter WebArrayLength for Name. Select Constraints for Group parameter under. Select Common for Discipline. Select Length for Type. Select Instance. Click OK.

19 Under Constraints, enter (Length - (CC+300))/2 for WebArrayLength Formula. This formula subtracts the length of the center chase and its two bordering chords plus an additional 300mm before dividing it in two to specify the length of each array. The additional 300mm is to account for the ends, which must remain at least 150mm long.

Create WebArrayNum formula-controlled parameter
20 In the Family Types dialog, under Parameters, click Add. 21 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Enter WebArrayNum for Name. Select Constraints for Group parameter under. Select Common for Discipline. Select Integer for Type. Select Instance. Click OK.

22 Under Constraints, enter WebArrayLength/(2*WebDepth) for WebArrayNum Formula. 23 Click OK.

718 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Add parameter to anchor web array
24 Select the dimension that refers to the midpoint of the left web as shown.

25 On the Options Bar, select Add parameter for Label. 26 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Enter Webhalflength for Name. Select Constraints for Group parameter under. Select Instance. Click OK.

27 Select the dimension that refers to the midpoint of the right web. 28 On the Options Bar, select Webhalflength for Label. 29 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Add formula for Webhalflength
30 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 31 Under Constraints, enter (WebArrayLength/WebArrayNum)/2 for Webhalflength Formula. 32 Click OK. Notice the location of the web components has adapted to the formula.

Creating Formula-controlled Parameters | 719

Associate web component parameters
33 Right-click the left web component, and click Element Properties. 34 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 35 In the Type Properties dialog, under Other, click the button to the right of the WebArrayLength value. 36 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog, select WebArrayLength, and click OK. In the Type Properties dialog, the button next to the WebArrayLength value should have an equals sign within it. 37 In the Type Properties dialog, click OK. 38 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. 39 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 40 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click View 1.

Because you have added and constrained new components, it is very important that you flex the model to ensure the nested components and the formulas that controls them work as expected. It is especially important to flex the model before arraying the truss so that you don’t multiply any existing problems.

Flex the design
41 Adjust the view so you can flex the truss while in the Family Types dialog. 42 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 43 In the Family Types dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■

Enter 686mm for Depth. Enter 76mm for Chord Thickness. Click Apply.

The truss should adapt to all the changes. If it does not, fix any problematic alignments and constraints.

44 In the Family Types dialog, reset the values as follows:
■ ■

Enter 286mm for Depth. Enter 38mm for Chord Thickness.

720 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Click Apply, and click OK.

45 On the File menu, click Save. 46 Proceed to the next exercise, “Arraying Nested Subcomponents” on page 721.

Arraying Nested Subcomponents
In this exercise, you array the nested web components, add alignment constraints, and link the arrays to the WebArrayNum parameter. Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you saved in the previous exercise.

Array the left web component
1 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Front. 2 Select the nested web component left of the center chase.

3 On the Edit menu, click Array. Creating an array requires two basic steps. First, you specify the move start point; then you specify the move end point. You must use precision when arraying because any error is multiplied as the array grows. 4 On the Options Bar, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Verify that Group and Associate is selected. Enter 3 for Number. Select 2nd for Move to. Select Constrain.

5 Select the bottom-right corner of the nested web extrusion as the move start point. When picking the corner, use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family.

Arraying Nested Subcomponents | 721

6 Select the bottom-left corner of the nested web extrusion as the move end point. When picking the corner, use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family.

7 Press ENTER to complete the array. 8 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Array the right nested web component
9 Select the nested web component right of the center chase. 10 On the Edit menu, click Array. 11 On the Options Bar, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Verify that Group and Associate is selected. Enter 3 for Number. Select 2nd for Move to. Select Constrain.

12 Select the bottom-left corner of the nested web extrusion as the move start point. When picking the corner, use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family. 13 Select the bottom-right corner of the nested web extrusion as the move end point. When picking the corner, use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family.

14 Press ENTER to complete the array. 15 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 16 Zoom out to view the truss.

Align and lock the arrays
17 Zoom in on the left array of web components. 18 On the Tools menu, click Align.

722 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

19 In the left array, place the cursor over the boundary between the two left web components until the reference highlights, then select the line twice.

Because there are two overlapping lines at this location, you are aligning the two bordering web components to each other. 20 Click the lock symbol to keep the web components locked at their edges.

21 Within the left array, align and lock the two right web components.

22 Within the right array, align and lock the two boundaries between the three web components. Use the same techniques as you did in the previous three steps. NOTE This step is very important. If you do not lock the edges of the array, the web components overlap each other when you change the depth of the truss.

Label the arrays
23 Select the middle web component of the left array. 24 Notice the array line displays above the components with the array value. Place the cursor over the array line as shown and select it.

NOTE Do not select the array value. 25 On the Options Bar, select WebArrayNum for Label. 26 Select the middle web component of the right array. 27 Select the array line over the web components on the right. 28 On the Options Bar, select WebArrayNum for Label. 29 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Arraying Nested Subcomponents | 723

30 Zoom out until you can see the entire truss.

Notice the arrays appear to be too long. This is because earlier in the tutorial, you added a dimension to lock the Member Left and Member Right reference plane to the outer Left and Right reference planes. The primary reason for this was to allow for flexing the length. 31 Zoom around the left side of the truss. 32 Select the dimension between reference plane Left and Member Left as shown.

33 Delete the dimension. 34 On the Tools menu, click Align. 35 Select the reference plane, Left, as the align-to point. 36 Select the reference plane, Member Left, and lock the alignment as shown.

Notice the end of the array still overlaps the trimmable end. You will fix this in later steps by changing the parameter value.

724 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

NOTE With most beam families, you would not want to align and lock these two reference planes; however, in this case, the wood floor truss normally sits on a sill bordering a rim joist. Therefore, this solution has little, if any, significant impact. 37 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 38 Zoom in around the right side of the truss. 39 Delete the dimension between reference plane Right and Member Right. 40 Align and lock reference plane Right and Member Right.

41 Zoom out until you can see the entire truss.

Change trimmable end length value
42 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 43 In the Family Types dialog, under Dimensions, enter 150mm for Trimmable End Length. 44 Click Apply, and click OK. Notice the web arrays fit within the truss without overlapping the ends.

Flex the design
45 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click View 1, and prepare the view for flexing. 46 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 47 In the Family Types dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Enter 686mm for Depth. Enter 12000mm for Length. Enter 900mm for Center Chase Width. Click Apply.

The truss should adapt to all the changes. If it does not, fix any problematic alignments and constraints.

Arraying Nested Subcomponents | 725

TIP When flexing a complex model such as this, you should flex the model in as many ways as possible to verify it is working correctly; however, for training and time purposes, these steps have been reduced. 48 In the Family Types dialog, reset the values as follows:
■ ■ ■ ■

Enter 286mm for Depth. Enter 6000mm for Length. Enter 400mm for Center Chase Width. Click Apply, and click OK.

You have completed the design of the primary components of the truss. 49 On the File menu, click Save. 50 Proceed to the next exercise, “Reloading a Family into a Project” on page 726.

Reloading a Family into a Project
In this exercise, you reload the truss family into the project. You then increase the distance between the foundation walls to see how the truss adapts to the changes in length.

726 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you saved in the previous exercise. In addition to the truss family, the project, m_WWF1.rvt, should be open. Close any other open projects.

Reload the truss into the project.
1 Verify that the truss family is active and the 3D View, View 1, displays. 2 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. 3 In the Reload Family dialog, select Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes. Notice the project file becomes active and the beam has updated with the latest changes.

4 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. 5 Drag Grid 2 downward until the shape of the building footprint is almost square. 6 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click 3D - Southeast Isometric. Notice the truss has adapted to the changes.

Reloading a Family into a Project | 727

7 On the Edit menu, click Undo Drag. 8 Save and close the project file and the family file. In the next lesson, you begin with a new dataset which is identical to both of these files. 9 Proceed to the next lesson, “Applying Subcategories, Materials, and Parameters” on page 728.

Applying Subcategories, Materials, and Parameters
In this lesson, you create and apply subcategories and materials. You then create a parameter to specifically control material application.

Creating and Applying Subcategories
In this exercise, you create new subcategories within the truss family. You then reload the family into the project and apply a material to the subcategory. Datasets
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_WWF2.rvt.

728 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

In this dataset, the truss was added to a beam system that occupies approximately half the building footprint. In addition, four instances of the floor truss were added to the other end of the structure.

Apply Object Styles
1 Zoom in around beam system. Notice no material has been applied to the truss. Within the family, the material values were set to By Category by default.

2 On the Settings menu, click Object Styles. 3 In the Object Styles dialog, verify that the Model Objects tab is selected, and expand the category Structural Framing. Notice that the Structural Framing category and all of the subcategories have no material value defined. In addition, notice that the subcategories do not apply to the wood floor truss that you have designed. 4 On the Structural Framing category line, click in the material field until the button displays as shown.

Creating and Applying Subcategories | 729

5 Click the button that displays in the Structural Framing Material field. 6 In the Materials dialog, click Wood - Timber for Name, and click OK. 7 In the Object Styles dialog, click OK. Notice the Wood - Timber material has been applied to all Structural Framing components.

When you apply a material to the Structural Framing category, all subcomponents of that category are assigned that material. If there was a metal beam in this building model, it would also have the wood material applied to it. If you create subcategories as you design in the Family Editor, you have more control over component visibility within a project. 8 On the Edit menu, click Undo Object Styles.

Create subcategories within the truss family
9 Select a truss that is not part of the beam system. 10 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family. 11 Click Yes to open the family for editing. 12 On the Settings menu, click Object Styles. 13 In the Object Styles dialog, under Modify Subcategories, click New. 14 In the New Subcategory dialog, enter Wood Floor Truss for Name, and click OK.

Apply material to subcategory
15 Click in the Material field for the Wood Floor Truss subcategory, and click the button to open the Materials dialog. 16 In the Materials dialog, click Duplicate. 17 In the New Material dialog, enter Wood Floor Truss, and click OK. 18 In the Materials dialog, under AccuRender, click .

19 In the Material Library dialog, navigate to _accurender\Wood\Pine, Yellow, select Natural,No Gloss for Name, and click OK. 20 In the Materials dialog, click OK. 21 In the Object Styles dialog, click OK.

Apply the subcategory to the truss components
22 Draw a pick box around the entire truss. 23 On the Options Bar, click .

24 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Other, and click OK. Notice the chords and end extrusions remain selected.

730 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

25 On the Options Bar, click

.

26 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identity Data, select Wood Floor Truss for Subcategory, and click OK. 27 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Apply a subcategory to the nested web components
28 Place the cursor over one of the arrayed web components, press TAB to toggle to the web component and click to select it. 29 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family. 30 Click Yes to open the family for editing. The web component family opens in a 3D view.

31 On the Settings menu, click Object Styles. 32 In the Object Styles dialog, under Modify Subcategories, click New. 33 In the New Subcategory dialog, enter Wood Floor Truss - Webs for Name, and click OK. By creating a separate subcategory for the web components, you can apply a different material to all web components when using this truss within a project.

Creating and Applying Subcategories | 731

34 Click in the Material field for the Wood Floor Truss - Webs subcategory, and click the button to open the Materials dialog. 35 In the Materials dialog, click Duplicate. 36 In the New Material dialog, enter Wood Floor Truss - Webs, and click OK. 37 In the Materials dialog, under AccuRender, click .

38 In the Material Library dialog, navigate to _accurender\Wood\Pine, Yellow, select Natural,No Gloss for Name, and click OK. 39 In the Materials dialog, click OK. 40 In the Object Styles dialog, click OK. 41 Select the web extrusion. 42 On the Options Bar, click .

43 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identity Data, select Wood Floor Truss - Webs for Subcategory, and click OK.

Reload web component into truss family
44 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. 45 In the Load into Projects dialog, select m_Wood Floor Truss_1.rfa, and click OK. 46 In the Reload Family dialog, select Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes.

Reload truss into project
47 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. 48 In the Load into Projects dialog, select m_WWF2.rvt, and click OK. 49 In the Reload Family dialog, select Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes. Notice the new object subcategory styles are applied to the truss components.

50 On the Settings menu, click Object Styles. 51 In the Object Styles dialog, under Categories, expand Structural Framing.

732 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Notice the two new subcategories are listed. You can change the style of only the wood truss components without impacting other structural framing components. 52 Click OK. 53 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics. 54 In the Visibility Graphics dialog, under Visibility, expand Structural Framing, clear Wood Floor Truss Webs, and click OK. Notice the web extrusions no longer display; however, the stick symbols continue to display.

55 On the Edit menu, click Undo Visibility/Graphics. 56 On the File menu, click Save As. 57 In the Save as dialog, navigate to a folder of your preference and save the project with the current name. 58 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating Material Parameters” on page 733.

Creating Material Parameters
In this exercise, you add a new material parameter that allows you to specify a material for each truss instance. Dataset Continue to use the dataset that you saved in the previous exercise.

Open truss family for editing
1 Select a truss that is not part of the beam system. 2 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family. 3 Click Yes to open the family for editing.

Create material parameter
4 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 5 In the Family Types dialog, under Parameters, click Add. 6 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Enter Floor Truss Material for Name. Select Materials and Finishes for Group parameter under. Select Common for Discipline. Select Material for Type. Select Instance. Click OK.

7 In the Family Types dialog, notice the default material is By Category.

Creating Material Parameters | 733

In this case, do not assign a material to the parameter. When reloaded into a project, this component will continue to use the material assigned to the subcategory by default. This material parameter allows you to assign a material on an instance parameter. 8 Click OK.

Link truss extrusions to material parameter
9 Draw a pick box around the entire truss. 10 On the Options Bar, click .

11 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Wood Floor Truss, and click OK. Notice the chords and end extrusions remain selected. 12 On the Options Bar, click .

13 In the Element Properties dialog, under Materials and Finishes, click the button to the right of the Material value field. 14 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog, select Floor Truss Material, and click OK. 15 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. 16 Place the cursor over one of the web components, press TAB, and select the component. 17 On the Options Bar, click .

18 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 19 In the Type Properties dialog, under Other, click the button to the right of the WebMaterial value field. 20 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog, select Floor Truss Material, and click OK. 21 Click OK twice. 22 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Reload truss into project
23 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. 24 In the Load into Projects dialog, select m_WWF2.rvt, and click OK. 25 In the Reload Family dialog, select Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes. Notice the appearance of the floor trusses has not changed. 26 Select a floor truss that is not part of the beam system. 27 On the Options Bar, click .

28 In the Element Properties dialog, under Materials and Finishes, click the Floor Truss Material field and click the button that displays. 29 In the Materials dialog, select Metal - Steel for Name, and click OK. 30 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. 31 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Notice the material is applied only to the selected beam.

734 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

32 On the File menu, click Save. 33 On the File menu, click Close. 34 Close any open files. You can save the open files if you wish. In the next lesson, a new dataset is supplied. 35 Proceed to the next lesson, “Controlling Component Visibility” on page 735.

Controlling Component Visibility
In this lesson, you add controls to specify the views in which each element displays and at what detail level.

Assigning Detail Level and View Controls
In this exercise, you designate the display of elements in specific views and at specific detail levels.

Datasets
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_WWF3.rvt.

Change detail levels
1 On the View Control Bar, click Detail Level, and click Coarse.

Controlling Component Visibility | 735

Notice the rim joist no longer displays. However, notice the floor truss has not changed appearance, because you have yet to assign a detail level to each of the elements within the truss family. Currently within the truss, all elements display at all times in all views.

2 Select a floor truss. 3 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family. 4 Click Yes to open the family for editing.

Apply detail level controls to web components
5 Select a web component. 6 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family. 7 Click Yes to open the family for editing. 8 Select the web extrusion. 9 On the Options Bar, click Visibility. 10 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under View Specific Display, clear Plan/RCP. Clear Left/Right. Under Detail Levels, clear Coarse. Click OK.

11 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. 12 In the Load into Projects dialog, select m_Wood Floor Truss_1.rfa, and click OK. 13 In the Reload Family dialog, select Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes. Notice the appearance of the floor trusses has not changed.

Assign detail level to center chase extrusions
14 Select the center chase extrusions. 15 On the Options Bar, click Visibility. 16 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under View Specific Display, clear Plan/RCP. Clear Left/Right. Under Detail Levels, clear Coarse. Click OK.

736 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Assign detail level to truss ends
17 Select the end extrusions. 18 On the Options Bar, click Visibility. 19 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■

Under View Specific Display, clear Plan/RCP. Under Detail Levels, clear Coarse. Click OK.

Assign detail level to truss chords
20 Select the truss chords. 21 On the Options Bar, click Visibility. 22 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog, specify the following:
■ ■

Under Detail Levels, clear Coarse. Click OK.

Reload truss into project
23 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. 24 In the Load into Projects dialog, select m_WWF3.rvt, and click OK. 25 In the Reload Family dialog, select Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes. Notice that the floor truss solid geometry is not displayed.

26 On the View Control Bar, click Detail Level, and click Medium. Notice the floor truss solid geometry is displayed. 27 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. 28 On the View Control Bar, click Detail Level, and click Coarse.

Assigning Detail Level and View Controls | 737

Notice the symbolic representation of the beams.

29 On the File menu, click Save As. 30 In the Save As dialog, navigate to your preferred location and save the project with the current name. 31 Proceed to the next lesson, “Creating Component Types” on page 738.

Creating Component Types
In this lesson, you create multiple floor truss types to speed up the design process when working in a project. In the final exercise, you create a conditional formula that adjusts the truss depth based on the truss length.

Creating Multiple Component Types
In this exercise, you create multiple types for a 89x38 truss and a 64x38 truss. Although you can change the parameters of a truss within a project, creating predefined types can speed up the design process.

Open the truss family for editing
1 Select a floor truss. 2 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family. 3 Click Yes to open the family for editing.

Create new types
4 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 5 In the Family Types dialog, under Family Types, click New. 6 In the New dialog, enter 89x38 for Name, and click OK. 7 In the Family Types dialog, under Family Types, click New. 8 In the New dialog, enter 64x38 for Name, and click OK. 9 In the Family Types dialog, under Dimensions, enter 64mm for Chord Width, and click Apply. Notice the chord changes width. 10 Select 89x38 for Name, and click Apply. The truss returns to its original designed value. NOTE When creating new components, create types for those most frequently used in your projects. 11 Click OK.

738 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

rvt. select m_WWF3. 21 In the Project Browser. 400))) 6 Click Apply. select 89x38. enter the follow formula for Depth: if(Length < 6600. 23 Proceed to the final exercise. 19 Add a beam next to the 64x38. 14 In the Reload Family dialog. select Override parameter values of existing types. and click OK. click Load into Projects. 17 Add a beam in the center of the open space.TIP You can also use new types to flex the model. under 3D Views. “Creating Conditional Formulas” on page 739. You are going to enter a conditional formula that follows this basic rule: IF ( <condition>. click Save. and click Yes. 20 On the Design Bar. if(Length < 7500. click Family Types. 400. if(Length < 9000. click Beam. 22 On the File menu. click Edit Family. 350. under Dimensions. 18 In the Type Selector. <result-if-true>. <result-if-false>) 5 In the Family Types dialog. 2 On the Options Bar. Creating Conditional Formulas | 739 . Creating Conditional Formulas In this exercise. Load new types into the project 12 On the Design Bar. Adding a conditional formula 4 On the Design Bar. Open the truss for editing 1 Select a floor truss. 286. you create a conditional formula that changes the depth automatically as the truss increases in length. double-click 3D .Southeast Isometric. 13 In the Load into Projects dialog. Notice the two beam types. select 64x38. 16 In the Type Selector. click Modify. 15 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 3 Click Yes to open the family for editing.

14 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. under Floor Plans. select m_WWF3. 17 Close any open files.Flex the design 7 In the Family Types dialog. 15 Notice the change in floor truss depth. IMPORTANT When you changed the width of the building footprint. click Apply. Notice the truss depth increases. click Save. NOTE You would have to change the depth of the sill and rim joist to accommodate this change. and click Yes. double-click 3D . 740 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . enter 8000 for length. Regeneration time and overall performance can be affected by over-designed families. 16 On the File menu. and click OK.Southeast Isometric. select Override parameter values of existing types. 11 In the Reload Family dialog. and click Apply. 10 In the Load into Projects dialog. and click OK. Load the truss into the project 9 On the Design Bar. click Load into Projects. Test the conditional formula within a project 12 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Family Types dialog. under 3D Views. You have completed this tutorial. you probably noticed a change in the amount of time the view needed to regenerate. enter 6000 for length. 13 Select Grid 2 and drag it downward until it is between 8000-9000mm from Grid 1.rvt.

Using Advanced Features 7 741 .

742 | Chapter 18 Using Advanced Features .

curtain systems are usually assembled on site as a single unit. grid lines. to resize the system. They are typically not load-bearing and are not cut for doors or windows. To change grids. A typical curtain system comprises a wall. you need to select a panel. 743 . and you can change these elements individually. and they are not windows. Like windows. panel. you select the grid.Curtain Systems 18 Curtain systems are not walls. To switch panel types. they can define space and separate the exterior from the interior. they can usually include mullions and have glazed panels. or you can use a specific curtain system command. This affects the entire curtain system. Like walls. Unlike windows. You can add curtain systems with the wall command. For example. and mullions. you need to change the length of the wall.

1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. and double-click Ground Floor. This type of curtain system is also referred to as a curtain wall. 4 In the Type Selector. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 744 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems .rvt. you create a curtain system using the wall command. and open Metric\m_Curtain_Walls. you further develop the building information model by creating a flat curtain system at the entrance of the model.Flat Curtain System In this lesson. 5 Start the curtain system where shown. 2 Zoom in to Grid F where it meets the arc in the floor. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. Creating an Entrance In this exercise. Creating a curtain system using the wall command 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. This floor edge will be the entrance to the building. click Wall.

Creating an Entrance | 745 . and double-click Southeast Isometric. 9 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast. and finish at the outside face of the exterior wall as shown. 7 Zoom in to the join between the curtain system and the exterior wall. 10 Zoom in to the curtain system you just added. expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views.6 Move the cursor down along the edge of the floor. 8 In the Project Browser.

and room bounding. 13 The curtain system is a single glazed panel. enter 1200. using curtain grids. and click (Properties). under Floor Plans. select Up to level: TOP OF ROOF. Note that a curtain system created from the wall command has similar properties to other walls: base constraint. The curtain system is now at the same height as the other existing curtain systems. Adding curtain grids 14 In the Project Browser. For Top Offset. top and base attachments. you are going to subdivide the panel into several smaller panels. You want the curtain system to attach to the roof.11 Select the curtain system. double-click GROUND FLOOR. Click OK. 746 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . top constraint. 12 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Constraints ➤ Top Constraint.

double-click the elevation symbol arrow to open the new elevation view. 24 Place another grid so that it snaps to the SECOND FLOOR level line. and click to place a horizontal curtain grid 1200 mm above the ground floor level line. and click Rename. 17 Click the elevation arrow to display the crop boundary. THIRD FLOOR. 21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 26 While pressing CTRL. 29 In the Select Levels dialog. 27 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. FOURTH FLOOR. 16 Place the elevation symbol in front of the curtain wall and click Modify on the Design Bar. 23 Place another grid 1500 mm above the first grid. 18 In the Project Browser.a. and click OK. right-click Elevation 1 . and click OK. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. select SECOND FLOOR. 19 Enter Entrance Elevation. click Curtain Grid. FIFTH FLOOR. 20 In the drawing area. click Elevation. click Modify. and SEVENTH FLOOR. select the 3 grid lines you just placed.15 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 22 Move the cursor along the edge of the wall. 25 On the Design Bar. Creating an Entrance | 747 . and resize the crop boundary as shown. or press CTRL + C on the keyboard. SIXTH FLOOR. while pressing CTRL.

click Modify.The selected grid lines are now at each of these levels. watch the tooltips and the Status Bar. This divides the curtain wall vertically into 2 panels. Click to create a vertical grid. 748 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . 32 Move the cursor along the GROUND FLOOR level (left of the vertical grid line) until it snaps to the midpoint of the larger vertical panel. 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Click to place another grid line. 31 Place the cursor on grid 2 so that it highlights. click Curtain Grid. 33 On the Design Bar. one larger than the other. TIP To be sure that the curtain grid is at the midpoint of the panel.

35 Select the left vertical grid line. You enter an editor that lets you select segments of the grid line to remove them. click Add or Remove Segments. you set up a doorway on a curtain panel. you add a doorway to the curtain system. Creating an Entrance | 749 . and on the Options Bar. Adding the doorway 34 Zoom in to the ground floor level in the Entrance Elevation view. and then you replace that panel with a curtain system door panel. The two segments are removed. and then select the segment above it. 37 Click in any white space to exit the editor. Instead of using the Door command. The segment line style changes to dashed.Next. 36 Select the lowest segment of the left grid line.

select One Segment. remove the horizontal segment that intersects the vertical segment removed in the previous step. TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings to view the dimensions. 41 Place 4 vertical grid lines as shown. 40 On the Options Bar. 39 On the Design Bar. click Curtain Grid. 42 Place dimensions as shown. 750 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems .38 Using the same method. and lock them.

46 Click Add or Remove Segments on the Options Bar. Creating an Entrance | 751 . click once to the right of the long grid and then click once to the left of it. To get the horizontal grid to display between the vertical grids. click M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl: Store Front Double Door. 51 Select the left 1800 mm panel. Watch the Status Bar to be sure you are highlighting the panel. click OK to leave the curtain grids constrained. 54 On the Design Bar. You will have to press TAB to highlight it. 47 Click the horizontal grid line between the smaller panels. click Training Files. The line style changes from dashed to solid to indicate a grid segment has been added. 44 When the warning about locked dimensions being deleted displays. TIP The middle grid lines are centered between the long vertical grid above them. You are going to add more segments to an existing curtain grid. click Modify. Do not click between the 1800 mm panels. and open Metric\Families\Doors\M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl. The panel changes to a double door. 50 In the left pane of the Open dialog. you replace the 2 larger 1800 mm panels with curtain system doors. Next. Use the following image as a guide. click in any white space to exit the editor. 53 Use the same method to replace the other panel with a double door. 49 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family.rfa. 52 On the Type Selector.43 Delete the dimensions. 45 Select the horizontal grid line that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. 48 When the grids are placed (line style have changed to solid). You now have two 1800 mm wide panels between smaller rectangular panels.

64 Replace the two adjacent glazed panels with solid panels. and the solid panels display in white. 55 In the Project Browser. 57 On the View Control Bar. click Edit/New to open the Type Properties of the panel. Now. Changing panels 58 Zoom in to the FIFTH FLOOR level. and click Wireframe. 61 With the panel still selected. 62 In the Element Properties dialog. Next. and Material specifies the shading and patterning. click . The glazed panel is changed to a solid panel. you replace some of the transparent panels with solid ones. click System Panel : Solid.These panels schedule as doors. double-click Entrance Elevation. The glazed panels display in blue. under Elevations. 56 In the Project Browser. double-click GROUND FLOOR to see the plan view door swings of the curtain wall doors. Thickness specifies the depth of the panel. 59 Select one of the panels below the FIFTH FLOOR level line. 60 On the Type Selector. 63 Click OK twice. you change panels in front of ceilings from glazed to solid. They are part of the curtain panel category. click . under Floor Plans. 752 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . The Offset property specifies the distance from the centerline of the curtain wall. on the new curtain system you added. This changes the graphics style of the view. not as curtain panels. 65 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.

68 On the File menu. 67 Change the remaining glazed panels in front of ceilings to solid panels. 2 On the Options Bar. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Name the file m_Curtain_Walls-in_progress. select Grid Line Segment. you place mullions on curtain panel grids. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 5 Place a mullion on the horizontal grid that is 1200 mm above the ground floor.66 Change the graphics style back to Wireframe. 3 Place a mullion on the grid segment at the ground floor immediately to the right of the right set of doors. click Mullion. click Save As. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System In this exercise.rvt. 4 On the Options Bar. This completes the exercise for creating an entrance. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System | 753 . select Entire Grid Line.

select All Empty Segments. 12 Click the lower mullion join control. however. so you remove them next. 9 Delete the mullions below them. 754 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . there are a few that you do not want. 7 Place the cursor on any empty grid segment on the curtain system and click. Now all empty grid segments have mullions on them. 11 Select the vertical mullion above and between the set of double doors. You are going to change some mullion joins. Two mullion join controls display. Removing mullions 8 Zoom in to the set of doors. Changing mullion joins 10 On the View Control Bar. The two mullions below the doors are not necessary. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. because their width reduces the size of the doors.6 On the Options Bar. Mullions can change their joins to other mullions.

The top of the vertical mullion now meets the bottom of the horizontal mullion above. you can also right-click. Adding a Curved Curtain System In this exercise. double-click Southeast Isometric. Finally.The bottom of the mullion meets the top of the horizontal mullion. You also learned how to modify grids and change panels. This also completes the lesson on creating a flat curtain system. Curved Curtain System | 755 . Finally. you create a curved curtain system near the entrance of the model that was just completed. 14 On the Design Bar. you learned how to add mullions and change their joins. click Modify. 15 In the Project Browser. TIP After selecting the vertical mullion. 16 Save the file. The curtain wall is sketched as an arc. You learned how to create a basic curtain wall system and how to subdivide it with grids. and click Join Conditions ➤ Break at Join to break the mullion at both joins. you add a curtain system using the wall command. This completes the exercise for adding mullions. Curved Curtain System In this lesson. You also create a custom curtain panel for the system. 13 Click the top mullion control. you add both predefined and custom mullions to the system.

10 Finish the wall by clicking at the top of the arc. 2 Zoom in to the circular space above the entrance that was just completed. (Arc passing through three points). For Top Offset. under Floor Plans. Click OK. for Top Constraint. enter 1200. select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. click Wall. click 8 Start the wall by clicking at the left edge of the circle at the centerline of the intersecting wall. 5 Click . 9 Place the second point at the lower right side. 6 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. 756 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. 1 In the Project Browser. 7 On the Options Bar. double-click GROUND FLOOR. 4 In the Type Selector. specify Up to level: FIFTH FLOOR.

You are going to use one of these snaps points. click Modify. 14 In the Project Browser. Next. double-click East. 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.The curtain wall displays as one flat panel between the first and second points placed. The curtain grid command snaps only to the curved arc. 12 Snap the cursor to the midpoint of the curved arc and click. 13 Continue to place more grids by using the snap points on the arc. Divide the halves into quarters. you place grids on the system. 16 On the Design Bar. and then sixteenths. 15 Zoom in to the cylinder. under Elevations. and snap the cursor to each level line and click to add horizontal curtain grids. Adding a Curved Curtain System | 757 . eighths. you change some panels in the system. click Curtain Grid. Next. Watch the Status Bar to ensure you are at the midpoint. Do not add a grid on the GROUND FLOOR level.

3 In the Project Browser. double-click Exterior. enter 100. Next you create a custom panel and add it to the system. 2 In the left pane of the New dialog. click Lines.Using walls as panels 17 Using a selection box. 18 In the Type Selector. you create a custom curtain panel and place it into the curved curtain system. to filter out all other 19 Save the file. This completes the first exercise for creating a curved system. 6 On the Options Bar. under Elevations. for Depth. select the bottom layer of panels.rft. 7 Start the sketch at the upper left reference line intersection and finish at the lower right reference line intersection. 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family.300mm. 758 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and on the Options Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Curtain Wall Panel. 4 On the Design Bar. Remember to click elements from the selection except Curtain Panels. click . 5 On the Design Bar. click Training Files. select Basic Wall: Generic . Adding a Custom Curtain Panel In this exercise.

Pattern. click Modify. 9 Select the extrusion.Pattern. . 18 Load the Curtain Panel . click Finish Sketch. All fourth floor panels are selected. 20 Press TAB until a panel in the arc is highlighted. select Curtain Panel . 19 In the Project Browser. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click FOURTH FLOOR. 17 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. select Glass. clear Chain. click Model Lines. and return to the project file. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid. 14 On the Design Bar. All the panels change to the custom panel you created. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel | 759 .rfa. and save the family as Curtain Panel . under Floor Plans. and click 13 Sketch 2 lines that crisscross the extrusion.rfa family. for Identity Data ➤ Subcategory. and click OK.8 On the Design Bar. 11 On the Design Bar.Pattern. 12 On the Options Bar. right-click. 21 In the Type Selector. 16 Click File menu ➤ Close. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and click .

and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid. 29 Save the file. 24 On the View toolbar. This completes the exercise for adding a custom curtain panel.22 Select the curved arc curtain wall. and then click (Dynamically Modify View). The finished arc wall should look like the following image. double-click FIFTH FLOOR. 760 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . you add both custom and predefined mullions to the curved curtain panel. 26 In the Project Browser. 27 Highlight a panel in the arc. All fifth floor panels are selected. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel In this exercise. The structure of the curved curtain system now matches that of the main part of the building. select System Panel . 28 In the Type Selector.Solid. 23 Right-click. click (Default 3D View). All the panels change to the solid panel. 25 Hold SHIFT and spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. and click Flip Orientation. right-click. under Floor Plans.

and click OK. for Profile Usage. Select Radius. 8 On the Design Bar. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel | 761 . 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. If Polygon does not display on the Options Bar. Creating a custom mullion in the Family Editor 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 7 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. click ■ ■ For Sides.Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. under Elevations. 10 Place the cursor at the intersection of the reference planes and click to enter the octagon starting point. 3 Select each horizontal grid line on the curved curtain panel. Notice that both the starting and ending points are in the same location. For vertical mullions. enter 8. and select it. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile. 1 In the Project Browser. you use the Family Editor to create a custom mullion. select Mullion. double-click East. click Training Files. except at the GROUND FLOOR level. 5 In the left pane of the New dialog. and enter 50 mm for the radius. click Mullion. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters.rft. 9 On the Options Bar: ■ Click (Polygon). . click Lines. Click again to specify the ending point.

and return to the project file. click Mullion.11 On the Design Bar. clear Fine. 762 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . 26 Load the Cylinder Mullion. 29 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. it can be added as a mullion type. clear Coarse and Medium. 15 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. and spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. 21 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. select Circular Mullion for Family. click Modify. The detail component becomes the true representation in plan view. click Visibility. 18 Place the detail component so that it snaps to the mullion profile as shown. and click Visibility. 31 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click Southeast Isometric. click Detail Component. click Training Files. 20 Select the detail component. and click OK. 23 Save the family as Cylinder Mullion. click Modify. 22 Click File menu ➤ Save As. After the new profile is loaded. 19 On the Design Bar. 30 Click . and click OK.rfa family. under 3D Views. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 14 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. 28 Click .detail. 12 Select the lines in the octagon. This controls the detail level at which the mullion profile displays. 13 On the Options Bar. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. 17 On the Design Bar. and open Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Cylinder Mullion . 27 In the Project Browser. 25 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family.rfa.rfa.

so you remove the unwanted ones. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel | 763 . and click OK. make custom curtain panels and mullions. 39 On the Design Bar. 41 Highlight a mullion in the arc. You have placed more mullions than you want. you learned to create a curved curtain system. 35 Under Construction. click Modify. 43 Save the file. select All Empty Segments. 38 Click on any grid line in the entry cylinder. 42 Press DELETE. and then apply those custom elements to the system. select Cylinder Mullion : Cylinder Mullion. 34 Enter Cylinder Mullion for Name. 36 Click OK twice. under Floor Plans. and click Select Mullions ➤ On Gridline. 40 In the Project Browser. right-click. 37 On the Options Bar. This completes the exercise for adding mullions. double-click GROUND FLOOR. click Duplicate. for Profile. as well as the lesson on creating a curved curtain system. In this lesson. 33 In the Type Properties dialog.32 Click Edit/New.

1 In the Project Browser. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. click Roof Properties. 8 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Family. 5 On the Options Bar.Additional Curtain Systems In this lesson. All the inside faces highlight. 764 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . enter 600. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 7 On the Design Bar. place the cursor on the inside face of one of the walls. under Floor Plans. click Pick Walls. and a ruled curtain system. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. TIP To chain select all the walls. 2 Zoom in to the skylight at the center of the building between Grids 2 and 3 and D and E. Sloped Glazings Sloped glazings are useful when you are creating skylights and other glazed roofing systems. select System Family: Sloped Glazing. 4 On the Design Bar. select Defines slope. a storefront system. and press TAB. 6 Select the inside faces of the base walls. 9 On the Design Bar. For Constraints ➤ Base Offset From Level. click Finish Roof. and you can click to select them all. you create additional types of curtain systems: a sloped glazing system. Click OK. double-click TOP OF ROOF.

you embed curtain walls into other walls to create a storefront system. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 12 Zoom in to the skylight. 15 Select the grid lines that define the edges of each panel in the sloped glazing. Storefront System | 765 . 17 On the View Control Bar. 14 On the Options Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 11 On the View Control Bar. Storefront System In this exercise. click Modify. 16 On the Design Bar. double-click GROUND FLOOR. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. under Floor Plans. double-click Southeast Isometric. 2 Zoom in to the wall at the right of the model.10 In the Project Browser. click Mullion. 13 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. This completes the exercise for creating a sloped glazing system. 18 Save the file. under 3D Views. select Entire Grid Line.

select Curtain Wall : Storefront. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 766 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . 5 On the Options Bar. select Unconnected for Height. You can place the curtain wall right inside this wall. and enter 2400. 7 Sketch a curtain wall along the wall centerline to the approximate length shown. click Wall. 4 In the Type Selector. 6 Start the wall 1200 mm from one end of the wall on the wall centerline.You are going to place a storefront system in this wall.

which is specified in the type. To see how the grid layout is defined. click OK to close the Type Properties dialog and return to the Element Properties dialog that displays the instance parameters. and the Spacing (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to 2400 mm. 8 Click the temporary dimension. click Edit/New. and click . This specifies an exact length for the wall. enter 10200 mm. Storefront System | 767 . under 3D Views. For this wall. 14 After you have looked at the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern parameters. 11 Zoom in to the new storefront wall. and the Spacing (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to 1524 mm. 9 On the Design Bar.The curtain wall cuts the original wall. and press ENTER. 12 Select the storefront wall. The storefront wall already has a curtain grid layout. click Modify. The Layout (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to Fixed Distance. This means that the panel heights will be exactly 2400 mm. This indicates that the curtain grids are placed at even intervals along the length of the curtain wall at a distance up to 1524 mm. The type parameters under the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern headings create the predefined layout. 10 In the Project Browser. double-click Southeast Isometric. even if the wall height changes. you can look at the properties of the storefront wall. the Layout (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to Maximum Spacing. 13 In the Element Properties dialog.

You see these same parameters for Horizontal Grid Pattern. center. click Mullion. 20 Save the file. 19 Select a curtain grid. 768 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems .The Instance Parameters list includes additional parameters that define the curtain grid layout. 17 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. By setting the Angle value. you create a curtain wall based on 2 lines that have been sketched at different elevations on the model. or end. 2 Orient the view to the storefront wall you added in the last exercise. The Offset is the distance the spacing starts from the justification point. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Justification. Under the Vertical Grid Pattern heading. Under Vertical Grid Pattern. This type of curtain system is known as a ruled curtain system. for Vertical Grid Pattern ➤ Angle. you are rotating the grid lines to an angle on the face of the panel. For more information about these curtain wall parameters. 15 To see how these parameters can affect the wall. double-click Southeast Isometric. under 3D Views. enter 15. select All Empty Segments. 18 On the Options Bar. you learned how to embed a curtain wall and set up a grid layout. In this exercise. Curtain System by Lines In this exercise. you find Number. The Justification specifies the vertical spacing at the beginning. The Horizontal Grid Pattern counterparts are the same but for the perpendicular direction. Angle. 1 In the Project Browser. see the Revit Architecture help. enter 45 and for Horizontal Grid Pattern ➤ Angle. the Number is the number of vertical curtain grids you want on the curtain instance. and Offset. This completes the exercise on creating a storefront. 16 Click OK.

click Curtain System ➤ Curtain System by Lines. Press TAB to select the line if it does not immediately highlight. 5 Place the cursor at the top edge of the SECOND FLOOR slab. 6 Click the highlighted line. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Curtain System by Lines | 769 . making sure Lines : Model Lines : Line is highlighted. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. and highlight the model line. Watch the Status Bar and Tooltips to be sure you are highlighting the model line. 7 Place the cursor at the top edge of the TOP OF ROOF level.3 On the View Control Bar.

Next.8 Select the highlighted line. click Curtain Grid. NOTE The next few steps are intended as a guide to finish the system. A ruled curtain system does not have all the properties of a curtain wall. you subdivide the ruled curtain system using curtain grids. 9 On the Design Bar. 11 Click OK. and click . click Modify. A panel between the 2 lines is created. Notice there are very few properties for the ruled curtain system. you can vary the steps to style the system the way you want. quarters. 770 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. but now that you have created a ruled curtain system. place horizontal grids that divide the panel into halves. 10 Select the panel. and then eighths. 13 Using the midpoint curtain grid snaps.

and the lesson on creating additional curtain systems. 17 Change the THIRD FLOOR level panels to solid. 14 Place vertical grids that snap to the midpoints on the panel and divide the panel into halves. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Grid 2. 18 Save the file. and define a ruled curtain system. you replace some of the glazed panels in front of the ceilings with solid panels. In this lesson you learned to create a sloped glazing system. This completes the exercise for creating a ruled curtain system.This is similar to placing the grids on the curved curtain system. Finally. quarters. and then eighths. embed a curtain system inside another wall. 15 Highlight a top level glazed panel. Curtain System by Lines | 771 . 16 In the Type Selector. select System Panel : Solid. right-click.

772 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems .

and soffits to the roofs that you create. gutters. In addition. you learn how to add fascia.Roofs 19 In this tutorial. you learn how to create different types of roofs in Revit Architecture 2008. 773 .

you need to select a work plane to use as a sketching guide. and double-click Level 1. Creating an Extruded Roof In this exercise. and mansard roofs. 774 | Chapter 19 Roofs . and open Metric\m_Roofs. 1 In the Project Browser.Creating Roofs In this lesson. including hip. click Training Files. You create the roof by sketching the top roof profile and extruding it over the length of the breezeway. 3 In the Work Plane dialog. and click OK. verify Level 3 is selected for Level.rvt. Before you can sketch the roof profile. expand Views (all). 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. In this lesson. you create an extruded roof over a breezeway between a house and a garage. you learn to create several different types of roofs. 4 Click OK. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Floor Plans. a work plane named Breezeway exists for the purpose of this exercise. gable. 6 In the Roof Reference Level and Offset dialog. You do not need to create the work plane. and then click Open View to select a section view parallel to the work plane in which to sketch the roof. and then select Reference Plane : Breezeway. you create roofs from footprints and by extrusion. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. select Name. 5 In the Go To View dialog. shed. verify that Section: Section1 is selected.

The section view is automatically cropped around the area where you want to sketch the roof. Creating an Extruded Roof | 775 . 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. you need to define four reference planes to help determine key points on the profile sketch. Before you can sketch the profile of the roof. you can place it in the general location and then zoom in and use temporary dimensions. 9 Sketch a similar reference plane 450 mm to the right of the right exterior breezeway wall face. and so on). click Ref Plane. centerline. To change where the temporary dimension is measured from (face. 8 Sketch the first reference plane 450 mm to the left of the left exterior breezeway wall face. click the blue square on the witness line. TIP Instead of trying to place the reference plane in its exact location initially. This helps ensure that the plane is measured from the face of the wall rather than from the wall centerline. 10 Sketch a vertical reference plane centered between the two vertical walls.

15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Begin the sketch at the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the horizontal plane. click Lines. 13 On the Options Bar. Use automatic snaps to link the chain to the reference plane intersections. select Chain. click Finish Sketch to complete the roof. Next. sketch the roof profile. 14 Sketch two sloped lines to create the roof profile. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.11 Sketch a horizontal reference plane 450 mm below Level 2. 776 | Chapter 19 Roofs .

click . Next. Use the Join Roof command again to join the opposite end of the breezeway roof to the exterior wall of the house that joins the breezeway. click to display the model. 19 On the Tools toolbar. The roof should resemble the following illustration. click . and then select the exterior face of the wall. press TAB. 16 On the View toolbar. 17 On the Tools toolbar. 18 Select the edge of the roof. and then select the exterior wall face of the garage to join the roof to the garage wall. Creating an Extruded Roof | 777 . 20 Select the breezeway roof edge. use the Join Roofs command to adjust the length of the roof and join the roof edges to the exterior walls.The roof is automatically extruded from the Breezeway work plane in one direction. Notice that the breezeway roof penetrates the house walls inappropriately.

24 On the Options Bar. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. “Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint” on page 778. You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. you create a gable roof over a garage from a footprint. expand Sections (Type 1). click Attach for Top/Base. so you next attach the breezeway walls to the breezeway roof.The breezeway walls still penetrate the roof. and double-click Section 1. You use roof slope lines to define the roof gable ends. 21 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all). 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. click to view the completed breezeway roof in the model. 26 On the View toolbar. click Modify. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. 25 Select the roof to join the wall tops to the roof. 23 Select one of the breezeway walls. 778 | Chapter 19 Roofs . and select the second wall. press CTRL.

click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. Verify that a dashed green line displays to the right of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. By default.rvt. Next. 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 7 Select the two horizontal walls to create a closed loop and complete the roof footprint. 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. verify that Defines slope is selected. and on the Options Bar. click Modify. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 5 Select the parallel wall on the right to define the second roof slope line. 9 Press CTRL. edit the properties of the two vertical slope definition lines to change the roof pitch. select both slope definition lines. m_Roofs. Verify that a dashed green line displays to the left of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. clear Defines slope. The Element Properties dialog is displayed.To complete the gable roof with the correct pitch. 2 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click . 4 Select the left vertical wall of the garage to define the first roof slope line. and enter 600 for Overhang. click Pick Walls. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint | 779 . 6 On the Options Bar. 3 On the Options Bar. you set the roof slope as a property of the footprint slope lines. the roof slope has a 750 mm rise over a 1000 mm run.

and double-click Level 3. 3 On the Options Bar. You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. you sketch a closed rectangular opening around the chimney. 780 | Chapter 19 Roofs . click Pick Walls. “Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint” on page 780. and enter 600 for Overhang. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. clear Defines slope. click Finish Roof. m_Roofs. click Yes to attach the highlighted exterior garage walls to the roof. under Dimensions. you add a main gable roof to a house from a footprint.10 In the Element Properties dialog. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. NOTE You add the slope defining lines in a later step.rvt. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. 11 On the Design Bar. When you complete the roof. and click OK. 12 When you see the informational dialog. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 1 In the Project Browser. 13 On the View toolbar. click to view the gable roof and attached walls in the model. The roof requires an opening to accommodate a chimney. the opening that you sketched becomes a void in the roof. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint In this exercise. After you define the roof slope lines and complete the footprint. enter 500 mm for Rise/1000 to change the roof slope. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. expand Floor Plans. expand Views (all).

Next. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the entire floor plan. 6 Click to select all the walls. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and then verify that a dashed green line displays to the exterior side of the walls. 9 Using automatic snaps. 11 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls. 14 Select one of the shorter line segments shown in the following illustration. 13 On the Options Bar. sketch the chimney opening. Next. add new slope lines to the roof. sketch a rectangle from the upper left corner of the exterior chimney face to the lower right corner of the exterior chimney face. click Lines. click Modify. 12 Select the uppermost horizontal line. select Defines Slope. 10 On the View menu. click . 8 On the Options Bar. press TAB. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint | 781 .

17 When you see the informational dialog. select Defines Slope. 5 Select the exterior edges of the three walls that create the rear addition to the house. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 18 On the View toolbar.15 On the Options bar. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. you create a hip roof over the rear of a house from a footprint. “Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint” on page 782. and enter 600 for Overhang. click to view the new roof in the model. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. expand Floor Plans. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. close the roof sketch. The sketched lines cannot overlap or intersect each other. Verify that a dashed green line displays on the exterior side of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the walls. m_Roofs. Roof sketches must create a closed loop before you can create the roof. click Pick Walls. click Finish Roof. 3 On the Options Bar. 782 | Chapter 19 Roofs . click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. select Defines slope. and double-click Level 2. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Next.rvt. expand Views (all).

8 Select the exterior edge of the uppermost horizontal wall of the main building. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and click . 12 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. and then specify a point near the midpoint of the line that you sketched along the wall of the main building. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 783 . The Element Properties dialog is displayed. click Finish Roof. 10 On the Options Bar. 14 Under Constraints. 16 On the View toolbar. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. click to display the model. Next. 9 On the Tools toolbar. click Roof Properties. clear Defines Slope. and click OK. click Lines. raise the roof 600 mm above the current level. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch.6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 7 On the Options Bar. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. 11 To trim the first line segment. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. enter 600 for Base Offset From Level. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. Next. using the following illustration for guidance. click . select the left vertical slope definition line.

24 Select the edge of the hip roof. Notice that the walls do not join to the roof. click Attach for Top/Base on the Options Bar. 19 Select one of the walls under the hip roof. 22 Using the same method that you used previously. use the Join Roof command to fix the roof. 21 Click to use the Dynamic View tool to view the remaining walls that support the hip roof. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. 18 On the Design Bar. 20 Select the roof to join the wall top to the roof. Notice that the new hip roof does not properly join to the back of the house. join the two remaining walls to the roof. and then select the edge of the main roof to join the roofs. click .17 Click to use the Dynamic View tool to view the back of the house. click Modify. Press and hold CTRL to select and join the two remaining walls at the same time. Use the Attach Top/Base command to join the walls to the roof. 23 On the Tools toolbar. Next. 784 | Chapter 19 Roofs .

m_Roofs. and enter 300 for Overhang. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. click Pick Walls. expand Floor Plans. you create a shed roof over the entrance to a house from a footprint. clear Defines Slope. expand Views (all). enter 0 for Overhang. “Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint” on page 785. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls that defines the entry way. 3 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.rvt. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint | 785 . 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click Level 2. and then click to select all three of the entry way walls. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 6 On the Options Bar. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. Verify that a green dashed line displays around the exterior side of the walls before clicking to select the walls. 4 On the Options Bar.The properly joined roof should resemble the following illustration. press TAB.

and press ENTER. 11 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. 18 Click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and select the lower horizontal line at the front of the roof. 13 On the Options Bar. Next. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. select the left vertical roof line. 16 Under Constraints. 14 Enter 500 mm for the rise value to change the roof slope. Next.7 Select the exterior face of the main wall to close the sketch. 9 On the Options Bar. enter -600 for Base Offset From Level. 10 To trim the first line segment. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. 19 Click 20 Click on the View toolbar to display the model. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. 786 | Chapter 19 Roofs . 8 On the Tools toolbar. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. click Roof Properties. click . and then select a point near the midpoint of the upper horizontal line you sketched earlier. select Defines slope. you add a slope-defining line. to use the Dynamic View tool to rotate the model. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Notice the rise value is displayed next to the slope marker. and click OK.

To help locate the position of each split. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof In this exercise. expand Floor Plans. Before you can add slope arrows. clear Defines Slope. 11 On the Design Bar. 10 Split the slope defining line where the reference planes intersect as shown in the following illustration. expand Views (all). and double-click 3D. change the longest slope line segment (the middle segment) so that it no longer defines slope. Next. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click Modify. Verify that the reference planes are located inside the shed roof sketch. 5 On the View menu. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof | 787 . click . 3 On the Options Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. click Edit to activate the roof footprint sketch. 14 On the Options Bar. “Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof” on page 787. click Split Walls and Lines. you need to add two reference planes. 7 On the Options Bar. click Slope Arrow.21 Proceed to the next exercise. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.rvt. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and zoom in around the shed roof footprint. 4 In the Project Browser. expand 3D Views. 12 On the Options Bar. you need to split the slope defining line into three segments. 9 On the Tools menu. verify is selected. and double-click Level 2. and enter 600 for Offset. you add slope arrows to the shed roof. Next. add two new slope arrows. 2 Select the shed roof over the entrance of the house. m_Roofs. and select the middle segment of the slope defining line. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. expand Views (all). click Ref Plane. 8 Select the two vertical sketch lines.

1 In the Project Browser. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. the adjacent eave heights must align. ■ 16 Repeat steps 13 . m_Roofs. click Modify. When you sketch a hip roof. Move the cursor along the roof line until the midpoint displays. Begin the tail at the right reference plane.15 Sketch a slope arrow from the reference plane to the midpoint of the lower horizontal roof line: ■ Select the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the roof line to specify the location of the slope arrow tail. 21 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. . The head should snap to the midpoint of the line as in the previous steps. use the Attach Top/Base command to join the wall to the roof. “Aligning Roof Eaves” on page 788. you convert the gable roof over the garage to a hip roof and use the Align Eaves tool to adjust the eave heights.15 to add the second slope arrow. you can use the Align Eaves tool to align them. and then select it to specify the location of the slope arrow head. 3 On the Options Bar. 22 Click on the View toolbar to display the model. 2 Select the gable roof over the garage. 788 | Chapter 19 Roofs . select both slope arrows. 4 Select the two gable end lines (the lines without slope definition). Aligning Roof Eaves In this exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. enter 500 for Rise/1000. click Edit. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. expand Views (all). and then click OK. 18 Press CTRL. and move the cursor to place the arrow. expand Floor Plans. When eave heights differ. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 5 On the Options Bar. and click 19 Under Constraints. and double-click Garage Roof. select Slope for Specify. select Defines Slope. NOTE If the front wall is separated from the roof.rvt. 20 Under Dimensions.

16 Proceed to the next exercise. 10 On the Options Bar. Creating a Mansard Roof In this exercise. 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. enter 800 mm for Rise/1000. When aligning eaves. 13 On the View toolbar. select a method to align the eaves. you create a mansard roof by cutting off a hip roof at a specific level and adding another roof on top of it.6 With the two gable end lines selected. Notice how the overhang adjusts to match the eave height of the first eave. “Creating a Mansard Roof” on page 789. click Finish Roof. select Adjust Overhang to align the eaves by adjusting the overhang to match the eave height of the first eave. Creating a Mansard Roof | 789 . and save the exercise file with a unique name. The eave lines display with a dimension. 11 Select both the horizontal eave lines. click . you must select one eave to use to align both eaves. 12 On the Design Bar. on the File menu. click to display the model. This dimension is the height of the eave measured from the sketch plane. 14 If you want to save your changes. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. Next. under Dimensions. click Align Eaves. click Save As. on the Options Bar. 15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 9 Select the left vertical eave to use to align the eaves.

under Constraints. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. click Training Files. 790 | Chapter 19 Roofs . 3 Select the roof and.Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. expand Views (all). 6 On the View toolbar. click to display the model. click . and open Metric\m_Mansard_Roof. and double-click North. select Level 3 for Cutoff Level. click Modify.rvt. on the Options Bar. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. expand Elevations. 5 Click OK to cut the top of the roof off at level 3. you constrain the current roof so it does not rise above Level 3. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Notice the model has four defined levels: In the next steps.

click . and Soffits | 791 . expand Views (all). create a new roof that starts at level 3 and completes the mansard roof. under Dimensions. click to display the model with the complete mansard roof. After you create a roof. 10 On the Options Bar. Gutters. click Lines. and then select Defines slope. Creating Fascia. gutters. click Save As. and click OK. click . click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. Creating Fascia. 18 If you want to save your changes. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and select the remaining three lines. and soffits in Revit Architecture. and double-click Level 3. press TAB. expand Floor Plans. Gutters. gutters. 13 Select one of the roof cutoff lines. and Soffits In this lesson. you can easily create its fascia. 11 Select the four edges of the roof cutoff.Next. you learn how to create roof fascia. click Finish Roof. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. on the File menu. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 7 In the Project Browser. click Modify. and soffits. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 17 On the View toolbar. enter 750 mm for Rise/1000. 19 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 14 On the Options Bar.

3 Press CTRL. click Duplicate. enter Built-up Fascia. 5 On the Options Bar. you learn to use the Host Sweep command to create fascia on the roof of a condominium. click Training Files. select M_Fascia-Built-Up: 38 x 184mm x 38 x 286 for Profile. 8 In the Name dialog. 1 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. and click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\Families\Profiles\Roofs. 11 Select the top edge of the roof to place the fascia. select M_Fascia-Built-Up. under Construction.rfa and M_Gutter-Cove. and open Common\c_Condominium.rfa. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 792 | Chapter 19 Roofs . 12 Select all of the roof top edges to place the fascia around the building. 10 Move the cursor to the top edge of the roof. and click Open. click Edit/New to access the type properties of the fascia. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia. click . and click OK twice. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt.Creating Roof Fascia In this exercise.

select M_Gutter-Cove: 125 x 125mm for Profile. 7 Under Materials and Finishes. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 3 In the Properties dialog. Creating Gutters | 793 . and click OK three times. click . c_Condominium. and click OK. 5 Enter Cove Shape Gutter for Name. “Creating Gutters” on page 793. click Modify to exit the Fascia command.rvt. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. click in the Value field for Material.13 On the Design Bar. 9 Move the cursor to the bottom edge of the roof. 2 On the Options Bar. under Construction. click Duplicate. click Edit/New. you use the Host Sweep command to place a gutter at the bottom edge of the roof on a condominium building model. select Metal-Aluminum for Name. 10 Click to place the gutter. . click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Gutter. and then click 8 In the Materials dialog. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. Creating Gutters In this exercise.

11 Continue to add gutters to the other roof edges of the building model. click Pick Roofs. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click Roof ➤ Roof Soffit.rvt. You add the soffit underneath the roof of the condominium building model that you used in the previous exercise. 794 | Chapter 19 Roofs . 3 On the Design Bar. and double-click Roof. 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views. 4 Select the roof. Creating Soffits In this exercise. you learn how to place a roof soffit. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans. c_Condominium. “Creating Soffits” on page 794.

6 In the Project Browser. click Finish Sketch.5 On the Design Bar. click Join Geometry. 10 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 9 If you want to save your changes. Creating Soffits | 795 . expand Views (all). and double-click 3D. click Save As. Notice that the geometry of the roof and the soffit overlap. expand 3D Views. on the File menu. 7 On the Tools menu. 8 Select the roof. and save the exercise file with a unique name. and then select the soffit to join them.

796 | Chapter 19 Roofs .

Two schemes are provided by default: Gross Building and Rentable. Finally. you create area schedules and color fill plans based on the area schemes and plans. You then create area plans for each scheme as needed. You can edit the rentable scheme and create additional schemes. 797 . The first step in area analysis is the definition of area schemes. you learn how to use area analysis tools to define and label spatial relationships. Each area scheme can have multiple area plans.Area Analysis 20 In this tutorial.

These schemes define spatial relationships. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. click the Area Schemes tab. select 2 decimal places. select Millimeters. and click Room and Area. NOTE Images in this exercise reflect Imperial values. under Length. select m2 Click OK. and verify that Level 1 is the active view. If you are using metric units. expand Floor Plans. right-click in the Design Bar. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. View predefined area schemes 5 In the Project Browser. For Unit Suffix. and open Common\c_Area. 2 In the Project Units dialog. you create a color fill plan and area schedule based on the area schemes and plans. Set units of measurement to metric 1 On the Settings menu. For Unit Suffix. You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas. Creating Area Schemes and Plans In this exercise. click Format and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Units. 4 In the Project Units dialog. 7 In the Room and Area Settings dialog. Click OK. select mm. your values will be different. Rentable: Area measurements based on the standard method for measuring floor area in office buildings. For Rounding. In the final exercise. click Training Files. ■ ■ Gross Building: Total constructed area of a building. select Square meters. There are two schemes currently defined: Gross Building and Rentable. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area.Using Area Analysis Tools In this lesson. expand Views (all).rvt. You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas. 798 | Chapter 20 Area Analysis . In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Settings. click OK. TIP If the Room and Area tab is not visible. click Format and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Units. 3 Under Area. click Project Units.

or 0. it is not necessary in this exercise. click Yes to create the boundary lines automatically. you can create a copy of the area plan with subsequent changes to the original area plan duplicated in the copied plan. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. forming a closed loop. under Views (all). do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Gross Building for Type. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 799 . 11 In the New Area Plan dialog. click Area Plan. NOTE If the room area includes a room separation line. If you select No. Expand Area Plans (Gross Building). notice there is a new view type called Area Plans (Gross Building). 8 In the Room and Area Setting dialog. You can specify the boundary location to be used for room area calculations. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. ■ At system computed height: Generally defaults to or 1000 mm above the level. ■ ■ Verify that the scale is 1/8'' = 1'-0''. Click OK. ■ At specified height: You specify the height above the level that area is calculated. NOTE If you clear Do not duplicate existing views. 9 Click Cancel. you must manually add these boundary lines. 12 When the informational dialog displays. Create a gross building area plan 10 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 13 In the Project Browser.Although you can create new schemes that are based on the Rentable scheme. You can specify the height where the room area is calculated. area boundary lines are automatically placed on the exterior walls of the building model. as well as selecting whether to have room volumes calculated automatically. click the Room Calculations tab. the system-computed height defaults to the level. When you select Yes in this dialog.

you create a new area plan for rentable space. An area is represented by two crossed reference lines. 17 In the New Area Plan dialog.14 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. The area reference lines are for design purposes only and do not print. rather than the area tag. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. Create a rentable area scheme and plan 16 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Rentable for Type. Click OK. A room tag measures the area enclosed within the room-defining walls at the boundary location specified in Room and Area Settings. To modify the area. You add and use area boundary lines to define the office areas. 18 Click Yes to automatically define the area boundary lines. NOTE The Area command is used to create and tag new areas. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. you must select one of the reference lines. NOTE An area tag measures area based on the area plan boundary lines. 15 Click in the middle of the room on the lower left corner of the building model to place the tag. common areas. Next. 800 | Chapter 20 Area Analysis . click Area Plan. and store area. click Area. The Area Tag command is used to tag existing areas.

click inside the middle of the room to place the tag. If you do not select this option.Notice that the area boundary lines are on the inner face of the exterior walls. When you pick the walls. When you add area boundary lines. the area boundary lines do not update automatically. 22 Select all the interior walls by clicking them one at a time. 19 Zoom out until you can see the entire building model. 23 On the Design Bar. you can select the option "Apply Area Rules" so that the area boundary lines adjust to the area type. click Area Boundary. click Area. the area boundary lines are placed on the face of the glass. NOTE The area lines follow some of the windows hosted by the exterior wall. 24 In the upper left corner of the building model. verify that Pick Lines and Apply Area Rules are selected. you can either draw them or pick them. Notice that there is a new view type called Area Plans (Rentable). Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 801 . Expand Area Plans (Rentable). if the window glass is greater than 50% of the wall height. Although the rule for these lines is to follow the inside face of the wall. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. 21 On the Options Bar. Add area boundary lines 20 On the Design Bar.

30 Add the area to the room on the lower left corner of the building model. click . 27 On the Options Bar. click . 32 On the Options Bar. and click to select the area. 31 On the Design Bar. click Modify and select the area. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Tenant 1 for Name. Click OK. place the cursor over the Area Tag and press Tab until Area displays in the status bar. Select Office area for Area Type. 26 Select the area you added to the room in the upper left corner of the building model. 802 | Chapter 20 Area Analysis . 29 On the Design Bar. click Area. 28 In the Element Properties dialog.25 On the Design Bar. NOTE If you have difficulty selecting the area. click Modify.

In the Element Properties dialog. 34 Using the techniques learned in previous steps. 35 Add an area to the building model core. enter Core for Name. Click OK. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Circulation for Name. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Tenant 2 for Name. Select Office area for Area Type. and select Store Area for Area Type. and Tenant 4 in the lower right. add an area in the common space to the right of the double doors hosted by the west exterior wall. Select Building Common Area for Area Type. Name the areas Tenant 3 and Tenant 4. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 803 . Tenant 3 should be in the upper right. 36 Add the last two areas to the two spaces on the right side of the building model.33 In the Element Properties dialog. and select Major Vertical Penetration for Area Type. Click OK.

38 Navigate to your preferred directory. the area boundary lines have adjusted to the new area type. 2 Move the cursor under the left corner of the building model. 804 | Chapter 20 Area Analysis . you used the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. NOTE This project is required in its current state if you intend to continue with the next exercise. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. Create a color scheme legend 1 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. In this exercise. click Color Scheme Legend. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans In this exercise. and click Save.rvt. In the next exercise. 37 On the File menu. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise.Notice that within the two store areas. and click to place the legend. name the project Area-in progress. click Save. You added and modified the area boundaries and applied area tags to define spaces.

Create an area schedule 4 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. select Areas (Rentable). 5 In the New Schedule dialog. The fields you selected in the Schedule Properties dialog are displayed as column headings within the schedule.3 When the dialog displays. under Category. 7 Under Available fields. 6 In the Schedules Properties dialog. 9 Click OK. 8 Add the fields Area and Name. click Schedule/Quantities. click the Fields tab. click OK to make the required visibility setting changes. select Area Type and click Add. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans | 805 .

806 | Chapter 20 Area Analysis .

you convert to the basic shell elements of the building model. In this tutorial. If you modify a massing face. and roofs. After you make building elements. At any time. floors. you can pick massing faces and make building model elements such as walls. Massing elements and building elements are not linked automatically. you can specify the view to display massing elements. You can create and modify the geometric shapes that aggregate to form the building model shell. After you create the basic geometric shape of the building model. You then modify the building model in both the massing view and the shell view to see how changes propagate throughout the project. 807 . or both. curtain systems.Massing 21 You can use massing tools during the initial design process to convey a potential design concept without the level of detail usually found in a project. you create a new building model using the various massing tools to add and cut mass. building elements. you then need to update the building face.

right-click anywhere over the Design Bar. you create the basic geometric shape of the building model using various massing tools. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. under Floor Plans. and open Metric\m_Massing_Start.Using Massing Tools In this lesson. the building model uses those element types to define the walls. and roof types so that when you convert the massing elements to shell elements in the final exercise. floor. 4 Click OK in the Name dialog to accept the default name Mass 1. Adding a mass element 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model In this exercise. and floors.rvt. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. TIP If the Massing tab is not available on the Design Bar. 3 Click OK in the Show Mass mode informational dialog. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. you create the basic geometric shape of a building model by adding solid and void extrusions. 5 On the Design Bar. 808 | Chapter 21 Massing . In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. and cutting geometry. click Create Mass. You assign the default wall. roofs. and click Massing. under Views (all). The Design Bar title changes to Mass. sweeps.

under Floor Plans. double-click Level 1. 10 In the Materials dialog. click Lines. 18 Place the cursor in the drawing area on an edge of the existing form so that the edge is highlighted. This means the sketch line is placed 1550 mm from the position you pick with the cursor. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. click Lines. and click OK. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 809 . click . click Finish Sketch. 8 On the Design Bar. on the Options Bar. enter 25000 for Extrusion End. 15 On the Design Bar. click the Value for Material. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. and click 17 On the Options Bar. 13 On the View toolbar. and click OK. and click 7 Sketch the shape as shown using the exact values. under Constraints. 16 On the Sketch Design Bar. Watch the Status Bar in the lower-left corner of the screen to be sure you are highlighting the Form : Extrusion : Shape Handle. 12 On the Design Bar.6 On the Sketch Design Bar. 19 Click the edges of the form to create sketch lines as shown. select Mass (Opaque) for Name. under Views (all). TIP You may want to dimension and constrain the lines to maintain the exact dimensions. Create next extrusion form 14 In the Project Browser. under Materials and Finishes. on the Options Bar. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. and then click . enter 1550 mm for the Offset. click Extrusion Properties.

21 In the Element Properties dialog. The second form is on top of the first form. 28 In the Work Plane dialog. 30 Click to select the face. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Blend. select Pick a plane. and click OK. 20 On the Design Bar. click Extrusion Properties. click Finish Sketch. 22 In the Materials dialog. select Mass (Transparent) for Name. under Views (all). 810 | Chapter 21 Massing . double-click West.Be sure to click to the inside of the extrusion. highlight the larger form. TIP If necessary. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 29 In the drawing area. Continue creation of next massing form 26 In the Project Browser. enter 25000 for Extrusion Start and 27500 for Extrusion End. click the Value for Material. 27 On the Design Bar. under Materials and Finishes. 25 In the Project Browser. double-click {3D} to see the results. and click OK. press TAB to highlight the entire face. 24 On the Design Bar. and then click . under Views (all). under Constraints. and click OK.

and click on the Options Bar. you draw a sketch line that acts as a construction line to create an arc. 37 Sketch the arc as shown with the top of the arc snapping to the top of the construction line. and click Arc passing through three points from the menu. click the arrow next to the drawing options. The triangle indicates that the cursor is at the midpoint. and click to select the line start point. Next. click . Sketch the blend base 32 Select the top of the larger extrusion as shown. 35 Sketch a line 6000 mm up as shown. TIP If you do not see this option.31 On the Sketch Design Bar. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 811 . 34 Place the cursor at the midpoint of the sketch line as shown. click . 36 On the Options Bar. click Lines. 33 On the Options Bar.

and delete the vertical construction line. 40 On the Edit toolbar. click 46 Sketch the horizontal line as shown. 45 On the Design Bar.38 On the Design Bar. Sketching the blend top 43 On the Design Bar. 812 | Chapter 21 Massing . 41 Click the cursor at the midpoint of the horizontal sketch line as shown. 47 On the Options Bar. . click 48 Create an arc as shown. click Modify. on the Options Bar. double-click East. 39 Select the arc and the horizontal line. . click . click Lines and. click Edit Top. under Views (all). 42 Move the cursor straight up and click at the top horizontal line of the smaller extrusion as shown. 44 In the Project Browser. under Elevations (Building Elevation).

50 In the Element Properties dialog. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the resulting building model. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model. you created two extrusions and a blend that form the basic geometric shape of the building model. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model | 813 . Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model In this exercise. click . In the next exercise. 53 Proceed to the next exercise. verify that Mass (Opaque) is selected for Material and that -92000 is specified for Second End. click Finish Sketch. 51 On the Design Bar. click Blend Properties. and click OK. In this exercise. 52 On the View toolbar.49 On the Design Bar. you use a void extrusion to cut geometry from one of the massing shapes you added in the previous exercise. you use the massing tools to cut geometry from the shapes you have created.

7 Using the same technique. 814 | Chapter 21 Massing . on the Options Bar. click Lines and. snap the corners to the intersections. click Finish Sketch.Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 5 Place the cursor near the left edge of the massing element so that the edge is highlighted. 2 In the drawing area. on the View Control Bar. place three more reference planes 15000 mm apart from left to right. 13 Under Constraints. click Ref Plane. click and select Chain. as shown. 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. you specify the intersection of the reference planes and the top and bottom edges of the massing element. click and enter 15000 for Offset. 14 Click OK. 4 On the Options bar. 11 Sketch two additional void extrusions as shown. under Views (all). and then click Hidden Line. click Void Form ➤ Void Extrusion. and 0 for Extrusion Start. 12 On the Design Bar. click Extrusion Properties. and place the first reference plane 15000 mm to the right. m_Massing_Start. When sketching each extrusion. When sketching the void extrusions in the steps that follow. click NOTE If the file is currently in shaded mode. and sketch the first void extrusion as shown.rvt. Sketch extrusion voids 8 On the Design Bar. enter 12000 for Extrusion End. 10 Enter SI for intersection snap. 9 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. Add reference planes 3 On the Mass tab of the Design bar. 6 Place another reference plane 15000 mm to the right of the first reference plane. These reference planes act primarily as sketching aids. 15 On the Design Bar. select the mass.

you cut voids through an extrusion you added in the first exercise. 19 Save the file as m_Massing_Complete. 12000 mm for Height. Finally. you use the Join Geometry command to join several instances of the mass elements. and click OK. click Training Files. enter 15000 mm for Width. click Family Types. and open Metric\Families\Massing\Box. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and 18000 mm for Depth. click Finish Mass.16 On the View toolbar. you create new family types from a mass family file. Creating New Mass Family Types In this exercise. under Other. you open a predefined mass family file and create new types from it. You place several instances of the mass families into the project.rfa. In this exercise. click New. click Save As. 3 In the Name dialog. Creating three new family types 1 On the Design Bar. 17 On the Mass Design Bar. click . Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Using Mass Family Files in a Project In this lesson. enter 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm for Name.rvt. 4 In the Family Types dialog. 18 On the File menu. You then load that mass family file and others into a project. Using Mass Family Files in a Project | 815 . 2 In the Family Types dialog. and click Apply.

you opened a mass family file and created three new types of this family file. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click OK. Loading and Placing New Mass Families In this exercise. 11 Save the file as Box-Training. 18000 mm for Height.rfa. and click Apply. click Save As. and open Metric\m_Massing_In-place. click on the View toolbar to show the massing model. 6 Enter 68000 mm for Width. 11000 mm for Height. You also load other existing mass families and place them. and click Apply. 7 Click New and enter 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm for Name. 10 On the File menu. In this exercise. and click OK. 816 | Chapter 21 Massing . click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and 9000 mm for Depth.rvt. you load and place the new family types that you created from the previous exercise. and 6000 mm for Depth. 9 Click OK. 8 Enter 46000 mm for Width.5 Click New and enter 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm for Name. 1 If not already selected. TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model.

11 Select the box. and open the Metric\Families\Massing folder. select Rotate after placement. select the triangle. Arc Dome.2 In the Project Browser. 22 Place the cursor in the drawing area. Loading and Placing New Mass Families | 817 . 5 In the left pane of the Open dialog. double-click Site. 23 On the Options Bar. 15 Place 3 of these box families on the larger box family as shown. click Modify. and Triangle. select Triangle: 15000 x 45000 x 10500. 12 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material instance parameter. 13 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 17 Press CTRL. 14 In the Type Selector. and click to place the mass. click Place Mass. under Floor Plans. and click OK twice. and click . select the 3 boxes. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 8 In the Type Selector. click Modify. 7 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. and click . 21 On the Options Bar. 10 On the Design Bar.rfa. click Place Mass. and use the Move command on the Edit toolbar to place the triangle as shown. 3 On the View Control Bar. click Place Mass. 25 In the drawing area. 9 Place the box mass family on the in-place mass family as shown. 18 Specify Mass (Opaque) for the Material instance parameter. and click OK twice. enter 90 for Angle. under Views (all). 16 On the Design Bar. select Box-Training: 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm. 19 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 24 On the Design Bar.rfa. click Modify. 20 In the Type Selector. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family.rfa family files. select Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm.rfa. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to accurately place the mass families. 6 Open the Box-Training. 4 On the File menu. click Training Files. Semi Barrel Vault.

You also loaded other existing mass families and added them to the building model. click Place Mass. and click . click . 28 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. Notice that the triangle and the box masses that you just placed all overlap. 31 Select the box and click . In the next exercise. 34 On the View menu. 29 In the Type Selector. In this exercise. 27 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material instance parameter. and click OK twice. click Orient ➤ Northeast. you join these mass elements.26 Select the triangle. 818 | Chapter 21 Massing . and click OK twice. you loaded and placed the new family types that you created in the previous exercise. select Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm. 33 On the View toolbar. 32 Specify Mass (Opaque) for the Material instance parameter. 30 Place the box mass family as shown.

Joining Mass Elements | 819 . you join and modify the mass elements you placed from the previous exercise. NOTE When you join geometry.Joining Mass Elements In this exercise. Join geometry 1 On the View toolbar. the first mass element selected cuts volume from any subsequently selected mass element. and then press ESC to see the result. . 4 Select the triangle. 3 Select the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm mass element as shown.rvt file. click 2 On the Tools toolbar. click . Dataset ■ Continue using the m_Massing_In-place.

under Views (all). under Floor Plans. 11 Drag the cursor down to create a vertical axis of reflection as shown. and snap to the midpoint of the edge. TIP Pressing SHIFT while dragging the cursor locks the axis orthogonally. Mirror the modified mass element 7 With the smaller box still selected. click for Axis. 820 | Chapter 21 Massing . click 8 On the Options Bar. on the Edit toolbar. 6 Select the right edge of the Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm and drag it to the left edge of the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm as shown. 10 Click to select the mirror axis start point.Modify existing massing elements 5 In the Project Browser. 9 Position the cursor over the upper edge of the middle box. double-click Site. enter SM.

click 14 On the Tools toolbar. 16 Repeat for the other instance of the modified mass element and the triangle. Joining Mass Elements | 821 . 15 Select one instance of the modified Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm first. In this exercise. 17 Press ESC to see the result.12 Click to mirror the existing massing element. click . you joined mass elements together. Join geometry 13 On the View toolbar. The first selected mass element cut geometry from the subsequently selected mass element. and then select the triangle. You also modified and mirrored a mass element before joining its geometry with that of another element. .

You add mass elements to design options to experiment with different versions of the design.Using Mass Elements with Design Options In this lesson. 11 Place a semi barrel vault where shown. Placing semi barrel vaults 6 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 5 In the Project Browser. You then switch between different design options to get different versions of the design. click Toolbar ➤ Design Options. clear Curved. under Views (all). 1 On the Design Bar. click Modify. and then click OK. Mass Elements in Design Options In this exercise. 10 On the Options Bar. enter 90 degrees for Angle. you place the mass elements from the previous exercise into Design Options. 4 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. double-click Site. select Sloped (primary). under Floor Plans. 2 On the Window menu. 9 Place the cursor in the drawing area and click to place the mass. click Place Mass. select Rotate after placement. you continue using the same file from the previous lesson. Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_In-place. 8 On the Options Bar.) 3 On the Design Options toolbar. (If Design Options is already selected. You then make one of the design options the primary one for the model. 7 In the Type Selector. select Semi Barrel Vault: 10000 x 15000 x 7500. do not clear the check mark. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to place the mass precisely.rvt. 822 | Chapter 21 Massing . click . and select the triangle mass element.

select the three arc domes. 16 On the View Control Bar. and click Wireframe. and click . and click OK twice. Placing arc dome mass elements 17 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. click . click Place Mass. 14 In the drawing area. under Elevations. 13 On the Design Bar. 23 In the Project Browser. select the 2 semi barrel vaults. 20 On the Design Bar. 15 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material property. and click OK twice. select Arc Dome: 6000R x 2750H. and click . double-click North. click Modify. Mass Elements in Design Options | 823 . 21 In the drawing area. 22 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material property. 18 In the Type Selector. click Modify. under Views (all). TIP Use the snap control lines to assist in placing the domes.12 Place another semi barrel vault as shown. 19 Place 3 arc domes as shown.

move the cursor over shapes in the drawing. click Visibility/Graphics. and watch the status bar. 30 On the View menu. under Views (all). 32 Click the value for Design Option. 824 | Chapter 21 Massing . click to select each of the arc domes and semi barrel values. and click Wireframe. 29 In the Project Browser. 28 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. clear Sloped. TIP To find the correct shapes. 25 Move the three arc domes to the position shown. 27 On the Design Options toolbar. Create a Design Option set 26 Select the 3 arc domes and the 2 semi barrel vaults.24 On the View Control Bar. under 3D Views. click . and click OK. click . and click OK. 31 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. It will indicate when you locate an arc dome or semi barrel vault. While pressing CTRL. double-click {3D}. select Curved. click the Design Options tab. select Curved from the Design Option menu.

click Make Primary.rvt. In this exercise. you use building component creation tools to make building components from mass faces. and open Metric\m_Massing_Building_Components. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements In this lesson. click Training Files. 34 In the Design Options dialog. under Option. click Save As and save the file as m_Massing_Design_Options. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 825 . you pick massing faces to create walls. select Curved and. you placed mass elements into Design Options.rvt. 36 On the File menu. In the left pane of the Open dialog.You can now see the shapes that are part of the curved design option. 33 On the Design Options toolbar. 35 Close the warning that displays. Because it is likely that your client prefers the design option with curved shapes. Creating Walls by Picking Faces In this exercise. You then switched between different design options to get different versions of the design. click . you can make it the primary option. and click Close.

7 Place the cursor in the drawing area and select the face of the in-place mass family as shown. click Wall by Face. 826 | Chapter 21 Massing . Creating walls 4 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar.Brick on CMU. 3 On the View menu. 10 Select all the faces shown in red. The southeast wall of the mass model is now Brick on CMU. click Orient ➤ Southeast. double-click Level 3. select Basic Wall: Exterior .1 In the Project Browser. click . under Views (all). 2 On the View toolbar. and select Wall Centerline for Loc Line. 8 In the Project Browser. 6 On the Options Bar. click Wall by Face. under Views (all). TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model. 9 On the Design Bar. 5 In the Type Selector. click to show the massing model. double-click {3D}. under Floor Plans.

under Views (all). 12 On the Design Bar. 15 On the Design Bar. click Wall by Face. 16 In the Type Selector. 14 In the Project Browser. select Curtain Wall : Storefront.NOTE If a Warning dialog is displayed. under Floor Plans. alerting you that the highlighted walls overlap. under Floor Plans. under Views (all). double-click Level 5. 13 Select the face indicated by the arrow as shown. Creating Walls by Picking Faces | 827 . click Wall by Face. 17 Select the 3 faces shown in red. ignore the warning and continue selecting wall faces. 18 Select all the faces shown in red. double-click Level 1. 11 In the Project Browser.

click . click Wall by Face. 22 Select all the faces shown in red. and click Edit Profile on the Options Bar. double-click Level 9. If desired. Creating Floors by Picking Faces In this exercise. 19 In the Project Browser. you pick massing faces to create floors. under Floor Plans. 23 Open the 3D view to see the results. You can then edit the profile to clean up the overlapping geometry. under Views (all). 828 | Chapter 21 Massing . 20 On the View Control Bar. In this exercise. you picked several massing faces and created both basic walls and curtain walls. you can select the overlapping curtain wall.You can ignore the warnings about walls overlapping. and click Wireframe. 21 On the Design Bar.

and click OK. 1 In the Project Browser. Creating floors 5 Select the in-place mass family Mass 1. 3 On the Model Categories tab. click Floor Area Faces. 7 In the Floor Area Faces dialog. clear Curtain Panels. under Views (all).Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. 6 On the Options Bar. 2 On the View menu. click Visibility/Graphics.rvt. 4 Click OK. double-click {3D}. and Walls. Creating Floors by Picking Faces | 829 . select all levels. Curtain Systems.

and select the three 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements and the mirrored 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box masses as shown. 12 In the Floor Area Faces dialog. 830 | Chapter 21 Massing . select Levels 1-4. 9 On the View menu. 10 Press CTRL.8 On the Design Bar. and click OK. click Orient ➤ Northeast. click Floor Area Faces. click Modify. 11 On the Options Bar.

23 On the View toolbar. 14 On the Options Bar. 19 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 15 Press CTRL. 18 In the Project Browser. verify that Select Multiple is selected. and click OK. clear Exclude Options. 22 On the Options Bar. 21 Drag a pick box over the entire model to select all the floor area faces. 17 In the Floor Area Faces dialog. and select the semi vault barrel mass elements and the 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm box mass element as shown. click Modify. 16 On the Options Bar. select Level 1. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 1. Creating Floors by Picking Faces | 831 . click Floor Area Faces. click Floor by Face.13 On the Design Bar. under Views (all). 20 On the Options Bar. click . click Create Floors.

double-click Mass Schedule. you pick massing faces to create roofs. you created floors by first creating floor area faces and then picking those faces to create floors.24 In the Project Browser. 832 | Chapter 21 Massing . In this exercise. under Schedules/Quantities. Creating Roofs by Picking Faces In this exercise. You then viewed a massing schedule that listed the gross floor area of each mass in the model. This shows you the gross floor area of each mass.

click Create Roof. double-click {3D}. select Basic Roof : Generic . Creating roofs 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. click Roof by Face. and also on the top faces of the 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box mass elements. click Create Roof. 6 Create the same roof on the remaining 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. 5 On the Options Bar.400mm. NOTE Each time you select a face on an instance of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element family. 4 In the Type Selector.rvt. 1 In the Project Browser.Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. under Views (all). This creates the roof and lets you pick another face to create a new roof. Creating Roofs by Picking Faces | 833 . 3 Select the top face of the left 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element as shown.

7 With the Roof by Face command still selected. select Curtain Panels. 834 | Chapter 21 Massing . 11 On the View menu. 12 Click the Model Categories tab. and Walls. click Create Roof. you created roofs by picking faces of massing families. you create curtain systems by picking non-planar massing faces. Curtain Systems. In this exercise. and then click OK. 9 On the Options Bar. Creating Curtain Systems In this exercise. 8 Select the left semi barrel vault mass element. 10 Repeat these steps to create a sloped glazing roof on the other semi barrel vault mass element. click Visibility/Graphics.Your model should now look as shown. select Sloped Glazing in the Type Selector.

2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 3 In the Type Selector.rvt.Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. under Views (all). double-click {3D}. 4 On the Options Bar. click Create System. click Curtain System by Face. be sure that Select Multiple is selected. Creating Curtain Systems | 835 . select Curtain System: 1500 x 1500mm. 6 On the Options Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. and select both halves of the left arc dome mass element as shown. 5 Press CTRL.

836 | Chapter 21 Massing .7 Repeat the same steps for the two other domes. 8 With the Curtain System by Face command still selected. select the blended form on the in-place mass.

you create curtain systems by picking non-planar massing faces. click Create System. Editing Elements Created from Massings In this exercise.9 On the Options Bar. In this exercise. 10 Click Modify to exit the command. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 837 . you created curtain systems on non-planar faces.

Next. Curtain Systems. click Duplicate. clear Curtain Panels.rvt. and Walls. and click OK. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 30000 for Width. and click OK. Roofs. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. 9 In the Element Properties dialog.Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. 838 | Chapter 21 Massing . under Floor Plans. and then click OK. 4 Select the box mass family as shown and click . double-click Site. 7 Enter Larger Size for Name. Floors. 2 On the View menu. click Edit/New. 3 On the Model Categories tab. click OK. you resize one of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. click Visibility/Graphics. 1 In the Project Browser. under Views (all).

click Modify. 13 Use the Move tool to position the box and dome families as shown. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 839 . 12 Drag a selection box over the box family and the dome family.10 On the Design Bar. 11 On the Options Bar. 14 Open the 3D view to see the result. clear Exclude Options.

TIP To select the curtain wall. 17 On the Options Bar. 18 In the Exclude Hosts dialog. press TAB several times until the Status Bar indicates you are highlighting the Walls : Curtain Wall : Storefront.The curtain system is no longer aligned with the dome family. you remake several of the building elements to fit to the new size of the massing family. 15 In the Project Browser. click OK. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 1. 19 On the View toolbar. under Views (all). 16 Zoom in to the upper right-hand portion of the model and select the three walls shown. remember that there are two curtain walls of this type that are overlapping here. you want to select the smaller one. 840 | Chapter 21 Massing . click Remake. In the next steps. click . Also.

Editing Elements Created from Massings | 841 . 20 Select the roof as shown. click Remake.TIP If you temporarily hide one of the resized walls. 21 On the Options Bar. you will notice that Revit Architecture resized the floors.

rvt. 1 Open the 3D view. you changed the size of an existing mass family. and click Remake.22 Select the arc dome curtain system. 842 | Chapter 21 Massing . you switch the visibility of the view between the massing elements and the model (shell) elements. Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. In this exercise. You then modified building elements to resize with the new mass family. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility In this exercise.

5 On the View menu.Massing only. 9 Select Mass. 4 Rename the view 3D . 6 On the Model Categories tab. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility | 843 . 7 Clear one of the check boxes. The 3D view now shows only the building shell. right-click on the 3D view. 8 Click None to clear the selection. click Visibility/Graphics. and click OK.Turn off massing 2 Click on the View toolbar to turn off massing. Now you create a 3D view that shows only the massing. click All to select all categories. 3 In the Project Browser.

844 | Chapter 21 Massing . you can continue adding additional Revit modeling components. You might create the model shown. you switched the visibility of the 3D view to show either the building shell or the mass model. to the building shell. such as columns and an extruded roof.In this exercise. If desired. This concludes the massing tutorial.

This functionality ensures consistency within and across projects. In this tutorial. you create a model group for a typical kitchen. Modifications to the nested group are automatically included in the host group. place. You can also nest groups within other groups. By grouping objects.Grouping 22 Using the grouping functionality in Revit® Architecture 2008. 845 . and modify repetitive units. Saving a group to a library gives you the ability to share the group with other team members working on the same project. and all new instances that you place contain the modifications. It also gives all those with access to the library the ability to load any group from the library into their project drawing. you not only simplify their placement. when you make changes to a single instance of a model group. creating a library of groups for your office can reduce the amount of work needed to create. all instances in the building model are updated. Because existing groups can be duplicated and then customized for another purpose. and then you nest the kitchen in a 2 bedroom condominium unit group. For example. or with those working on a different project. you can create reusable entities that represent layouts common to many building projects. you also simplify the modification process.

expand Views (all). click Training Files.Creating. you can place instances of the group in the building model using various methods. and rotate the other instance to modify the layout position. you add the new model group to a previously created group. you create a model group for a typical kitchen for a condominium unit. You create the group by selecting drawing objects and grouping them as a single entity. The new group is considered nested within the host group. and is contained in every instance of the host group that you place in the building model. hotel rooms. Create a group for the typical kitchen layout 1 In the Project Browser. Examples of the types of units for which groups are intended include condominium units. and double-click First Floor. the host group is also updated automatically. and open Metric\m_Groups-Condominium. expand Floor Plans. You mirror one instance of the group. and Nesting Groups In this lesson. When you make changes to a nested group. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 846 | Chapter 22 Grouping . You can also update all instances of a group in the building model by editing a single instance of the group and saving the changes. Creating and Placing a Group In this exercise. you learn how to use model groups to collect related elements to simplify placement of repetitive units. In the left pane of the Open dialog. After you create a model group.rvt. In another exercise. and typical office layouts. you place 2 new instances of the kitchen group in the floor plan. Modifying. In this exercise.

3 Draw a selection box around the kitchen. and click OK. 5 In the Create Model Group dialog. and zoom to the kitchen in the upper-left area of the floor plan. enter Typical Kitchen. 4 On the Edit toolbar. Creating and Placing a Group | 847 . click (Group).2 Enter ZR.

The objects are now grouped and can be placed in the drawing as a single entity. click Modify. 7 On the Design Bar. and drag it to the upper-right corner of the kitchen. Zoom flyout. 848 | Chapter 22 Grouping . Change the origin point for the group 6 In the drawing area. click Zoom To Fit. 8 On the View toolbar. select the center control for the group origin.

10 Zoom to the center of the floor plan. under Groups. expand Model. right-click Typical Kitchen. 11 Click in the upper-right corner of the stairwell to place a second instance. 12 On the Design Bar. Creating and Placing a Group | 849 . click Modify. and click the upper-left corner of the lower unit to place the kitchen group.Place instances of the group 9 In the Project Browser. and click Create Instance.

clear Copy. 16 Select the adjacent wall near the sink as the axis of reflection. 850 | Chapter 22 Grouping . The kitchen is now positioned correctly in the floor plan.13 Select the first instance of the Typical Kitchen group that you just placed. 14 On the Edit toolbar. 15 On the Options Bar. click (Mirror).

click (Rotate). 18 Click in the drawing area to the left of the kitchen. Creating and Placing a Group | 851 . and on the toolbar.17 Select the kitchen in the stairwell.

19 Click above the right area of the kitchen to rotate the placement. click Zoom To Fit. click Modify. 852 | Chapter 22 Grouping . 21 On the Zoom flyout. 20 On the Design Bar.

Modify visibility of elements in a group 1 Zoom in to the kitchen on the right above the stair. as shown.You should now have three instances of the Typical Kitchen group in your model: one with the original orientation. Save the dataset 22 On the File menu. When you finish editing.rvt. one mirrored. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. Modifying a Group In this exercise. and click Save. 23 Navigate to your preferred directory. all instances of the same group in the drawing are updated. and one rotated. Modifying a Group | 853 . click Save As.rvt. name the file m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. you make changes to an instance of a group. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress.

This element remains in the group but is not visible in the project view for this group instance. press TAB to highlight the wall. 5 Click (Exclude group member). press TAB. select the element. and click 4 Move the cursor over the door.2 Move the cursor over the wall to the left of the kitchen. NOTE To display an excluded element. 6 Move the cursor over the horizontal wall. press TAB. 3 Click (Exclude group member). and click to select the wall. 7 Click (Exclude group member). and click to select the door. and click to select it. (Include group member). 854 | Chapter 22 Grouping .

14 In the Type Selector. 13 On the Design Bar. Modifying a Group | 855 . 16 Click in the new wall on the left and on the right to place 2 sets of folding doors for a closet. Add elements for a unique condition 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click to draw a horizontal wall that extends to the left vertical wall.8 On the Design Bar. click Wall. 11 Click at the endpoint of the short vertical wall in the kitchen entrance. 12 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click Modify. select Bifold-4 Panel : 1220 x 2134mm. click Door. 10 In the Type Selector.127mm. clear Tag on Placement. move the cursor to the left. select Basic Wall : Generic . 15 On the Options Bar.

22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. All other elements in the model are grayed out.17 On the Design Bar. click Zoom To Fit. and click near the top corner of the wall to create an opening. select Opening ➤ Wall Opening. Zoom flyout. 24 Click near the bottom corner of the wall. The elements in this instance of the group remain displayed in their object style. the background color of the drawing area is pale yellow. click Modify. select the vertical wall to the left of the long counter top. click Edit Group. move the cursor up. In edit group mode. 18 On the View toolbar. 856 | Chapter 22 Grouping . Modify geometry of a group and have changes display in all group instances 19 Zoom in to the kitchen in the left area of the floor plan. 21 On the Options Bar. and the group editor toolbar initially displays in the upper left corner. 23 In the drawing area. 20 Select the Typical Kitchen group.

The kitchen group is then nested within the 2 bedroom unit group. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. under Constraints. for Unconnected Height. and click OK. all instances of the host group are updated to contain the nested group. When you nest the kitchen in the 2 bedroom unit. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. which acts as the host. created in an earlier lesson. you add the Typical Kitchen group. Add elements to an existing group 1 If necessary. 29 In the group editor toolbar. 26 Select the opening. enter 2134. and on the Options Bar. 27 In the Element Properties dialog.rvt. and the wall and folding doors for the closet. 30 Click File menu ➤ Save. in the Project Browser. to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. All instances of the Typical Kitchen are updated to reflect the change. under Floor Plans. enter 1000.25 On the Design Bar. double-click First Floor. click Finish. click Modify. Nesting Groups In this exercise. Nesting Groups | 857 . 28 For Base Offset. click Properties.

858 | Chapter 22 Grouping . 5 In the drawing area.2 Select the 2 Bedroom Unit group in the top area of the floor plan. click (Add to Group). 3 On the Options Bar. select the Typical Kitchen group. click Edit Group. 4 In the group editor toolbar.

You work with the attached detail group in a different way than you had previously worked with host and nested groups because attached detail groups require more manual manipulation. Working with Detail Groups In this lesson. Attached detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements that are associated with a specific model group. you add door tags to a group. Detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements. such as text. 9 Select the 2 bedroom group. 8 In the Project Browser.6 Press TAB. You create a detail group in the First Floor plan and add the group to the Second Floor plan of the building model. click Finish. and create an attached detail group containing the tags. In the next exercise. Notice that the Typical Kitchen and pantry are nested within the 2 bedroom group. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save. Working with Detail Groups | 859 . you work with groups in order to use them in the most efficient manner within and across projects. such as door and window tags. double-click Second Floor. 7 In the group editor toolbar. select the wall between the folding doors. and each of the bifold doors. and filled regions. under Floor Plans.

click Filled Region. click to draw a rectangular region. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. you sketch and annotate a rectangular filled region that represents an area of tiled flooring in front of the elevators in the building model. under Floor Plans. double-click First Floor. 4 On the Options Bar. 2 Zoom in to the stair area in the center of the floor plan. You can add the detail group to other views of the building model. 860 | Chapter 22 Grouping . 5 Click the upper-right endpoint below the elevators as the start point of the rectangle. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.Creating a Detail Group In this exercise. You then save the region and the text note as a detail group. Draw a filled region 1 In the Project Browser. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise.rvt.

and on the Design Bar. and select a point below the left elevator. Add a text note 8 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. A rectangular region with a diagonal cross hatch pattern is added in front of the elevator doors. 7 On the Design Bar. Creating a Detail Group | 861 .6 Move the cursor down and to the left. 12 Enter Tile. 11 Click below the filled region to end the leader and specify the text start point. 9 On the Options Bar. click Text. click to add an arc leader. click Finish Sketch. 10 Click in the filled region to specify the leader start point. click Modify.

enter Elevator Lobby Tile. select the instance of the Elevator lobby tile group. 18 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click (Group). 20 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 15 In the Create Detail Group dialog. 16 In the drawing area. 17 Move the origin of the group to the corner of the elevator shaft. as shown. double-click Second Floor. and click Create Instance. and click OK. Create a detail group 13 Press and hold CTRL.The text note with arc leader is added to the building model. and select the note and the filled region. 862 | Chapter 22 Grouping . under Groups. 14 On the Edit toolbar. Add a group instance to a different drawing view 19 In the Project Browser. expand Detail. right-click Elevator Lobby Tile.

click Modify 23 On the Zoom flyout. it cannot be added to a group in the same manner that a drawing component can be added. you must manually attach it to each instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. click to place the detail group. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. 22 On the Design Bar. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress.rvt. clear Leader. click Tag ➤ By Category. you add door tags to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. Because the detail group contains variables.21 In the drawing area. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Zoom To Fit. under Floor Plans. Using Attached Detail Groups In this exercise. double-click First Floor. 24 Click File menu ➤ Save. 3 On the Options Bar. Place door tags 1 In the Project Browser. and then use the door tags to create an attached detail group. Using Attached Detail Groups | 863 .

click (Group). and click OK. draw a selection box around the right area of the floor plan including the door tags. 864 | Chapter 22 Grouping . select Door Tags. 8 In the Filter dialog. click Check None.4 Place door tags in the original instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit. Create an attached detail group 6 In the drawing area. 9 On the Edit toolbar. click (Filter Selection). click Modify. as shown: 5 On the Design Bar. 7 On the Options Bar.

under Floor Plans. 13 Select the model group 2 Bedroom Unit. click Place Detail. select Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags. Using Attached Detail Groups | 865 . and view that Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags is attached. the doors are numbered based upon the order in which you placed each group. NOTE Component instance numbering is sequential. and click OK. 15 In the Attached Detail Group Placement dialog. 11 In the Project Browser. 14 On the Options Bar. double-click Second Floor. enter 2 Bedroom Door Tags.10 In the Create Model Group and Attached Detail Group dialog. and click OK. therefore. expand Groups\Model\2 Bedroom Unit. Door Tags are placed on the Second Floor instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. for Attached Detail Group Name. Place a detail group in another group instance 12 In the Project Browser.

In this case. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise.rvt. you save a group to a library so that you can use the group in a new project. for Create new. select 2 Bedroom Unit. 2 In the left pane of the Save Group dialog. Save a group to a library 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. click Modify. right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. verify that Same as group name is selected. browse to the Desktop. Load the group in a new project 4 On the File menu.16 On the Design Bar. you save a typical condominium layout to a library where it can be accessed by other team members for use in other projects. You can save a group as a Revit project file (RVT) if you are working in a project. Using groups from a library ensures consistency and increases productivity for projects that reuse similar typical layouts for repetitive units. you can then work with it in the context of the new project. accept the default template file. 5 In the New Project dialog. When you load the group from the library into a new project. and click Open. 3 For File name. click Desktop. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. or a Revit family file (RFA) if you are working in the Family Editor. and click Save. verify that Project is selected. click OK.rvt. and click Save Group. 7 In the Load File as Group dialog. 8 In the Duplicate Types dialog. You also convert the group instance to a linked file to replace the group with an alternative unit layout. under Groups\Model. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. click New ➤ Project. Saving and Loading Groups In this lesson. the file is saved as a Revit project file (RVT). 866 | Chapter 22 Grouping . Saving and Loading Groups In this exercise. This enables you to create a library of groups that can be shared with other team members and used on multiple projects.

click Training Files. expand Groups. When a group is converted to a link. and on the Options Bar. and open Common\c_2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. 15 In the Convert Group to Link dialog. explaining that duplicate types were found and the types from the new project will be used. or the group instance can be replaced with an existing linked file. Saving and Loading Groups | 867 . click Use Existing. and click Create Instance. 10 Right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. Convert group instance to a linked file 14 Select the group. and expand Model.rvt. click Link. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 12 On the Design Bar. 11 Click in the drawing area to place the group instance. either the selected group can be used to make a new linked file. Place an instance of the loaded group 9 In the Project Browser. click Modify. 13 Zoom in to the 2 Bedroom Unit group.A warning dialog is displayed.

click OK. click Bind. 21 In the Bind Link Options dialog. click Yes to replace the existing Typical Kitchen group with the alternate Typical Kitchen group. You can remove the linked file from the project by clicking Remove Link. 25 The linked file is converted to a new model group stored in the project. but the linked model file will still be loaded in the project. and click OK.17 On the Design Bar. select the linked Revit model. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. 868 | Chapter 22 Grouping . click Modify. 23 In the confirmation dialog. or you can remove it at a later time from the Manage Links dialog. expand Revit Links. 18 In the Project Browser.rvt file is added as a link to the project. Convert the linked model to a group 19 In the drawing area. 20 On the Options Bar. 24 In the message dialog. This message indicates that all instances of the linked model will be deleted from the project. 22 In the Duplicate Types dialog. click Remove Link. and the link is removed. verify that Attached Details is selected only. The 2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate.

you use the site tools in Revit Architecture 2008 to add and modify site components within a project. 869 .Site 23 In this tutorial.

In the final exercises. The scale of this view is 1 : 100. 4 On the Options Bar. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed. click Training Files. and open Metric\m_First_Project. enter an absolute elevation of 3000 mm. 3 On the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Views (all). In the second part of this exercise. Create a toposurface by adding elevation points 1 In the Project Browser. and walkways. you create a toposurface by manually placing elevation points in the site plan. You add property lines manually. Creating a Toposurface In this exercise. you add a building pad to the site. Using the first method. islands. and click Site. right-click in the Design Bar.Using Site Tools In this lesson. You add subregions to the area to define parking areas. click Toposurface. expand Floor Plans. After grading the topography to create a slightly elevated and flat surface. you use site tools to add and modify site components within a project. you add parking and planting components and create a parking space schedule. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 870 | Chapter 23 Site . The exercises are sequential and must be done in order. you import contour data from a DWG file and use it to create the project toposurface. and then modify the data. convert the data to a table. This project file was created using the default metric template. you create a toposurface using two different methods. click Point.rvt. You start by importing the site contour data and converting it to 3D contour data. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Site.

7 Add additional points to create a contour circle similar to the following illustration. Creating a Toposurface | 871 . 9 Add a concentric circle of 6000 mm elevation points inside the 3000 mm contour. Triangulation boundaries display only after you add the third elevation point.5 Click in the drawing area to specify a point. 6 Add two additional points to create a triangle. 8 On the Options Bar. enter an absolute elevation of 6000 mm. A toposurface must have at least three elevation points. The circle should be approximately 55000 mm wide. Use the following illustration as a reference.

and click OK. under Additional Contours. 11 On the Design Bar. under Increment. 15000 mm. 13 In the Site Settings dialog. click Site Settings. click Finish Surface. Try to add each circle concentrically inside the previously created circle. 10 Repeat the previous step for 9000 mm. enter 1500 mm. 12000 mm. 872 | Chapter 23 Site . Use the following illustration as a reference. 12 On the Settings menu. and 18000 mm absolute elevations.TIP Do not be concerned with the exact quantity or placement of the points.

click Yes. and double-click South. Click Yes when prompted to rename corresponding views. rename the level Base Site Elevation. and press ENTER. 18 In the Project Browser. 14 On the View toolbar. click Modify. Use imported contour data to create a toposurface 17 Select the toposurface and. on the Standard toolbar. 20 Zoom in around the Level 2 head. and press ENTER. Before importing the contour data. 16 On the View toolbar. under Views (all). click to delete it. 19 On the Design Bar. rename the level Basement. click Model Graphics Style. click the elevation value. modify the level names and elevations. 21 Click the Level 2 text. and press ENTER. 22 When you are asked if you want to rename corresponding views. 15 On the View Control Bar. Creating a Toposurface | 873 . expand Elevations (Building Elevation). enter 1000 mm. 23 Click the Level 1 text. and click Shading with Edges. click .This setting reduces the quantity of contour lines in the view. click and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles.

clear Current view only and choose Select for Layers. Under Import or Link. double-click Site. select Preserve colors. Under Layer/Level Colors. 29 Select the imported topography. You are immediately prompted to select the layers you want to import. and click OK. 31 On the Design Bar. 30 On the Edit menu. Until it is exploded. click Modify. it is considered an import symbol. and zoom out until you can see the entire topography within the view. click Training Files. click Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats.24 In the Project Browser. Click Open. 26 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. click Pin Position. 27 In the Select Layers/Levels to Import/Link dialog. 874 | Chapter 23 Site . under Views (all). This ensures the import symbol is not accidently moved. click Modify. clear layer 0 and layer C_bench_mark. under Floor Plans. Select the c_Import_Site file located in the Common folder. 25 On the File menu. 28 On the Design Bar.

Creating a Toposurface | 875 . click Visibility/Graphics. 33 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. When you select the import symbol. 38 In the Add Points from Selected Layers dialog. you are prompted to select the layer that will generate the elevation points. click Toposurface. clear C_INDX. and then click OK. click Use Imported ➤ Import Instance. 32 On the View menu. click the Annotation Categories tab. when the edges highlight. select it. clear Elevations.Notice the elevation symbols are displayed. 35 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. 34 Under Visibility. 36 On the Design Bar. 37 Place the cursor over the imported symbol and.

click and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. 40 On the View toolbar. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. 44 Navigate to your preferred folder. Using the second method.rvt. 876 | Chapter 23 Site . click . name the project Site-in progress. you sketch the property lines and then convert the sketch into survey data. 42 On the View toolbar. you create property lines by entering survey data into a table of distances and bearings. 45 Proceed to the next exercise.The import symbol is converted to elevation points and contours. “Adding Property Lines” on page 876. 41 Enter ZF to zoom to the extents of the image. and click Save. 39 On the Design Bar. Using the first method. Notice the change in this toposurface elevation is minor. click Finish Surface. Adding Property Lines In this exercise. click Save As. 43 On the File menu. this project file is required in its current state. you add property lines using two methods.

you can quickly create the shape by doing the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Sketch the rectangle first. click Property Line. Sketch property lines 1 In the Project Browser. If you have not completed the previous exercise. Using the 3-point Arc tool. add an arc line on the right. NOTE The weight of the sketch lines has been increased in the illustration for training purposes. click Lines. Adding Property Lines | 877 . 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. double-click Site.This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the project file in its current state. Click Modify. 4 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. Although you can use your preferred sketching method.rvt. click Lines. Site-in progress. select Create property lines by sketching. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. On the Design Bar. sketch the shape shown in the following illustration. do so before continuing. Select and delete the right vertical line. and click OK. 3 In the Property Line Creation dialog. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.

enter the following deed data for rows 1 through 4: ■ ■ ■ ■ to delete them. The property lines are displayed with a dash-dot line type on the topography. click 12 On the Design Bar. select Edit Table. click OK. when they highlight.6 On the Design Bar. 100000 S 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" W 100000 N 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" E 878 | Chapter 23 Site . 10 In the Property Lines dialog. on the Standard toolbar. 9 In the warning dialog. NOTE The values displayed in the Property Lines dialog depend on the exact dimensions and location of your sketch. 8 On the Options Bar. Create property lines using a table of distances and bearings 11 Select the property lines and. click Property Line. 14 In the Property Lines dialog. and click OK. 13 In the Property Line Creation dialog. 7 Move the cursor over the property lines and. click OK. informing you that converting a property line sketch to a table cannot be undone. select Create property lines by table of distances and bearings. 15 Starting in Row #1. A warning dialog is displayed. click Finish Sketch. select the lines. click Insert three times until there are four rows of deed data.

the visibility of the imported symbol needs to be turned off. notice a tag is now loaded for property line segments. 20 Click Load. Tag property lines 18 On the Settings menu. Adding Property Lines | 879 . click Training Files. the original DWG file remains visible in the view. click Visibility/Graphics. Before adding property line segment tags. 21 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click to place the property lines. 16 Click OK. 23 On the View menu. review your data entry and make necessary corrections. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Civil\M_Property Line Tag. This means there is no gap in the property lines.dwg and click OK.rfa. the distance that displayed under From last to first point now displays Closed. 25 Under Visibility. If the gap is not closed. and click OK. 19 In the Tags dialog.Notice that after you complete the last line. 22 In the Tags dialog. 17 Move the cursor over the topographic surface and using the following illustration as a reference. Even though you converted the symbol to elevations points and contours. The property lines are displayed at the tip of the cursor. click Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. clear the checkbox for c_Import_Site. scroll down the list of categories until you find Property Lines and notice there are no tags loaded for Property Line Segments. click the Imported Categories tab. 24 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog.

27 On the Options Bar.26 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. right-click in the Design Bar. 880 | Chapter 23 Site . You also modify the site settings so that the new subcategory is displayed at the specific elevation. In this exercise. click Save. 30 On the View Control Bar. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings In this exercise. In the final step. NOTE If the Drafting tab of the Design Bar is not visible. and click Shading with Edges. and click Drafting. 31 On the File menu. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. You created the second set of property lines directly from deed data and located it on the topography. you created two sets of property lines. this project file is required in its current state. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. you modify site settings and contour line visibility. click Model Graphics Style. you loaded and tagged the property line segments. The tags display more prominently in this view. clear Leader. click to place it. In the next exercise. 28 Zoom in and place the cursor over the center of the north property line. click Tag ➤ By Category. The first set you sketched and then converted into deed data. “Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings” on page 880. you create a new object style subcategory to mark a specific elevation. 29 Tag the three remaining property lines. When the tag displays at the tip of the cursor.

for Subcategory. specify the following settings for the Working Contour subcategory: ■ ■ ■ Verify that the Line Weights are 1.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. the new object style subcategory is displayed under Topography. Under Line Pattern. Under Range Type. select Topography. select a shade of Brown. 4 Under Modify Subcategories. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ Under Start. enter 1000. 10 Under Additional Contours.rvt. select Dash dot. under Contour Line Display. click Site Settings. enter the name Working Contour. 2 On the Settings menu. Site-in progress. and click OK. Under Line Color. select Working Contour. Create an object style subcategory for specific elevation 1 On the View Control Bar. and click Wireframe.0 mm. 3 On the Model Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. scroll down the list of categories and expand Topography. In the Object Styles dialog. click Object Styles. click New. 7 Click OK. Under Subcategory. select Single Value. Modify site settings 8 On the Settings menu. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings | 881 . specify an interval of 1000 mm passing through elevation 0. 5 In the New Subcategory dialog. 6 In the Object Styles dialog. 9 In the Site Settings dialog. click Model Graphics Style.

882 | Chapter 23 Site . displays on the topography only at the elevation you specified. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. parking areas. In this exercise. 12 On the File menu. parking areas. “Creating Topographic Subregions” on page 882. Click Yes when prompted to save changes. you create subregions in order to define roads. and islands. You then modified the site setting to distinguish a specific contour interval using this subcategory. Working Contour. Creating Topographic Subregions In this exercise. such as material. and islands. it merely defines an area of the surface where you can apply a different set of properties. click Close. The object style subcategory. you created a new object style subcategory for topography. you create topographic subregions to define roads. In the next exercise. Creating a subregion does not result in separate surfaces. The next exercise requires a new dataset.11 Click OK.

2 On the Design Bar. TIP You can either sketch the shape freehand or draw two perpendicular rectangles.Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Using the sketching tools on the Options Bar. click Training Files. Although the exact dimensions are not important.rvt. the vertical rectangle is approximately 19500 mm wide. sketch the shape highlighted in the illustration below. Sketch initial parking area 1 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. try to replicate the location and proportion. and use the fillet arc sketching tool to add the curved corner. click Lines. use the trim tool to create just one closed loop. The horizontal rectangle is approximately 7500 mm wide. and open Metric\m_Site. click Subregion. Creating Topographic Subregions | 883 .

click Finish Sketch. 8 On the Design Bar. under Materials and Finishes. and then click the down arrow to open the Material dialog. When you finish the sketch in a later step. select Site . 884 | Chapter 23 Site . click Shading with Edges. enter Parking for Name. the subregion will end at the edge of the defined topography. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. Notice that the left edge of the subregion overhangs the site topography. 7 In the Element Properties dialog.Tarmacadam for Name. under Identity Data. and click OK. Specify subregion properties for parking area 4 On the Design Bar. you may see fewer contour lines than in the images shown in this exercise. 6 In the Materials dialog. click the Value for Material.NOTE In the Metric dataset. and click OK. click Properties. 9 On the View menu.

NOTE Your values may differ depending on your sketch. The two additional parking areas in the top portion of the sketch must be at least 5500 mm deep to accommodate parking spaces. Mirror the arc line to create an exact duplicate. and click Hidden Line. expand Schedules/Quantities. 12 On the View Control Bar. Although you can select each toposurface region separately and apply different properties to each. As you create new subregions. You can create a toposurface schedule to report information regarding each toposurface region. TIP Add the two upper parking areas as rectangles. click Model Graphics Style. Modify the subregion 11 In the Project Browser. 15 Add new lines and modify the existing lines to create a boundary similar to the one shown in the following illustration. Creating Topographic Subregions | 885 . they display within this schedule. click Model Graphics Style. 18 In the Project Browser. 14 On the Options Bar.Tarmacadam. click Finish Sketch. 17 On the View Control Bar. click Edit Boundary.Notice that the new subregion uses the material Site . 16 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. the toposurface and its contour data remain one element. and double-click Topography Schedule. and click Shading with Edges. double-click Topography Schedule. and use the split and trim tools to clean up the sketch. Notice that the project area has increased. under Schedules/Quantities. double-click Site. 13 Select the subregion you created in the previous steps. This topography schedule uses a filter to omit unnamed topographic regions. Delete overlapping lines. Open the topography schedule 10 In the Project Browser.

Precise dimensions are not important at this time. under Schedules/Quantities. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. In this training project. double-click Topography Schedule. click Finish Sketch. and then click the down arrow to open the Material dialog. under Identity Data. Notice that the schedule has been updated with the new information. 21 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. 22 On the Design Bar. under Materials and Finishes. click Subregion. 27 In the Element Properties dialog.Add additional subregions 19 In the Project Browser. and click Shading with Edges. click Lines. additional subregions are required to create a more attractive parking area. 20 On the View Control Bar. 24 On the Design Bar. 886 | Chapter 23 Site . and click OK. 29 On the View Control Bar.Grass for Name. click Model Graphics Style. you apply different materials such as grass and concrete. 23 In the upper-right parking area. and click Hidden Line. Within each subregion. under Floor Plans. 28 On the Design Bar.Grass for Name. select Site . 26 In the Materials dialog. 30 In the Project Browser. double-click Site. use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the parking island shown in the following illustration. click Model Graphics Style. click Properties. click the Value for Material. and click OK. enter Island .

Grass. and apply the material Site . 35 On the Design Bar. and apply the material Concrete . Name the subregion Walkway. You must sketch each region separately. double-click Topography Schedule. click Subregion. 34 On the Design Bar. click Lines. Using the techniques learned in previous steps.Cast-in-Situ Concrete . 36 Use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the new concrete walkway shown in the following illustration. add the three additional subregions shown in the following illustration. Creating Topographic Subregions | 887 .walkway. double-click Site.31 In the Project Browser. Name each region Island . under Floor Plans. Notice that the schedule has been updated. under Schedules/Quantities. double-click Site. under Floor Plans. 32 In the Project Browser. Add the concrete walkway 33 In the Project Browser.Grass.

38 In the Project Browser. 888 | Chapter 23 Site .WARNING Subregions cannot intersect. 37 On the Design Bar. you must either edit the entire toposurface or split the toposurface. 39 On the File menu. Notice that the schedule has been updated. there is still only one toposurface. click Save As. under Schedules/Quantities. so you need to offset coincident lines between the subregions by 100 mm. double-click Topography Schedule. If you want to modify the elevation points of a particular subregion. NOTE Although several toposurface subregions now exist within this project. click Finish Sketch.

this project file is required in its current state.rvt.rvt. Modify toposurface phase assignment 1 In the Project Browser. Notice that the toposurface displays differently. “Grading the Toposurface” on page 889. Site tutorial-in progress. name the project Site tutorial-in progress. 5 On the Design Bar. “Using Phasing” on page 992. Click OK to set the subregion phase to match the toposurface. click Modify. you grade the toposurface to create a slightly elevated and flat parking area. double-click Site. under Phasing. Grading the Toposurface | 889 . 3 On the Options Bar. 2 Select the toposurface. click . and click OK. see the tutorial. and click Save. RELATED For more information regarding phasing. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. When you use the grading tool. A warning dialog is displayed. the existing topography is demolished and a new toposurface is created where you can edit the elevation points. under Floor Plans. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. select Existing for Phase Created. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. Grading the Toposurface In this exercise.40 Navigate to your preferred folder. The display settings are controlled by the phase filter. stating that subregions must have the same Phase Created parameter and the same Phase Demolished parameter as the host toposurface.

Delete elevation points 9 Draw a pick box outside the main parking area as in the following illustration.6 On the Design Bar. 890 | Chapter 23 Site . click Graded Region. 7 In the Graded Region dialog. select Copy Internal Points. The intent is to select all the elevation points inside and around the parking area. 8 Select the topographic surface. Make sure the pick box allows a significant buffer around the area. Copying internal points lets you delete only the points in the parking area without altering the remaining elevation points. and click Select and Edit.

11 On the View Control Bar. Notice the toposurface displays with different colors representing the different phases: existing. demolished. and click Hidden Line. and new. 12 Draw another pick box around the driveway and remaining parking area as in the following illustration. Grading the Toposurface | 891 . click Model Graphics Style.10 Press DELETE. 13 Press DELETE.

click . click . and click Shading with Edges. 16 Add elevation points outside the perimeter of the entire parking area and walkway as in the following illustration. click Finish Surface. and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. click Model Graphics Style. 17 On the Design Bar. The parking and walkway areas are now elevated and flat.Add new elevation points 14 On the Design Bar. Place the points until there are no contour lines crossing the parking area or walkway. 20 On the View toolbar. 18 On the View toolbar. 892 | Chapter 23 Site . 19 On the View Control Bar. 15 On the Options Bar. specify an Absolute Elevation of 5500 mm. click Point.

Only the components created in or assigned to the Existing phase display in this view. specify New Construction for Phase. Delete the demolished toposurface from the project 21 On the View menu. click View Properties. 24 On the View menu. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. This accounts for the red surface that you see in this view.rvt. this project file is required in its current state. it automatically cuts a hole in the toposurface and places it at the depth you specify. Only the graded topography displays. click View Properties. 23 Select the toposurface. 26 On the File menu. you create a building pad. because you assigned it to the Existing phase before grading.The phase filter for this view allows both the new and demolished surfaces to display. and click OK. “Adding a Building Pad” on page 893. and delete it. and click OK. nor can you add it without first adding a topographic surface. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. Adding a Building Pad In this exercise. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. Site tutorial-in progress. under Phasing. Adding a Building Pad | 893 . 25 In the Element Properties dialog. you can delete it. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. Therefore. When you add a building pad. A building pad is a toposurface hosted element and cannot be added to any other element. click Save. under Phasing. specify Existing for Phase. Because this toposurface is no longer required for this project. only the original toposurface displays.

3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. click Pad. sketch an approximate replica of the outline shown in the following illustration. double-click Site. 894 | Chapter 23 Site .Add a building pad to the project 1 In the Project Browser. If you have an existing building model. NOTE By default. click Lines. 2 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style. and click Hidden Line. the Pick Walls command is active. The building pad should border the concrete walkway on the right and the upper parking area. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. 4 On the Design Bar. you can pick the exterior walls to define the building pad.

Adding Site Components In this exercise.6 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. click 9 On the View toolbar. . click Model Graphics Style. click Save. 8 On the View toolbar. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. you add parking and planting components to the site surface. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. “Adding Site Components” on page 895. this project file is required in its current state. and click Shading with Edges. click building pad. Adding Site Components | 895 . 7 On the View Control Bar. . and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. Notice the new 10 On the File menu.

4 Zoom in on the upper parking area that borders the building pad and add a parking component to the area.rvt. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. and select the parking space. Site tutorial-in progress. 3 In the Type Selector. under Floor Plans. 5 On the Design Bar. click Parking Component. select M_Parking Space: 4800 x 2400mm .Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.90 deg. Add parking components 1 In the Project Browser. 896 | Chapter 23 Site . NOTE Make sure you place the parking space a slight distance above the building pad. 6 Use the flip arrows so it displays as shown below and move it toward the lower left corner of the parking area. double-click Site. click Modify.

and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles.7 Add 6 additional parking spaces to the right of the first space. under Floor Plans. double-click Site. 8 On the View toolbar. . click 9 On the View toolbar. click parking spaces. Notice the new Add planting components to the site 10 In the Project Browser. Verify that the spaces are horizontally aligned and the left edge of each space is aligned with the right edge of the previous space. Adding Site Components | 897 . 11 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. click Site Component. . TIP You could also use the Array tool to accomplish this task.

choose any tree type. and add a tree to each of the two round parking islands as shown below. 898 | Chapter 23 Site . click . 14 On the View toolbar.12 In the Type Selector. 13 Add some more trees outside the parking area as shown below.

NOTE Plants are displayed as simple geometry unless rendered. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. Site tutorial-in progress. click Tag All Not Tagged. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Tagging Site and Parking Components | 899 . 17 Proceed to the next exercise. you tag the planting and parking components that you added previously. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. this project file is required in its current state. Notice how the trees vertically attach to the toposurface. the landscape shown in the previous illustration has been rendered. click . under Floor Plans. In the following illustration. Tagging Site and Parking Components In this exercise. double-click Site. 16 On the File menu.15 On the View toolbar. Tag site components 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. “Tagging Site and Parking Components” on page 899. click Save.

click Hidden Line. 7 On the File menu. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Mark. Site tutorial-in progress. click Apply. Notice each is tagged with no instance mark. In the following exercise. select Parking for Category. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. Creating Parking Space Schedules In the final exercise of this tutorial. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. you create a parking schedule. and click OK. You can use a parking schedule to report the quantity and area of each type of parking space. and click Apply. NOTE Site components can also be numbered by clicking the tag number and changing the value. and click Add. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. you use a parking schedule to number the parking spaces. 5 On the View menu. 4 Under Available fields. 900 | Chapter 23 Site .rvt. 4 Select the line for the category Planting Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Planting Tag: Boxed. select the line for the category Parking Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Parking Tag: Boxed.3 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. click the Fields tab. click Schedule/Quantities. Create a parking schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. this project file is required in its current state. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and click OK. 6 Zoom in to the upper parking area and around the trees. click Save. “Creating Parking Space Schedules” on page 900.

number the first three spaces consecutively. under Views (all). This closes all the views except the parking schedule. and under Heading. 9 On the Window menu. under Space. select Type. click Tile. and click OK. click Save. Notice that the parking spaces in the Site plan update automatically. The parking schedule is displayed. and click Add. 8 Under Fields. This tiles the Site plan next to the parking schedule. enter Size. under Space. This allows you to know which space you are numbering.5 Under Available fields. enter Space. Creating Parking Space Schedules | 901 . select Mark. 6 Click the Formatting tab. 11 On the Window menu. select Type. 10 In the Project Browser. click Close Hidden Windows. zoom in around the upper parking lot where you previously added the parking spaces. 14 In the Parking Schedule. finish numbering the remaining spaces. and under Heading. 12 In the Site plan. Also notice that when you place the cursor in the parking schedule. double-click Site. the selected space highlights in the Site plan. 13 In the Parking Schedule. If necessary. under Floor Plans. 15 On the File menu. 7 Under Fields. you can resize the column width by dragging the column edges.

902 | Chapter 23 Site .

and beams to Level 1. 903 . you use the structural tools in Revit Architecture 2008 to create a building model skeleton.Structural 24 In this tutorial. columns. you create framing elevations and add structural braces to the building model. You begin by adding the structural walls. you copy the entire structure and use the paste-align command to add the structure to the three levels above it. After completing level 1. In the final lesson.

go to the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. If necessary. you import a DWG file into the Level 2 floor plan. you add structural walls to a project file where only the grid lines have been added. under Import or Link. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. You then sketch additional walls to which you add dimensions and constraints. Importing a DWG for Use as an Underlay In this exercise. 3 In the left pane of the Import/Link dialog. and double-click Level 2. click Training Files. specify the following: ■ Select Link (instead of import).Adding Structural Walls In this lesson.rvt. click Training Files. The DWG file contains walls that you trace in the next exercise to create the structural walls. 904 | Chapter 24 Structural . You use an imported DWG file as an underlay to trace the initial outline of the structural walls. and open Metric\m_Structural. and select Metric\m_Wall_Import. 2 On the File menu. Import the DWG file 1 Before importing the DWG file. under Views (all).dwg. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. verify that the Level 2 floor plan is open. 4 In the Import/Link dialog.

6 Under Positioning. This project file is required for all subsequent exercises in this tutorial. right-click in the Design Bar and click Structural. Sketching Structural Walls | 905 . you use the linked DWG file to trace the initial set of structural walls. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. “Sketching Structural Walls” on page 905. 7 Click Open. Sketching Structural Walls In this exercise. Display the Structural tab of the Design Bar 1 If the structural tab is not displayed. 8 On the File menu.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.■ ■ Select Current view only. The DWG file is displayed on the Level 2 floor plan. you imported a DWG file. This file is used in the next exercise. Select All for Layers. 9 Navigate to a folder of your choice and save the project as Structural_tutorial.rvt. 5 Under Layer/Level Colors. to trace the initial set of structural walls. After you trace the walls. and add the remaining structural walls to the building model. Structural_tutorial. and select Origin to origin. select Automatically place. select Invert colors. In this exercise. you turn off the visibility of the DWG file. click Save As.

First. and click to specify the wall endpoint.200mm. In the steps that follow. their Structural Usage parameter is automatically set to Bearing. click Structural Wall. In addition. you add a structural wall by specifying the depth of the wall. 4 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. select Basic Wall: Generic . click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region.Sketch structural walls by tracing the DWG 2 On the View menu. ■ ■ ■ Select Chain. 906 | Chapter 24 Structural . 6 On the Options Bar. 5 In the Type Selector. you sketch a chain of walls over the path highlighted in the following illustration. rather than the height. specify the following: ■ Select Depth. Select Finish Face: Exterior for Loc Line. Click . Structural walls differ from non-structural walls in several ways. 7 Begin the first wall by selecting the intersection of the upper left corner of the line chain. 3 Draw a zoom region around the upper set of lines. 8 Move the cursor over the top right intersection of the line. This requires the bottom of the primary view range to be set to the level below in order to see the walls as you sketch them.

click . 11 Move the cursor to the top of the line chain until a reference plane displays indicating the cursor is on a parallel plane with the slanted wall on the left. and click the next line intersection. and click to specify the next wall endpoint.9 Move the cursor downward to the next line intersection. 10 Move the curser to the right. Sketching Structural Walls | 907 . click Modify to finish the sketch. 12 On the Design Bar. and click to complete the chain of walls. 13 On the View toolbar.

TIP If necessary. and double-click Level 2. you can spin the model in a 3D view by clicking View tools to modify the 3D view. On the Options Bar. expand Floor Plans. in the View toolbar. Click each exterior line intersection in a clockwise direction. When you reach the endpoint on the lower right corner of the chain. Use the Dynamic 14 In the Project Browser. zoom in to ensure you select the intersection of the imported lines and grid C. notice that the wall options you used previously are still selected. ■ Begin the wall chain by clicking the lower left intersection where the end of the line chain adjoins grid C. 16 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 15 Zoom around the second chain of lines. click Structural Wall. 17 Using the bulleted steps below. ■ ■ 908 | Chapter 24 Structural . sketch a chain of walls over the path highlighted in the following illustration. expand Views (all).

clear m_Wall_Import. under Floor Plans.200mm. Click to create a three-point arc. click Modify to end the wall chain. 21 On the View menu. 26 On the Options Bar. click Visibility/Graphics.dwg and click OK. 23 Under Visibility. 22 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. ■ Sketching Structural Walls | 909 . click Structural Wall. 19 On the View toolbar. Sketch additional structural walls 24 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. specify the following: ■ ■ Clear Chain. click the Imported Categories tab. click . Select Wall Centerline for Loc Line. 25 In the Type Selector. Unselected categories are not visible in the referenced view. select Basic Wall: Generic . double-click Level 2. Turn off the DWG visibility 20 In the Project Browser.18 On the Design Bar.

29 Add a horizontal wall beginning at the midpoint of the left vertical wall as shown. click . 31 Add a vertical wall between the two horizontal walls as shown. 910 | Chapter 24 Structural . This is the left extent of the arc. ■ ■ ■ Select the endpoint of the left vertical wall. 30 Move the cursor to the right until it intersects with the slanted wall on the right.27 Follow the sequence of steps in the illustration below to add a 180 degree three point arc. Move the cursor upward and specify an arc radius of 180 degrees. 28 On the Options Bar. Select the right endpoint of the horizontal wall. This is the right extent of the arc.

Sketching Structural Walls | 911 . click the value. and press Enter. If it is not. 34 Select the horizontal wall. 33 Select the vertical wall you added in the previous step and make sure the temporary dimension between the wall and the centerline of the left vertical wall is equal to 1500 mm. click Modify. enter 1500.32 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. enter 1500. click the temporary dimension value between it and grid C.

click Structural Wall and on the Options Bar.35 Zoom around the upper set of walls as shown. In the steps that follow. 38 Draw the 1200 mm wall parallel to the adjoining wall as shown. 912 | Chapter 24 Structural . Create the final structural walls 37 Begin the first wall on the endpoint and wall centerline shown in the illustration below. Both walls are 1200 mm long. you create the final structural walls for the project. clear Chain. 36 On the Design Bar.

Structural_tutorial. In this exercise. click Modify. under Views (all). This project file is required. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. double-click Level 2. click Save. you dimension the structural walls and add an equality constraint to the dimension to keep the walls equidistant. you add dimensions and equality constraints to the walls. You then make minor modifications to their position. you added the remaining structural walls required for this building model. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. in its current state. 42 On the File menu. Dimensioning and Modifying Walls | 913 . Add an aligned dimension 1 In the Project Browser. Dimensioning and Modifying Walls In this exercise. 2 Zoom around the lower set of walls. After turning off the visibility of the linked DWG. Begin the wall at the top of the right vertical wall and draw it inward so that it is parallel with the wall you sketched in the previous steps. 41 On the View toolbar. click . Floor Plans.39 Create an additional 1200 mm wall as shown. In the next exercise. You also reposition the walls to see how they adapt to changes in the design. “Dimensioning and Modifying Walls” on page 913. 40 On the Design Bar. you used the DWG file to trace the initial set of structural walls.rvt. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.

Select Wall Centerlines for Prefer. 5 Move the cursor over the left vertical wall. 4 On the Options Bar. Select Entire Walls for Pick. After you select Entire Walls. 914 | Chapter 24 Structural . Create an equality constraint 7 On the Design Bar. In the Auto Dimension Options dialog. and click OK. select it. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. 6 Move the cursor to the left. select Intersecting Walls. click Modify.3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. the Options button becomes available. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Select . and when it highlights. click Dimension. and click to place the dimension as shown. click Options to specify the wall pick options.

8 Select the dimension you added in the previous steps. 9 Click the EQ symbol to make each of the segments equal. Modify wall position 10 Select the upper horizontal wall as shown. Dimensioning and Modifying Walls | 915 .

Notice the horizontal walls remain equally spaced. 12 On the Edit menu. joists. and enter 4000 for the distance between the wall centerline and grid B. click Undo Edit Dimension Length. you add structural columns and different beam types to the building model.11 Click the temporary dimension value. to continue with the next lesson in this tutorial. you add structural columns. and purlins to complete the Level 1 structure. several different beam types. In this exercise. you added a dimension to the structural walls and used an equality constraint to keep the walls equidistant. You also repositioned the walls and observed how they adapted to the change in the design. Adding Structural Columns and Beams In this lesson. “Adding Structural Columns and Beams” on page 916. click Save. 916 | Chapter 24 Structural . This project file is required. In the next lesson. 13 On the File menu. in its current state.

click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. select M_W-Wide Flange-Column: W250x80. you use several different methods to add structural columns: you manually select grid intersections. In addition. and you add a column outside the grids. Adding Structural Columns | 917 .Adding Structural Columns In this exercise. 6 Add a column to C1 as shown. you use the grid intersection tool. click Structural Column. Structural_tutorial. If necessary. 5 On the Options Bar. 2 On the View menu. press the SPACEBAR to rotate the column. if the column orientation is not similar to the callout shown below. TIP When adding the column. under Floor Plans. zoom in to place the column. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. double-click Level 1. you rotate columns by pressing the SPACEBAR when necessary. 4 In the Type Selector. 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. Add columns to grid intersections manually 1 In the Project Browser. select Height and specify Level 2.

and A. This option allows you to place columns at the intersections of selected column grids. and select grids 1-5. click Grid Intersection. 9 Use a crossing selection. and C5. C3. Add columns using selected grid intersections 8 On the Options Bar.7 Add similar columns to C2. 918 | Chapter 24 Structural .

Notice the columns rotate until they are parallel with grid A. 13 Press the SPACEBAR until the columns return to their original position. All of the columns on grid A rotate until they are parallel with the vertical grids. Adding Structural Columns | 919 .TIP To create the crossing selection. Columns A3-5 are shown below. and drag your cursor up and to the left as shown below. 12 Press the SPACEBAR again. Rotate the columns 11 Press the SPACEBAR. 10 Notice columns are added to A1-5. specify a point under grid A and to the right of grid 5.

zoom out until you can see all the grids. Although you could have added columns B1-5 with the first set of columns. 15 On the Options Bar. That is why you finished the first set and then reentered the grid intersection mode to add columns B1-5. The column should be 4200 mm to the left of grid 5.14 If necessary. 18 If the columns are not aligned as in the illustration below. TIP Notice that as you rotate these columns using the SPACEBAR. Add columns B1-5 16 On the Options Bar. click Grid Intersection. 19 On the Options Bar. Add a column outside of the grid 22 On the Design Bar. the columns on A1-5 do not rotate. you could not have rotated them independently of each other. 17 Create a crossing selection that includes B1-5. This completes this set of columns. click Finish. 23 Add a M_W-Wide Flange-Column: W250x80 between B4 and C5. and 6900 mm below the exterior face of the horizontal wall above it. press the SPACEBAR to rotate them. Columns B3-5 are shown below. 20 On the Design Bar. 920 | Chapter 24 Structural . 21 Select column A5 and delete it. click Structural Column. click Finish. click Modify.

Adding Structural Beams and Girders In this exercise. As you use the beam tool. and you rotate the columns using the SPACEBAR. and use the grid tools to add beams automatically. Different structural conditions exist within the building model that require specific beam conditions. you add beams manually. In the next exercise. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. click . 25 On the View toolbar. click Modify. in its current state. you add structural beams to the building model. Adding Structural Beams and Girders | 921 . “Adding Structural Beams and Girders” on page 921. you used various methods to add structural columns.24 On the Design Bar. This project file is required. you learn how to work with these varied conditions. 26 On the File menu. click Save. In this exercise.

click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. 6 Add a beam between the column shown below and the horizontal wall above it.Dataset This exercise requires the project file. Structural_tutorial. click Beam. 4 In the Type Selector. 5 Zoom around the right side of the building model. Add beams using point-to-point insertion 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the View menu. 8 Zoom around the upper set of walls as shown.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. 7 On the Design Bar. double-click Level 2. click Modify. To add a beam using point-to-point insertion. you specify the start and endpoint of the beam. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67. 922 | Chapter 24 Structural . 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. Start the beam at the column midpoint and move your cursor up until it connects with the wall centerline.

7. TIP Select the midpoint of the wall first. Adding Structural Beams and Girders | 923 . Use the following table for other conditions. 15 Create a crossing selection that includes grids 1 and 2. 11 On the Options Bar. For example.9 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. the Structural Usage parameter is automatically set to Girder. 12 Add a beam between the midpoint of the structural wall shown and grid A. click Beam. if a beam is joined column-to-column. click Grid. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67. 10 In the Type Selector. 14 On the Options Bar. Use the grid tool to add beams between columns 13 In the Type Selector. When you use the grid tool to place beams. the Structural Usage parameter of each beam is automatically specified depending on the join conditions. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x32. and then move the cursor up to grid A. select Girder for Usage. Column Brace Horizontal Bracing Horizontal Bracing Other Horizontal Bracing Girder Joist Purlin Other Column* Girder Other Girder Joist Purlin Other Brace Horizontal Brace Girder Joist Purlin Other Other Other Horizontal Bracing Joist Other Horizontal Bracing Joist Purlin Other Horizontal Bracing Purlin Purlin Purlin Other Other Other Other Other Other *Structural walls produce the same result as columns.

22 In the Type Selector. and select grid C. 23 On the Options Bar. Add beams to an intersecting structural wall 20 Select the structural wall that spans grids 3 and 4. click the temporary dimension value. click Beam.16 Notice that beams are added at the grids and connected to each column. 17 On the Options Bar. click Modify. enter 8200. 24 Select grid 3. 924 | Chapter 24 Structural . select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67. 19 Zoom in the upper-right quadrant of the building model. and press ENTER. 18 On the Design Bar. click Finish. press and hold CTRL. 21 On the Design Bar. click Grid.

25 On the Options Bar. and for Usage. Click column B5 to add the first beam.Notice beams are added between columns. In addition. select Girder. notice that beams connect to the structural walls that intersect grids. ■ ■ ■ ■ Click column C5 to start the beam chain. 27 Using point-to-point insertion. click Finish. Click the intersection of grid 5 and the structural wall as shown to add the final beam in the chain. Press ESC to end the chain. select Chain. Add a chain of beams 26 On the Options Bar. refer to the following steps and illustration to add two beams to grid 5. Adding Structural Beams and Girders | 925 .

make sure you select the intersection of the grid lines. select Girder for Usage. Press ESC to end the chain. You can also use the shortcut key. and ending with the structural wall that intersects grid 4 as shown. 30 On the Options Bar. You may need to zoom in significantly to accomplish this. NOTE When you begin the beam chain at C4. connecting the column at B4. SI. to snap only to intersections. Press ESC to end the chain. 31 Add a chain of beams beginning with the end of the structural wall at C4. select Girder for Usage. 29 Add a beam between A4 and the structural wall that intersects grid 4 as shown. 926 | Chapter 24 Structural .28 On the Options Bar.

The W310x67 beam spanning A3-4 supports the W310x32. 36 On the Options Bar. Adding Structural Beams and Girders | 927 . 33 Select grid A. If the W310x32. it would have become the supporting beam because it was placed first. and the W310x67 beam spanning A3-4 would have been two separate beams.Add beams that intersect other beams 32 On the Options Bar. click Grid. 35 Zoom around the beam between A3-4.7 beam had crossed grid A.7 beam that intersects it perpendicularly. click Finish. 34 On the Options Bar. click Grid.

click Beam. you use point-to-point insertion to add the beam between the two short wall segments that adjoin grid 4 and 5. 41 Zoom around the upper structural walls between A4-5. click Finish. under Floor Plans. 43 In the Type Selector. select Girder for Usage. In the steps that follow.37 Select grid B. 42 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 44 On the Options Bar. select M_Concrete-Rectangular Beam: 200 x 500mm. Add a concrete beam 40 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 2. click . 928 | Chapter 24 Structural . 39 On the View toolbar. 38 On the Options Bar. 45 Specify the beam start point at the endpoint of the short wall segment adjacent to grid 4 as shown below.

enter SE (shortcut key for endpoints). and click the endpoint of the short wall segment adjacent to grid 5 as shown below. click Modify. 47 On the Design Bar. Adding Structural Beams and Girders | 929 . 48 On the View toolbar.46 Move the cursor to the right. Notice the concrete beam you added in the previous step. click .

In the steps that follow. 52 In the Type Selector. you add two W310x67 beams parallel to the wall that intersects grid 3. click Beam. for Usage. 53 On the Options Bar. 54 Begin the beam chain by selecting the intersection of the wall and grid 3. 50 Zoom around the A1-B3 region. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67. 55 Move the cursor to the left and parallel to the wall.Add remaining girders 49 In the Project Browser. select Girder. and select Chain. 51 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 930 | Chapter 24 Structural . and click when it intersects grid 2. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 2.

Adding Structural Beams and Girders | 931 . and click when it intersects grid 1. Press ESC twice to end the beam placement mode. 57 On the View toolbar.56 Move the cursor to the left and parallel to the wall. click .

58 On the File menu. This project file is required. you add joists and purlins to the building model. 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 4 In the Type Selector.B3 quadrants. Adding Joists and Purlins In this exercise. 6 Add one beam between the A1-2 girder and the parallel girder below it. “Adding Joists and Purlins ” on page 932. and their display within the plan view adjusts accordingly. You then create a joist array. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x32. For example. 932 | Chapter 24 Structural . click Save. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. in its current state. You begin by adding W-Wide Flange joists.7. the structural usage of the beams is automatically set to purlin. double-click Level 2. You used the grid tool to add beams to selected grids and learned how varied structural conditions affect the outcome of the automatically placed beams. click Beam. you added beams and girders using the point-to-point insertion method. when you use the automatic beam tool to add beams between joists. under Floor Plans. select Automatic. In this exercise. 2 Zoom around the A1 . while allowing the automatic beam tool to assign the Structural Usage parameter value depending on the join conditions. In the next exercise. Add a W-Wide Flange joist 1 In the Project Browser. for Usage. 5 On the Options Bar. Do not worry about the exact placement at this time. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. Structural_tutorial. Add the beam a few feet to the right of grid one.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. you add joists and purlins to the building model.

8 Select the beam you added in the previous steps. 11 Click OK. This value was set automatically because when you created the beam. notice that the Structural Usage value is Joist. click Modify.7 On the Design Bar. According to the table shown at the beginning of this lesson. any beam added between two girders becomes a joist when the Automatic option is selected. click Array. under Structural. on the Edit menu. Adding Joists and Purlins | 933 . you selected the Automatic option. click on the Options Bar. The beam needs to be 1250 mm right of grid 1. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 9 With the beam selected. Modify the temporary dimension value if necessary. Create a joist array 12 With the joist selected.

specify the following: Click . Enter 14 for Number. 15 Move the cursor to the right and parallel to grid A. ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. This creates an array of 14 joists that are parallel to grid A. enter 1250 and press ENTER.13 On the Options Bar. 14 Click the intersection of the upper extent of the joist and grid A as shown to specify the array start point. Select 2nd for Move to. 934 | Chapter 24 Structural . Make sure the cursor is over grid A. Once the direction is set.

18 Zoom in around the area surrounding the purlin. click Beam.Add purlins 16 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. Adding Joists and Purlins | 935 . 17 Add a beam from the midpoint of the first joist to the right of grid 2 that stretches perpendicularly to the next joist on the right as shown.

specify the following: Click . Their display in plan view is dependent on their Structural Usage parameter value. and purlins. 19 Select the purlin you created in the previous steps. and click. 22 Click the endpoint of the left joist as shown to specify the array start point. ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. Enter 7 for Number. click Array. 20 On the Edit menu. 23 Move the cursor to the endpoint of the next joist on the right. Select 2nd for Move to.Notice the difference between the line weights and patterns of the girders. and color within the Object Styles dialog. 936 | Chapter 24 Structural . style. joists. NOTE You can control the structural framing line weight. 21 On the Options Bar.

25 On the Options Bar. clear all options except Structural Framing (Girder) and Structural Framing (Joist).The purlins array along the midpoints of the joists. Turn on connection symbol visibility 24 Zoom in around the structural framing below A1-2. click . 26 In the Filter dialog. under Other. 27 On the Options Bar. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. change the following instance parameters: ■ Select Moment Connection Last. Adding Joists and Purlins | 937 . click . and create a crossing selection that includes all the structural framing members in this portion of the view.

click Modify. “Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels” on page 938. you create new levels and copy the level one structure to the upper levels of the building model. This technique saves significant design time and ensures consistency on each level. in its current state.■ ■ Select Moment Connection First. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. Click OK. you added different joist types and allowed the automatic beam tool to assign the Structural Usage parameter value depending on the join conditions. In this exercise. click . You then copy the entire structure that you have designed up to this point and use the paste-align command to create the structure on the upper levels. In the next lesson. and adjust the view until it resembles the image below. 29 On the Design Bar. 938 | Chapter 24 Structural . click Save. you create new levels. 31 On the File menu. and notice the connection symbols display. This project file is required. Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels In this lesson. 30 On the View toolbar.

double-click Building Elevation. 5 On the Options Bar. 6 Sketch the new level line 3000 mm above Level 2 as shown below using the following steps: ■ ■ ■ Click the level line starting point 3000 mm above the left extent of Level 2. Create three new levels 1 In the Project Browser.Defining New Levels In this exercise. 2 Select grid 1. Click to add Level 3. You need at least 3 meters of space. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Make Plan View. 3 Drag the upper grid control up to move the grid heads out of the way of the new levels. click Level.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. you create several new levels. under Elevations. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. Move the cursor over the right extent of Level 2. Structural_tutorial. Defining New Levels | 939 . These levels are required in the next exercise where you copy the existing structural components to the new levels.

click . This technique saves you significant time compared to manually recreating the design on each level. notice that the Level 3 floor plan is displayed. This project file is required. 7 Repeat the steps above to create Levels 4 and 5 as shown. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. Structural_tutorial. you created three new levels. 940 | Chapter 24 Structural . where you copy the structural elements and paste align them to the new levels. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. Each level is 3000 mm high. Duplicating the Existing Design In this exercise.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. 8 On the File menu. in its current state. These levels that are required in the next exercise. In this exercise. you copy the structural elements and use the paste-align command to add them to the new levels. “Duplicating the Existing Design” on page 940. Copy the structural elements 1 On the View toolbar.In the Project Browser. click Save.

to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. double-click Building Elevation. click Save. click Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 3 On the Edit menu. click Copy to Clipboard. in its current state. In the next lesson. 7 In the Project Browser. press and hold CTRL. 5 In the Select Levels dialog. Make sure the entire building model is included. Duplicating the Existing Design | 941 . click OK. 6 In the Select Levels dialog. it is often easier and more certain to copy from a 3D view if your intent is to select the entire building model. select Level 3. This project file is required. under Elevations. 8 On the File menu. and select Levels 4 and 5. “Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation” on page 942. Although you can select and copy the components from any view. Paste the structural components on the new levels 4 On the Edit menu.2 Draw a selection box around the entire design. In this exercise. you copied the existing structural elements on Level 1 and used the paste-align command to create the structural framing on the upper levels. you create a framing elevation in order to add structural braces.

at the midpoint between grids 2 and 3. 942 | Chapter 24 Structural . You can now view the new elevation. in the Project Browser. You then add C-channel bracing to one level and array it to the remaining levels. you create a framing elevation in order to provide a view in which to place structural bracing members. 6 On the Design Bar. Creating a Framing Elevation In this exercise. 4 On the Options Bar. 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 5 Place the cursor over grid C. under Floor Plans. 2 Zoom out so you can see the entire building model. click Modify. and click. you create a framing elevation. double-click Level 2. Elevation 1-a. click Framing Elevation. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. Create a framing elevation 1 In the Project Browser.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation In this lesson. You use this elevation view in the next exercise to place structural braces. Structural_tutorial. make sure Attach to Grid is selected.

This project file is required. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. Adding Structural Braces In the final exercise of this tutorial. 8 On the File menu. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. in its current state. “Adding Structural Braces” on page 943. Structural_tutorial. In the next exercise.7 Double-click the elevation head in order to open the view. Notice the stick framing representation. click Save. You are ready to add the structural braces. You begin by adding a set of braces to level 4. You then array the braces to the remaining levels.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. Adding Structural Braces | 943 . In this exercise. This is because the Detail Level of this view is automatically set to coarse. you add c-channel bracing to the building model. Also notice that grid 3 is identified within the view. you created an elevation view design specifically to add structural braces. you add structural braces to the building model.

When adding the braces. 3 In the Type Selector. selectM_ C-Channel: C75x7. Because it is often necessary to make sure you snap to the endpoints and midpoints.4. SE: Snap only to endpoints of objects. you use point-to-point insertion. 944 | Chapter 24 Structural . 5 Enter SM and click the midpoint of the girder located on Level 5. 4 Enter SE and click the beam endpoint below the intersection of grid 2 and Level 4.Expand the view extents 1 Before adding the braces. Also select grids 2 and 3 and drag them until they appear as shown. click Brace. drag the left and right extents until you can see the grid heads for 2 and 3 as shown. and using the shape grips. you should use the following snap shortcut keys when applicable. ■ ■ SM: Snap only to midpoints of objects. select the view crop box. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar.

6 Enter SM and click the midpoint of the girder located on Level 5.The brace displays. The second brace is displayed. Adding Structural Braces | 945 . 7 Enter SE and click the endpoint below the intersection of grid 3 and Level 4.

Select Constrain. 11 On the Options Bar. 14 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. Enter 4 for Number. Select 2nd for Move to. 946 | Chapter 24 Structural . specify the following: Click . click Array. click Tag All Not Tagged. 12 Click the intersection of Level 5 and grid 2 to specify the array start point. 10 On the Edit menu. click Modify. The braces are arrayed to Level 1. 13 Click the intersection of Level 4 and grid 2 to specify the array endpoint. 9 Select both braces on Level 4.Array the braces 8 On the Design Bar.

Adding Structural Braces | 947 . 17 On the File menu. and click OK. 16 On the View toolbar. click Save. click . you added structural braces to the design and created a brace array. select Structural Framing Tags.15 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. In this exercise.

948 | Chapter 24 Structural .

Sharing Projects 25 When working with large building projects. You can enable Worksharing for any project. such as walls. architects commonly work in teams with each person assigned to a specific functional area. however. Only one user can edit each workset at a given time. floors. All other team members can view this workset. and so on. doors. you can borrow that element without requiring the workset owner to relinquish control of the entire workset. called Worksharing. A workset is a collection of building elements. you learn how to use Worksharing to divide a project into worksets so multiple users can access the project and have all their changes coordinated by Revit Architecture 2008. they cannot make changes to it. team members adding and changing elements in worksets can save their work to a local file on the network or their own hard drive and publish work to a central file whenever they choose. stairs. Using Worksharing. They can update their local files at any time in order to see the changes other team members have published. 949 . In this tutorial. This involves simultaneously working on and saving different portions of the project at the same time. If you need to modify an element that belongs to a workset that someone else is actively working on. This prevents possible conflicts within the project.

each building element in the project is contained in exactly one workset. are automatically assigned to the view workset of the current view. You learn what to consider before enabling and using Worksharing. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing. When planning a Worksharing-enabled project The decisions you make when sharing a project and setting up its worksets can have long-lasting effects on the project team. After the project is shared. When you are working on a shared project. you can only make changes to the worksets that are editable by you. You then learn how to work within a Worksharing-enabled project with multiple users and borrow particular elements from other users. Any new model elements are automatically assigned to the active workset. This reduces the time it takes to open the file and the amount of memory it uses. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing application. you specify an active workset. After learning the fundamentals. You can improve the display-related performance of Revit Architecture by opening only those worksets required for your work. such as annotations and dimensions. If you only need to modify a single element within a workset that someone else has checked out. The first time you activate worksets within a project. Increasing performance using selective open When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. you must first enable Worksharing. you should take several considerations into account: General Considerations: ■ ■ ■ ■ Project size Team size Team member roles Default workset visibility You can maximize long-term project performance more easily if you plan Worksharing appropriately and use the feature correctly. you can select which worksets are open or closed. You learn the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals In this conceptual exercise. Elements specific to a view.Overview Sharing a project for the first time To share a project. You can close or open worksets at any time using the Worksets dialog. When setting up Worksharing. use Element Borrowing. Project size 950 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . Using Worksharing in a Project In this lesson. This includes how to plan and execute the use of worksets in a project in order to maximize project and team performance. and click Editable. you enable Worksharing within a project and set up the initial workset environment. Working in a shared project In a shared project. a dialog displays allowing you to set up the initial sharing of the project. go to the Worksets dialog. You can change the workset assignment of any modeling element within the property dialog for that element. you learn how to work as an individual with the central and local project files. Each workset can only be editable by one user at a time. In the lessons and exercises that follow. In the next exercise. select the desired workset. you learn some of the strategies that maximize your use of worksets. To make a workset editable. Elements in closed worksets are not read from disk until they are required. You gain valuable practical experience setting up a project for worksets and working within that project. Establishing practical policies on how all team members access and create new worksets in the project will maintain performance for existing users and ease the process of introducing new team members to the project.

This project file should incorporate as many office/project standards as possible and it should include many of the families required by the project. In a multi-story structure. Step 1: Start the project with one user One user starts to work on the project. When you create a new workset. you do not need to make separate worksets for each floor of the building. designers work in teams. Notice that the workset names refer to functional roles. Step 2:Activate Worksharing After the building model is ready for multiple user access. Team size You should take into consideration the size of the project team at the time you enable Worksharing. you decide whether or not the elements in that workset are visible by default in each view. If the project floor plan is so large that you need to split it with match lines to fit it on sheets. Default workset visibility After a project has been shared. remember to create worksets for functional roles and properly assign default visibility. not including the Project Standards. Instead. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 951 . the worksets they add often do not need to be visible by default. On this tab. Experience has shown that. each team member has control over a portion of the design. you can change the visibility setting in the Visibility/Graphics dialog. the project coordinator should create the additional worksets required by the team. TIP As new team members create new worksets for their own use. You should have at least one workset for each person. Team size usually increases as the project progresses from the design stage to the documentation stage. This allows Revit Architecture to display the view faster because computing time is not spent figuring out if the element belongs to a workset that should be displayed. for a typical project. As new members create worksets for their own use. you may want to create separate worksets for each portion. The building model should also reach a reasonable point of development before you enable Worksharing. Long-term performance is improved if new worksets are not visible by default unless they need to be. When creating the new worksets. A typical scenario for a multi-story commercial building is shown in the following illustration. By subdividing the project based on these task roles. you control workset visibility on a per view basis. you should separate the project into worksets that allow team members to work without interfering with each other. greater subdivision improves workflow by reducing interference between team members. make sure visibility defaults are set appropriately. Conceptual stages of project sharing The following steps explain the basic stages of project sharing. the project coordinator should enable Worksharing. Unlike AutoCAD Xrefs. the optimum number of worksets is approximately four for each team member. If you are sure that the elements of a particular workset should not appear in a view. and View worksets. Shared Levels and Grids. Team member roles Typically. you could create separate worksets for a set of building elements that will only appear on one floor. with each assigned a specific functional task.The size of your building may affect the way you decide to segment the worksets for your team. Step 3: Create additional worksets After enabling Worksharing. a Worksets tab displays on the Visibility/Graphics dialog. such as a tenant interior. Regardless of the default setting. In most projects. you can turn off the visibility of that workset within that view.

new building elements are assigned to the workset that is active at the moment. each user saves their changes back to the central file where the changes can be propagated to all team members. your changes propagate to the entire team. you can select which workset is active.Step 4: Subdivide the building model into worksets After you have created the initial worksets. This is called “Selective Open. When you save to the central file. the central file is not a file that a team member would open and work in directly. On the Options Bar. For example. This gives you the right to make changes to the elements in the workset and to add to the workset. you can still work remotely as an individual and as a team. however. Step 11: Closing a local file At the end of a work session. There is no limit to the number of worksets you can have editable at one time. proceeds as usual. you should relinquish any worksets that you no longer need. you should then save to your local file. you make that workset editable by you.” When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. This ensures that your local file is synchronized with the central file. You can make a workset active only if it is editable by you. it is essential that you save the central file to a location accessible to all team members. Step 8: Check out worksets from the central file When you “check out” a workset. Tips and common scenarios 1 When working on a Worksharing-enabled project. Any changes that other users have made to the building model become visible to you after you save to the central file or when you select Reload Latest. However. they are not propagated to the rest of the team. you should save the file locally and to the central file at regular intervals. you must assign building model elements to their respective workset. You create a local file by opening the central file and using “Save As” to create a local copy of the central file. you should save to the central file and relinquish control of all worksets that you set as editable. The central file coordinates and propagates the changes of each user and keeps track of which worksets are available. you would want to assign the interior walls and other interior components to that workset. no other users can make modifications to any elements in those worksets until you check them back into the central file. Step 5: Create the central file The first time you save a project after Worksharing has been enabled. As you work. Step 10: Saving your changes As you work on the project throughout the day. When finished or at regular intervals. within the local file. The tips discussed below provide useful information for working creatively with worksets. Generally. Step 6: Create local files Each team member creates a local file that makes it possible to check out worksets and work on their respective portion of the building model. After saving to the central file. you have the option to choose which worksets to open. the file is saved as the central file. Step 7: Open worksets Whenever you open a central or local file. When you save to the central file. When you save locally (to your local file). your changes are saved. Therefore. Step 9:Work on the project Work on the project. Local files are user-specific and can only be accessed by the users that created them. you can shorten the time required to open the file by selecting to open only the worksets required to complete your assigned tasks. 952 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . if a workset named Interior was created. This makes them available to other team members.

you should use it only when: ■ ■ You do not intend to save your changes back to the central file. In this conceptual exercise. you can make the workset Editable at Risk. You can modify any elements in an editable workset and all new elements are added to the active workset. you will not only lose the changes to that workset. This will guarantee that no other user can make it editable during the remainder of your absence. make any required worksets editable. you may want to request that someone start a session of Revit Architecture. you will not be able to save your changes back to the central file if another user has changed the same workset and already published those changes back to the central file. you will lose the changes you made to all your worksets. You can work on the project from a remote location by doing the following: ■ Before leaving the office and disconnecting from the networked access to the central file. or You are very confident that no other user will make that workset editable in your absence. Remote rendering 4 While rendering remotely using AccuRender® is supported. change the username to your name under Settings ➤ Options. save to the central file. reload the latest changes from the central file. you can save your changes back to the central file but then the other owner loses all their work. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You can also add new elements to any View or Project Standards workset even if they are not editable. If you have a colleague who is in the office with access to the central file. To do this. In the next exercise. If you choose Editable at Risk and the owner of the at-risk workset has already published their files to the central file. Alternatively. you should check out the Materials workset. If you intend to render the building model while away from the office. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 953 . you enable Worksharing within an existing project. and make that workset editable. This means that other team members will not be able to change any materials while you have the Materials workset checked out. WARNING You should avoid editing a workset “at risk” whenever possible." Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you learned what to consider before enabling Worksharing. You learned the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios.Taking your computer to a remote location with the project 2 You do not need to have access to the central file in order to work on the project. You subdivide the project into worksets and save the project as the "Central File. and transfer the updated local file back to the remote user. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets In this exercise. using VPN. In this situation. Multiple users working remotely 3 Users can work remotely provided the remote users have high-speed network access to the central file. it is not recommended unless you understand the implications for the rest of the team. ■ If you realize that you need to modify elements in a workset that you did not make editable before going remote. and open Common\c_Worksets. and then save the local file. If the owner of the at-risk workset agrees to relinquish editability of the contested workset. Since making a workset Editable at Risk carries a high risk that work will be lost. a user can transfer a local file to someone with network access who can then publish the changes back to the central file. you will probably be changing material definitions and other project settings.rvt. you may want to phone them and make arrangements rather than waste valuable work time. When working remotely. In this instance. you enable Worksharing in a project and set up some initial worksets. if you know who checked out the required workset. you work no differently then you would in the office. for instance. click Training Files.

Floor Plan Level 1 view moves into a workset called View: "Floor Plan Level 1". Project Standards.Enable Worksharing 1 On the File menu. and the remainder of the team must work on wall section details. Revit Architecture creates new worksets and moves project elements and settings into the new worksets: ■ ■ Families: Loaded families in the project move into separate worksets. imagine four users including yourself. and notice all are editable by you. For training purposes. clear Families. When you enable worksharing. The project must be subdivided in such a way as to reflect the tasks of each user. It also informs you that existing elements in your project move to a default workset. Project Standards: All project-wide settings defined from the Settings menu move to Project Standards worksets. 3 Notice that all worksets are open and editable by you. and Views. 954 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . click Worksets. Do not change your username during this exercise unless explicitly instructed to do so. ■ 6 Under Show. TIP You can change your username by selecting Options under the Settings menu. you must create worksets that allow each team member to work independently. In this case. another is assigned the interior layout. The Worksets dialog is displayed. Therefore. a small number of team members are working on the building model. Only User-Created worksets should display. 4 In the Worksets dialog. For example. Your username displays as the present owner. You cannot change your username with an unsaved Worksharing-enabled project open. In this simple training project. Views: Each view moves into a separate View workset. one user is assigned to the development of the exterior. under Show. A confirmation dialog displays indicating that you are about to enable Worksharing. 2 Click OK to accept the default workset name. a third team member is assigned furniture placement. select: ■ ■ ■ Families Project Standards Views 5 Scroll down the list of workset names.

under Identity Data. 15 In the Worksets dialog. type the name Exterior Shell. expand Floor Plans. 24 Select all of the interior elements. 17 In the drawing area. This is why all worksets are editable immediately after you enable worksets. Because you renamed Workset1 to Exterior Shell. 11 Enter Furniture Layout. When you initially activate Worksharing. and double-click Level 1. need to reassign the interior elements to the Interior Layout workset. 14 In the Rename dialog. you can rename the default workset. notice that the Workset parameter is set to Exterior Shell. 12 In the Worksets dialog. it is better to make them visible by default. click . 23 In the Element Properties dialog. under Identity Data. expand Views (all). select Interior Layout for Workset. In this training file. Notice that Visible by default in all views is checked. currently named Workset1. Because furniture should only be visible in specific views. all building model elements are assigned to that workset. select any of the exterior walls of the building model. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 955 . and click OK. all building model elements are placed into Workset1 by default. click . click OK. Rather than create a new workset for these elements. Because the interior walls appear in many views. The next step is to assign elements within the building model to specific worksets. 9 Click OK. Subdividing the project into worksets 16 In the Project Browser. including the interior doors. and click OK You have created the required worksets for each team member working on this project. you should turn off Visible by default in all views. furniture components have not been added to the building model and therefore do not need to be moved to the respective workset. select Workset1. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. This improves performance since fewer components need to be generated in each view.Creating new worksets 7 In the Worksets dialog. and click OK. 13 Click Rename. 22 On the Options Bar. and walls. You do. however. 18 On the Options Bar. stairs. 8 Enter the name Interior Layout. 21 Select one of the interior walls. click New. The final new workset is for the exterior shell of the building model. The next workset you create is for the furniture layout. clear Visible by default in all views. 10 Click New. 20 Click OK.

32 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. select them and change their workset assignment to Interior Layout. TIP You can also hold CTRL down to select multiple elements. click . 29 Clear Interior Layout to turn off the visibility of that workset in the view. and click OK. 28 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click the Worksets tab. 26 In the Element Properties dialog. The Level 1 floor plan should display with only the exterior shell visible. click Visibility/Graphics. 956 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . 25 On the Options Bar. 31 On the View menu. Hold Shift down to deselect an element. 30 Click OK. Notice that the visibility of the Furniture Layout workset is turned off in this view. If any interior elements remain. This is because you turned off “Visible by default in all views” when you created the workset.The easiest way to do this is to drag a pick box beginning inside the lower right corner and up to the upper left corner. click Visibility/Graphics. under Identity Data. You can verify that all interior elements have been reassigned to the Interior Layout workset by turning off the visibility of that workset. click the Worksets tab. 27 On the View menu. select Interior Layout for Workset.

click Worksets. you enabled Worksharing on a project. enter Worksets Project-Central as the file name. This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and access to the resulting central file. 36 On the Options Bar. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open.33 Select Interior Layout. This project is now ready for individuals to access it and check out their required worksets. This is imperative if you and another user intend to complete the multi-user exercise later in this tutorial. and click OK. and publish your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file created in the previous exercise. under Floor Plans. 2 In the Open dialog. Working Individually with Worksets In this exercise. click . If you have not yet completed the exercise. check out worksets. select all of the interior elements of the building model. select Specify. In addition. under Views (all). 44 Click OK. Navigate to a location on a network drive that all team members have access to. In this exercise. under Open Worksets. 3 Click Open. make modifications to the building model. If you do not have access to a network and still want to complete that exercise. click Close. and then assigned building model elements to the worksets. You then created the central file and checked in all worksets. If you intend on completing the remaining exercises in this tutorial. Working Individually with Worksets | 957 . select the central file and. 45 On the File menu. but be sure not to save the file in the training files location. “Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets” on page 953. click Open. Creating a local file 1 On the File menu. 35 In the drawing area. 42 In the Worksets dialog. created new worksets to accommodate each team member. you create your local file. 34 In the Project Browser. make sure you remember the location of this central file. Now that you have created the central file. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. 37 In the Element Properties dialog. Checking in the worksets 41 On the File menu. this can be accomplished by saving the central file to your hard drive and changing your user name before accessing the project. select all the User-Created worksets by pressing CTRL + A. select Interior Layout for Workset. You must access it in each of the remaining exercises. please do so before continuing. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. click Non Editable. under Identity Data. double-click Level 2. 39 In the Save As dialog. The central file is created automatically the first time you save the project after enabling worksets. click Save As. 43 On the right side of the dialog. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. and click OK. Notice that your name has been removed as the owner of the worksets and all Editable values are set to No. 40 Click Save. you must relinquish workset editability so that other users can have access to the worksets they need. Create the central file 38 On the File menu.

15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 11 Click OK. select Interior Layout for Name. and select Yes for Editable. If this is selected. 10 In the Worksets dialog. The Worksets toolbar displays with a drop-down list that allows you to specify the active workset. You are now ready to modify the interior layout of the building model. 8 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. select Interior Layout. Next. Any new elements that you add to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. and click OK. 13 On the Worksets toolbar. and click Save. notice the Editable Only option. In this case. click Save As. 5 On the File menu. 6 In the Save As dialog. The project sharing environment allows you to choose which worksets are opened during a working session. click . 14 In the Project Browser. Verify that it is cleared. click Options. 958 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . and click OK. Only the worksets that are opened are visible during that session. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. click Toolbar ➤ Worksets. On the Options Bar. expand Floor Plans. 17 On the Options Bar. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. you should activate the Worksets toolbar. and double-click Level 1. expand Views (all).4 In the Opening Worksets dialog. click Worksets. click Modify. You have created a local file which is for your use only. 12 On the Window menu. Your name displays as the owner of the Interior Layout workset. select all the User-Created worksets. you are assigned the task of designing the interior layout of the building model. 7 In the File Save Options dialog. you can only select editable elements within the drawing area. Checking out worksets 9 On the File menu. 16 Select the upper exterior wall and notice a symbol displays indicating that the element belongs to a workset that is not currently editable. Before working on the model. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected.

18 In the Element Properties dialog. 22 On the File menu. In the Worksets dialog. 23 Click OK. Working Individually with Worksets | 959 . a message would display and you would have the option to cancel the change or make the element editable. click Wall.126mm Partition (2-hr). 27 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. however. but you are listed as a borrower of that workset. Notice that the wall still belongs to the Exterior Shell workset. The upper exterior wall should still be selected. you have borrowed the ownership of the upper exterior wall. add a horizontal wall in the lower right corner. under Identity Data. click . 19 Under Constraints. the Edited by value is now assigned to you. 21 Click OK. you can still edit this wall. click Worksets. 20 On the Options Bar. notice that you do not own the Exterior Shell workset. and click OK. Revit Architecture borrows it for you and applies your changes. Modify the building model 24 Select the door on the right side of the corridor. 29 Using the following illustration as a guide. notice that this element is assigned to the Exterior Shell workset and that the Edited by value is blank. Because this element is not owned by another user. 28 In the Type Selector. 26 Select the wall that hosted the deleted door. and modify the length so that the corridor is open. Even though you have not checked out the Exterior Shell workset. The precise location is not important. 25 Delete the door. select Finish Face: Exterior for Location Line. If it was owned by another user. select Basic Wall: Interior . In this case.

notice that there is an option to save the local file immediately after the save to central. In addition. and save locally immediately afterward. At the end of a work session. 31 Select the vertical interior wall in the upper right corner. Borrowed Elements is selected. It is recommended that you locally save your work approximately every 30 minutes and save to central every 1-2 hours. Saving your work 35 On the File menu. Although this is not a necessary option if you are in the middle of a work session. you should perform regular saves. You should check this element back into central so that others can use it if necessary. save to central. click Door. select: ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets 960 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . select M_Sgl Flush: 864 x 2032mm. you can relinquish the user-created worksets as well as any borrowed elements. The Save to Central dialog is displayed with the path to the central file automatically filled in. click Modify. 33 In the Type Selector. and extend the lower end until it intersects the horizontal wall you added previously. By default. 32 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. displays the workset as well as the element type. add two door openings into the rooms you created. which matches the information in the Status Bar.30 On the Design Bar. 34 Using the following illustration as a guide. All of the new elements that you added were automatically assigned to the Interior Layout workset. you should relinquish all worksets. a tooltip. click Save to Central. it is recommended. In this particular case. When working in your local file. Whenever you save. If you place the cursor over any of the new elements. 36 In the Save to Central dialog. you borrowed the upper exterior wall in order to modify it.

Using Worksets with Multiple Users In this exercise. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file named Worksets Project-Central. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. return to the Settings dialog. one user has already created a local file. Using a second Revit Architecture session to mimic User 2 1 Minimize the current Revit Architecture window. select one of those central files to be used in this exercise. consider that person to be User 1. select Specify. skip the following section. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. If both users have completed the previous worksets exercises and created central files on the network. and published your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. Throughout the remainder of this exercise. 8 Click Open. and click OK. and reload the latest changes. User 2: Create a local file. For training purposes.■ Save the local file after “Save to Central” 37 Click OK. Throughout the process. If you have not yet completed these exercises. make elements editable. In addition. select the central file and. Creating a local copy 5 In this exercise. you created your local file. For training purposes. each user must check out worksets. instructions are staggered. The next series of steps create a local file for User 2. In the following section of this exercise. Regardless of which central file you choose to use. In this exercise. This is a system setting. 4 Click the General Tab and. click Options. select all the User-Created worksets. The user who has not yet created a local file for the chosen central file is User 2. under Username. 3 On the Settings menu. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. This exercise requires the completion of the previous workset exercises and access to the resulting local and central files. and refer explicitly to User 1 and User 2. and reset the Username to your computer login name. and check out worksets 6 On the File menu. enter User 2. 9 In the Opening Worksets dialog. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 961 . any referenced workset is opened but hidden. please do so before continuing. two users access the central file through a network connection. If you intend to complete the remainder of this tutorial by proceeding to the multi-user exercise. checked out worksets. 2 Start a new Revit Architecture session by double-clicking the Revit Architecture icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. and proceed to Creating a local copy. Each modifies the building model within their local file and publishes it back to the central file where the other user can see the changes.rvt. two users work on the building model residing in the central file you created and saved in a previous exercise. under Open Worksets. and click OK. and borrowed an element from a workset you did not own. leave this file open in its current state. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. specifically sequenced. You modified the building model. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2. 7 In the Open dialog. click Open.

modify the building model. it becomes the active workset. User 1: Check out worksets. expand Views (all). and double-click Level 1.10 On the File menu.” 28 Click OK. Notice that you own this workset and the active workset is now Interior Layout. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. 19 Try to change the Editable status for Exterior Shell to Yes. 22 Click OK. click Worksets. This file is for your use only. expand Floor Plans. User 2: Modify the building model and publish changes 29 In the Project Browser. and select Yes for Editable. and double-click Level 1. A warning is displayed informing you that a conflict exists. 21 Select the Interior Layout workset. click Worksets. 25 Click anywhere in the empty drawing area to ignore the warning. open it now. A warning is displayed informing you that you cannot check out this workset because it is already checked out by another user. and publish changes 17 User 1 should still have the local file open. and select Yes for Editable. and click OK. You now have a local copy of the project. 24 Select the vertical interior wall shown in the following illustration. Notice that the Exterior Shell workset is checked out by User 2. click Save As. You are now the owner of that workset. 16 Click OK. click Save to Central. 11 In the Save As dialog. If it is not open. and click Save. If you only have one workset checked out. 13 Navigate to your preferred location on the hard drive. That is because changes made to the central file display in local files only when the worksets are explicitly updated. expand Floor Plans. expand Views (all). 14 On the File menu. and move it to the left until it approaches the centerline of the exterior double door on the south wall. 23 In the Project Browser. 18 On the File menu. 962 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. 15 Select the Exterior Shell workset. click Options. Notice that the changes made by User 1 do not immediately display in the local file of User 2. 12 In the File Save Options dialog. 26 On the File menu. 20 Click OK to return to the Worksets dialog. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. 27 In the Save to Central dialog.

Click Yes. 41 Select Furniture Layout. and click OK. under Floor Plans. and click Duplicate. 42 On the Project Browser. any elements added to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. Because you now have more than one workset checked out. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. click Save to Central. click Component. you should create a furniture plan view.” 38 Click OK. 33 In the Save to Central dialog. and click OK. click Save to Central. The wall conflict with the door opening that User 1 introduced now displays. click Reload Latest. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan.” 34 Click OK. and click Rename. The changes User 2 made are apparent.30 Using the following illustration as a guide. under Floor Plans. 37 In the Save to Central dialog. 35 Using the following illustration as a guide. 40 On the File menu. 45 On the Project Browser. you still have complete access to the elements belonging to the Interior Layout workset. you publish your changes and load the changes other users have made to the building model. select the lower exterior wall. delete the left window on the lower exterior wall. 36 On the File menu. When you save to central. 43 On the Project Browser. select Yes for Editable. 44 In the Rename View dialog. you are asked if you want to make the Furniture Layout workset the active workset. This is because windows are wall-hosted components and cannot float in the air without a wall to host them. User 1: Reload latest worksets. and move the door to the right in order to avoid the conflict. under Views (all). 32 On the File menu. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 963 . right-click Level 1. and move it upward approximately 2 meters. right-click Copy of Level 1. Before adding any furniture. Even though the Furniture Layout workset is active. and check out additional worksets 39 On the File menu. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. 46 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Worksets. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. 31 Click Delete Instances to delete the windows. However. A message displays warning you that several windows are not cutting anything.

and click OK. You should turn on the visibility before adding furniture. click the Worksets tab. click Reload Latest. Notice you have borrowed a portion of the workset. 53 In the Save to Central dialog. Therefore. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. 50 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. are placed under Project Standards. 51 Notice that the desk you added previously now displays. and click Properties. NOTE System families. click Rename. 65 On the File menu. rather than Families. 49 On the View menu.47 In the Type Selector. the visibility of the workset is not turned on even though it is checked out and is the active workset.200mm. choose any desk. click Save to Central. enter Exterior Wall . 63 Scroll down to the bottom of the list until you see Wall Types. click Modify. leave this file open in its current state. click Visibility/Graphics. 61 On the File menu. User 2: Make an element editable on the fly 55 On the File menu. under Show. such as Wall Types.” 54 Click OK. and click OK. click Edit/New. If you intend to complete the final portion of this tutorial by proceeding to the Element Borrowing exercise. 58 In the Type Properties dialog. 57 In the Element Properties dialog. A message displays informing you that the component you are trying to place is not visible in that view. 52 On the File menu. 964 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . This is because when the Furniture Layout workset was created. 48 On the Design Bar. 59 In the Rename dialog. 60 Click OK 3 times. select Furniture Layout to turn on its visibility. 66 In the Save to Central dialog. click Save to Central. and click inside any room. Notice the new Level 1 Furniture Plan view in the Project Browser. 56 Right-click the upper exterior wall. 62 In the Worksets dialog. the Visible by default option was not selected. click Worksets. 64 Click OK. select Project Standards. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the local file after “Save to Central” 67 Click OK.

Only one user needs to open the dataset and save the central file to a network location. click Save As. click Options. modified the building model. leave this file open in its current state. two users are working on the same project with separate local files. select Reload Latest.rvt. There are specific instructions for each user. and click OK. click Training Files. two users worked on the same building model using worksets. you may receive a message informing you that the central file has been relocated. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users In this exercise. ■ ■ User-created Worksets Save the local file after “Save to Central” In this exercise. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). and save 68 On the File menu. you save the dataset as a central file. Checking out worksets. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. proceed directly to the section Checking out worksets. In subsequent steps. throughout this training. and click OK. 2 Navigate to a directory on the network that both users have access to. and these problems are rectified. select Save to Central. Save training file as the central file on the network 1 On the File menu. You learn how to make borrowing requests and how to grant them. 4 In the File Save Options dialog. This exercise requires two users and. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2. These messages are a result of the central file being relocated (to your PC). 3 In the Save As dialog. select the following. you learn how to borrow elements from worksets that other users are actively working on. “Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users” on page 965. Each user must have network access to the central file. 70 In the Save to Central dialog. Each user checked out worksets. 5 Click Save. select Make this a Central File after save. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. you need to set up your central and local files. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 965 . finished the previous workset exercises. Click OK to this message and subsequent messages. NOTE When you open the training dataset for this tutorial. At the appropriate point in this exercise. In the final exercise of this tutorial. and still have your local files open. and published their changes back to the central file. As each of you work. This exercise also requires two users and you can skip the first sections of the exercise and proceed directly to the section. 69 On the File menu.User 1: Reload latest. you must borrow elements that belong to worksets that the other user has checked out. You have created a new central file for User 1 and User 2. and open Common\c_Worksets Project-Central. If you intend to complete the final exercise of this tutorial. If you have not completed the previous workset exercises.

click Options. select Specify. if any User-Created worksets are not open. 18 In the Save As dialog. 14 In the Open dialog. and click OK. click Save As. Set the Username to User 2. click Save As. 17 On the File menu. perform the following steps to create a session for User 2: ■ Start a second session of Revit Architecture by double-clicking the icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. Next. and click Open. This is a system setting. 11 Name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. Checking out worksets 21 Both User 1 and User 2 can check out their worksets at the same time. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. click Options. click Worksets. On the Settings menu. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. return to the Settings dialog. click Options. and click Save. 7 On the File menu. 19 In the File Save Options dialog. and click Save. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. 20 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. and click OK. 9 In the Save As dialog. 23 In the Worksets dialog. the user that saved the central file should be User 1. Afterwards. User 1: Check out worksets 22 On the File menu. 13 On the File menu. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. The central file should still be open. 966 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . 8 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. 15 Click Open. and click OK. 16 Select all the User-Created worksets. In addition. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. and click OK. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. Click the General tab of the Options dialog. select them. the steps for each user have to be followed in sequence. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. You have created a local file which is for your use only. click Open. select the central file and under Open Worksets. This is the local file for User 1. and reset the Username to your computer login name. User 2: Create local file 12 If you are a single user and want to replicate the multi-user experience. and navigate to the network location where User 1 saved the central file. 10 In the File Save Options dialog. ■ ■ ■ This Revit Architecture session is now set up for User 2. any referenced workset is opened but hidden.User 1: Create local file 6 For the sake of simplicity.

and select Yes for Editable. You are now the owner of that workset. click Worksets. select the second window from the top. This allows you to select elements that belong to worksets that you do not own. User 1: Grant User 2 permission to borrow element 34 When User 2 contacts you and informs you that a borrowing request is pending your authorization. You are now the owner of that workset. select Interior Layout. you should inform User 1 that you are waiting for permission to edit a borrowed element. 28 Under Active Workset. select Exterior Shell. A symbol appears letting you know that it belongs to a workset you do not own. a message informs you that you are waiting for permission from User 1. click the File menu. under Floor Plans. 30 On the Options Bar. select the Interior Layout workset. and then click OK. After you submit the request. A warning message informs you that you must obtain permission from User 1. and then click OK.24 Select the Exterior Shell workset. User 2: Borrow an element from User 1 29 On the Project Browser. and select Yes for Editable. User 2: Check out worksets 26 On the File menu. 27 In the Worksets dialog. and click Editing Requests. double-click Level 1. 31 On the left exterior wall. 33 Click Place Request to ask User 1 for permission to edit the window. Leave this dialog open until User 1 grants permission. You can do this by dragging the window or by modifying one of the temporary dimension values. 25 Under Active Workset. 32 Move the window 500 mm toward the upper exterior wall. verify that Editable Only is cleared. At this point. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 967